Home

PZ4000 Power Analyzer USER`S MANUAL - Electro

1. Dimensions with the JIS rack mount kit Current input protective cover Mounting surface 480 1 460 c 2 S55 2 Ii o sH S l Dimensions with the EIA rack mount kit 481 1 0 4 465 7 1208 29 Mounting surface 101 6 e gR gt o coo EN gt gt O cI k N Unless otherwise specified tolerance is 3 however tolerance is 0 3 mm when below 10 mm 17 14 IM 253710 01E 17 15 Power Measurement Module 253751 Item Specification Number of input channels 2 Voltage 1 Current 1 Select Direct input 5 A terminal or current sensor input connector Insulation resistance Between voltage input terminals and case 50 MQ or more at 500 VDC Between current input terminals and case 50 MQ or more at 500 VDC Between voltage input terminals and current input terminals 50 MQ or more at 500 VDC Withstanding voltage Between voltage input terminals and case 2200 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between current input terminals and case 2200 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between voltage input terminals and current input terminals 3700 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute
2. The zero crossing Delta Sampled Data that are source signal when the Symbols used computation substituted into the equations measurement when displaying Notes menu on the next page computation period is the computed a set to zero crossing result u t i t detection Signal used to detect pae u1 u2 ul u2 zero crossing points AUdct on Element 1 c AUac1 NON COO Signal used to detect pe i1 i2 i1 i2 zero crossing points Mae on Element 1 7 Alac1 Signal used to detect ee ul u2 i1 i2 zero crossing points aunt AMNI on Element 1 AUdc1 Alde Presumption 3P3W AUac1 Alaci ul u2 u3 0 P3IVIA Signal used to detect AUrmsg Alrmss eee u3 u4 i3 i4 zero crossing points AUmn3 Almn3 on Element 3 AUdc3 Aldc3 AUac3 Alac3 AUrms1 uq 1 82 _ AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 AUrms2 u2 Ui u2 AUmn2 3 AUdc2 Delt Signal used to detect Re a zero crossing points Star on Element 1 AUrms3 _ u1 u2 E AUmn3 3 AUdc3 AUac3 Alrms4 ia a Rt ee Almn4 i1 i2 i3 Alde4 Alac4 Presumption Aeneas u1 u2 u3 0 _ AUmn1 apne AUdc1 AUac1 AUrms2 u2 u3 _ AUmn2 Signal used to detect re Star zero crossing points ac bDelta on Element 1 AUrms3 AUmn3 usmai AUdc3 AUac3 Alrms4 ETET Almn4 i1 i2 i3 Aldc4 Alac4 Note u1 u2 u3 and u4 denote the sampled voltage data of elements 1 2 3 and 4 respectively i1 i2 i3 and i4 denote the sampled cur
3. z suo1 1 d 0 194 0 pue nd no 13611 jeu13 x3 IM 253710 01E 14 5 14 3 Setting the Display Colors of the Screen Setting the text color Selecting preset or user Press the Text Color soft key to display the text color setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the Mode from Preset1 to User Po Setting user colors Press the User Color soft key to display the text color setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the item you wish to set Press the SELECT key The color level setting box appears Turn the jog shuttle to select the color level from 0 to 7 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box O MONA Text Color eJ Node Text Color O Mode Graph Color Preset 1 Preset 1 4 Text Color A User Color Text Color User Color an Menu Fore Lie Menu Back F i fs Ee Select Box E 9 6 i id Sub Menu Selected Key JUUUUUUU WUUUUUUU Explanation You can set the display color for different items on the screen The color is set using ratios 0 to 7 of red R green G and blue B Setting the graphics color Select either the default or user setting For the user setting the display color can be set on the following items Back Sets the background
4. 0000000 g 1 Press the MATH key to display the Math setting menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select ON Selecting the number of computed points 3 Press the FFT Points soft key to display the menu used to select the number of computed points 4 Press one of the soft keys from 1000 to 10000 to select the number of points Selecting the time window 3 Press the FFT Window soft key to display the time window selection menu 4 Press the Rect or Hanning soft key to select the time window OFF DN OFF DN M Mathi M Mathi M Mathz M Mathz fw Start Point O Start Point fw Start Point 9 00ms 00ms 9 00ms md Poin md Poin md Poi End Point End Point End Point L_ 166 66ms L_ 164 66ms M FFT Points H FFT Points 1000 1000 Haming Math Exec Math Exec IM 253710 01E 11 3 Performing the FFT Explanation The power spectrum of the voltage current and active power can be displayed by taking the FFT Fast Fourier Transform You can check the frequency distribution of the voltage current and active power from the result For example if the equation is set to FFT C1 when setting the equation as described in section 11 2 the FFT of CH1 is performed For a detailed explanation of the FFT see section 1 8 Waveform Analysis Operand C1 to C8 which correspond to CH1 to CH8 can be used as oper
5. Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 c O cO Current sensor Current sensor input connector input connector Wiring Example of a three phase three wire system 3P3W using a shunt type current sensor SOURCE LOAD 0 Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 w O wO Current sensor Current sensor input connector input connector IM 253710 01E 3 17 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 8 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Wiring Example of a three voltage three current system 3V3A using a shunt type current sensor SOURCE LOAD Input a Input T Input O terminal 1 terminal 2 O terminal 3 Current sensor Current sensor Current sensor input connector input connector input connector Wiring Example of a three phase four wire system 3P4W using a shunt type current sensor SOURCE LOAD Input Input Input terminal 1 terminal 2 terminal 3 O Current sensor Current sensor Current sensor input connector input connector input connector 3 18 IM 253710 01E 3 9 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Connect a measurement cable from an external potential transformer PT or current transformer CT to the voltage or current input terminal of
6. Front panel 2 2 IM 253710 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle and Rotary Knob Common to All Functions Soft keys SHIFT key ESC key Clears and escapes from the current menu SELECT key Confirms the selection made using the jog shuttle or the set value RESET key Press this key to reset the value to default TRIG D CONFIGURATION SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ pispLaY MATH cursor zoom REMOTE Shuttle ring Jog shuttle Rotate the jog shuttle to select setup parameters or to set values The step size increases as the rotation angle of the shuttle ring increases Arrow keys ASF stanrstor Moves along the digits of the value that is set by the jog shuttle or GEERT moves the input position of the character string HELP key Displays help information related to the operation key or soft key that is pressed after pressing this key Section 4 6 CICAHCH EE CIC CH7 VOLTAGE CH 8 CURRENT Press these keys to select the setup After pressing this key to light the indicator on the upper left corner of the SHIFT parameter on the displayed menu key press an operation key to display the menu corresponding to the item indicated below the operation key Set Measurement Mode Acquisition Conditions of Measured Data and Trigger a 00000008 r
7. Pin No Signal Name Pin No Signal Name Pin No 1to12 GND 38 TERMPWR 13 NC 39 40 GND 1 e2 14 to 25 GND 41 ATN 2 33 26 DBO 42 GND 3 o8 27 DB1 43 BSY 28 28 DB2 44 ACK AEE Back side 29 DB3 45 RST 11 68 30 DB4 46 MSG BIE 31 DB5 47 SEL 23 2 32 DB6 48 C D 24 oe 33 DB7 49 REQ BEE 34 DBP 50 I O GA 35 to 37 GND Necessities when connecting a SCSI device SCSI cable Use a commercially sold cable that is 3 m or less in length that has a ferrite core on each end of the cable and that has a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 Q Connection Procedure 1 Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the back of the instrument 2 Turn ON the SCSI device and this instrument To format a medium follow the steps given in section 12 4 Formatting the Disk SCSI devices that can be connected Most SCSI devices MO disk drive hard disk and ZIP can be connected to the instrument but there are some exceptions For example the maximum number of partitions that can be selected is ten and each partition cannot exceed 2 GB If the total capacity of all partitions exceeds 20 GB the hard disk cannot be formatted For general handling precautions for the connected SCSI device see the instruction manual that is provided with the device 1 5 for products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 2 10GB for products PZ4000 with firmware version
8. 16 6 IM 253710 01E 16 3 Performing a Self test Explanation Testing the memory Tests whether or not the internal ROM or RAM is operating correctly If Pass is displayed it is operating correctly If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Testing the keys and the keyboard Tests whether or not the front panel keys are operating properly If the name of the key being pressed appears on the screen it is operating correctly If the indicator turns ON OFF when the arrow keys lt or gt are pressed the keys are operating correctly To exit from the key test press the ESC key twice If the keys are not operating correctly contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 253710 01E 16 7 g uonsedsu pue asueuazuien HunooysajqnoiL 16 4 Checking the System Conditions TRIG D seru eur jes aeee EES ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM FILE MISC HELP LOCA SHIFT copy wut ca MENU 2 WUUUUUUB 2 a 5 a T z g m EY T z g m EY ELEMENTS FILTER FILTER 1 cH1 cH3 cn5 cH7 vorace CO JCC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key SS ORT SINGLE SUGE stant sToP AB Procedure 1 Press the MISC key to display the Misc
9. Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Frequency range 20 Hz to 6 4 kHz Input level CMOS AN CAUTION Applying a signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK IN that is outside the 0 to 5 V range may damage the instrument Note Specify a signal that has the same period as the signal being measured Selecting a signal with little distortion for the PLL source will result in a stable harmonic measurement If the fundamental frequency of the PLL source cannot be determined due to fluctuations and distortion of the signal correct measurement results cannot be obtained Itis recommended that the PLL source be set to a voltage that has little distortion as compared to the current There are cases when the specifications cannot be satisfied if all input signals are distorted or their amplitudes are small with respect to the measurement range In order to measure the harmonics of higher orders more accurately set the PLL source to external clock and apply a signal to the external clock input connector that has the same period as the input signal If the fundamental frequency is less than or equal to 500 Hz and the signal contains high frequency components we recommend the zero crossing filter be set to 500 Hz This filter has a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and is effective only for the frequency measurement circuit When the amplitude of the signal selected for the PLL source CH1 to CH8 is small compared to
10. BoUUGUDU OUGUOUU0 10 22 IM 253710 01E 10 7 Setting the Harmonic Orders under Analysis Explanation Select the range of harmonic orders that will be used to determine the numerical data of the measurement functions of the harmonic waveform Selecting the minimum harmonic order under analysis Select from the following choices 0 Includes the Oth order DC component when determining the various numerical data of the harmonic waveform Does not include the Oth order DC component when determining the various numerical data of the harmonic waveform 1st order fundamental signal is the first component used Selecting the maximum harmonic order under analysis Select the harmonic order in the range from 1 to 500th order Note When the minimum harmonic order is set to 1 the numerical data of Total of the harmonic measurement data will not include the DC component You can set the maximum harmonic order to be up to 500th order but the maximum harmonic order that is actually used to determine the numerical data is the order corresponding to the upper limit of the harmonic order under analysis This upper limit is automatically determined maximum is 500 from the frequency of the PLL source The numerical data corresponding harmonic orders exceeding the upper limit are shown as no data IM 253710 01E 10 23 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 8 Selecting the Equation for the Distortion F
11. Zz Q dc I dc k K k Serial resistance of the load circuit P dc _ P k Rs dc Rs k Rs 0 sdo Fac sO Tio Serial reactance of the load circuit Q dc _ Q k Xs dc Xs k Xs 2 s a Kac TK Parallel resistance of the load circuit U dc E U k Rp de Rp k Rp 2 1 G pie P dc Ptr P k Parallel reactance of the load circuit U dc _ U k Xp dc Xp k Xp 2 1 B paa ao mt aio Rotating Speed Speed Speed Spdr 0 trar k traj k Torque Trq Trq de trqr 0 Trq k i ne Trq 4 Y Traw k min Synchronous Speed Sync Sync 120 ua fl Motor output Pm Motor Evaluation 2n Pm trqr 0 espdr 0 e qr 0 espdr 0 Slip Syne Speed_ Slip Sync Note Continues on the next page k r and j denote the harmonic order real part and imaginary part respectively min denotes the minimum order You can select 0 DC component or 1 Fundamental signal component for the minimum order For details see section 10 7 max denotes the upper limit see section 17 5 of the harmonic order under analysis The upper limit is automatically determined from the frequency of the PLL source maximum is 500 The numerical data of Speed Torque Sync and Slip are Oth order DC components The default setting of the minimum order Min Order in the harmonic measu
12. 1 34 Averaging Phase Difference cecccceeecceeeseeeeeseceeeseeeesnecenesneeseneneeennensesseeseneneeenaees 1 35 Equation for the Distortion Factor Corrected Power Re computing the numerical data ee eeeeeeneeeeesneeeseeeeeeneeeeesaeeeseneeeessaeeeesneeeeeaaes 1 36 1 8 Wavetormi Analysis c cc s ai eased terriers A E atten de Geeta 1 37 Waveform Computation wiinica nnd a dink held 1 37 Display Scaling of a Computed Waveform c cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeneeseaeeeeeeeeatens 1 39 PEW saxty chive cea iA eid ei rend ee ate Saeed etl 1 40 Re computing the Waveform Cursor measurements eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetteeeeeeeneeees 1 41 IM 253710 01E Contents Communication Function GP IB Serial 0 ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeesseeeeeeeneees Chapter 2 Names and Uses of Parts 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top VIEW ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenaee 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle and Rotary Knob eeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeetteeeeeeeee PR 4 E N cs ah eel aie hin nati i teen es ate ais tee see 2 4 Input Modules ieia lee nea ihe hae a a Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements 3 1 Precautions on the Use of the instrument eeseeseseeeeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeersneeesenneerenneees 3 2 Installing the Instrumentering heeded cl a leet al eee A 3 3 Installing the Input Module ceccecceceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeceeee
13. 1999 01 01 66 11 34 Specified date and time 0 094 W 25 980 VA 25 980 var 0 00361 90 207 50 02 Hz 1 000kHz 9 8576 V 2 6 IM 253710 01E 2 3 Screens 42 items display uoloun jJuewesnsealy Urmsi 5 2241 YU Unni 4 6657 U Udet 1 6399 U Uaci 5 1195 V Irms1 4 97312 A Imi 4 97277 A Idci 0 03930 A Tacl 4 97297 A Pi 0 094 U S1 25 980 UA Qa 25 980 var AL 0 00361 el 30 207 fui 50 02 Hz 78 items display uoljoun zuawanseaN Urmsi 5 2241 4 Um 4 6657 4 Udc1 1 0399 U Uaci 5 1195 4 Irmsi 4 97312 A Imi 4 97277 A Idci1 0 03930 A laci 4 97297 A P1 0 094 U 31 25 980 VA Qi 25 986 va AL 0 00361 1 90 207 fui 50 02 Hz fI 1 000kHz Utpki 9 8576 U U pki 7 7754 U I pki 7 16912 A I pki 7 27178 A cfu 1 887 cfi1 1 462 Fruit 1 244 Fela 1 114 zi 1 05046 2 Rs1 3 79359m Xs1 1 05046 All display uoloun juawainseely fit 1 000kHz Ihnki 93 8576 V 1 7 7754 U 5S 1 7 16912 A 1 7 27178 A 1 887 1 462 FfUL 1 244 Felt 1 444 z 1 05046 2 Rsi 3 79359m Xs1 1 05046 Rp1 2930 879 xi a 05047 Rpi 290 879 Xp1 1 05047 Prt 0 083 U si 0 0413 U 1 0 0365 U 1 0 0111 U 1 0 03938 4 Urms2 5 1418 U Umn2 4 5488 U F300 FQ dUrnsi 9 0413 V Adimi 0 0365 V dUdc1 0 0111 U dUacl 0398 V Udc 1 0150 4 Uacz 5 0407 U Irms2 Imnz Idcz Tacz P2 o S2 o Qz 0 AZ p2 f U2 piz 6 660nA 9 000nA
14. Procedure Set the measurement mode to normal measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Normal 2 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 3 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying numerical data Displaying only the numerical data 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Disp tay Format Numeric Tten Amount 8 Reset Exec Nuner ic Disp Itens Select Numeric Wave Bar Vector Nuneric Wave Numer ic Bar Wave Bar UUOUUU0E 8 2 IM 253710 01E 8 2 Displaying Normal Measurement Data Displaying numerical data and waveforms 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric Wavel 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection For the procedures related to setting the waveform display see chapter 9 Display Select g Format Nuner ic Numeric Wave Item Amount Bar 8 Vector Numer ic Bar Reset Wave Bar Exec H Numeric Disp Itens NJUUUUU0U Displaying numerical data and bar graphs 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric Bar 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection The bar graph is useful when making harmonic measurements For the procedures related to setting the
15. Selftest Test Item Memory Memory Test ped Test Exec O Selftest Selftest Test Item cece Memory Test gt gt gt gt gt gt Memory Test Item Systen Memory H Memory Test Main Memory Pass Systen Backup Memory Pass RON Pass Sun 1234H ACQ RAN Test Completed Register Sub CPU OUUOUUDU JOO000U0 Test Exec Saar Testing the keys and the keyboard Selftest NO 9 1 Testing the keys Press the Test Exec soft key Press the keys on the front panel to test them Press the arrow keys lt or gt The indicator lights one by one each time an arrow key is pressed Press the ESC key twice to exit from the key test Testing the keyboard Press the Soft Key soft key A keyboard is displayed 0 Operate the keyboard Check that the characters entered on the keyboard are correctly displayed in the entry box of the keyboard For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings W Test Item Selftest _ self test Test Item Key Board a Soft Rey JUUUUUUE Test Exec lt lt lt lt ReyBoard Test gt gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt lt ReyBoard Test gt gt gt gt gt key Board Key Code INPUT Exit gt Push ESC Key twice LED Test gt Push lt or gt Key Ee ALLTEL UUOUOUUU Test Exec
16. Wiring A 3V3A 10 08 A 1 11 2730 U Wiring B 1P2W i IUN 6 3143 A PLL Src CH1401 i P161 48 644 W Frequency 60 005 Hz i 104 a1 181 vA qwi U2 66 55 QED 541 967 var u1 U3 299 52 ALC 0 68338 U1 I11 313 11 11 313 11 U1 12 80 27 ui 13 188 22 eo NK Wa 45 0445 y Uza 1235384 V B 6459 A 124 254 0 PHD 3 479 W P201 74 973 W S3 86 692 VA 52 1 77 173 VA Q361 80 775 var Q2c 18 297 var A3 0 36311 1 0 97149 931 248 71 21 13 72 For a 3V3A three voltage three current wiring system For a 3P3W three phase three wire wiring system Wiring A 3P3U 11 2712 U Wiring B 3P3U 6 3133 A PLL Src CH 48 645 W Frequency 71 158 UA wui U2 935 var W u3 Z k 68361 qui ld gui 1Z qui 13 oe j u2 4 12 4398 U 12 G P20 74 955 W 77 157 UA 18 362 var 0 97146 e201 13 72 For a 3P3W three phase three wire wiring system e When the vector size is displayed zoomed applicable to products with firmware version 2 01 or later Example in which the voltage is zoomed 4 times and the current is zoomed 2 times The value indicating the size of the peripheral circle range The size of the vector representing the voltage and current is expanded 4 times and 2 times respectively The voltage range and current range values are reduced to 1 4 and 1 2 the original values respectively IM 253710 01E 2
17. no data For example if a measurement function of a delta computation is in the equation but delta computation is turned OFF or a measurement function of an element that does not have a module installed is in the equation an error message is displayed When averaging see section 10 5 is turned ON the user defined function cannot be turned ON 10 14 IM 253710 01E 10 4 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power and Corrected Power For a functional description see section 1 7 1 z 5 S ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy wut cau MENU ELEMENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER 4 CH7 VOLTAGE QD OUOUU0U8 SINGLE SE start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME 2 3 font cna fons T CH8 cunRENT SF S S e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedure 1 Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select ON 3 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Selecting the equation for apparent power 4 Press the S Formula soft key to display the equation selection menu for apparent power 5 Press one of the soft keys from Urms Irms to Udc ldc to select the equation Measure Measure
18. 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Harmonics Press the PII Source soft key to display the PLL source selection box 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the PLL source from CH1 to Ext Clk 4 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new PLL source Setup Setup K Mode K Mode Harmonics Harmonics RDSE lect eg CHZ M Wiring CH3 M Wiring 1P2W 1P2U CH4 1P2W 1P2U Display CHS Display Resolution Resolution Bdgts 6Gdgts CHG Bdgts 6dgts W Pil Source CH M Pil Source CHL CH8 CH1 Ext Cik Initialize Initialize IM 253710 01E 6 7 sIxy sul y Buje a 6 4 Selecting the PLL Source for Harmonic Measurement Explanation Select the PLL source phase locked loop source to be used for determining the fundamental frequency for the analysis of the hermonics Selecting the PLL source Select the PLL source from the following choices e CH1 to CH8 The voltage or current of the element that has a measurement module installed becomes the PLL source The numbers of the channels that do not have measurement modules installed are not displayed Ext Clk The clock signal applied to the external clock input connector becomes the PLL source When setting the PLL source to Ext Clk Apply a clock signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK IN on the rear panel that meets the following specifications AN Ext cLK IN
19. Auto range Select Auto for the input range setting to enable auto range The range changes automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The switching conditions and precautions are the same as the descriptions given in section 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input The different ranges used in the auto mode are the same as those available for fixed range 15 8 IM 253710 01E 15 3 Selecting the Input Filter WUOUUULE 1 z 5 S CONFIGURATION ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy mui ca MENU ELEMENTS SINGLE SGE sTaRT SToP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g S cH2 cH4 cH6 cH8 current SA SS a S e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedure i Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu Press the Motor Module soft key to display the motor module setting dialog box On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 only the Power Module soft key appears and you cannot set the motor module In addition if the motor module is not installed in the element number 4 slot the Motor Module menu does not appear Selecting the line filter 3 4 5 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Line Filter Press the SELECT key to display the line filte
20. SINGLE SAGE stant sToP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME UO cna cna ows cH vo rce E a on cHa cHe cma Jcunnenr NZ SS ee _ Se e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT COPY MENU to display the Copy setting menu 2 Press the Copy to soft key to display the output medium selection menu 3 Press the Centro soft key Selecting output command type 4 Press the Format soft key to display the output command selection menu 5 Press one of the keys from ESC P to PR201 to select the output command type If you select ESC P ESC P2 BJ or PCL5 go to step 6 If you select LIPS3 or PR201 go to step 7 Copy K Copy to Copy to Printer Centro Copy K Copy to Printer Centro 4 Format File ESC P Color DFF ON Comment Comment Comment Paper Feed Paper Feed Abort Abort JUUUU0UU NUON EE EE a 13 8 IM 253710 01E 13 3 Printing to an External Centronics Printer Select whether or not to print in color ON OFF This step applies if you selected ESC P ESC P2 BJ or PCL5 in step 5 6 Press the Color soft key to select ON or OFF Setting comment 7 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard appears
21. UUUOB0U0 Selecting the waveform to be saved The waveform selection menu CH1 to MATH2 is displayed only when Float is selected in step 5 If the data type is Binary or ASCII the displayed waveform is saved 6 Press the Save soft key to display the save setting menu 7 Press the Trace soft key to display the waveform selection menu 8 Press one of the soft keys from CH1 to Math2 to select the waveform to be saved Only for Float File M File Item Wave M Data Type Float Save Utility JUUUUUUE WJUUUUUUU Save Exec IM 253710 01E 12 17 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 6 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Selecting the range of the waveform to be saved 9 Press the Range soft key to display the save range selection menu 10 Press one of the soft keys from Main to Z2 to select the range of the waveform to be saved Only the data that are saved for Main can be loaded as described later File List File Nane 4 Trace CHL W Range Main JUUUUUUL JUUUUULL Save Exec Selecting the destination medium and directory 11 The procedures are the same as Selecting the destination medium and Selecting the destination directory in section 12 5 Save Exec Setting the file name and comment 12 The procedures are the same as Setting the
22. display channel display format eee cee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees display interpolation 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees display order numerical data 0 0 0 eee display record length ccsecsccccsescessseeesecssceesseseseeseeees Display Resolution i display scaling essseseesseseerierresineiresirerrerrnrinnrrnrresrnnrrnens displayed digita aaa cecbeeveceacteesuseustadeeedenssdes iraa pat displayed item displayed point distorted wave 00 dividing the record length eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 1 16 6 4 division screen scseccsecccseseeeseececeeseeseesesescserevseeneeessnees 9 9 UIA MA TTEA AEEA NE EEEE EEE EE E 2 9 8 17 E COG6 tiQQe hsrt a eue ndee 1 18 7 7 CMNICIONCY asesir aa airaa AT NEN a ENNA 1 6 EIA 2392 nand aaia andea Aa aaae 17 11 BVACS A E E EE AAT 17 11 IM 253710 01E Index 1 Index CIOMON srren aaiae entering string entering value sse equation apparent power eects 1 34 10 17 equation corrected POWET cee eee eee eeeeeeeeneees 10 17 equation distortion factor 1 36 equation user defined function equation waveform computation Se error messag eane aena Dace caves Aa aaa Aea a 16 2 expanding sisser ecsadiaesddarehint eaves Mere eietverves exponentially averaging eee eeeeeeeeeeees Ext Trigger atoni extension numerical data extension screen image ex
23. Terminal 5A pen ZOA Jase lect pa Sen_zoA Lp 1 Range LOOGMUpK fooonUpK 1oApk__ Sensor Rat io mA 6 6000 400nUpk 0 0000 Line Filter OFF 200MUpk zero Cross Filter OFF 106nUpk Scaling FF ON_ Auto Pt Ratio 6 0000 0000 ct Ratio C 0 0000 0 0000 _0 0000 L Scaling Factor 6 0000 9 0000 ___6 9000 OUOUU000 Setting the current sensor transformation ratio 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Sensor Ratio mV A of the element you wish to set 10 Press the SELECT key to display the current sensor transformation ratio setting box 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the transformation ratio For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 12 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Power Module Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 20A Shunt ZOA Shunt 20A Shunt 20A Shunt U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk Terminal 5A_pen zoa pA Sen_zoa pa Sen_zon pA Sen_Z6n I Range 1006nUpk_ TeApK__ ToApK__ Sensor RatiocnuarL 6 001 0000 0 0000 Line obuey pue spo Jusweinseay oy bumas Filter OFF J OFF OFF zero Cross Filter Scaling PP OFF ON BFF on g P
24. scceeeeeeeeseneeeeeseeerenneeeeeneeeeenaeeeenaes 17 7 Vector Bar Graph Displays Simultaneous display Numerical computation Wavetorm Analy SIS irnir enaar A arent Acai eb a A as 17 8 Harmonic Measurement Save and Load data Output Screen Image Data 17 9 17 6 External Trigger O Section oo cee ecceeececeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeteaeeseaeeeaeeseaeenaeeeeaeens 17 10 17 7 Internal Floppy Disk Drive 20 2 eccceeeeccseeeseceeseneeeeseeeeeneeeesesaeeseseeeeeeeeeeneaaeneseeeneneeaeess 17 10 17 8 GPIB Intertaces 2 ieee en ed ala i ei 17 10 17 9 Serial RS 232 Interface 00 eee ee cece eeeeceneeeeeeeeaeetseeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseeseaeeeeeteaeseeeeteaeee 17 11 17 10 Centronics nteriace iiipin en ai daiatelindicneokn dain nan deine ae 17 11 VFA SCSI Option r oa a a aa a a aai 17 11 17 12 Built in Printer Option vrasin a a a a aaa 17 11 17 13 General Specifications e a r lel a aaa A eet a i 17 12 17 14 External Dimensions 253710 eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeeeeesenaeeesnaeeeeeeeeeenaeeeenaeeess 17 14 17 15 Power Measurement Module 253751 eeecceeseeeeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeeesaeesenaeeesseeeeenneeeenaeeess 17 15 17 16 Power Measurement Module 253752 00 eeeesceeeeseeeenneeeeeneeeeesaeeeenaeeeesaeeeeenneeeenaeeess 17 20 1754 7 Motor Mod le 258771 arian eraran daa e a a A ey 17 25 Appendix App 1 Relationship between the Observation Time Sampling Rate and Record length App 1 App 2
25. A11 ON CHS A11 OFF CH6 je Zi Nag Gi cut cH Z2 Mag cuz cue le Z1 Position Ma in amp zi z2 21 Position Main z2 00ns c3 Mathi 22 Position LW 8 00ns le 22 Position LW 9 60ms CH4 Math2 22 only Z1 amp Z2Z B08BOBBL o0o0o00 IM 253710 01E 9 19 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 8 Zooming on the Waveform Setting the zoom factor 13 Press the Z1 Mag and Z2 Mag soft keys so that the jog shuttle controls Z1 mag Z2 Mag or both Z1 Mag and Z2 Mag To control both Z1 Mag and Z2 Mag you must have selected Z1 and Z2 in the previous section Selecting the type of zoom display 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom factor Setting the zoom position 15 Press the Z1 Position and Z2 Position soft keys so that the jog shuttle controls Z1 Position Z2 Position or both Z1 Position and Z2 Position To control both Z1 Position and Z1 Position you must have selected Z1 and Z2 in the previous section Selecting the type of zoom display 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom position M Node iq Mode Ma in amp 21 amp 22 Ma in amp 21a22 M Zoom Format M Zoom Format Main Main M Allocation M Allocation 21 Position jw 21 Position le 22 Position LW 9 60ms le 22 Position LW 9 00ns UUOUUUUU UUUOUUUU 9 20 IM 253710 01E 9 8 Zoomi
26. CCONFIGURATION D SAR SETUP INPUT MEASURERTRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM 1 z 5 5 o REMOTE FILE misc HELP LOCAL Leal SHIFT copy nuit caL MENU FILTER FILTER FILTER r SINGLE SHE start stop ABORT VOLTAGE C CURRENT NSA e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key S 0000000 Set the measurement mode to normal measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Normal Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the AMeasure soft key to display the delta computation setting menu Press one of the keys from OFF to Star gt Delta to select the delta computation apron Measure Mode m o g Period zero Cross M Sync Source Measure Exec M 4 Measure OFF g User Def ined Star bDelta 10 8 IM 253710 01E 10 2 Selecting the Delta Computation Explanation In the normal measurement mode the sum or difference of the instantaneous values sampled data of the voltage or current between elements 1 2 and 3 can be used to determine the measurement functions AU AUrms AUmn AUdc AUa
27. Data in this format cannot be loaded on this instrument Float The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in 32 bit floating point format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC Data in this format cannot be loaded on this instrument Data size The following table shows the data size when the numerical data of CH1 to CH8 are saved with a record length of 100 k words observation time of 100 ms and MATH1 and MATH2 turned OFF For the normal measurement mode Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 6 K depends on the input signal conditions Float FLD Approx 1 K 43 functions x 6 elements x 4 For the harmonic measurement mode Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes ASCII CSV Approx 50 K when there is one measurement function for each element depends on the input signal conditions Float FLD When the measurement function is U or P Approx 4 K 502 501 x 4 When the measurement function is other than U I or P Approx 2K 502 x 4 Numerical data to be saved For the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 3 Determination of Delta Functions For the wiring methods of A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method For normal
28. H A Measure Ext Trigger Measure Exec Exec W A Measure fd Measure WA 4d Measure OFF OFF OFF J User J User J User Def ined Def ined Def ined 10 4 IM 253710 01E 10 1 Setting the Measurement Computation Period Re computing Re computing 13 Press the Measure Exec soft key to determine all the numerical data over the measurement computation period set in the previous pages Measure Mode OFF DR 4 Period M Period M Period zero Cross Cursor Ext Trigger we Start Pos 10 00ms i End Pos 78 0OMS Measure Exec M 4d Measure M Sync Source Measure Exec Wo 4 Measure M A Measure OFF OFF OFF g User Def ined g User Def ined 4 User Def ined Explanation The numerical data of the measurement functions can be determined using the sampled data in the measurement computation period that is set in this section This procedure works for both the normal measurement and harmonic measurement modes Turning ON OFF the numerical computation mode Select whether or not to perform numerical computation OFF Numerical computations are not performed Because none of the numerical data are determined the interval between the data acquisition and the waveform display becomes shorter ON All the numerical data are determined The menu used to set the numerical computation also appears Selecting the method
29. M Function Se lect WH Function Wd Function Urns None urns Element Unean Element 1 urns K Elenent Se fect Element Element Z Element 1 Elenent 1 Element 3 Element 4 za ZB BOUUBUDI BUQUUBUL IM 253710 01E 8 9 Aejdsiq jeouewnyn e 8 3 Changing the Displayed Items of the Normal Measurement Data Explanation For the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 3 Determination of Delta Functions For details regarding the wiring methods A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method Changing the measurement function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are indicated in Measurement Function in section 1 2 and Delta Computation and User defined Function in section 1 7 You can also select not to display the measurement functions None Changing the element wiring method Select the element wiring method from the following choices Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 2A B Urmsi 5 0517 V Urmsi 5 0517 V Ummi 5 0516 V Changing the measurement Unni 5 0516 V Udc1 0 0315 U function of the third item ie Ummi 5 0516 Y Uaci 5 0516 U Uaci 5 0516 V Irmsi 5 6536 A Irmsi 5 6536 A
30. MENU SINGLE START STOP ABORT Fan ca L IE IE I VOLTAGE CH4 CH6 CH8 curRENT NA J L e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key CJ C CD Let rse foca CJ CJ C oO Procedure Set the measurement mode to harmonic measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Harmonics 2 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 3 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying the vectors 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Vector 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Select whether or not to display the numerical data ON OFF 6 Press the Numeric soft key to select ON or OFF Disp tay Format Wave Disp tay Select K Format Numeric Vector Wave Numeric ON Bar Vector Nuner ic Wave Numer ic Bar Wave Bar Wave Setting 9 24 IM 253710 01E 9 9 Displaying the Vectors of the Harmonics Zooming in on the vector This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later 7 Press the U Mag or I Mag soft key to set the jog shuttle control to U Mag I Mag or both U Mag and I Mag
31. Selecting the medium and directory The media that are available are displayed in the File List dialog box Examples FDO Floppy disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5_1 The first partition of a SCSI device with an ID number of 5 Data size The data size corresponding to one set of setup parameters is approximately 20 KB File name and comment e You must specify a file name Comment can be omitted You cannot save to a file name that is already in use in the same directory no overwriting Number and types of characters that can be used Item Number of chars Characters that can be used Filename 1 to 8 chars 0 to 9 A to Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces The maximum length of the comment when saving a file is 20 characters File extension The File extension set is automatically appended to the file Auto naming function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 are automatically created Specify the common name maximum of five characters specify at the Filename item that is placed before the three digit number 12 14 IM 253710 01E 12 5 Saving and Loading Setup Parameters Specifying the files to display in the File List dialog box You can specify the type of files to display Item Displays only setup parameter files All Displays all files on the medium Properties Lists
32. 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu 2 Press the Motor Module soft key to display the motor module setting dialog box On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 only the Power Module soft key appears and you cannot set the motor module In addition if the motor module is not installed in the element number 4 slot the Motor Module menu does not appear Setting the motor s number of poles 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Pole 4 Press the SELECT key to display the motor s number of poles selection box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the number of poles For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Motor Module Power Module Each Speed Ch Torque Ch8 Pm Range Soupk__ Seupk__ Power Module Catt Sense Type mato Puse Freq Range _ 2k 20oKHz_ Line Filter Zero Cross Filter I Motor Module Scaling 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Unit rpn Nm y Pulse N 68 a Pole co 2 Sync Speed Source CH 15 16 IM 253710 01E 15 6 Setting the Motor s Number of Poles Used to Compute the Synchronous Speed and the Slip Setting the frequency measurement source input channel for the voltage or current supplied by the motor 3 Turn the
33. 1 3 Acquiring Data Voltage and Current Signals c Measurement Range of Voltage Current and Power For procedures see section 5 3 When directly inputting voltage or current signals to the input module there are two types of measurement ranges fixed range and auto range When displaying the waveform the measurement range corresponds to the vertical display range For waveform display see section 1 6 Waveform Display suoljoun Fixed range Select the range from a list of choices The selected range does not change even if the amplitude of the input signal changes For the voltage of the power measurement module the maximum and minimum selectable voltages are 2000 Vpk and 30 Vpk respectively Auto range The measurement range changes automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The different ranges are the same as those available for the fixed range Note that when the measurement function of the power measurement module is set so that the numerical data are not measured or computed when the Measure Mode is OFF you can select auto range However the range does not change in this case Power range The measurement range power range of active power apparent power and reactive power of the power measurement module are determined by the wiring method voltage range and current range as follows For the actual numerical values of the power range see section 5 3 Setting the Measurement Ran
34. 1P2W 1P2U Display Resolution Bdgts 6dgts Initialize WUUUUUUU The values set with the keys can be reset to their factory default values This function is useful when you wish to clear the previous settings or restart a configuration from the beginning For details on the default settings see Appendix 4 Parameters that cannot be initialized Date and time Settings related to saving and loading data Settings related to screen image data output Settings related to the GP IB interface and serial interface SCSI ID numbers The SCSI interface is optional Initializing on Power Up If the power switch is turned ON while pressing the RESET key the instrument is powered up with the factory default settings in place In this case the settings related to the GP IB interface serial interface and SCSI ID numbers are also initialized IM 253710 01E 4 3 suoneiedg uowwog a 4 3 Starting Stopping Data Acquisition Procedure ONFIGURATION TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE msc Here HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy NULL CAL MENU FILTER FILTER FILTER 3 FILTER va SINGLE START START STOP ra OBSERVATION TIME UOUUUU8 ont cna ons on b T ZE SS ST e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the
35. Determining the voltage and current in section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 34 IM 253710 01E 1 7 Numerical Computation a Averaging For procedures see section 10 5 The numerical data can be exponentially averaged using a specified attenuation constant This function is useful when the numerical display is fluctuating and is hard to read such as when the fluctuation of the power supply or load is large or when the frequency of the input signal is low The averaging is performed according to the following equation suoljun Mn Dn 1 Dn Dn 1 K Dn Displayed value at the nth time that has been exponentially averaged The displayed value D on the first time is M1 Dn 1 Display value at the n 1 time that has been exponentially averaged Mn Measured data at the nth time K Attenuation constant Select 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 Phase Difference For procedures see section 10 6 The display format of the phase difference of the voltage and current can be selected With the reference axis set to zero degrees one format displays the phase difference using 360 in the clockwise direction and the other format displays an lead of 180 in the counter clock wise direction and a lag of 180 in the clockwise direction IM 253710 01E 1 35 1 7 Numerical Computation Equation for the Distortion Factor For procedures see section 10 8 The measurement funct
36. Setting the unit Number of characters 8 characters or less Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or a space Converting the scale of the computed waveform The upper and lower limits of the display frame used to display the computed waveform can be set Select the method to set these limits from the following choices Auto Sets the method to auto scaling The upper and lower limits of the display are automatically determined from the maximum and minimum values of the computed result Manual Sets the method to manual scaling The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily as necessary Setting the upper and lower limits for manual scaling Set the values in the range from 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Note If a channel of an element that has no module installed is used as an operand in the equation the operand is handled as a zero An Equation Math1 or Math2 cannot be placed inside another equation Math1 or Math 2 The equation of Math1 or Math2 cannot be placed inside the equation of a user defined function The TREND waveform including TRENDM TRENDD and TRENDF of the waveform displayed at the ends of the screen that is less than one period is not displayed The TREND waveform is displayed over one period of the waveform On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 a coefficient cannot be multiplied to the result of TREND and FFT functions 2 TREND or 3 FFT for example On p
37. The data specified by the measurement function numerical data in the harmonic measurement mode are measured or computed over the specified period of the sampled data as described later in Measurement Computation Period For information on the sampled data see section 1 3 Acquiring Data Voltage and Current Signals suoljoun Harmonic measurement function types of numerical data Harmonic measurement function on each power measurement module The following 28 types of numerical data can be determined For details related to the determination of the measurement function see Appendix 2 Measurement Chars and numbers inside Function de 1 k All No U Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Numerical data exist Yes Yes Yes Yes No Numerical data do not P Yes Yes Yes Yes erst S Yes Yes Yes Yes Q Always 0 Yes Yes Yes A Yes Yes Yes Yes o No Yes Yes No ou No No Yes No ol No No Yes No Z Yes Yes Yes No Rs Yes Yes Yes No Xs Yes Yes Yes No Rp Yes Yes Yes No Xp Yes Yes Yes No Uhdf Yes Yes Yes No Ihdf Yes Yes Yes No Phdf Yes Yes Yes No Uthd No No No Yes Ithd No No No Yes Pthd No No No Yes Uthf No No No Yes Ithf No No No Yes Utif No No No Yes Itif No No No Yes hvf No No No Yes hef No No No Yes fU _ No No No Yes fl _ No No No Yes Measurement functions having parenthese
38. eecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeetaeeeneeesieeeeaeeeneeee 8 1 8 2 Displaying Normal Measurement Data esceeesseeeesneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeseneeeeeeneeeenaeees 8 2 8 3 Changing the Displayed Items of the Normal Measurement Data eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 8 The following sections apply when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement 8 4 Displaying Harmonic Measurement Data 00 0 eeeeeeeeeesneeeeeneeeeesneeeenneeeeeeeeeenneeeenneees 8 11 8 5 Changing the Displayed Items of the Harmonic Measurement Data cceeeeereee 8 19 Chapter 9 Waveform Display 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display c cecceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeaeessaeeseeeenaeesieeseeeeneeeed 9 1 9 2 Moving the Vertical Position 0 0 0 eeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteseeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeesneeeseaeeeeenneeeesneeerenaeees 9 5 9 3 Splitting the Screen and Displaying the Waveforms ecccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneetseeeeteeeneeeeaes 9 7 9 4 lt Interpolating the Display 2 20 40 wilson a eel E A 9 10 9 5 Changing the Graticule sssi ena a a aaa a oa 9 12 9 6 Turning ON OFF the scale display 0 0 2 0 cceeecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeseeseaeeeeeeeeatens 9 14 9 7 Setting a Label Name for the Waveform ccceesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeseaeeseeeenaeetiaeeeaeeeneeens 9 16 9 8 ZOOMING ON the Waveform eeeeeeeseeeeeneeeteeneeeeeneeeeeaaeeeeaeeesaeeeeeaneetenneeeseaeeeeenneenennes 9 18 The following sections apply when the m
39. measurement range error x 1 5 calibration period is one year Power factor coso A influence When cos 0 45 to 66 Hz Add apparent power reading x 0 0015 Other frequencies Add apparent power reading x 0 0002 x f designed value However add at least apparent power reading x 0 0015 fis the frequency kHz When 0 lt cosd lt 1 45 to 66 Hz Add 0 15 x tan of reading Other frequencies Add 0 02 x f x tan of reading designed value However add at least 0 15 x tano of reading fis the frequency kHz Influence from the amplitude of the input signal and frequency For input voltages of 400 Vrms or more add reading error x 1 5 x U of reading For input voltages of 400 Vrms or more and frequencies of 100 kHz or more add an additional 0 005 x f x U of reading designed value U input voltage kV f frequency kHz Line filter influence Add 1 of reading to an input signal whose frequency is 1 10th of the cut off frequency when the line filter is ON Measurement range influence As shown in the above table when the input signal is a sinusoid and its rms value is between 5 and 55 of the measurement range As shown in the above table when the input signal is a DC signal and the value is between 55 and 55 of the measurement range The reading error is doubled when the input signal is a sinusoid and its rms value is between 55 and 70 of the measurement range The
40. or je cursori 9 00ns Cursor2 x ns M Jump Type x to Main Marker Junp t 00ns 6 06ns UOOUBUU UOUUOUUU IM 253710 01E 11 11 sishjeuy wojne M z 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor Making the marker x jump to the center of the waveform display frame 16 Press the Jump Type soft key to display the jump selection menu 17 Press one of the soft keys from to Main to x to Z2 to select the marker and the jump destination 18 Press the Marker Jump soft key to make the selected marker move to the jump destination je cursori je cursori 9 00ns x to Main 9 00ns Cursorz x Cursorz x ms ns Jump Type H Jump Type x to Main Marker Junp x to Main Marker Junp 11 12 IM 253710 01E 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor When Horizontal is Selected Selecting the waveform on which to place the H cursor 4 Press the Cursor1 Trace soft key to display the box used to select the waveform on which to place the H cursor 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform from CH1 to Math2 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Moving the H cursor Moving H cursor 1 7 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 8 Turn the jog shuttle to move H cursor 1 Moving H cursor 2 9 Press the Cursor1
41. 12 Press the SELECT key to select Analog or Pulse Selecting the frequency input range of the revolution sensor signal The selection made here takes effect when Pulse is selected in the previous section Selecting the revolution sensor signal type 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select Freq Range 14 Press the SELECT key to display the frequency input range selection box 15 Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 2k 200kHZz to 1 40Hz and Auto 16 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new frequency input range Motor Module Motor Module Speed Ch Torque Ch Pr Speed Ch7 Torque ch8 Pn Range soupk_ _s0upk_ Sp select Range SUpk__ C Sense Type fina Tog Putse 1 BoUpk Sense Type fmalog_ Pulse Freq Range 2k 2O0kHz 20Upk Freq Range Zk Z0 kHz Select Line ine Filter 10Upk Filter OFF zero Cross zero Cross Filter OFF SUpk Filter 250 8kHz Scaling 1 0009 1 0000 2Upk Scaling 1 0000 16 B00 Hz 1 0000 Unit rpn Nm 1Upk Unit rpm 1 40 Hz T Pulse N Auto Pulse N Auto Pole Pole Sync Speed Sync Speed Source HZ source CHE 15 4 IM 253710 01E 15 2 Setting the Input Range of Revolution Sensor and Torque Meter Signals Setting the Input Range of the Revolution Sensor Signal Using the Channel Setting Menu 1 Press the CH7 key to display the channel setting m
42. 16 42 or 78 X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later 8 8 IM 253710 01E 8 3 Changing the Displayed Items of the Normal Measurement Data Display 4 Format Numeric Numeric Disp Items The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Numeric 3 Press the Numeric Disp Items soft key to display the menu used to select the number of displayed items Selecting the item to change 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select highlight the item to change Changing the measurement function 5 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select the measurement function You can also select not to display the measurement functions None 7 Press the SELECT key The symbol for the selected element or wiring method and the numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position Changing the element wiring method 8 Press the Element soft key to display the element wiring method selection box 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the element wiring method from Element1 to B 10 Press the SELECT key The selected element number or wiring method symbol Zfunction and the numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position Nuneric Ttens weNorm Item No Numeric Itens Norn Item No l Nuneric Ttens Norn Item No l 1 1 1
43. 2 3 Screens Numerical Display for the Normal Measurement Mode 8 items display r Displays the last channel key that was pressed the waveform color and the measurement range of that channel I Aa CHL uolouny zUIWINSLIN I 1 Uover 30Upk Iover Urmsi 5 2241 V Umn1 4 6657 V Udc1 1 0399 V Uacl 5 1195 V Irmsi 4 97312 A Imni 4 97277 A Ide1 0 03930 A Tacl 4 97297 A 16 items display uoun JUSLSINSeS wmi 5 2241V n wmi 4 6657 V o wer 1 0399V B wa 5 1195 V m 4 97312 A mi 497277 As wer 0 03930 A ss wa 4 97297 A Uspkt Vv The color changes from green to red when the input signal exceeds the approx 125 level of the specified measurement range The first and second lines correspond to voltage and current respectively The input condition of each element Element 1 2 3 and 4 is indicated in order from the left However if the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot and the revolution sensor signal is a pulse signal input the fourth indicator from the left on the top row remains green m When the observation time is changed while the data acquisition operation is stopped the new observation time and sampling rate are displayed here The observation time and sampling rate for data that are displayed on the screen 40ns Z2 5NS s zons 5MS7s Display H Format Numeric 4 Ttem Amount eea Menu Reset Exec Numeric Disp Itens
44. 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom factor Display g Format vector Numeric ON c U Mag 1 000 1 I Mag 1 000 Explanation Vector display is possible during harmonic measurement mode Selecting the display format Select Vector to set the vector display The phase difference and the amplitude rms relationships between the fundamental signal U 1 and the I 1 of the element wired using wiring method A can be displayed as vectors The vector of each input signal is displayed with the positive vertical axis representing zero degrees Turning ON OFF the numerical data display Select whether or not to display the numerical data The values of the amplitude and the phase difference between the signals can be displayed along with the vectors For information pertaining to the display format of the phase difference see section 10 6 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference ON Displays the numerical data OFF Does not display the numerical data Setting the zoom factor of the vector The size of the vectors can be changed This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The zoom factor can be set in the range from 0 100 to 100 000 You can specify separate zoom factors for the fundamental waves U 1 and 1 IM 253710 01E 9 25 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 9 Displaying the Vectors of the Harmonics When displaying numerical data the size of the sig
45. E CY CO ED a ed A prece fal HAE LAD eL J Sync Speed source z Explanation Setting the scaling factor You can specify the scaling factor used to compute the motor output mechanical power from the rotating speed and torque Select the value in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 The equation is indicated below When the scaling factor is 1 in the following equation the normal motor output is determined Motor output Pm W 2 Scaling factor x Torque N m x San Roraing speed mp 1 Torque derived in section 15 5 2 Rotating speed derived in section 15 4 Setting the unit of motor output Number of characters Eight characters or less Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or a space Note To set the unit of the motor output that is determined in section 15 7 to Q set the unit of torque to Nm When the unit of torque is set to Nm see section 15 5 the motor output is determined in terms of Q If the unit of torque is set to some other unit the unit of motor output can be converted to Q by multiplying the conversion value in the table below Unit of Torque Conversion Value Nm 1 0000 kgfm 9 80665 ftlb 1 35582 ozin 0 00706155 Ibin 0 112985 IM 253710 01E 15 19 Sa NpOW JOJO 0 lqe2ddy uonouny uonenjesra 10 0N 15 8 Computing the Motor Efficiency and Total Efficiency Fr
46. FILTER y SINGLE 4 START START STOP ABORT eie SS SSeS e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key UUUUUUUE Procedure Set the measurement mode to harmonic measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Harmonics Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 3 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Aejdsiq wiojyonem el Displaying the bar graph Displaying only the bar graphs 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Bar 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Two bar graphs are displayed Display Se lect q Format Nuner ic Bar Wave Bar Item No Bar 1 Vector H Function Numer ic Wave u Numeric Bar fH Element Wave Bar Element 1 CBar Markeri Bar Markerz x L 98 order Start Order a End Order a OUOUUUG0 IM 253710 01E 9 27 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data Displaying numerical data and the bar graphs 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric Bar 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Two bar graphs are displayed Select Numeric Wave Bar Vector Nuner ic Wave uneric Bar Wave Bar Displaying the waveform and the bar graph
47. SINGLE Suge start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME rr N Gl A e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Set the trigger mode to a mode other than OFF For procedures see section 7 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode 1 Press the TRIGGER key to display the Trigger setting menu Check that Mode is set to something other than OFF Press the Position soft key 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger position For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings IM 253710 01E 7 11 10661 y Bunjes 7 5 Setting the Trigger Position Explanation The trigger position is used to set which section of the sampled data in the acquisition memory to display on the screen Setting the trigger position Set the trigger position in the range from 0 to 100 The left end of the screen is 0 the right end of the screen is 100 When the trigger delay described in the next section is O s the trigger point and trigger position match Trigger point Pre trigger gt Post trigger Acquisition memory Display record length 4 Displayed on the screen Trigger position ears point N Pre trigger Post trigger Note The trigger position can be changed even when the data acquisition is stopped The new trigger position takes
48. SUGE stant sToP XJ ff CS Cd e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Select a display format to display the waveforms For the procedures see section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Check that Format is set to Wave Numerict Wave Wave Bar or Wave X Y X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Wave 3 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the waveform menu 4 Press the Scale Value soft key to select ON or OFF Display g Format Wave Wave Setting Wave Display 4 Wave Format Single Tnterpolate Fal y Graticule a Scale Value DFF ON Trace Label PFF ON Mapping Fixed 9 14 IM 253710 01E 9 6 Turning ON OFF the scale display Explanation You can select whether or not to display ON OFF the upper and lower limits of the vertical axis of each channel and the values at the left and right ends of the horizontal axis time axis e ON Displays the scale values OFF Does not display the scale values 000A Upper limits L io
49. Weight Approx 0 9 kg Voltage input Input terminal type Plug in terminal Input format Floating input resistive voltage divider Input impedance Input resistance Approx 1 MQ Input capacitance Approx 5 pF Measurement range Select from Auto 2000 Vpk 1200 Vpk 600 Vpk 300 Vpk 200 Vpk 120 Vpk 60 Vpk 30 Vpk Frequency range DC to 2 MHz Instantaneous maximum 2000 Vpk or 1000 Vrms whichever is less CAT II allowable input 1 s Continuous maximum Same as the instantaneous maximum allowable input allowable input Continuous maximum 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz CAT Il common mode voltage CMRR Short input terminals apply 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz between input Influence from terminals and case common mode voltage 0 005 of range or less at 10 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz Maximum range measurement range x 0 0002 x f of range or less for other frequencies designed value f is the frequency in kHz Line filter Select from OFF 500 Hz 20 kHz and 1 MHz Zero crossing filter Select from OFF 500 Hz and 20 kHz A D converter 12 bit Sampling rate 5 MS s maximum IM 253710 01E 17 15 h Ey suoleoyioeds 17 15 Power Measurement Module 253751 Item Specification Current input Input terminal type Direct input large binding post Current sensor input BNC connector Input format Floating input shunt input method Input impedance Direct input 5 A Input res
50. Wiring Example of a three voltage three current system 3V3A using PT and CT R SOURCE LOAD nput terminal 1 ST Wiring Example of a three phase SOURCE LOAD zion IM 253710 01E 3 21 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 10 Wiring a Circuit with Voltage Input Exceeding 600 V When the voltage across the voltage input terminals exceeds 600 V do not directly input the current to the current input terminals Connect the output of an isolation sensor CT DT CT or clamp to the current sensor input connector A WARNING _ The rated voltage between the input terminal voltage input terminal current input terminal and current sensor input connector and earth ground is 600 V Do not apply a voltage exceeding 600 V The rated voltage between the voltage and current input terminals between the voltage input terminal and current sensor input connector and between the current input terminal and current sensor input connector is 600 V Do not apply a voltage exceeding 600 V The rated voltage between the U voltage input terminal and the terminal of voltage input terminal is 1000 V Do not apply a voltage exceeding 1000 V When the voltage across the voltage input terminals exceeds 600 V do not directly input the cur
51. current SA CJC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedure Select a display format to display the waveforms For the procedures see section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Check that Format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave X Y X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Wave Selecting the number of split windows 3 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the waveform menu 4 Press the Wave Format soft key to display the menu used to select the number of split windows 5 Press one of the keys from Single to Quad to select the number of windows Display g Format Wave Display Wave Display Fornat Single Dual Wave Wo Wave Format Single Interpolate Ay Graticule Triad Scale Value m ow Trace Label m o Quad M Trace Label ON Wave Setting K 4 Wave Mapping Wave Mapping IM 253710 01E 9 7 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 3 Splitting the Screen and Displaying the Waveforms Selecting th
52. nt holes are located on the top and bottom of the instrument In addition vent es for the cooling fan are located on the top To prevent internal overheating allow east 20 mm of space around the vent holes When connecting measurement wires and other various cables or when opening or clo sing the built in printer cover allow extra space for operation Ambient temperature and humidity Ambient temperature 5 to 40 C Ambient humidity 20 to 85 RH when the printer is not used 35 to 80 RH when the printer is used No condensation in either case Do not install the instrument in the following places Storage Location In direct sunlight or near heat sources Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases are present Near strong magnetic field sources Near high voltage equipment or power lines Where the level of mechanical vibration is high In an unstable place For the most accurate measurements use the instrument in the following environment Ambient temperature 23 3 C Ambient humidity 50 10 RH no condensation When using the instrument in a place where the ambient temperature is 5 to 20 C or 26 to 40 C add the temperature coefficient to the accuracy of the module as specified in chapter 17 When installing the instrument in a place where the ambient humidity is 30 or below take measures to prevent static electricity such as using an anti static mat Internal condensation may oc
53. 049nA 6 666nA 00005 W 0090900 VA 00000 var Error Error 50 00 HZ 0 00OMHZ Uspk2 9 7975 U U pkZ 7 7806 V I pkz 1 058mMA I pk2 0 895mA cEuz 1 905 celz Error FEUZ 1 256 FfIZ Error 22 Error Rs Error XsZ Error Rp2 482 521k xp2 Error Element and wiring method Elementi Element2 Urms l 5 2241 5 1418 Um Y 4 6657 4 5488 Udc Y 1 1 0399 1 0150 Uac V 1 5 1195 5 0407 Irms A 1 4 97312 0 000m Inn A 1 4 9727 0 000m Idc A 1 0 039330 0 04m Iac 1 4 97297 6 006m P W 1 0 094 0 00005 5 VA 1 25 980 0 00000 Q var 1 25 980 0 00000 A E 1 0 00361 Error e P 1 96 267 Error fU Hz 1 50 02 50 00 fI Hz 1 1 000k 0 00 m U pk y 1 9 8576 9 7975 U pk u 1 7 7754 7806 I pk A 1 7 16912 1 058 I pk A 1 7 27178 6 995m cfu E 1 1 887 1 965 CFI E 1 1 462 Error FfU 1 1 244 1 256 Feit 1 1 111 Error Zz 1 05046 Error Rs 1 3 79359m Error Elenent3 5 1577 4 5635 1 0259 5 0546 0 000m 0 000m 0 44m 6 006m 0 00005 0 00000 0 00000 Error Error 50 00 6 006m 9 8654 7 7859 9 881m 0 889m 1 913 Error 1 255 Error Error Error Elenent4 5 2681 4 7438 1 2703 5 1127 24 9324 24 9297 0 2221 24 9314 6 00001k 6 13135k 13135k 6 00006 89 996 50 04 1 000k 9 9788 7 6726 35 7969 36 2547 1 894 1 454 1 233 1 111 211 2980 0 0000 A 5 2241 4 6657 1 6399 5 1195 4 97312 4 97277 0 03930 4 97297 0 094 25 980 25 986 0 00361 30 207 1
54. 16 10 IM 253710 01E Chapter 17 Specifications 17 1 Input Item Specification Input type Plug in input Number of slots 4 Maximum record length 100 k word CH 1 M word CH option 4 M word CH option 17 2 Display Item Specification Display 6 4 color TFT LCD monitor Display resolution of entire 640 H x 480 V dots screen Display resolution 501 H x 432 V dots waveform display Display update rate Depends on the observation time and record length Approx 2 s when the observation time is 100 ms record length is 100 k word number of channels is eight numerical computation is ON and waveform computation is OFF in normal measurement mode Approx 2 s when the observation time is 100 ms record length is 100 k word number of channels is eight numerical computation is ON and waveform computation is OFF in harmonic measurement mode In some cases up to 0 02 of the total number of pixels of the LCD can be defective 17 3 Time Axis Item Specification Observation time Normal measurement mode 10 us to 1 ks 1 2 4 and their ten fold multiples Harmonic measurement mode Approx 0 5 to 1 6 s when the record length is 100 k word Approx 4 9 to 16 3 s when the record length is 1 M word Approx 19 5 to 65 1 s when the record length is 4 M word Time axis accuracy 0 005 External clock input connector type BNC connector EXT CLK IN Frequency range 1
55. 24 000kw 40 000kw 60 000kw 120 00 kW f 240 00 kw 400 00 kw 6 digits 6 00000 kW 12 0000 kW 24 0000 kW 40 0000 kw 60 0000 kw 120 000 kw 240 000 kw 400 000 kw 5 12 IM 253710 01E 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Wiring Method 3P4w anda Displayed Voltage Range Vpk Apk digits 30 60 120 200 300 600 1200 2000 5 digits 9 0000W 18 000W 36 000W 60 000Ww 90 000w 180 00w 360 00W 600 00 W on 6 digits 9 00000W 18 0000 w 36 0000 w 60 o0o00w 90 0000w 180 000w 360 000 W 600 000 W 5 digits 18 000 W 36 000 W 72 000 W 120 00 W 180 00 W 360 00 W 720 00 W 1 2000 kW me 6 digits 18 0000 W 36 0000 W 72 0000 W 120 000 W 180 000 W 360 000 W 720 000 W 1 20000 kw 5 digits 36 000 W 72 000 W 144 00 W 240 00 W 360 00 W 720 00 W 1 4400 kw 2 4000 kW 0 4 6 digits 36 0000 W 72 0000 W 144 000 W 240 000 W 360 000 W 720 000 W 1 44000 kW 2 40000 kW 5 digits 90 000w 180 00w 360 00w 6oo oow g900 0o0w 1 8000kw 3 6000kW 6 0000 kw 1 6 digits 90 0000w 180 000w 360 000 w 600 000 w 900 000 w 1 80000 kw 3 60000 kw 6 00000 kw 5 digits 180 00W 360 00W 720 00W 1200 0W 1 8000kw 3 6000kw 7 2000kw 12 000 kw 5 6 digits 180 000W 360 000 W 720 000 W 1200 00 W 1 80000 kW 3 60000 kW 7 20000 kW 12 0000 kw 5 digits 360 00w 720 00w 1 4400kw 2 4000kw 3 6000kw 7 2000kw 14 400kWw 24 000 kW I 6 digits 360 000 W 720 000 W 1 4400
56. 8 Use the keyboard to enter a comment For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Copy K Copy to centro 4 Format ESC P Color ON Comment ie Printing 9 Display the screen that you wish to print 10 Press the START STOP key to stop the data acquisition Check that the START STOP indicator is OFF 11 Press the COPY key to print the screen image OUUOUUU0 Canceling the printing operation 12 Press the Abort soft key in the Copy setting menu Copy K Copy to Centro 4 Format ESC P Color DFF ON Comment ian IM 253710 01E 13 9 ejyeq afew use19S Bulyyndjno g 13 3 Printing to an External Centronics Printer Explanation You can send the screen image data to an external printer via the Centronics interface CAUTION Use a 25 pin D Sub cable for connecting the external printer and this instrument If the cable is not connected properly damage to this instrument and to other connected devices may result Centronics interface specifications Pin No Signal Pin No Signal 1 STROBE 10 ACK acknowledge 2 DATAO Print data bit 0 11 BUSY 3 DATA1 Print data bit 1 12 PE Paper end 4 DATA2 Print data bit 2 13 SLCT select 5 DATAS Print data bit 3 14 AFDXT auto feed transfer 6 DATA4 Print data bit 4 15 Error Printer error 7 DATAS Print data bit 5 16 INIT initializing of printer 8 DA
57. 902 System RAM failure Maintenance service is required 903 System ROM failure Maintenance service is required 904 System RAM failure Maintenance service is required 905 System failure Install the input modules correctly 3 3 906 Fan stopped Power off immediately Maintenance service is required 907 Backup battery is flat Maintenance service is required to replace the backup battery 908 Internal temperature is too high Power off immediately Maintenance service is required 909 Illegal SUM value Maintenance service is required 910 RAM read write error Maintenance service is required 911 Memory bus error Maintenance service is required 912 Fatal error in Communication driver Maintenance service is required SE 914 Time out occurs in Communications 915 EEPROM SUM error EEPROM may be damaged Maintenance service is required 917 No module installed Install the module 3 3 919 Module installation condition and The instrument is initialized setup parameters do not match 920 SUM error of NULL value The Null value is reset to 0 a Note If the corrective action indicates maintenance service try initializing the instrument It may recover from the error 16 4 IM 253710 01E 16 3 Performing a Self test Procedure CONFIGURATION MENU WUO0000 fens ora on e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To ex
58. C Each Elenent 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Standard 26A Shunt Standard Standard U Range 2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ Terminal 5A pen 5A pen ZOA 5A penj I Range 1000nUpk_ __1066mUpk_ _1e00nUpk_ Sensor Ratio nv AiL 10 0000 10 0000 10 0000 Line K Pouer Module CALLI Filter wF or or Zero Cross Filter OFF OFF OFF Scaling DFF __ON_ FF oN pFF __on_ a gt Pt Ratio CI 1 0000 e 1 0000 Ct Ratio C 1 0090 1 0000 1 9090 Scaling Factor 1 0000 1 0000 C 1 0000 JUON 5 22 IM 253710 01E 5 5 Setting the Scaling Function when using an External PT or CT Setting the CT ratio 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the CT Ratio of element 1 4 Press the SELECT key to display the CT ratio setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the CT ratio For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box The CT Ratio of all other modules that are displayed are set to the same CT ratio Power Module All Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 Standard 2 A Shunt Standard Standard U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk Term
59. Csa h c iv s IM 253710 01E 2 9 2 3 Screens Waveform Display Normal waveform displ Uover m m m CHB S Upk lover ay Displays the last channel key that was pressed the waveform color and the measurement range of that channel The color changes from green to red when the input signal exceeds the approx 125 level of the specified measurement range The first and second lines correspond to voltage and current respectively The input condition of each element Element 1 2 3 and 4 is indicated in order from the left However if the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot and the revolution sensor signal is a pulse signal input the fourth indicator from the left on the top row remains green m When the observation time is changed while the data acquisition operation is stopped the new observation time and sampling rate are displayed here For the normal measurement mode only The observation time and sampling rate for data that are displayed on the screen For the normal measurement mode only SMSS SMS s ans ans Tisplay__ HZ 2000A Upper limits an 10 00 iA i 2 000 iA a Lower limits Rt Hain 100000 gt d Fornat Record length Wave Waveform label Menu g Right end time axis Applicable to products with firmware version 2 01 or later Wave Setting 100 oes 1999 01
60. DELTAIDC Alac DELTAIAC Torque TORQUE Speed SPEED Slip SLIP Sync SYNC nmA MAETA nmB MBETA A symbol representing the element to which the measured signal is to be applied is entered in parentheses excluding delta functions DELTAURM to DELTAIAC Elements 1 2 3 4 ZA and B are represented by the symbols E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 and E6 respectively One symbol from E1 to E6 can be used except for the following computation symbols One symbol from E1 to E4 can be entered in the parentheses for FU to FFI functions No symbols need to be entered in the parentheses for ETA DIVETA TORQUE SPEED SLIP SYNC MAETA and MBETA The element symbol inside the parentheses of delta computation DELTAURM to DELTAIAC does not represent the element to which the measured signal is to be applied but rather the location at which to store or display the results of the delta computation A1 A2 A3 and A4 are represented by symbols E1 E2 E3 and E4 respectively You can specify one symbol from E1 to E4 within the definition of the delta computation For details regarding delta computations see section 10 2 The measurement functions n efficiency 1 and 1 efficiency 2 are displayed as percentages as indicated by the equations given in Appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions However measurement functions ETA and DIVETA described in this section ar
61. Floppy disk Saving Loading from a SCSI Device For procedures see chapter 12 On instruments with the SCSI option suffix code C7 various data can be saved or loaded from an external SCSI device in the same manner described above for the floppy disk This is useful when handling large amounts of data Zip disk hard disk drive MO disk PD disk etc SCSI device Initialization For procedures see section 4 2 The various setup parameters configured using operation keys and soft keys can be initialized to their factory default values For details regarding the initial settings see Appendix 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Outputting Screen Image Data For procedures see chapter 13 Screen image data can be output to various recording media such as the built in printer an external printer that support Centronics a floppy disk or a SCSI device Built in printer option Centronics printer 1 42 IM 253710 01E 1 9 Saving Loading the Data and Other Useful Functions a Selecting the Message Language For procedures see section 14 2 The language for the error and help messages that are displayed during operation can be selected The choices are English and Japanese suoljun Setting the Brightness of the LCD monitor For procedures see section 14 2 The brightness of the LCD monitor
62. Function 4 g User Def ined Expression Next 12 Turn the jog shuttle to select the user defined function from Function1 to UOOU0UUE IM 253710 01E suonendwog jeonawny g 10 3 Setting the User Defined Function Explanation Setting the unit 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Unit 7 Press the SELECT key A keyboard appears 8 Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Setting the equation 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select Expression 10 Press the SELECT key A keyboard appears 11 Use the keyboard to set the equation For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings User Defined Function 1 4 User Defined Function 1 4 Function 1 L Function 1 OFF wmit Ca Expression Expression URMS CET TRMS CE1 Function 2 a Function 2 PFF _ON_ unit LH Expression Expression Function 3 J Function 3 DFF _ON_ Unit CJ Expression Expression Function 4 Function 4 DFF ON Unit LW Expression Expression An equation can be created by combining the measurement function symbols Using the numerical values of the measurement functions the numerical data of the new equation can be determined Turning ON OFF the user defined function Select whether or not to perform t
63. IM 253710 01E 12 15 eea y Buipeo7 pue Burnes G 12 6 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Procedure CONFIGURATION O TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy mui ca MENU i CENS FILTER FILTER T START STOP 1 4 4 ABORT oogun cH1 cH3 cn5 cH7 vorace CO JCC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key pey Press the FILE key to display the File setting menu 2 Press the File Item soft key to display the File Item setting menu 3 Press the Wave soft key to select waveform data File W File Item Setup Nuner ic Load Load Save Save Utility Utility JOUOOUODU JUUUUUUU 12 16 IM 253710 01E 12 6 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Saving the Waveform Data Selecting the data type 4 Press the Data Type soft key to display the data type selection menu 5 Press one of the keys from Binary to Float to select the data type Only the data that are saved in Binary can be loaded as described later Fie File Item Wave Tata Type l File W File Item Wave 4 Data Type Binary Load Save Ut ae _ Y Utility WJUUUUUUU
64. IM 253710 01E 17 17 as Ey suoljeoyi9eds aN 17 15 Power Measurement Module 253751 Item Specification Power accuracy Conditions Within 3 months after calibration Standard operating conditions Power factor 1 Input signal Sine wave Common mode voltage 0 V Input signal is 5 cycles or less and there are at least 10 k words of sampled data within the observation time DC accuracy is NULL function ON and line filter ON fis the frequency Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 0 1 Hz lt f lt 10Hz 0 2 of reading 0 05 of range 10 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 2 of reading 0 025 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 025 of range 1 kHz lt f lt 10 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 04 of range 10 kHz lt f lt 50 kHz 0 2 of reading 0 05 of range 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 0 6 of reading 0 1 of range 100 kHz lt f lt 200 kHz 1 5 of reading 0 15 of range 200 kHz lt f lt 400 kHz 1 5 of reading 0 15 of range 400 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz wes ee eee eR A fata a pe eR A 0 1 0 009 x f of reading 0 15 of range 500 kHz lt f lt 1 MHz 0 1 0 009 x f of reading 1 5 of range One year accuracy The unit of f in the equation for the reading error is KHz reading error
65. Lower limits T22 i Right end time axis Applicable to products with Left end time axis firmware version 2 01 or later 100 aons IM 253710 01E 9 15 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 7 Setting a Label Name for the Waveform TRIG D CONFIGURATION SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE SHIFT oer va a MENU ELEMENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER 7 START STOP 1 2 ala ABORT Jvoutace ZN E iee cacacoco fume A e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key UOUUULE Procedure Setting the label name 1 Press the desired channel key from CH1 to CH8 The channel setting menu is displayed 2 Press the Label soft key A keyboard appears 3 Use the keyboard to enter the label name For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings CH1 Wave Display m o M U Range 2000Upk 9 16 IM 253710 01E 9 7 Setting a Label Name for the Waveform Explanation Select a display format to display the waveforms For the procedures see section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display 4 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 5 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Check that Format is set to
66. Next 172 10 2 IM 253710 01E 10 1 Setting the Measurement Computation Period Re computing Measure Mode FF ON Setting the period with the cursors This method can be used to set the period in the normal measurement and harmonic measurement modes For the normal measurement mode carry out steps 3 to 12 For the harmonic measurement mode carry out steps 7 and 8 Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the Period soft key to display the period setting menu Press the Cursor soft key to select cursor setting oa rw Setting the start point of the measurement computation period For normal measurement and harmonic measurement modes 7 Press the Start Pos End Pos soft key and set the jog shuttle control to Start Pos For harmonic measurement mode only the Start Pos soft key is available 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start position on the waveform Set the end position of the measurement computation period For normal measurement mode only 9 Press the Start Pos End Pos soft key to set the jog shuttle control to End Pos 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end position on the waveform Setting the start and end points of the measurement computation period simultaneously For normal measurement mode only 11 Press the Start Pos End Pos soft key to set the jog shuttle control to
67. Sco Space 2012315648 byte File Nane Size Date Attribute a File Name 1999 01 01 00 52 R W 1999 01 13 09 54 RW Load Save Utility JOOUUUUL JUUUUUUU Save Exec Setting the file name and comment 10 Press the File Name soft key to display the file name setting dialog box 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select Auto Naming 12 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select File Name 14 Press the SELECT key A keyboard appears 15 Use the keyboard to enter the file name For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 16 Similarly enter the Comment 17 Press the ESC key to close the file name setting dialog box File Nane uto Naming File Name Comment Normal Property Filter Iten All Save Exec JUUUUUUE IM 253710 01E 12 11 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 5 Saving and Loading Setup Parameters Saving the file 18 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the saving operation 19 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the save operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec File Nane SET1 Property Filter Iten All Save
68. The output of the zero crossing detector of the trigger source is used to detect the trigger condition When the zero crossing filter is set the trigger becomes less susceptive to harmonic noise and unexpected triggers are prevented from occurring Because the trigger occurs when the input signal crosses the center level of the amplitude of the trigger source a hysteresis of approx 3 5 of the measurement range exists and the display is updated the trigger level setting is void HF normal mode The method in which the trigger is activated is the same as in the HF auto mode The behavior with respect to the timeout period is the same as in the normal mode 1 20 IM 253710 01E 1 4 Trigger a Trigger Position For procedures see section 7 5 The trigger position is used to set which section of the sampled data in the acquisition memory to display on the screen When the trigger delay described in the next section is set to 0 s the trigger point and trigger position match In this case if you wish to display the sampled data before the trigger point you would move the trigger position from the left end of the screen to the right and then perform data acquisition For example if the trigger position is moved to the horizontal center of the screen 50 then the area to the left of the trigger position will be displaying data that existed before the trigger point The section before the trigger position is called the pre trigger se
69. When the zoom factor is set to 2 600 Vpk 300 Vpk Zero input lines p 4 600 Vpk 300 Vpk Zooming horizontally The selected waveforms can be expanded horizontally using two types of zoom factors This function is useful when the observation time is long and you wish to observe a section of the waveform in detail Zoom factor When the display record length is larger than the number of displayable points the instrument performs P P compression for each time segment This function can be used to lower the P P compression rate so that each sampled data point in the acquisition memory can be observed The maximum zoom factor that can be selected depends on the display record length and observation time For example the maximum zoom factor is 10 000 times when the observation time is 20 s and the display record length is 100 k words It is 100 000 times when the observation time is 20 s and the display record length is 1 M word or 4 M words When the display record length is less than the number of displayed points or when there are less than 500 points of sampled data on the time axis such as when using a high zoom factor the display points can be interpolated as explained in an earlier section Types of zoom displays The normal waveform that is not zoomed Main waveform and the zoomed waveform Z1 and Z2 wavefo
70. cursor zoom FILE MISC HELP LOCA SHIFT 1 z 5 S 1 2 z 3 zIs ai COPY NULL CAL MENU FILTER FILTER y SINGLE P SINGLE START STOP ABORT T I e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key I 5 a 2 E E f FILTER FILTER Ooue Procedure Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu 2 Press the Motor Module soft key to display the motor module setting dialog box On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 only the Power Module soft key appears and you cannot set the motor module In addition if the motor module is not installed in the element number 4 slot the Motor Module menu does not appear Setting the scaling factor used to transform the revolution sensor signal 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Scaling under Speed Ch7 4 Press the SELECT key to display the scaling factor setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the scaling factor For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Motor Module Power Module Each Speed Ch TorquetCh8 Pm Range Seupk__ SOUpk__ Sense Type fina Tog Puse Freq Range _2k Z0oKHz_ Line Filter OFF Zero Cro
71. only If the harmonic section is set to ORT it represents Total if it is set to O zero it represents DC Operators The following operators can be used to create the equation Operator Example of use Description URMS E1 URMS E2 Basic arithmetic of the measurement functions U E1 OR1 U E2 0R1 ABS ABS UMN E1 UMN E2 Absolute value of the measurement function ABS P E1 ORT P E2 ORT SQR SQR IDC E1 Square of the measurement function SQR I E1 OR0 SQRT SQRT ABS IDC E1 Square root of the measurement function SQRT ABS I E1 OR3 LOG LOG UDC E1 Natural log of the measurement function LOG U E1 OR25 LOG10 LOG10 UDC E1 Common log of the measurement function LOG10 U E1 OR25 EXP EXP UAC E1 Exponent of the measurement function EXP U E1 0R12 NEG NEG URMS E1 Negation the measurement function NEG U E1 0R12 Number and type of characters that can be used in the equation Number of characters 50 characters or less Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or a space Note An equation F1 to F4 cannot be placed inside another equation F1 to F4 When the measurement computation range or the equation is changed do a re computation For information pertaining to changing the measurement computation range and re computation see section 10 1 If an operand in the equation is undetermined the computation result displays
72. ten All q Utility C Load Exec Se Selecting the source medium and directory 6 The procedures are the same as Selecting the source medium and Selecting the source directory in section 12 5 Selecting the file to be loaded 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the file Loading the file 8 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path The name of the load Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the loading operation 9 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec File List L Load Menu Path Foo Space 861184 byte File Name Size Date Attribute ry FD 1 WAVEGOS WVF 413593 1999 03 18 17 55 RW Property Filter Kter A11 Load Exec Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and Viewing the properties in section 12 5 DJUUUUUUE IM 253710 01E 12 19 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 6 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Explanation CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the mark is blinking It can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the data
73. the motor For torque meters it is the DC voltage analog signal that is proportional to the torque of the motor Selecting the revolution sensor signal type Select from the following list of choices Analog Select this when the revolution sensor signal type is a DC voltage analog signal Pulse Select this when the revolution sensor signal type is a pulse signal Selecting the input range of the revolution sensor signal Two types of range settings are available fixed range and auto range Fixed range When the revolution sensor signal type is Analog Select from the following input ranges 50Vpk 20Vpk 10Vpk 5Vpk 2Vpk and 1Vpk When the revolution sensor signal type is Pulse Fixed to 5Vpk Auto range Select Auto for the input range setting to enable auto range The range changes automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The switching conditions and precautions are the same as the descriptions given in section 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input The different ranges used in the auto mode are the same as those available for fixed range 15 6 IM 253710 01E 15 2 Setting the Input Range of Revolution Sensor and Torque Meter Signals Selecting the frequency input range of the revolution sensor signal The selection made here takes effect when the revolution sensor signal type is set to Pulse Two types of range settings are available fixed range and auto range F
74. 0 0003 0 018 32 0 0010 0 021 Scroll E Itif 4999 054 15 0 0018 0 035 15 0 0432 0 913 0 424 33 0 0008 0 016 J3 60 0006 0 011 0 424 16 0 0014 0 029 16 0 0470 0 992 het 0 224 35 0 0010 0 019 36 0 9010 6 028 het 0 224 17 0 0009 0 018 17 0 0750 1 585 3 0 0010 0 020 3 0 0007 0 014 Page Doun 18 0 0013 0 026 18 0 10277 2 168 Page Doun u 5 0383 U 39 0 0005 0 010 40 0 0007 0 014 Scrott Exec uz 5 0383 U 19 0 0015 0 038 19 0 1741 3 678 Scrott Exec 12 0 0011 A 41 0 0002 0 004 42 0 0004 0 007 12 0 0011 A 20 0 0012 0 023 20 4 7228 99 746 P2 0 000 U 43 0 0006 0 011 44 0 0005 0 010 P2 0 000 U 21 0 000 0 013 21 0 1928 4 072 s2 0 000 UA 45 0 0004 0 009 46 0 0007 0 014 C s2 0 000 UA 22 0 0912 0 023 2 0 0755 1 594 C When List is selected 8 Turn the jog shuttle to change the harmonic order that is displayed in the Order section of the Display setting menu The measurement functions U I P S Q 0 and so on for that order are displayed g Format Numeric Elementi Element2 Element3 Elenent4 EA XB U J 4 0523 4 0364 4 0490 4 0520 4 0523 4 0364 1 0 00074 0 005m 6 004m 6 0042 0 00074 0 005m EW 1 0 001 8 06662 0 00002 6 60602k 0 001 6 66662 A l 0 003 9 00002 0 00002 0 00002k 0 003 0 00002 1 0 003 0 00000 0 00000 0 00001k 0 003 0 00000 E 1 0 33571 6 99896 6 99964 0 90485 0 33571 0 99896 1 109 616 2 620 2A ISLE sssssess5 esse erouwe F E 5 OUUSUBUL 8 14 IM 253710 01E 8 4 Displaying Harmonic
75. 0 8 Approx 3 1 to 8 1 Approx 12 2 to 32 6 640 1280 fx 128 Approx 0 3 to 0 8 Approx 3 1 to 8 1 Approx 12 2 to 32 6 1280 2560 fx64 Approx 0 3 to 0 7 Approx 3 1 to 7 1 Approx 12 2 to 28 4 2560 6400 fx32 Approx 0 2 to 0 7 Approx 2 4 to 7 1 Approx 9 8 to 28 4 Note The items of the fundamental frequency of the PLL source have hysteresis band widths IM 253710 01E App 3 Ea xipueddy Appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Measurement Functions in the Normal Measurement Mode Measurement Functions in the Normal Measurement Mode Determination Equation True rms value Urms Rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Umn Simple average Udc AC component Uac Maximum U pk Minimum U pk Voltage U V Urms Umn 1 T 1 2 ue dt Udc Uac af Urms Udc U pk U pk T 2V2 Maximum Minimum z 1j Ju t dt T 1 u t dt T Io Lf uy True rms value Irms Rectified mean value calibrated to the rms Current value Imn 1 A Simple average Idc AC component lac Maximum l pk Minimum I pk Imn Idc l pk l pk Irms lac m 1 z 1 aye af 2 2 i t dt Irms Ide bake 24 2 T T T i t at 1 i t dt Maximum Minimum 0 0 fU FreqU fl Freq Hz The voltage frequency fU and current frequency fl are measured using zero crossing detection Current crest factor Cf
76. 0 9595 A3 0 36311 0 97149 0 97146 pati 20 74 zti 16 37 31 21 13 72 2i 13 72 By moving the vectors U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 so that the starting points of vectors are all at the origin the phase relationship can be observed in the same fashion as the three phase four wire method For the relationship between the positions of the vectors after moving them see Vector Display of Harmonics in section 1 6 Waveform Display The PZ4000 does not provide a function for moving the vectors eThe phase difference between the line voltages can be determined from the phase difference measurement functions 0U1 U2 and 6U1 U3 12 1 U1 U2 This is the measurement function 12 1 U1 U2 U2 U3 dU1 U3 pU1 U2 180 U3 U1 U1 U3 U1 U2 When not displaying numerical data and when the vector size is displayed zoomed applicable to products with firmware version 2 01 or later See Vector display of harmonics in section 2 3 Screens 9 26 IM 253710 01E 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data For a functional description see section 1 6 This section applies when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement Keys CONFIGURATION TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ pisPLAY MATH cursor zoom a REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy nut cau MENU CEMS L FILTER F FILTER
77. 01 00 25 29 Left end time axis Zoom display Specified date and time Z1 zoom box Z2 zoom box J i lt Main waveform Z1 waveform gt lt Z2 waveform X Y waveform display applicable to products with firmware version 2 01 or later Display example when the normal waveform T Y waveform and X Y waveform are displayed The Y axis waveform trace simultaneously oH ZDT Ke Maint 100000 2 400 d ns The trace of the waveform L chi HZ assigned to the X axis The value at the top edge of the Y axis The value at the bottom edge of the Y axis iaio A 1 0 a The value at the right edge A X axis of the X axis The value at the left edge of the X axis 20 00 V 2 10 IM 253710 01E 2 3 Screens Vector display of harmonics e When displaying numerical data the size of the signal and the phase difference between signals For a 3P4W three phase four wire wiring system Wiring A 3P4U 7 1226 V Wiring B 1P2U 7 04063 A PLL Src CH 49 3779 W Frequency 4 0 1476 VA pui z bf i 8 7523 var U1 U3 ul 11 eui l2 U1 13 ud x J669 V TB R 0263 A px Se F 59 042 W 3 1 61 536 UA 31 17 344 var BU 0 9595 p 74e pD 16 37 e When not displaying numerical data For a 3P4W three phase four wire wiring system For a 3V3A three voltage three current wiring system
78. 0168 Uthd 01D4 Uthd 0240 Uthd 0028 Ithd 0094 Ithd 0100 Ithd 016C _ Ithd 01D8 Ithd 0244 Ithd 002C Pthd 0098 Pthd 0104 Pthd 0170 Pthd 01DC Pthd 0248 Pthd 0030 Uthf 009C Uthf 0108 Uthf 0174 Uthf 01E0 Uthf 024C Uthf 0034 Ithf OOAO Ithf 010C _ Ithf 0178 Ithf 01E4 Ithf 0250 Ithf 0038 Utif 00A4 Utif 0110 Utif 017C Utif 01E8 Utif 0254 Utif 003C Itif 00A8 Itif 0114 Itif 0180 Itif 01EC Itif 0258 lItif 0040 hvf OOAC hvf 0118 hvf 0184 hvf O1FO hvf 025C hvf 0044 hcf 00BO hcf 011C hcf 0188 hcf 01F4 hcf 0260 hcf 0048 NAN 00B4 NAN 0120 NAN 018C NAN 01F8 oU1 U2 0264 U1 U2 004C NAN 00B8 NAN 0124 NAN 0190 NAN 01FC U1 U3 0268 U1 U3 0050 NAN OOBC NAN 0128 NAN 0194 NAN 0200 U1 I1 026C oU1 I1 0054 NAN 00CO NAN 012C NAN 0198 NAN 0204 oU1 l2 0270 U1 l2 0058 NAN 00C4 NAN 0130 NAN 019C NAN 0208 oU1 I3 0274 U1 I3 005C F1 00C8 F1 0134 F1 01A0 F1 020C F1 0278 F1 0060 F2 00CC F2 0138 F2 01A4 F2 0210 F2 027C F2 0064 F3 00D0 F3 013C F3 01A8 F3 0214 F3 0280 F3 0068 F4 00D4 F4 0140 F4 01AC F4 0218 F4 0284 F4 Note This format is fixed regardless of the number of modules that are installed or the elements that are specified to be saved 162 data points 27 functions x 6 elements are saved even when there is one module installed The same data are saved for F1 to F4 on all elements regardless of whether or not the modules are installed In places where measurement functions are not computed or are NAN 0x7FC00000 is saved 0x7F800000 and OxFF800000 are saved when the da
79. 03 17 39 MakeDir Format Filter Item Aly Attribute Selecting the medium directory 5 The procedures are the same as Selecting the source medium and Selecting the source directory in section 12 5 Changing the file attribute 6 The procedures are the same as Changing the file attribute in section 12 8 Changing the directory file name 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a directory or a file 8 Press the File Name soft key A keyboard appears The name of the directory file is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard 9 Use the keyboard to enter the directory file name For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings File List Renane Path SCONPZ M Function Space 2012315648 byte File Name Size Tate Attributi Rename a File Nane WAVEGOO WUF m INSERT IZ GEEECPESPRPE eea B CIO ELF GILL TKILIN NUMEROGG CSU ER NTO ORS Tru KET Property WAYEGGO HDR eer VE LEE ELEUbI ef WAVEOOO UUF Filter hd Iten Aly Attribute UUOUUUGU Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and Viewing the properties in section 12 5 12 38 IM 253710 01E 12 10 Changing the Di
80. 0390 NAN 0038 fl 00E4 FI 0190 fl 023C fl 02E8 NAN 0394 NAN 003C U pk 00E8 U pk 0194 U pk 0240 U pk 02EC NAN 0398 NAN 0040 U pk OOEC U pk 0198 U pk 0244 U pk 02FO NAN 039C NAN 0044 l pk OOFO l pk 019C l pk 0248 l pk 02F4 NAN 03A0 NAN 0048 l Pk OOF4 l Pk 01A0 l Pk 024C _ l Pk 02F8 NAN 03A4 NAN 004C CfU OOF8 CfU 01A4 CfU 0250 CfU 02FC NAN 03A8 NAN 0050 Cfl OOFC Cfl 01A8 Cfl 0254 Cfl 0300 NAN O3AC NAN 0054 FfU 0100 FfU 01AC FfU 0258 FfU 0304 NAN 03BO NAN 0058 Ffl 0104 Ffl 01BO Ffl 025C Ffl 0308 NAN 03B4 NAN 005C Z 0108 Z 01B4 Z 0260 Z 030C Z 03B8 Z 0060 Rs 010C Rs 01B8 Rs 0264 Rs 0310 Rs 03BC Rs 0064 Xs 0110 Xs 01BC Xs 0268 Xs 0314 Xs 03CO Xs 0068 Rp 0114 Rp 01CO Rp 026C Rp 0318 Rp 03C4 Rp 006C Xp 0118 Xp 01C4 Xp 0270 Xp 031C Xp 03C8 Xp 0070 Pc 011C Pc 01C8 Pc 0274 Pc 0320 Pc 03CC Pc 0074 n 0120 n 01CC n 0278 n 0324 n 03D0 n 0078 1 0124 1M 01D0 1M 027C 1M 0328 1 M 03D4 1M 007C F1 0128 F1 01D4 F1 0280 F1 032C F1 03D8 F1 0080 F2 012C F2 01D8 F2 0284 F2 0330 F2 O3DC F2 0084 F3 0130 F3 01DC F3 0288 F3 0334 F3 03E0 F3 0088 F4 0134 F4 01E0 F4 028C F4 0338 F4 03E4 F4 008C AUrs 0138 AUrs 01E4 AUrs 0290 AUrs 033C Speed 03E8 Speed 0090 Aumn 013C Aumn 01E8 Aumn 0294 Aumn 0340 Torque 03EC Torque 0094 AUdc 0140 AUdc 01EC AUdc 0298 AUdc 0344 Sync 03F0 Sync 0098 AUac 0144 AUac 01FO AUac 029C AUac 0348 Slip 03F4 Slip 009C Alrms 0148 Alrms 01F4 Alrms 02A0 Alrms 034C Pm 03F8 Pm 00A0 Almn 014C Almn 01F8 Almn 02A4 Almn 0350 nmA O3FC nmA 00A4 Aldc 0150 Aldc O1FC Aldc 02A
81. 05046 3 79359m XB 5 1418 4 5488 1 0150 5 0407 0 000m 0 000m 0 04m 6 006m 0 00005 0 00000 0 000090 Error Error Error Error eed IM 253710 01E 2 7 sled JO s sn pue s wey 2 3 Screens Numerical Display during the Harmonic Measurement Mode 8 items display Displays the last channel key that was pressed the waveform color and the measurement range of that channel The color changes from green to red when the input signal exceeds the approx 125 level of the specified measurement range The first and second lines correspond to voltage and current respectively The input condition of each element Element 1 2 3 and 4 is indicated in order from the left However if the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot and the revolution sensor signal is a pulse signal input the fourth indicator from the left on the top row remains green Yo al WEEDS Ul 1 1377V 9 o N Il 1 96106 A gt S P1 0 149 W so 2 Ysi 0 260 VA t vienu Z Ol 0 213 var e 2 ULM 0 8970 V gt uW 1 15186 A ae P 1d 0 191 W Specified date and time 16 items display uoloun pu waInseaN ut 1 PL 31 q ui a It a Pi a 1 1377 V w 1 033 VA 1 96106A b 1015 var 0 149W B 0 18486 0 260VA 4 100 653 0 213 var 2 260 0 8970 V w 89 524 1 15186 A w 0 000mHz 0 191 W w 0 000mHz 2 8 IM 253710 01E 2 3 Screens
82. 11 sled JO s sn pue soweN 2 3 Screens Bar graph display of harmonic data Bar Graph Display of Harmonic Data Bar Ut 100 050 Clea Scales TO Top The measured values of F marker and x for bar graph 1 Marker AEE vA A Yi 4 126 U Ex 0 317 V F 3 3 863 V IU I o mai Marker x lt e el The measured values of P and x for bar graph 2 is 90 53 A FL FPA erm ite Cursor measurement display the marker position Applicable to products with firmware version 2 01 or later Marker and x indicate that they are at the 1st order and 13th order positions respectively For Markers For H Cursors Cursor 1 Curson 2 9725 6mU 9725 6nU 0 O00kU Xe 16 046ns Xx 36 606ns AX 19 954ms 174X 50 116 HZ lcs 50 00 IeHI 16 37 4 Cursor 1 9741 1mU 2172 2mU 11 913 V f Measured values Measured values For V Cursors For H amp V Cursors CAL y T ji EHT 97y T T lt Cursor 1 lt Cursor 2 lt Cursor 3 lt Cursor 4 i I cH 60 004 H leu 16 37 4 Cursor 1 5741 imy 2172 2mU 14 913 V xi t 100ms XZ 30 160ms ax 26 oG0ms 1aK 50 000 Hz Measured values 2 12 IM 253710 01E 2 3 Screens Simultaneous Displays of Numerical Data and Waveforms Simultaneous Displays of Numerical Data and Bar Graphs Urns1 Umi Udci Uaci 4 6156 V 4 2
83. 1366n y Bunjes 7 2 Selecting the Trigger Source Explanation Selecting the trigger source Select the signal that is used for triggering trigger source Select from the following choices CH1 to CH8 The trigger source is set to the voltage or current of the element that has a measurement module installed The numbers of the channels that do not have measurement modules installed are not displayed Ext The trigger source is set to the signal that is applied to the external trigger input connector Edge trigger see section 7 3 is the only trigger type that is valid The trigger level setting see section 7 3 is void When the trigger source is set to Ext Apply a signal to the external clock input connector EXT TRIG IN on the rear panel that meets the following specifications EXT TRIG IN Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Input level CMOS Minimum pulse width 1 us Trigger delay time Within 1 us 1 sample period AN CAUTION Applying a signal to the external trigger input connector EXT TRIG IN that is outside the 0 to 5 V range may damage the instrument Circuit diagram and timing chart of the external trigger input 5 V 100 Q External trigger signal V Minimum pulse width EXT TRIG IN when the slope is 1 Trigger delay time M___ gt A Internal trigger 7 4 IM 253710 01E 7 2 Selecting the Tr
84. 2 and 3 are combined into a 1P3W system Element 4 is handled as 1P2W It does not affect XA and B 1P2W 3P3W XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 XB Displays the numerical data when elements 2 and 3 are combined into a 3P3W system Element 4 is handled as 1P2W It does not affect ZA and B 1P2W 3V3A XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 XB Displays the numerical data when elements 2 3 and 4 are combined into a 3V3A system 1P2W 3P4W XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 XB Displays the numerical data when elements 2 3 and 4 are combined into a 3P4W system 1P3W 1P2W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 1P3W system XB Displays the numerical data of element 3 Element 4 is handled as 1P2W It does not affect XA and B 1P3W 1P3W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 1P3W system XB Displays the numerical data when elements 3 and 4 are combined into a 1P3W system 1P3W 3P3W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 1P3W system 2B Displays the numerical data when elements 3 and 4 are combined into a 3P3W system 3P3W 1P2W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 3P3W system XB Displays the numerical data of element 3 Element 4 is handled as 1P2W It
85. 4 Elements 3 and 4 are handled as single phase two wire systems 1P3W 1P3W 1 and 2 3 and 4 1P3W 3P3W 1 and 2 3 and 4 3P3W 1P2W 1 and 2 3 4 Elements 3 and 4 are handled as single phase two wire systems 3P3W 1P3W 1 and 2 3 and 4 3P3W 3P3W 1 and 2 3 and 4 3V3A 1P2W 1 2 and 3 4 3P4W 1P2W 1 2 and 3 4 1P2W_ single phase two wire system 1P3W_ single phase three wire system 3P3W_ three phase three wire system 3V3A _ three voltage three current system 3P4W three phase four wire system 3 12 IM 253710 01E 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement Note __ Check that the power measurement modules are installed in order starting from the element number 1 slot If you leave the slots that have smaller element numbers empty measurements will not be made properly For example do not install a power measurement module into the element number 2 slot and leave the element number 1 slot empty Do not install power measurement modules into element number 1 and 3 slots and leave the element number 2 slot empty For the procedures on installing the modules see section 3 3 Installing the Input Module When the sensor input module is installed into the element number 4 slot only up to three power measurement modules can be installed In this case you cannot select a wiring method that uses four power measurement modules After wiring the wiring method must be selec
86. 60 0000W 120 000W 240 000W 400 000W 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 40000 kw 4 00000 kw 5 digits 120 00W 240 00w 480 00W s800 0coW 1 2000kW 2 4000kW 4 8000kW 8 0000 kw i 6 digits 120 000W 240 000W 480 000W 800 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 40000 kW 4 80000 kw 8 00000 kw 5 digits 300 00W 600 00W 1 2000kW 2 0000kw 3 0000kW 6 0000kW 12 000kW 20 000 kw i 6 digits 300 000W 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 00000 kW 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 12 0000 kw 20 0000 kw F 5 digits 600 00 W 1 2000kW 2 4000kW 4 0000kW 6 0000kW 12 000kW 24 000kW 40 000 kw 6 digits 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 40000 kW 4 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 12 0000 kW 24 0000 kW 40 0000 kw 5 digits 1 2000kW 2 4000kW 4 8000kW 8 0000kW 12 000kW 24 000kW 48 000kW 80 000 kw i 6 digits 1 20000 kW 2 40000 kW 4 80000 kW 8 00000 kW 12 0000 kW 24 0000 kW 48 0000 kW 80 0000 kw Joo 5d9ts 3 0000 kW 6 0000kW 12 000kW 20 000 kW 30 000 kW 60 000 kW 120 00 kW 200 00 kw 6 digits 3 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 12 0000 kW 20 0000 kW 30 0000 kW 60 0000 kW 120 000 kW 200 000 kw Wiring Method 1P3W 3P3W 3V3A as Displayed Voltage Range Vpk Apk digits 30 60 120 200 300 600 1200 2000 5 digits 6 0000W 12 000W 24 000W 40 000W 60 000W 120 00W 240 00W 400 00 w be 6digits 6 00000W 12 0000W 24 0000W 40 0000W 60 0000W 120 000W 240 000W 400 000 W 5 digits 12 000W 24 000W 48 000W 80 000W 120 00W 240 00W 480 00W 800 00 w 6 di
87. Check the storage medium 605 File not found Check the file name and the storage medium 606 Media is protected Set the disk s medium s write protect switch to OFF 607 Media was removed while accessing Check the storage medium 608 File already exists 12 5 609 610 Contains invalid characters 12 5 611 Media full Delete unnecessary file s or use another disk 12 4 to 12 7 612 613 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message still appears maintenance service is required 614 File is protected 12 8 615 Physical format error Reformat the medium If the same error occurs the 12 4 instrument is probably unable to execute a format on this medium 616 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 620 still appears maintenance service is required 621 File is damaged Check the file 622 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 641 still appears maintenance service is required 642 No media exists in SCSI device Check that the storage medium is correctly inserted in the SCSI device 643 Media failure Check the medium to 653 654 Media failure Check the format type of the floppy disk 656 File system failure Check using another disk If the same message to 664 still appears maintenance service is required 665 Cannot load this file format File was stored on other models or other
88. D converter which results in the quantization of the sampled data using 4096 discrete levels However the waveform is displayed using 512 levels per grid On the other hand when using cursors explained later to measure the data from the waveform the data are converted to a resolution of up to 16 bits Horizontal time axis The instrument displays the sampled data of the voltage or current within the observation time The horizontal axis corresponds to the time axis of the observation time The sampled data on the screen become more recent as you move from the left to the right on the horizontal axis The grid on the screen divides the observation time into 10 equal sections For example if the observation time is set to 100 ms then one grid 1 div corresponds to 10 ms 1 grid 1 div 10 ms 1 grid 1 div 20 ms 100 ms lt 200 ms al Observation time Observation time 1 26 IM 253710 01E 1 6 Waveform Display a Note Number of displayed points on the screen When displaying the sampled data as a waveform on the screen the data points are displayed in segments called rasters There are 501 rasters in the time axis direction on one screen Recall that the sampled data are stored into the acquisition memory according to the sampling rate Then the display record length of the data is shown on the scree
89. For information on the input module see page iii Power cord D UL CSA Standard Power Cord Part No A1006WD Maximum rated voltage 125 V Maximum rated current 7 A F VDE Standard Power Cord Part No A1009WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A Q BS Standard Power Cord Part No A1054WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A R SAA Standard Power Cord Part No A1024WD Maximum rated voltage 240 V Maximum rated current 10 A Options M1 Extend memory to 1 Mword CH M3 Extend memory to 4 Mword CH B5 Built in printer C7 SCSI Only one of the options M1 or M3 can be selected Ex For UL CSA standard power cord 4 Mword CH memory extension built in printer and SCSI 253710 D M3 B5 C7 NO Instrument No When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please quote the instrument No IM 253710 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories for the PZ4000 The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument Part Name Part Number Q ty Notes 1 Power cord See previous page 1 2 Spare power fuse A1354EF 1 250 V 6 3 A time lag Attached to the fuse holder 3 Printer roll paper B9850NX 1 For the built in printer Only provided with option B5 4 Rubber feet A9088ZM 2 Two pieces in one set Two sets provided 5 Cover plate B9315DC 4 Attach cover
90. HELP LocaL SHIFT copy mui ca MENU i CJ CENS O FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER 7 START STOP 1 4 ABORT CH7 cH cna cns A CJC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key VOLTAGE ZN CHB CURRENT Procedure 1 Press the FILE key to display the File setting menu 2 Press the File Item soft key to display the File Item setting menu 3 Press the Setup soft key mC rera C H File Item setup Setup C _ L C ae C iq M C i C H M A C L C H es LJ LJ 12 10 IM 253710 01E 12 5 Saving and Loading Setup Parameters Saving the Setup Parameters 4 Press the Save soft key to display the save setting menu Selecting the destination medium 5 Press the File List soft key to display the File List dialog box 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select the destination medium displayed with 7 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Selecting the destination directory When there are directories on the medium 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select the destination directory displayed with lt gt 9 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection The Path box on the top left corner of the File List dialog box displays the selected medium and directory File W File Item File List Setup File List Path
91. Hz 20 kHz and 1 MHz Zero crossing filter Select from OFF 500 Hz and 20 kHz A D converter 12 bit Sampling rate 5 MS s maximum 17 20 IM 253710 01E 17 16 Power Measurement Module 253752 Item Specification Current input Input terminal type Direct input large binding post Current sensor input BNC connector Input format Floating input shunt input method Input impedance Direct input 5 A Input resistance Approx 100 mQ Input reactance Approx 0 07 uH Direct input 20 A Input resistance Approx 11 MQ Input reactance Approx 0 02 uH Current sensor input Input resistance Approx 10 kQ Measurement range Direct input 5 A Select from Auto 10 Apk 4 Apk 2 Apk 1 Apk 0 4 Apk 0 2 Apk 0 1 Apk Direct input 20 A Select from Auto 100 Apk 40 Apk 20 Apk 10 Apk 4 Apk 2 Apk 1 Apk Current sensor input Select from Auto 1000 mVpk 400 mVpk 200 mVpk 100 mVpk Frequency range DC to 2 MHz Instantaneous maximum Direct input 5 A 30 Apk or 15 Arms whichever is less allowable input 1 s Direct input 20 A 150 Apk or 40 Arms whichever is less Current sensor input 2 Vrms Continuous maximum Direct input 5 A 10 Apk or 7 Arms whichever is less allowable input Direct input 20 A 100 Apk or 30 Arms whichever is less Current sensor input 2 Vrms Continuous maximum 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz common mode voltage CMRR Open input terminals apply 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz b
92. I soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor4 I 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move V cursor 2 Moving V cursor 1 and 2 simultaneously 17 Press the Cursor3 Cursor4 I soft key to set the jog shuttle control to both Cursor I and Cursor4 I 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move V cursor 1 and 2 simultaneously The distance between them is kept constant Type je cursori 1 0 Cursor2 gr 1 1 le Cursors TF 82 60ns E Cursor PY 880 00ns Sooooed IM 253710 01E 11 15 sishjeuy wojne M z 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor Explanation By placing markers or cursors on the displayed waveform the data defined by that point can be measured and displayed It can be used to measure the voltage and current for various sections of the waveform or the corresponding horizontal axis X axis data Waveforms that can be measured Select the waveform to be measured using the cursor from the following choices CH1 to CH8 Math1 Math2 Marker and cursor types and measured items Marker and x marks are displayed on the specified waveform The vertical value Y axis value and the horizontal value from the left edge of the screen X axis value of each marker can be measured The differences between the Y axis values and between the X axis values can also be measured The marker moves along the waveform and measures the value of the waveform data marker C
93. Inni 5 0551 A Imi 5 0551 A Grane Urmsi 5 0517 V sth Unni 5 0516 VY element of the third item Udc2 0 0307 Uaci 5 0516 VY Irmsi 5 6536 A Imi 5 0551 A Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 3 Determination of Delta Functions For details regarding the wiring methods A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or there are no numerical data 8 10 IM 253710 01E 8 4 Displaying Harmonic Measurement Data For a functional description see section 1 5 This section applies when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement CONFIGURATION TRIG D z SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy mui ca pea MENU i ll FILTER 7 SINGLE Saige start stop ABORT VOLTAGE C C e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key UOUU0U8 CH7 Procedure Set the measurement mode to harmonic measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the
94. Itif 0164 Itif 01C0 Itif 021C Itif 0054 hvf 00BO hvf 010C hvf 0168 Hvf 01C4 hvf 0220 Hvf 0058 hcf 00B4 hcf 0110 hcf 016C Hcf 01C8 hcf 0224 Hcf Address Numerical Data 0228 U1 U2 022C U1 U3 0230 U1 I1 0234 U1 12 0238 oU1 I3 023C F1 0240 F2 0244 F3 0248 F4 024C Speed 0250 Torque 0254 Sync 0258 Pm 025C nmA 0260 nmB Note This format is fixed regardless of the number of modules that is installed or elements specified for storage Even when the number of installed modules is 1 153 data points are saved However when the motor module is not installed NAN 0x7FC00000 is saved to the positions between Speed and nmB 0x7FC00000 is saved in measurement function positions that are NAN or are not being computed When the data value is equal to positive infinity Ox7F800000 is saved when the data value is negative infinity OxFF800000 is saved App 24 IM 253710 01E Appendix 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Power Constants Related to the AC Circuit This section describes the basic concepts of power harmonics and the three constants related to the AC circuit Electrical energy is transformed and used in different forms such as heat in an electric heater or an electric furnace rotational power to drive motors and light in fluorescent and mercury lamps Power electric power represents the amount of work that the electricity electrical energy performs on these types of loads over a unit amount of time Th
95. Measurement Data Page scrolling the display You can page scroll when Single List or Dual List is selected Listing the numerical data corresponding to the harmonic orders that are higher than those currently displayed 8 Press the Page Down Scroll Exec soft key The numerical data of the higher harmonic order is listed 9 Press the Page Down Scroll Exec soft key repeatedly until the section of the list containing the desired order is reached You can page scroll to view up to a 500th order harmonic Listing the numerical data corresponding to a harmonic order that is smaller than those currently displayed 10 Press the Page Up Scroll Exec soft key The numerical data of the lower harmonic order is listed 11 Press the Page Up Scroll Exec soft key repeatedly until the section of the list containing the desired order is reached You can page scroll down as far as Total or dc Oth order or PLL cHI U1 0 0295 dc 0 0104 35 403 Freq 49 Hz 1 6 0034 31 961 2 0 0046 15 512 3 0035 11 845 4 0 0021 201 uL 0 8295 V 5 0 0040 13 644 6 0 0008 2 825 n 8 0011 7 8 0027 3 002 a 0 0012 3 906 Pi 0 000 U 9 8 00065 1 46 10 6 9005 1 641 L 51 0 000 uA 11 0 0905 1 554 12 6 0008 2 551 Qi 0 000 var 13 0 0006 2 006 14 0 0005 1 646 AL 0 87644 15 0 0995 1 663 16 6 0004 1 382 i 151 216 17 8 0002 0 511 18 0 0003 0 980 Uthd 296 471 19 0 9006 1 907 20 0 0005 1 549 maen Ithd
96. Measurement Mode 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Harmonics Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 3 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying numerical data Displaying only the numerical data 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Display Wp Select g Format Nuner ic Numeric Wave Item Amount Bar 8 Vector Numer ic Wave Numer ic Bar Reset Wave Bar Exec H Numeric Disp Itens PUULE IM 253710 01E 8 11 Aejdsiq jeouewny e 8 4 Displaying Harmonic Measurement Data Displaying numerical data and waveforms 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric Wavel 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection For the procedures related to setting the waveform display see chapter 9 Display Se lect g Format Nuner ic Numeric Wave Item Amount Bar 8 Vector Numer ic Bar Reset Wave Bar Exec H Numeric Disp Itens O UEULDI Displaying numerical data and bar graphs 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric Bar 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection The bar graph is useful when making harmonic measurements For the procedures related to setting the bar graph display see section 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data Display Selec
97. PX QX QX var Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Px az SE af P oz cos 2 For the normal measurement mode only SZ Zz 9 irns7 For the normal measurement mode only Rs 9 S For the normal measurement mode only Xsz 9 Qz z For the normal measurement mode only Irms gt Rp 9 Urms gt 1 G Py For the normal measurement mode only Xpz 9 Urms gt 1 B or For the normal measurement mode only Pci Pc2 Laas Pc2 i For the normal measurement mode only Forine norma mode only n Efficiency 1 100 For the normal measurement mode only 1 y Efficiency 2 PZA PB 100 For the normal measurement mode only Note ___ PX QZ and Az are equations that apply both to the normal and harmonic measurement modes Each symbol denotes the measurement function of the corresponding element that is determined during normal or harmonic measurement modes For details see section 1 2 and pages App 4 to App 6 The letters A and B of XA and XB denote the combinations of wiring systems For details see section 5 2 For information on Speed Torque Sync Slip Pm motor efficiency and total efficiency see chapter 15 IM 253710 01E App 7 Ea xipueddy Appendix 3 Determination of Delta Computation Delta Computation Menu Sampled Data Symbols Used when Displaying the Computed Result The sampled data in the table are substituted into the equations on the next page to derive the computed results
98. Speed Ch Torque Ch8 Pm Range Sense Tyl Freq Ran Line 15 12 IM 253710 01E 15 4 Setting the Scaling Factor the Pulse Count and Unit Used to Measure the rotating speed Explanation Setting the scaling factor You can specify the scaling factor used to transform the revolution sensor signal Select the scaling factor in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 When the revolution sensor signal type is Analog By setting the number of rotations per volt of input voltage the rotating speed is derived from the following equation Speed rotating speed Scaling factor x Input voltage from the revolution sensor When the revolution sensor signal type is Pulse The value is used as a scaling factor in the equation given in the next item Setting the pulse count Setting the pulse count Set the pulse count per rotation Select the value in the range from 1 to 9999 This takes effect when the revolution sensor signal type is set to Pulse in section 15 2 Speed rotating speed _ Number of input pulses from the revolution sensor x Scaling factor Pulse count pulse count per revolution 1 When the number of input pulses from the revolution sensor is measured in one minute intervals the unit of rotating speed is rpms 2 When the revolution sensor signal is a changed signal you can set the scaling factor see previous item to determine the rotating speed befo
99. Symbols and Determination of Measurement FUNCTIONS eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerereeeeeeen App 4 App 3 Determination of Delta Computation 00 0 0 ec eeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeneeetias App 8 App 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data ceeeeeseeeteeereeenees App 10 App 5 ASCII Header File Format ccceescesseesseeeeseeeeeeeeseeseaeeseeseaeeseeseaeeseaeseaeesaeseeessaees App 16 App 6 Float File Format esanen AeA he I a App 20 App 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit App 25 Index xiv IM 253710 01E Chapter 1 Functions 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram System Configuration Numerical data Screen image data m i Waveform data Setup parameters Numerical data Waveform data GP IB interface Setup parameters Serial interface SCSI option PC Waveform data Built in printer option External lt Setup parameters Waveform data Floppy disk SCSI lt Setup parameters z device Numerical data Screen image data Numerical data External trigger output lt Screen image data External trigger input gt External clock input gt Centronics Power interface Centronics printer Mot dul maa Screen image data otor module oaule Ea Voltage Current Input one type of signal Input one type of signal ree Gi i Revolut
100. Turning ON OFF the Power Switch Pressing the button once turns the instrument ON Pressing it again turns the instrument OFF o T The Order in Turning ON OFF the Power When using the model with the SCSI option and you wish to save or load data using an external SCSI device turn ON the SCSI device first then turn ON this instrument When turning OFF the instrument and SCSI device reverse the order Power Up Operation When the power switch is turned ON the self test starts automatically When the self test completes successfully the display shows the screen that is displayed when the power switch is turned OFF Note If the instrument does not operate as described above when the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the power switch and check the following points Check that the power cord is securely connected to the outlet Check that the correct voltage is coming to the power outlet see section 3 6 Connecting the Power Supply Check that the fuse is not blown see section 16 5 Replacing the Power Fuse If the power switch is turned ON while pressing the RESET key the setting parameters are initialized to their factory default values For information on initialization see section 4 2 Initializing the Settings If the instrument still does not work after checking these points contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs IM 253710 01E 3 23 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 11 Turning ON OFF the Po
101. be assigned to each divided window The screen can be divided into up to four windows This function is useful when there are many waveforms on the screen You can select the method of assignment from the following list of choices e Auto The channels that are turned ON are assigned in order according to the channel number to the divided windows Fixed The channels are assigned in order according to the channel number to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON User The channels can be assigned arbitrarily to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later Display Interpolation of the Waveform For procedures see section 9 4 When there are less than 500 points of sampled data on the time axis the waveform is no longer continuous This function interpolates between the points so that the waveform appears to be connected Linear interpolation Interpolates between two points using a line Interpolation OFF No interpolation is performed Only the data points are displayed 1 28 IM 253710 01E Zooming on the Waveform For procedures see section 9 8 1 6 Waveform Display a Zooming vertically The waveform of each channel can be expanded or reduced by the zoom factor which can range from 0 1 to 100 The waveform is zoomed around the zero input line suoljun
102. before 2 01 Note When connecting multiple SCSI devices in a chain attach a SCSI terminator to the device at the other end of the chain 12 2 IM 253710 01E 12 3 Changing the SCSI ID Number Procedure CONFIGURATION MENU WUO0000 OP ONS number TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER zT ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE SHIFT copy nut cau ELEMENTS fens ona one ows e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key CURRENT SINGLE SHAE stant sToP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g S amp A Press the MISC key to display the Misc setting menu Press the SCSI ID soft key to display the SCSI number setting menu Press the Own ID soft key Turn the jog shuttle to select the ID from 0 to 7 Press the Initialize SCSI soft key to change the SCSI ID to the selected ID An icon blinks in the upper right corner of the screen while the ID is being changed The icon disappears when the changes are complete Information M GPIB RSZ3Z SCSI ID M Date Time Conf ig Selftest Initialize SCSI SCSI TD Oun TD JUUUUUUU IM 253710 01E 12 3 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 3 Changing the SCSI ID Number Explanation The SCSI ID number is used to distinguish between the various devic
103. both Start Pos and End Pos 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the measurement computation period The distance between them is kept constant Go to step 13 on page 10 5 Measure Mode Measure Mode Measure Mode OFF M OFF Period Zero Cross cursor Ext Trigger OFF M g Period g Period zero Cross Cursor M Sync Source wm Start Pos 0 00MS End Pos 100 00ns M A Measure 4 User Def ined A User Def ined 4 User Def ined OUOUOUU0 IM 253710 01E 10 3 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 1 Setting the Measurement Computation Period Re computing Setting the period using external trigger Set the measurement mode to normal measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 3 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Normal Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the Period soft key to display the period setting menu Press the Ext Trigger soft key to select the external trigger setting NOs Selecting the trigger condition Press the Pattern soft key to select f or F1 Go to step 13 on page 10 5 Measure Mode Measure Mode OFF DN Period OFF Dn 4 Period 4 Period Zero Cross zero Cross Ext Trigger 4 Sync Source Cursor
104. can be adjusted Setting the Display Colors For procedures see section 14 3 The colors for graphical elements such as the waveform background scale and cursor and text elements such as the menu and the menu background can be selected The colors are set using RGB percentages Action on Trigger For procedures see section 14 4 The specified operation is carried out whenever a trigger occurs Save numerical data waveform data and setup parameters to the specified medium Output or save the screen image data to the specified destination Self test Function For procedures see section 15 3 A self test can be performed to check whether or not the instrument is operating properly Components such as the memory the operation keys the floppy disk drive and the built in printer option can be tested Confirming the System Condition of the Instrument For procedures see section 15 4 The system condition of the instrument such as the model ROM version firmware version module configuration and existence of options can be confirmed Communication Function GP IB Serial See Communication Interface User s Manual IM253710 11E A GP IB interface and a serial interface complies with EIA 574 Standard EIA 232 RS 232 standard for 9 pin come standard with the instrument The communication function can be used to transfer data to a PC for analysis or to control the instrument with an external controller Communicat
105. can display the harmonic order from Total or dc Oth order up to 500th order However numerical data that correspond to harmonic orders up to the upper limit of the analysis determined by the frequency of the PLL source are actually determined from the harmonic measurement IM 253710 01E 8 23 Aejdsiq jeouewnyn e Chapter 9 Waveform Display 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display For a functional description see section 1 6 CONFIGURATION TRIG D SETUP INPUT NEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE ESC LJ FILE misc HELP LocaL SHIFT LU copy nu ca f MENU LJ ELEMENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER Y LO START STOP 1 2 al 4 4 ABORT LJ VOLTAGE cH2 cH4 cH6 cH8 fcurrent SA e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedure Selecting from the Display setting menu 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying the waveform Displaying only the waveform 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Wave 4 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Display g Format ip Select Nuner ic Numeric Wave Item Amount Bar 8 Vector Numer ic Bar Reset Wave Bar a H Numeric Disp Itens UUUUUUO
106. clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the zoom box can be moved in the range defined by the number of data points in the record length For example if the record length is 100 k words then the range is from data point 0 the left end of the screen to data point 100 k the right end of the screen The center of the zoom box indicates the center of the zoomed waveform When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the zoom position can be set in steps of observation time display record length When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the zoom position can be set in steps of one data point The zoom box enclosed with a solid line is Z1 the zoom box enclosed with a dotted line is Z2 The zoom positions of Z1 and Z2 can be set independently To set the positions of Z1 and Z2 simultaneously keeping the distance between them constant Z1 and Z2 must both be selected as described in the previous section Selecting the type of zoom display IM 253710 01E 9 23 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 9 Displaying the Vectors of the Harmonics For a functional description see section 1 6 This section applies when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement Keys CONFIGURATION TRIG D z serve neur Jesse ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy mut ca
107. color within the waveform display frame Grid Sets the color of the menu frame Cursor Sets the color of the marker and cursor CH1 to CH8 Sets the colors of the waveform The colors for Math1 and Math2 are set to the same colors as CH5 and CH6 respectively 14 6 IM 253710 01E 14 3 Setting the Display Colors of the Screen Setting the text color Select the text color from presets 1 to 3 or the user setting For the user setting the display color can be set on the following items Menu Fore Sets the color of the menu diglog box window and other text that is displayed on the screen Menu Back Sets the color of the waveform display frame and the background color for the text on the screen Select Box Sets the background color inside the selected menu frame or box Sub Menu Sets the color of the selected dialog box and window Selected Key Sets the color of the selected soft key IM 253710 01E 14 7 z suo1 1 d 0 194 0 pue yndyno 13611 jeu13 x3 14 4 Setting the Action on Trigger TRIG D CONFIGURATION O SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE SHIFT copy mui ca MENU E O MENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER 7 SINGLE STAAF START STOP 4 ABORT 2 WUOUUUUB 1 2 CH3 CH5 cH7 voLtaGE IN rE tI S CS e The __ ma
108. columns When the display format is other than Numeric 22 items of numerical data of one type of measurement function are displayed in two columns Dual List When the display format is Numeric 24 items of numerical data of two types of measurement functions are displayed in each column When the display format is other than Numeric 11 items of numerical data of two types of measurement functions are displayed in each column List A table indicating the numerical data for each measurement item is displayed The measurement functions U I P S Q A 6 and so on are displayed vertically and symbols representing the elements and wiring methods are displayed horizontally The sixth horizontal item B is hidden behind the menu You can view the hidden data by clearing the menu by pressing the ESC key Resetting the order of the displayed items If the number of displayed items is set to 8 or 16 the order of the displayed items can be reset to a preset order For details regarding the reset information see Appendix 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Scrolling the display Because all the data cannot fit on one screen a scroll function is provided When the number of displayed items is set to 8 or 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move the highlight to another measurement function The menu items that are displayed change as follows Harm Item No The data number of the highlighted measurem
109. does not affect XA and XB 3P3W 1P3W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 3P3W system XB Displays the numerical data when elements 3 and 4 are combined into a 1P3W system 3P3W 3P3W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 3P3W system XB Displays the numerical data when elements 3 and 4 are combined into a 3P3W system 3V3A 1P2W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 2 and 3 are combined into a 3V3A system XB Displays the numerical data of element 4 3P4W 1P2W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 2 and 3 are combined into a 3P4W system XB Displays the numerical data of element 4 5 4 IM 253710 01E 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method Check that the power measurement modules are installed in order starting from the element number 1 slot If you leave the slots that have smaller element numbers empty measurements will not be made properly For example do not install a power measurement module into the element number 2 slot and leave the element number 1 slot empty Do not install power measurement modules into element number 1 and 3 slots and leave the element number 2 slot empty For the procedures on installing the modules see section 3 3 Installing the Input Module When the sensor input module is installed into the element number 4 slot only up to three power measurement module
110. effect when the data acquisition is started If the observation time is changed the display range centers itself around the trigger position 7 12 IM 253710 01E 7 6 Setting the Trigger Delay Procedure For a functional description see section 1 4 This section applies when the trigger mode is set to a mode other than OFF CONFIGURATION MENU COPY NULL 3 SETUP INPUT MEASURE DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM CAL RI S d gt E M zJ REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT Doung ont cnaf ons cn7 E E E on E E E VOLTAGE CURRENT SINGLE Suge start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME rr N Gl A e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Set the trigger mode to a mode other than OFF For procedures see section 7 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode 1 Press the TRIGGER key to display the Trigger setting menu Check that Mode is set to something other than OFF Press the Delay soft key 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger delay For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings IM 253710 01E 7 13 10661 y Bunjes 7 6 Setting the Trigger Delay Explanation The trigger position matc
111. file name and comment in section 12 5 Saving the file 13 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the saving operation 14 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the saving operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec File List Save Menu Path Foo Space 740352 byte File Name Size Date Attribute ry F0 1 File Nane WAVE Property Save Exec Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and Viewing the properties in section 12 5 12 18 IM 253710 01E 12 6 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Loading the Waveform Data Set the data type to Binary For the procedures see steps 4 and 5 in the paragraph Saving the Waveform Data 4 Check that the Data Type is set to Binary 5 Press the Load soft key to display the load setting menu and the File List dialog box k e E L Far File List L Load Menu Space 861184 byte Wave File Name SIZE Tate Attribute M Jata Type FDO 1 E C WAUEOOO WUF 413593 1999 03 18 17 55 R U Binary 7 Load O Property M Filter Save idi C
112. follows The display resolution of sampled data such as the voltage level does not change see section 1 6 Single 432 points Dual 216 points Triad 144 points Quad 108 points Waveform mapping Auto The waveforms of CH1 CH2 Math1 Math2 are assigned in order from the top divided window The channels that are turned OFF are skipped Fixed The channels that are turned OFF are also assigned to the windows Math1 and Math2 are displayed in the top window and 2nd window respectively When the screen is divided into four windows Quad CH1 through CH6 CH8 and Math2 are ON and CH7 and Math1 are OFF Auto Fixed CH1 CH5 CH1 CH5 CH2 CH6 CH2 CH6 Math2 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el User The channels can be assigned arbitrarily to the divided windows regardless of whether or not the display is turned ON You can select the display position from O to 3 The channels are assigned in order starting from number 0 from the top divided window This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later User when the screen is divided into three windows with CH2 Math1 and Math2 set to 0 1 and 3 respectively CH2 Math2 0 3 The channels are displayed in 1 2 order according to the specified number IM 253710 01E 9 4 Interpolating the Display For a functional description see section 1 6 TRIG D SETUP INPUT WEASURE TRIGGER DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMO
113. gt Selecting the number of split windows in the zoom display region The zoom display regions Z1 and Z2 can be evenly divided and each waveform can be assigned to each divided window Select the number of split windows from the following list of choices Main The number of windows selected in Wave Format in section 9 3 Splitting the Screen and Displaying the Waveforms becomes effective Single No division Dual Two divisions Triad Three divisions Quad Four divisions The assigning of the zoom waveforms follows the setting that was specified in Mapping in section 9 3 Splitting the Screen and Displaying the Waveforms IM 253710 01E 9 21 Aejdsiq wiojonem el 9 8 Zooming on the Waveform Observation Time Selecting the waveform to zoom Select the waveform to zoom from the following choices CH1 to CH8 Math1 Math2 However the waveforms that are turned OFF according to the settings described in section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display cannot be zoomed Setting the zoom factor The maximum zoom factor that can be selected depends on the display record length and observation time For example the maximum zoom factor is 10 000 times when the observation time is 20 s and the display record length is 100 k words It is 100 000 times when the observation time is 20 s and the display record length is 1 M word or 4 M words The maximum zoom factor becomes smaller as the display r
114. is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Measurement function on each power measurement module so that the correspondence can be seen For example Urms1 represents the true rms value of the voltage of element 1 Wiring method The wiring method is the method by which the signals that are input to each element are combined Different selections are possible depending on the number of elements that have power measurement modules installed In some cases only one type of wiring method can be selected while in other cases two types of wiring methods can be selected When two types of wiring methods are selected A or B is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Measurement function of the average or sum of multiple measurement modules Xfunction so that the correspondence can be seen For example UrmsxA represents the true rms value of the average of the voltage of the power measurement modules that are combined using wiring method A Efficiency The n efficiency 1 is determined by PXB PXA and 1 n efficiency 2 is determined by PXA P B n is the efficiency of wiring B with respect to wiring A 1 m is the efficiency of wiring A with respect to wiring B 1 6 IM 253710 01E 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods a Harmonic Measurement Mode and Measurement Function Types of Numerical Data For procedures see section 5 1
115. length When the optional memory extension is being used the record length can be selected 2 Press the Record Length soft key to display the record length selection menu 3 Press one of the keys from 100k to 4M to select the record length Select whether or not to divide the record length 2 Press the Rec Division soft key to select ON or OFF K Record g Length 168k Rec Division Rec Division an oF Tine Base Ti Int Ext nt OUDUC0EU IM 253710 01E sIxy sul y umM S a 6 2 Selecting the Record Length for Acquiring Data Explanation Selecting the record length On this instrument the record length refers to the data capacity of the acquisition memory per channel It can be selected from the following choices 1 M and 4 M are memory extension options 100 k 1 M 4M The sampled data in the acquisition memory are P P compressed and displayed The number of data points displayed on the screen is referred to as the display record length The numerical data are determined based on the sampled data within this display record length For details regarding the observation time sampling rate and record length see Appendix 1 For the normal measurement mode the size of the display record length varies depending on the observation time setting and the maximum size is equal to the record length When the observation time is long the record length and display re
116. maximum allowable input of 50 Vpk or 25 Vrms to the sensor input connector When the PZ4000 is OFF turn off the power supplied to the sensor input connector Revolution Sensor Signal Input Channel CH7 Input the signal output from the revolution sensor a DC voltage analog signal or a pulse signal that is proportional to the rotating speed of the motor according to the following specifications DC voltage analog input Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Measurement range 50 Vpk 20 Vpk 10 Vpk 5 Vpk 2 Vpk and 1 Vpk Effective input range 100 of the measurement range Input impedance Approx 1 MQ and 17 pF Maximum allowable input 50 Vpk or 25 Vrms whichever is less Continuous maximum common 600 Vrms CAT Il mode voltage For other specifications see chapter 17 Pulse input Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Frequency range 1 Hz to 200 kHz Amplitude input range 5 V Effective amplitude 1 V Peak to Peak or more Input waveform 50 duty cycle square wave Torque Meter Signal Input Channel CH8 Input the signal output from the torque meter a DC voltage analog signal that is proportional to the torque of the motor according to the following specifications Item Specifications Connector type BNC connector Measurement range 50 Vpk 20 Vpk 10 Vpk 5 Vpk 2 Vpk and 1 Vpk Effective input range 100 of the measurement range Input impedance Approx 1 MQ
117. measurement mode Data of all measurement functions are saved The numerical data of delta computation and of user defined functions are also saved 12 26 IM 253710 01E 12 7 Saving Numerical Data For harmonic measurement mode The data in the range from Total or dc Oth order up to 500th order of the selected elements and measurement functions are saved Select the element from Element1 Element2 Element3 and Element4 Select the measurement function from U I P S Q A o QU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp Torque and gt List all functions This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot The numerical data of the measurement functions fU or fl Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf and hcf are saved regardless of the selection made in the previous section Selecting the medium and directory See the explanation given in Selecting the medium and directory in section 12 5 File name and comment See the explanation given in File name and comment in section 12 5 Auto naming function See the explanation given in Auto naming function in section 12 5 Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box You can specify the type of files to display Item Displays only the numerical data files All Displays all the files on the medium Properties See the explanation give
118. menu 2 Press the Information soft key to display the information window w C Informat ion Information Model PZ4000 Version 1 60 g xax Module Configuration weee GPIB RSZ32 Calibration Date Status Elementi 253752 20A Shunt 99 62 25 11 52 00 OK Element2 253752 20A Shunt 99 62 25 11 52 00 A Elenent3 253752 20A Shunt 99 62 25 11 52 00 SCSI ID Element4 253752 Z6A Shunt 99 62 25 11 52 00 080000008 Dpt IONS 0005000005 Date Time ACQ Memory 4MWord CH Printer Yes SCSI No Conf ig Link Date 99 02 25 Thu 11 39 selftest Next 12 a Ie Explanation Displaying the system conditions You can check the model ROM version module configuration and the existence of options 16 8 IM 253710 01E 16 5 Replacing the Power Fuse A WARNING To prevent the possibility of fire use only a fuse having the specified rating voltage current and type Make sure to turn OFF the instrument and unplug the power cord before replacing the fuse Never short the fuse holder Specified Rating The power fuse used on this instrument is specified as follows Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 6 3 A Type Time lag Standard UL VDE certified Part number A1354EF Replacement Procedures Follow the procedures below to replace the power fuse 1 Turn OFF the power switch 2 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet 3 Place th
119. menu the true rms value of i1 i2 is computed and displayed at Alrms1 When the measurement computation period is changed do a re computation For details see section 10 1 10 10 IM 253710 01E 10 3 Setting the User Defined Function UUOUULE e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation CONFIGURATION TAIG D SETUP INPUT WEASURE TRIGGER ico DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL ca SHIFT copy nu ca MENU CICHCH LE on Co CC CH7 For a functional description see section 1 7 SINGLE SNE start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME VOLTAGE g Gl amp Aj CURRENT e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedure N Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the User Defined soft key to display the user defined function setting dialog box Selecting whether or not to perform a user defined function computation 4 5 Measure Mode E o Function4 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF User Defined Function 1 4 g Measure Mode OFF m Period Zero Cross Function 1 I Expression Function 2 g Sync Source Measure Exec Expression Function 3 g 4 Measure OFF Expression
120. mode Measurement functions that are determined for each element power measurement module For details related to the determination of and the equations of measurement functions see Appendix 2 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V U k rms value of the harmonic voltage of order k U Total rms value of the voltage signal Current A I k rms value of the harmonic current of order k Total rms value of the current signal Active power W P k Active power of the harmonic signal of order k Total active power Apparent power VA S k Apparent power of the harmonic signal of order k S Total apparent power Reactive power var Q k Reactive power of the harmonic signal of order k Q Total reactive power Power factor A k Power factor of the harmonic signal of order k Total power factor Phase difference o k Phase difference between the harmonic voltage and current of order k o Total phase difference k Phase difference of each harmonic voltage U k with respect to the fundamental signal U 1 ol k Phase difference of each harmonic current I k with respect to the fundamental signal I 1 Impedance Q of the load Z k Impedance of the load circuit observed by the kth order harmonic signal circuit Resistance and reactance Rs k Resistance observed by the kth order harmonic signal of the load circuit that has a resistor Q of the load circuit R inductor L a
121. of all channels are turned OFF Display Format Wave Wave Setting all ON A11 OFF cn z cus cna cus cHe cue cue Mathi Math2 Wave Display M Wave Format Single Interpolate Fal y Graticule Scale Value w o Trace Label my o Mapping Fixed OUUUULEL IM 253710 01E Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display Selecting from the channel setting menu You cannot turn ON OFF the computed waveform using this procedure Explanation Turning ON OFF the waveform display 1 2 M Wave Display m o Press the desired channel key from CH1 to CH8 The channel setting menu is displayed Press the Wave Display soft key to select ON or OFF CHI U Range 2000Upk U zoom xO 1 Label Selecting the display format Select the display format from the following list of choices Wave Only the waveform is displayed Numeric Wave The numerical data and waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the numerical display see chapter 8 Wave Bar Waveforms and bar graphs are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows The bar graphs is useful when making harmonic measurements For the procedures related to setting the bar graph display see section 9 10 Displaying t
122. on the vertical axis Y axis Simultaneous observation of X Y waveform and normal T Y waveform waveform display using time axis and amplitude level is also possible 1 32 IM 253710 01E Other Display Settings For procedures see section 9 5 to 9 7 1 6 Waveform Display a Graticule A grid or cross scale can be displayed on the screen You can also select not to display the grid or cross scale suoljun Displaying the scale value The upper and lower limits of the vertical axis and the values at the left and right ends of the horizontal axis time axis of each channel can be turned ON or OFF Displaying the Waveform Labels The waveform labels of each channel can be turned ON or OFF ae Z 000A Upper limits L s fir Waveform label He 10 00 R Lower limits L22 i oe iaw a Right end time axis Applicable to products with Left end time axis firmware version 2 01 or later IM 253710 01E 1 33 1 7 Numerical Computation By making use of the measurement function data and the measurement and computation function see section 1 2 additional numerical computation can be carried out In addition a function is provided in which the equation used in determining the measurement function data can be selected Delta Computation For procedures see section 10 2 In the normal measurement mode the sum or difference of the instantaneous values sampled data of the voltage or current bet
123. pel _sen FA Sen_zeA Bay _sen Bel _sen 10APk_ TeApk__ TeApk__ 1 Range __10Apk__ Select TeApk__ 1oApk__ C 10 0000 C 10 0000 O 10 0000 C 3 Fat 10A 10 0000 oap 10 0000 C 10 0000 Orr o_o aa 4apk oFF Zero Cross OFF OFF OFF Filter __orF___ ZApk OFF OFF 1 FF N FF N FF N a Scaling FA 1apk PFF __ON_ OFF __on_ 1 0000 C 1 90099 1 0090 5 Pt Ratio 1 0000 0 4Apk 1 0000 1 9000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 5 Ct Ratio L 1 0000 9 ZApk 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 5 a aioe 0 1Apk 1 0000 Auto Setting the Range Using the Channel Setting Menu Setting the voltage range Auto 1 Select the desired channel key from the CH1 CH3 CH5 and CH7 keys The channel setting menu appears If the CH7 key is pressed when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for the rotating speed signal input appears For the procedure see chapter 15 2 Press the U Range soft key to display the voltage range selection box 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 2000Vpk to 30Vpk and Auto 4 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new voltage range Wave eT C eeSe fect LJ 1200Vpk H U Range 660Upk 2000Upk ey 300Upk 200Upk C 120Vpk V Zoom 60Upk xO 1 C Setting the current range 1 Select the desired channel key from the CH2 CH4 CH6 and CH8 keys The channel setting menu appears If the CH8 key is pressed when
124. plates on unused slots using screws see item 7 6 Current input B9315DJ 1 protective cover 7 Screw Y9305LB 20 M3 length 5 mm for fixing cover plates and current input protective covers in place 8 User s Manual IM253710 01E 1 This manual Communication IM253710 11E 1 Interface User s Manual 1 one of the following power cords is supplied 2 according to the instrument s suffix codes IM 253710 01E iii Checking the Contents of the Package Input Module Sold Separately Check that the model name given on the name plate on the input module matches that on the order Power measurement module Model Code Suffix Code Specifications 253751 Voltage 1000 V current 5 A current sensor 500 mV 253752 Voltage 1000 V current 5 A amp 20 A current sensor 500 mV Module specification E1 Plug in unit Install the power measurement modules in order starting with the slot for element 1 Sensor input module Model Code Suffix Code Specifications 253771 Motor module 2 channel input Allows signals to be input from revolution sensor or torque meter Module specification E1 Plug in unit 1 Install the sensor input module into the element 4 slot 2 This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later Ex For a power measurement module with Voltage 1000 V current 5 A current sensor 500 mV 253751 E1 MODEL SUFFIX NO YOKOGAWA M
125. points that are acquired into the acquisition memory in one second For example a sampling rate of 10 kS s indicates that 10 000 points of data are acquired in one second The sampling rate of the instrument is automatically determined depending on the observation time and the record length explained later For the relationship between the observation time sampling rate and record length see Input module Appendix 1 The input module is equipped with terminals for inputting voltage and current signals It is installed into the slot located on the rear side of the main unit model 253710 For the different types see Input module on page iv Element and Channel Element When an input module is installed in a slot that is located on the rear side of the main unit the slot combined with the input module is referred to as an element The main unit can contain up to four elements which are numbered from one to four On power measurement modules one voltage and current pair can be input to each element Channel The voltage and current input terminals of each element are assigned channel numbers as follows Element Number Voltage Current 1 CH 1 CH 2 2 CH3 CH 4 3 CH5 CH6 4 CH7 CH8 When the motor module is installed the output voltage from the sensors is assigned to CH7 and CH8 However motor modules can be used on only products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later IM 253710 01E
126. power S E Ss Ss E Reactive power Q E Qs Qs E Max Min current value Ipk E Ipks current sensor output lIpks E IM 253710 01E 1 13 1 3 Acquiring Data Voltage and Current Signals When inputting voltage or current signals via an external PT or CT The output from the secondary side of the potential transformer can be connected to the same voltage input terminal used for direct input and the output of the secondary side of the current transformer can be connected to the same current input terminal used for direct input Set the PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient coefficient multiplied by power determined from the voltage and current Then the input signal can be made to correspond to the numerical data or display data that are obtained when the current is directly applied to the input terminals Measurement Function Transformation Ratio Conversion Result Voltage U U2 secondary output of PT UszxP P PT ratio Current l2 secondary output of CT loxC C CT ratio Active power P P2 PoxPxCxSF SF power Apparent power S Se S2x P x C x SF coefficient Reactive power Q Qe Q2 x P x C x SF Max Min current value Ipk Ipk2 secondary output of C lpk2 x C Input Filter Line Filter and Zero Crossing Filter For procedures see section 5 6 There are two types of filters This instrument makes measurements by synchronizing to the input signal Therefore the frequency of the input signal must be measured accurate
127. rectification circuit phase control circuit and other circuits that are used in various electrical devices generates harmonic voltages and currents on the power line When the fundamental signal and harmonic signals are combined the waveform is distorted and this can cause interference to devices that are connected to the power line Terminology The following terms are related to harmonics Fundamental wave fundamental component Periodic complex waves are divided into different sinusoid groups The fundamental wave is the signal with the longest period It is the sinusoid that has the fundamental frequency among the periodic complex wave Fundamental frequency This is the frequency corresponding to the period of the periodic complex wave It is the frequency of the fundamental wave Distorted wave The distorted wave has a waveform that is different from the fundamental wave Higher harmonic Sinusoids that have frequencies that are integer multiples 2 or greater of the fundamental frequency Harmonic component The signal component of the waves that have frequencies that are integer multiples 2 or greater of the fundamental frequency Harmonic distortion factor The ratio of the rms value of the nth harmonic signal contained in the distorted waveform to the rms value of the fundamental signal or total signal Harmonic order The integer ratio of the harmonic frequency with respect to the fundamental frequency Total harmoni
128. region 6 Press the Zoom Format soft key to display the menu used to select the number of split windows in the zoom display region 7 Press one of the soft keys from Main to Quad to select the number of windows Selecting the waveform to zoom 8 Press the Allocation soft key to display the zoom waveform selection box Selecting whether or not to zoom on each waveform ON OFF 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the desired channel 10 Press the SELECT key When the button to the left of the channel in the zoom waveform display selection box is highlighted the waveform will be zoomed If it is not highlighted the waveform will not be zoomed Go to step 13 Selecting deselecting all waveforms to zoom ON OFF Selecting all waveforms 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select All ON 10 Press the SELECT key All the buttons to the left of the channels in the zoom waveform display selection box are highlighted and all waveforms are selected Deselecting all waveforms 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select All OFF 12 Press the SELECT key All the buttons to the left of the channels in the zoom waveform display selection box are no longer highlighted and all waveforms are deselected 200m Zoon oon g Mode Dzon a M Mode Mode g Mode Main Ma in amp 21822 Ma in amp 21 amp 22 Ma ina21 amp 2z2 L Zoon Format M Zoom Format M Zoom Fornat Main zi Main Main M Allocation Allocation K Allocation 21 Only Single
129. respectively For information on Speed Torque Sync Slip Pm motor efficiency and total efficiency see chapter 15 App 4 IM 253710 01E Appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Measurement Functions in the Harmonic Measurement Mode amp the Motor Evaluation Table 1 2 Measurement Functions in the Harmonic Measurement Mode amp the Motor Evaluation Determination Equation The characters values inside the of the measurement function dc When k 0 1 k When k 1 When k 2 to max Total No Voltage U V U dc ur 0 Uk uto wile 2 4 i k i k a a n U Fue k min max Current I A dc ir 0 I 4 Yo k min Active power P W P dc ur 0 ir 0 P k ur k ir k uj k i k P P k k min Apparent power S VA S dc P dc S k 4 P k Q k S 4 P Q Reactive power Q var Q dc 0 Q k ur k ij k uj k ir k Q D Q k k min Power factor A _ Ade Sas Mk _ A Phase difference k cos eet b cos Phase difference with respect to U 1 The phase difference of U k ou with respect to pU k U 1 Phase difference with respect to I 1 The phase difference of I k ol n with respect to ol k I 1 Impedance of the load circuit _ U dc _ U k Z dc Z k
130. select Color or Reverse go to step 10 If you select OFF go to step 11 Select whether or not to compress the data ON OFF This step applies if Color was selected in step 9 10 Press the Compression soft key to select ON or OFF Copy q Copy to Copy K Copy to File File g 4 File List File List M Format 4 Format TIFF TIFF le Color OFF Color Color Conpression L OFF File Nane File Nane JO000UUU Setting the file name and comment 11 The procedures are the same as Setting the file name and comment in section 12 5 OUOUGU0U OUDUCUO Printing 12 Display the screen that you wish to save 13 Press the START STOP key to stop the data acquisition Check that the START STOP indicator is OFF 14 Press the COPY key to save the screen image Canceling the save operation 15 Press the Abort soft key in the Copy setting menu Copy q Copy to File File List M Fornat TIFF color Color Compression OFF File Name 13 12 IM 253710 01E 13 4 Saving Screen Images to Floppy Disk and SCSI Device Explanation The screen image can be saved to a floppy disk or to a SCSI device Selecting the destination medium and directory See the explanation given in Selecting the medium and directory in section 12 5 Selecting the data format file extension and data size Select the dat
131. selection box Check that Format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave X Y X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Wave 3 4 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the waveform menu Press the Graticule soft key to select E or Format Wave Wave Setting J Wave Display 4 Wave Format Single Tnterpolate Fal ty Graticule a Scale Value DFF ON Trace Label DR o Mapping Fixed 9 12 IM 253710 01E 9 5 Changing the Graticule Explanation Select the grid or cross scale to display on the screen from the following list of choices Grid display No grid or cross scale display Cross scale display IM 253710 01E 9 13 Aejdsiq wiojonem el 9 6 Turning ON OFF the scale display WUUUUULE Procedure CONFIGURATION O SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER TRIG D ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE copy wut ca MENU ELEMENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER SHIFT 1 2 CO Jt CH7 CH8 VOLTAGE CURRENT Vz SS ORT AB BRD SINGLE
132. selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 50Vpk to 1 Vpk and Auto Press the SELECT key to confirm the new input range O OV Pe o When Pulse is selected in the latter section Selecting the revolution sensor signal type The input range is fixed to 5Vpk Selectable when the revolution Fixed to 5Vpk when the revolution sensor signal type is Analog sensor signal type is Pulse Motor Module Power Module Each Speed Ch7 Torque Ch8 Pn Speech Torg Range L E ES Range ane Cs sense Type Analog Pu OUR Sense Type Analog_ Pulse Freq Range 2k ZOOKHz zoUpk Line Power Module CALL Motor Module Filter OFF 10Upk Zero Cross Filter SUpk Scaling 1 0000 2Upk 1 9000 Unit 1Upk a Pulse N Auto Pole Sync Speed source OUUUOUL IM 253710 01E 15 3 Sa NpoOW JOJO 0 lqe2ddy uoloUNY uonenjesra 10 0N 15 2 Setting the Input Range of Revolution Sensor and Torque Meter Signals Selecting the input range of the torque meter signal 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select Range under Torque Ch8 8 Press the SELECT key to display the input range selection box 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 50Vpk to 1Vpk and Auto 10 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new input range Selecting the revolution sensor signal type 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select Sense Type
133. senzor I Range 1000nUpk_ TeApk__ TeApK__ Sensor Ratio nvyAdl__ 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 L 0 0000 Line Filter OFF OFF Zero Cross Filter Scaling Pt Ratio 0 0000 0 0000 3 0000 gnm Ct Ratio mi 0 0000 0000 0 0000 Scaling Factor 0 0000 5 0900 3 0090 Setting the power coefficient 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Scaling Factor of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to display the power coefficient setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the power coefficient For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Power Module Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 20A Shunt ZOA Shunt 20A Shunt 20A Shunt U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk Z000Upk Terninal BA_pen zoa SA Sen_zoa pA Sen_zon bal Sen_Z6n I Range 1006nUpk_ TeApK__ ToApK__ Sensor Ratio muvA C 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 L 0 0009 Line Filter w oF orr__ zero Cross Filter OFF___ COF OFF___ scaling OP a BFF on g Pt Ratio 5 0000 0 0000 5 0000 Ct Ratio 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Scaling C Factor 0 00
134. setting the time base to external clock and applying a clock signal to the external clock input connector that has a frequency that is 4096 times the fundamental frequency of the input signal the harmonics of higher orders can be measured more accurately When acquiring sampled data with the time base set to external clock and a clock with a frequency outside the specifications or the clock is not input the acquisition of the sampled data may not operate properly In some cases this may corrupt the normal sampled data acquired the previous time to the partitioned acquisition memory 6 6 IM 253710 01E 6 4 Selecting the PLL Source for Harmonic Measurement For a functional description see section 1 2 The following section applies when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy nu ca f MENU gt S j S LEMENT FILTER FILTE El SINGLE Suge start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME VOLTAGE IN CH4 CH6 cH8 curRENT Q T ay a pes e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key WUUOU0UE Procedure Set the measurement mode to harmonic measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode
135. soft key places marks on the selected directory and all files in that directory Selecting a medium and pressing the All Set soft key places marks on all the directories and files on the selected medium Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box See the explanation given in Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box in section 12 8 Properties See the explanation given in Properties in section 12 5 Note You cannot copy files while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON fan error occurs while copying multiple files the files after the error will not be copied Directory attributes cannot be changed Ifa file with the same name exists at the destination copying is not allowed You cannot copy the same files to another directory immediately after copying those files You must again select the files you wish to copy When File Item is Wave Data Type is Binary and Filter is Item copying a file with a WVF extension that has a mark causes the file with the same name with the HDR extension to be copied When Filter is All only the files that have the marks are copied 12 36 IM 253710 01E 12 10 Changing the Directory File Name Creating a Directory Procedure CONFIGURATION TRIG D 5 SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH cursor zoom REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCA
136. suoneiedg uoWWOD a 4 6 Using the Help Function Procedures Explanation TRIG D CONFIGURATION O SETUP INPUT WEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM y REMOTE MENU ELEMENTS FILTER 7 SINGLE i STAAF START STOP 1 ABORT e i CH3 CH5 cH7 voLtaGE CH4 CH6 CH8 curreNT ail Jt e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key WUOUUULE i Displaying the help window 1 Press the HELP key to open the help window 2 Press the operation key or soft key corresponding to the setup parameters you wish to check The setup data related to the pressed key are displayed Closing the help window 3 Press the HELP key when the help window is being displayed The help window disappears When the HELP key is pressed a help window is displayed that contains information related to the soft key menu or jog shuttle menu that was displayed immediately before the help key was pressed If you press a key while the help window is being displayed help information related to the pressed key is displayed 4 8 IM 253710 01E Chapter 5 Setting the Measurement Mode and Range 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode Procedure Explanation For a functional description see section 1 2 TRIG D SETU
137. temperature and humidity are within the specifications 3 2 Check that noise is not affecting the measurement 3 1 3 4 Check the wiring of the measurement cable 3 4 to 3 10 Check the wiring method 3 7 to 3 10 5 3 Check that the line filter is turned OFF 5 7 Check the measurement computation period settings 10 1 Reboot the instrument 3 11 Keys do not work Check the REMOTE indicator If the REMOTE indicator is ON press the LOCAL key to turn it OFF Do a key test If it is abnormal the instrument needs servicing 15 3 Triggering does not occur Check the trigger conditions chap 7 Check that the trigger source is being applied 7 2 Cannot make harmonic measurements Check the PLL source settings 6 4 Check that the PLL source input signal is within the specifications 6 4 chap 17 Cannot print The printer head may be damaged or worn out The instrument needs servicing Cannot recognize the medium Check that the cables are properly connected 12 2 Check the format of the medium If necessary format the medium 12 4 The medium may be damaged Cannot save data to the selected medium Check the format of the medium If necessary format the medium 12 4 Check that the write protect is disabled lt Check the free space on the medium Remove unnecessary files as necessary or use a new medium 12 4 Cannot set or control the instrument via the communication interface Check that the GP IB address or the parameter settings o
138. that are installed 258 data points 43 functions x 6 elements are saved even when there is one module installed The same data are saved for n 1 n and F1 to F4 on all elements regardless of whether or not the modules are installed In places where measurement functions are not computed or are NAN 0x7FC00000 is saved 0x7F800000 and OxFF800000 are saved when the data values are positive infinity and negative infinity respectively App 20 IM 253710 01E Appendix 6 Float File Format When power measurement modules and motor module are installed Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 IA 2B Address Numerical Data Address Numerical Data andreas Numerical Data Address Numerical Data Address Numerical Data Address Numerical Data 0000 Urms OOAC Urms 0158 Urms 0204 Urms 02B0 Urms 035C Urms 0004 Umn 00BO Umn 015C Umn 0208 Umn 02B4 Umn 0360 Umn 0008 Udc 00B4 Udc 0160 Udc 020C Udc 02B8 Udc 0364 Udc 000C Uac 00B8 Uac 0164 Uac 0210 Uac 02BC Uac 0368 Uac 0010 Irms OOBC Irms 0168 Irms 0214 Irms 02CO Irms 036C Irms 0014 Imn 00CO Imn 016C Imn 0218 Imn 02C4 Imn 0370 Imn 0018 Idc 00C4 Idc 0170 Idc 021C Idc 02C8 Idc 0374 Idc 001C lac 00C8 lac 0174 lac 0220 lac 02CC lac 0378 lac 0020 P 0O0CC P 0178 P 0224 P 02D0 P 037C P 0024 S ooDO S 017C S 0228 S 02D4 S 0380 S 0028 Q 00D4 Q 0180 Q 022C Q 02D8 Q 0384 Q 002C 00D8 A 0184 0230 A 02DC i 0388 i 0030 6 OODC o 0188 6 0234 6 02E0 6 038C 6 0034 fU OOEO FU 018C fU 0238 fU 02E4 NAN
139. the potential transformer is extremely small the active power of the potential transformer that is measured needs to be compensated In such case set the compensating equation and the coefficient Corrected power Pc is a measurement function in the normal measurement mode Selecting the applicable standard Select the standard from the following choices The equation varies depending on the selected standard 1EC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 Equation P Pc Urms J Umn Pc Corrected Power P Active power Urms True rms voltage Umn Voltage rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value P4 P2 Coefficient as defined in the applicable standard see Setting the coefficient Pi Pal IEC76 1 1993 Equation Po P x Umn ums Umn Pc Corrected Power P Active power Urms True rms voltage Umn Voltage rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Setting the coefficient Set coefficients P1 and P2 Set the coefficients in the range from 0 0001 to 9 9999 Note ___ The equations of apparent power and corrected power are applied to measurement functions in the normal measurement mode IM 253710 01E 10 17 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 5 Averaging Procedure For a functional description see section 1 7 TRIG D CONFIGURATION O ACQ DISPLAY MATH cursoR zoom REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL Led SHIFT coor ron an MENU ELEMENT
140. the File List dialog box in section 12 8 Properties See the explanation given in Properties in section 12 5 Note You cannot rename a directory file or create a new directory while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON Directory attributes cannot be changed If a file with the same name exists in the same directory renaming is not allowed If a directory with the same name exists in the same directory the directory cannot be created When File Item is Wave Data Type is Binary and Filter is Item renaming the name of the selected file with a WVF extension causes the file with the same name with the HDR extension to be changed When Filter is All only the selected files are changed 12 40 IM 253710 01E Chapter 13 Outputting Screen Image Data Installing the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option Paper Feeding 13 1 Paper Roll for Printing The printer uses a dedicated roll of paper provided by YOKOGAWA Do not use any other type of paper roll When using the printer for the first time use the roll of paper that is included in the package Order extra rolls from your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Part No B9850NX Specifications Thermal sensitive paper 30 m Sold in Packs of 5rolls Handling the Roll of Paper The paper is a thermal sensitive paper that changes color with the application
141. the copy setting menu File Fornat L Function L W File Item d Functio Delete Setup Format A C Ea C ay F Load Fornat L NakeDir C r i C ii C 4 ve C C IM 253710 01E 12 33 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 9 Copying Files Selecting the source medium and directory 5 The procedures are the same as Selecting the source medium and Selecting the source directory in section 12 5 Changing the file attribute 6 The procedures are the same as Changing the file attribute in section 12 8 Selecting the source file one at a time 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file 8 Press the Set Reset soft key If an mark is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List dialog box the file will be copied If the is not displayed the file will not be copied Go to step 12 Selecting all copy source files at once 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file directory or a medium 10 Press the All Set soft key Depending on whether a file directory or medium is selected before pressing the All Set key the marks are either displayed to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all files in that directory displayed next to the selected directory and all files in that directory or displayed next to all directories and files on the selected medium see the Explanation These directories and f
142. the external trigger output connector It may damage the instrument Trigger output terminal A CMOS level signal is output when a trigger occurs The level is normally high but goes low when a trigger occurs A EXT TRIG OUT Specifications Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Output level CMOS Output logic LI negative logic Output delay time within 1 us 1 sampling period Output hold time 200 ns or more at low level Output Circuit Diagram Timing Chart 5 V 220 Q Trigger output signal 77 NW Trigger activated time at the trigger position Y Internal trigger Output delay time Trigger output signal ta l H Output hold time g suo1 1 d 0 194 0 pue yndyno 13611 jeusayxXy Note For the handling of the external trigger input see section 7 2 Selecting the Trigger Source IM 253710 01E 14 1 14 2 Selecting the Message Language Setting the Brightness of the Screen Procedure Config CONFIGURATION TRIG D ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE SHIFT orr maa MENU Eems D FIL ER WUOUUUUUB TER FILTER FILTER FILTI 7 START STOP 2 ABORT VOLTAGE ZN CH4 CH6 CH8 current Q e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press th
143. the measurement mode to normal 5 1 mode 804 Cannot change this parameter while running Press the START STOP key to stop acquisition 4 3 805 Cannot change this parameter when averaging Turn OFF the averaging function 10 5 is ON 806 Cannot change this parameter when any of Turn OFF all user defined functions 10 3 the user defined functions is ON 807 Cannot change this parameter when either Turn OFF both MATH1 and MATH2 11 2 MATH1 or MATH2 is ON IM 253710 01E 16 3 g uonsedsu pue asueuazuien HunooysajqnoiL 16 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Codes Messages Actions Sections 808 Cannot change this parameter during numerical display 809 Cannot change this parameter during vector display 810 Cannot change this parameter during bar graph display 814 Duplicated Name Change the label string 9 7 817 Cannot change Please change X Trace in the X Y menu 9 11 819 Cannot change when Channel Display is OFF Set the channel display ON or make appropriate 9 1 or Math settings are invalid Math settings 823 Cannot change when started 827 Illegal math expression Input a correct computing equation 10 3 11 2 834 Duplicate SCSI ID Set different ID numbers 12 3 840 Illegal input value Error in System Operation Codes Messages Actions Sections 901 Failed to backup setup data Will initialize 3 11
144. the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for the torque signal input appears For the procedure see chapter 15 Selecting the current input terminal N Press the Terminal soft key to select 5A or 20A 20A cannot be selected on the power measurement module 253751 Selecting the current range Press the I Range soft key to display the current range selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the current range from 10Apk to 0 1Apk and Auto or 100Apk to 1Apk and Auto when the current input terminal is 5A or 20A respectively Press the SELECT key to confirm the new current range IM 253710 01E 5 9 obuey pue spo Jusweinseay y Buas a 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input EHZ Wave Display ON Terminal CHEZ Wave Display mo o Terminal Se fect BA Sen zen M I Range 4Apk H I Range 10Apk ZApk 10Apk 1Apk 4Apk le U doom 0 2Apk O Vv 2oon x 1 1Apk xO 1 Auto WJUUUUUUE Explanation Setting the voltage and current ranges The voltage and current ranges can be set using the full screen menu or channel setting menu There are two types of ranges fixed and auto Fixed range Voltage range Select 2000Vpk 1200Vpk 600Vpk 300Vpk 200Vpk 120Vpk 60Vpk or 30Vpk Current range For the 5 A current input terminal Select 10Apk 4Apk 2Apk 1Apk 0 4Apk 0 2Ap
145. the range PLL synchronization may fail In this case set the measurement range so that the amplitude of the PLL source signal is larger than 30 of the range rating The harmonics of higher orders can be measured more accurately by using an external clock signal that has a frequency that is an integer multiple of the fundamental frequency of the signal being measured The external clock must be a continuous clock Burst signals cannot be used There is no function available to frequency divide the external clock signal on this instrument When acquiring sampled data with the time base set to external clock and the frequency of the PLL source is lost cannot be detected the acquisition of the sampled data may not operate properly 6 8 IM 253710 01E Chapter 7 Setting the Trigger 7 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode Procedure For a functional description see section 1 4 Gi serur INPUT MEASURE frricaen ESC L DISPLAY MATH cursoR zoom FILE MISC HELP LOCA CHF copy nu ca MENU i C LEMENS D FILTER y SINGLE SINGLE START STOP ABORT 1 gt z zs a l l cH1 cH3 cH5 cH7 vorace 7N Eeh CH8 CURRENT SH St ee e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Doou 1 Press the TRIGGER key to display the Trigger setting menu 2 Pre
146. this manual may differ from the actual screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders 1st edition April 1999 2nd edition April 2000 All Rights Reserved Copyright 1999 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 253710 01E Checking the Contents of the Package PZ4000 Main Unit Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate on the side panel match those on the order MODEL SUFFIX YOKOGAWA Made in Japan MODEL and SUFFIX codes Model Code Suffix Code Specifications 253710 100 to 120 200 to 240 VAC The input module is not included with the main unit
147. time axis the area between the display points rasters is no longer continuous This function interpolates between the points so that the waveform appears to be connected Select the interpolation mode from the following choices No interpolation When there are 500 points or more of sampled data When there are less than 500 points of sampled data Linearly interpolate between two points When there are 500 points or more of sampled data Connects the dots vertically When there are less than 500 points of sampled data IM 253710 01E 9 11 Aejdsiq wiojonem el 9 5 Changing the Graticule WUUUUULE Procedure CONFIGURATION O SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER TRIG D ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE copy wut ca MENU ELEMENTS FILTER FILTER F 5 a E SHIFT 1 2 CO Jt CH7 CH8 VOLTAGE CURRENT Vz SS ORT AB BRD SINGLE SUGE stant sToP XJ ff CS Cd e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Select a display format to display the waveforms For the procedures see section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu Press the Format soft key to display the display format
148. time varies depending on the SCSI device Medium Normal Quick MO 128 MB Approx 10 min Approx 15 s MO 230 MB Approx 10 min Approx 15 s External HDD 1 GB Approx 20 min Approx 15 s 12 8 IM 253710 01E 12 4 Formatting the Disk Selecting the number of partitions The external hard disk can be divided into several partitions for use Select the number of partitions in the range from 1 to 10 If the number of partitions is set to 2 the hard disk is divided into two partitions named SCO and SC1 5 for products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 When formatting a large hard disk select the number of partitions so that each partition does not exceed 2 GB If the total capacity of all partitions exceeds 20 GB the hard disk cannot be formatted 10GB for products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 The selection of the number of partitions only applies to hard disk storage devices For all other devices it is handled as one partition Information about the medium The following information is listed for the selected medium Media Name Name of the medium Media Size Total capacity Used Space Used space Vacant Space Free space Partition Size Number of partitions If you press the Media Info soft key when an MS DOS formatted floppy disk is inserted in the floppy disk drive the information about the floppy disk is displayed Note For
149. to 8 kHz 16 Hz to 800 Hz and 1 Hz to 40 Hz Amplitude input range 5 V Effective amplitude 1 V Peak to Peak or more Input waveform 50 duty cycle square wave Accuracy h ai suoleoyioeds 0 05 of reading Except the observation time is greater than or equal to 300 times the period of the pulse IM 253710 01E 17 25 17 17 Motor Module 253771 Item Specification External Dimensions Unit mm 73 52 242 Attachment surface 2 g a a z AAAAAA lo E q E EA 17 26 IM 253710 01E Appendix Appendix 1 Relationship between the Observation Time Sampling Rate and Record length The relationship between the observation time sampling rate and record length when the time base is set to internal clock are shown below When the time base is set to external clock the observation time is determined from the record length and the frequency of the external clock For example if the frequency of the external clock is 100 kHz and the record length is 100 k words the observation time is approximately 1 s For Normal Measurement Mode When the rec
150. total 8 18 IM 253710 01E 8 5 Changing the Displayed Items of the Harmonic Measurement Data For a functional description see section 1 5 This section applies when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement CONFIGURATION TRIG D 7 SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy nu ca MENU CELEMENTS OOOO FILTER FILTER FILTER 7 SINGLE j Saar START STOP ABORT VOLTAGE 7N EE CURRENT ii E gt e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key WUUOU0UE CH7 CH8 Cc Procedure Set the measurement mode to harmonic measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Harmonics Set the display format of the numerical data to something other than gt List For the procedures see section 8 4 Displaying Harmonic Measurement Data 2 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu Check that Format is set to Numeric Numeric Wave Numeric Bar or Numeric X Y Check that Item Amount is set to 8 16 Single List Dual List or List X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with f
151. using wiring method A PLL source For procedures see section 5 1 When measuring harmonics the fundamental period period of the fundamental signal must be determined in order to analyze the higher orders The PLL phase locked loop source is the signal that is used to determine the fundamental period Specify a signal that has the same period as the signal being measured Selecting a signal with little distortion or fluctuation for the PLL source will result in a stable harmonic measurement An ideal signal would be a rectangular wave with an amplitude that is greater than or equal to 50 of the measurement range see section 1 3 IM 253710 01E 1 9 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods Measurement Computation Period For procedures see section 10 1 During normal measurement mode There are three methods of selecting the period The measurement computation period is set using one of the methods and the numerical data are measured or calculated using only sampled data within the period 1 For information on the sampled data see section 1 3 Acquiring Data Voltage and Current Signals 2 However when the method of selecting the period is set to zero crossing the numerical data of the maximum values Peak of voltage and current are determined over the entire screen display record length Thus other measurement functions such as U pk U pk I pk I pk CfU Cfl FfU and Ffl that a
152. versions 666 File is now being accessed Execute after access is made 667 Cannot be executed while running Press START STOP key to stop acquisition 4 3 668 Cannot find HDR file Check the file 12 6 16 2 IM 253710 01E 16 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Codes Messages Actions Sections 669 Cannot find INF file Check the file 670 No ch is displayed Turn ON the display of the appropriate channel 9 1 671 Save data not found Check for presence of data 12 5 to 12 7 672 This model does not have the SCSI interface page ii 673 SCSI controller failure Maintenance service is required 674 Initializing file system Please wait 675 Cannot load this file 679 Printer error Maintenance service is required 680 Move the release arm to the HOLD position 13 1 681 Paper empty Load a roll chart 13 1 682 Printer over heat Power off immediately E 683 684 No built in printer on this model Check the specifications to see whether or not the page ii optional printer is provided 685 Printer time out Maintenance service is required E5 686 Centronics printer error Turn the power of the printer from OFF to ON E 687 Centronics printer off line 688 No paper 689 Centronics interface in use 690 Can t detect printer Turn ON t
153. x100000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x50000 x50000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x20000 x100000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x50000 x100000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x50000 x50000 x50000 x50000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x20000 x20000 x20000 x20000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x10000 x10000 1 2 5 5 steps x5000 x5000 1 2 5 5 steps x2000 x2000 2 5 5 steps x1000 x1000 1 2 5 5 steps x500 1 2 5 5 steps 1 2 5 5 steps 2 5 5 steps 1 2 5 5 steps 1 2 5 5 steps 1 2 5 5 steps 1 2 5 5 steps 9 22 IM 253710 01E 9 8 Zooming on the Waveform Setting the zoom position When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the zoom position is set in units of time When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the zoom position is set in units of data point If the Main waveform and the Z1 or Z2 waveforms are displayed simultaneously a zoom box indicating the zoom position appears in the display frame of the Main waveform Thus the zoom position can be checked When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the zoom box can be moved in the range from 0 s the left end of the screen to the observation time the right end of the screen When the time base is set to external
154. 0 IM 253710 01E 9 1 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display Displaying numerical data and the waveform 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric Wave 4 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection For the procedures related to setting the numerical display see chapter 8 sa C Se lect g Format Nuner ic Numeric C Yave Item Amount me 3 C Vector C Numer ic Bar Reset Wave Bar Exec H Numeric Disp Itens Displaying the waveform and the bar graph 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Wave Bar 4 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection The bar graph is useful when making harmonic measurements For the procedures related to setting the bar graph display see section 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data sa C Se lect i Format Nuner ic Numeric C Wave Item Amount ea i C Vector Numer ic Wave C Numer ic Bar Reset Wave Bar Exec H Numeric Disp Itens Displaying waveform and X Y waveform 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Wave X Y 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later For the procedures related to setting the X Y waveform display see section 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform Display Select g Format Nuner ic Numeric Wave Item Amount X Y BH Bar Vector Num
155. 0 kW 2 40000 kW 3 60000 kW 7 20000 kW 14 4000 kW 24 0000 kw 5 digits 900 00 W 1 8000 kW 3 6000 kW 6 0000 kW 9 0000 kW 18 000 kW 36 000 kW 60 000 kW oe 6 digits 900 000 w 1 80000 kw 3 60000 kw 6 00000 kw 9 00000 kw 18 0000 kw 36 0000 kw 60 0000 kw 5 digits 1 8000 kW 3 6000 kW 7 2000 kW 12 000 kw 18 000 kW 36 000 kW 72 000 kW 120 00 kW 20 6 digits 1 80000 kW 3 60000 kW 7 20000 kW 12 0000 kW 18 0000 kW 36 0000 kW 72 0000 kW 120 000 kw m 5digits 3 6000kW 7 2000kW 14 400kW 24 000kW 36 000kW 72 000kW 144 00kW 240 00 kW 6 digits 3 60000 kW 7 20000 kW 14 4000 kW 24 0000 kW 36 0000 kW 72 0000 kW 144 000 kW 240 000 kw jop Scigits_ 9 0000 kw 18 000kw 36 000kw 60 000kW 90 000 kW 180 00 kw 360 00 kw 600 00 kw 6 digits 9 00000 kW 18 0000 kw 36 0000 kw 60 0000 kw 90 0000 kw 180 000 kw 360 000 kw 600 000 kw IM 253710 01E 5 13 obuey pue spo Jusweinseay oy bumas eo 5 4 Setting the Measurement Range when Using an External Current Sensor For a functional description see section 1 3 1 EA 2 iad 5 ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE ue se re iocar SHIFT or uaa MENU ELEMENTS FILTER FILTER ILTER FILTER 7 SINGLE Slant START STOP 1 2 ABORT cH1 cH3 cH cH7 vorrace a Cr tL cacococo fume A e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e
156. 00 0000 L 0 0000 IM 253710 01E 5 21 obuey pue spo Jusweinseay oy Buas a 5 5 Setting the Scaling Function when using an External PT or CT Setting the Scaling Function for All Elements Sets the scaling function of the power measurement module for all elements at once This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu 2 Press the Power Module All soft key to display the All power module setting dialog box The menu does not appear for elements without modules If the sensor input module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for element 4 does not appear Turn ON OFF the scaling function 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Scaling of element 1 4 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF The Scaling of all other modules that are displayed are set to the same value ON or OFF Setting the PT ratio 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the PT Ratio of element 1 4 Press the SELECT key to display the PT ratio setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the PT ratio For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box The PT Ratio of all other modules that are displayed are set to the same PT ratio Pover Module Alt Power Module
157. 000000E 07 0 0000000E 00 S App 16 IM 253710 01E Appendix 5 ASCII Header File Format Date Time Group3 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Group4 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Privatelnfo Form InputModule Mode ModelVersion Note 1999 01 03 20 36 59 4 1 Ch1 CAL 1024 4 5777764E 03 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32767 32768 1 0000000E 06 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 4 1 Ch5 CAL 1024 7 6296274E 02 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32767 32768 1 0000000E 06 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 8 000000e 06 253752 253752 NORMAL 2 01 1999 01 03 20 36 59 Ch2 CAL 1024 3 8148137E 04 0 0000000E 00 IS2 A 32767 32768 1 0000000E 06 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 Ch6 CAL 1024 3 8148137E 04 0 0000000E 00 IS2 A 32767 32768 1 0000000E 06 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 253752 253752 1999 01 03 20 36 59 Ch3 CAL 1024 7 6296274E 02 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32767 32768 1 0000000E 06 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 Ch7 CAL 1024 7 6296274E 0
158. 01 to 99999 9999 By setting the torque per volt of input voltage the torque is derived from the following equation Torque Scaling factor x Input voltage from the torque meter Setting the unit of torque Number of characters Eight characters or less Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or a space Note To set the unit of the motor output that is determined in section 15 7 to Q set the unit of torque to Nm When the unit of torque is set to Nm see section 15 5 the motor output is determined in terms of Q If the unit of torque is set to some other unit the unit of motor output can be converted to Q by multiplying the conversion value in the table below Unit of Torque Conversion Value Nm 1 0000 kgfm 9 80665 ftlb 1 35582 ozin 0 00706155 Ibin 0 112985 IM 253710 01E 15 15 sS jNpoN 10101 0 lqe2ddy uolNOUNY uonenjesrg 10 0N 15 6 Setting the Motor s Number of Poles Used to Compute the Synchronous Speed and the Slip CONFIGURATION ACQ 1 ie s DISPLAY MATH cuRSOR zoom FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy mui ca MENU 1 F fy S m i e SINGLE i Sant START STOP ABORT E SSS e e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key WUOUUUUE Procedure
159. 1 4 Trigger The trigger is used to display the sampled data stored in the acquisition memory as waveforms on the screen The trigger is activated when the specified trigger condition is met Trigger Source For procedures see section 7 2 Trigger source refers to the signal that is used in checking the trigger condition Trigger Slope For procedures see section 7 3 Slope refers to the movement of the signal such as the movement from a low level to a high level rising or the movement from a high level to a low level falling When the slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope Trigger Level For procedures see section 7 3 Trigger level refers to the level that is used to judge the passing level of the trigger slope or the condition of the trigger source Trigger Type For procedures see section 7 3 7 4 There are two types of triggers edge trigger and window trigger Edge trigger A trigger occurs when the trigger source rises above or falls below a preset trigger level The trigger source can be selected as the input signals of CH1 through CH8 or as the external trigger input signal Trigger Level l j Trigger Source 1 A trigger occurs at this point if rising edge 4 is selected Window trigger A certain window width is set and a trigger occurs when the trigger source level enters this window IN or exits from this window OUT IN OUT 7 Jrigger is activat
160. 1 and 2 simultaneously The distance between them is kept constant Cursor Type hw Cursori if 82 00ms i Cursor2 7 LW 880 0 ms O00uUBuL 11 14 IM 253710 01E 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor When H amp V is Selected Selecting the waveform on which to place the H and V cursors 4 Press the Cursor1 Trace soft key to display the box used to select the waveform on which to place the V cursor 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform from CH1 to Math2 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Moving the H cursor Moving H cursor 1 7 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 8 Turn the jog shuttle to move H cursor 1 Moving H cursor 2 9 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor2 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move H cursor 2 Moving H cursor 1 and 2 simultaneously 11 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 12 Turn the jog shuttle to move H cursor 1 and 2 simultaneously The distance between them is kept constant Moving the V cursor Moving V cursor 1 Cursors 1 13 Press the Cursor3 Cursor4 I soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursors I 14 Turn the jog shuttle to move V cursor 1 Moving V cursor 2 Cursor4 I 15 Press the Cursor3 Cursor4
161. 1192448 byte File Nane Size Date Attribute a F 1 sce 1 SETUPOO SET 8825 1999 01 03 17 31 R W JUUUUUUU Selecting the file to be loaded 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the file Loading the file 10 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the loading operation 11 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec Property Filter Load Exec WJUUUUUUE IM 253710 01E 12 13 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes G 12 5 Saving and Loading Setup Parameters Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box The procedures are the same as Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box on page 12 12 Viewing the properties The procedures are the same as Viewing the properties on page 12 12 Explanation CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the mark is blinking It can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Setup Parameters that are saved The setup parameters of each key existing at the time of the saving operation are saved However date and time communication parameters and SCSI ID numbers are not saved
162. 16 2 628 2 509 154 803 _ uol IUN JUSWdINSeO Page scroll of the list The data of all harmonics cannot fit on one screen Thus a scroll function is provided so that all data can be viewed Resetting the Numerical Display For procedures see section 8 2 8 4 When displaying numerical data in the normal measurement or harmonic measurement mode the order in which the measurement functions are displayed can be reset toa default One default set is provided for each measurement mode IM 253710 01E 1 25 1 6 Waveform Display Vertical Amplitude Axis and Horizontal Time Axis Vertical amplitude axis The vertical display range is set to the specified measurement range For example if the voltage measurement range is set to 300 Vpk then the display range is set so that the top of the screen is 300 Vpk and the bottom is 300 Vpk with the zero input line at the center When the measurement range is When the same signal is measured set to 300 Vpk with the measurement range set to 600 Vpk 300 Vpk 600 Vpk Zero input line 300 Vpk j 600 Vpk 1 grid 1 div 1 grid 1 div 75V 150V Note Display resolution of the vertical axis Setting a measurement range that is close the maximum amplitude of the signal results in a more accurate waveform display The instrument uses a 12 bit A
163. 198 U pk 0244 U pk 02FO NAN 039C NAN 0044 l pk OOFO I pk 019C l pk 0248 l pk 02F4 NAN 03A0 NAN 0048 l Pk 00F4 l Pk 01A0 l Pk 024C l Pk 02F8 NAN 03A4 NAN 004C CfU OOF8 CfU 01A4 CfU 0250 CfU 02FC NAN 03A8 NAN 0050 Cfl OOFC Cfl 01A8 Cfl 0254 Cfl 0300 NAN O3AC NAN 0054 FfU 0100 FfU 01AC FfU 0258 FfU 0304 NAN 03B0 NAN 0058 Ffl 0104 Ffl 01BO Ffl 025C Ffl 0308 NAN 03B4 NAN 005C Z 0108 Z 01B4 Z 0260 Z 030C Z 03B8 Z 0060 Rs 010C Rs 01B8 Rs 0264 Rs 0310 Rs 03BC Rs 0064 Xs 0110 Xs 01BC Xs 0268 Xs 0314 Xs 03CO Xs 0068 Rp 0114 Rp 01CO Rp 026C Rp 0318 Rp 03C4 Rp 006C Xp 0118 Xp 01C4 Xp 0270 Xp 031C Xp 03C8 Xp 0070 Pc 011C Pc 01C8 Pc 0274 Pc 0320 Pc 03CC Pc 0074 n 0120 n 01CC n 0278 n 0324 n 03D0 n 0078 im 0124 1M 01D0 im 027C 1M 0328 1 y 03D4 1 007C F1 0128 F1 01D4 F1 0280 F1 032C F1 03D8 F1 0080 F2 012C F2 01D8 F2 0284 F2 0330 F2 O3DC F2 0084 F3 0130 F3 01DC F3 0288 F3 0334 F3 03E0 F3 0088 F4 0134 F4 01E0 F4 028C F4 0338 F4 03E4 F4 008C AUrms 0138 AUrms 01E4 AUrms 0290 AUrms 033C NAN 03E8 NAN 0090 AUmn 013C AUmn 01E8 AUmn 0294 AUmn 0340 NAN O3EC NAN 0094 AUdc 0140 AUdc 01EC AUdc 0298 AUdc 0344 NAN O3FO NAN 0098 AUac 0144 AUac 01FO AUac 029C AUac 0348 NAN 03F4 NAN 009C Alrms 0148 Alrms 01F4 Alrms 02A0 Alrms 034C NAN 03F8 NAN OOAO Almn 014C Almn 01F8 Almn 02A4 Almn 0350 NAN O3FC NAN 00A4 Aldc 0150 Aldc O1FC Aldc 02A8 Aldc 0354 NAN 0400 NAN 00A8 Alac 0154 Alac 0200 Alac 02AC Alac 0358 NAN 0404 NAN Note This format is fixed regardless of the number of modules
164. 2 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32767 32768 1 0000000E 06 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 253771 253771 1999 01 03 20 36 59 Ch4 CAL 1024 3 8148137E 04 0 0000000E 00 IS2 A 32767 32768 1 0000000E 06 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 Ch8 CAL 1024 3 8148137E 04 0 0000000E 00 IS2 A 32767 32768 1 0000000E 06 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 253771 253771 This header file format is common to many YOKOGAWA measurement instruments Therefore even data that are not needed by this instrument 0 data are included IM 253710 01E App 17 i xipueddy Appendix 5 ASCII Header File Format PublicInfo Common information FormatVersion Version No of YOKOGAWA s common header file Model Model name Endian Endian mode Big when the file was saved DataFormat Storage format Trace of the waveform data of the BINARY file GroupNumber The number of Group below TraceTotalNumber Total number of saved waveforms DataOffset Start position of the waveform data of the BINARY file Group1 Group information TraceNumber The number of waveforms in this group BlockNumber The number of blocks in this group TraceName Name of each waveform BlockSize Number of data points of each waveform in one block VResolution The value of coefficient VResolution of the Y axis converting equation of each waveform VOffse
165. 20kHz 0 0000 Ct Ratio 0 0000 AMHz 0 0000 Scaling Factor 6 0000 8 0006 Selecting the Input Filter for All Elements Selects the input filter of the power measurement module for all elements at once This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu 2 Press the Power Module All soft key to display the All power module setting l OUUUU0U0 Power Module C Each 3 Pouer Module CALL dialog box Power Module Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 20A Shunt ZOA Shunt 20A Shunt 20A Shunt U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk Terminal BA_pen zoa SA Sen_zoa pa Sen_zon fal Sen_Z6n I Range 1006nUpk_ TeApK__ ToApK__ Sensor Ratio nvAdl__ 0 0000 C 0 0000 C 0 0000 C Line Filter F OF orF___ zero Cross Filter OFF select F Scaling E p g Pt Ratio 6 6000 500HZ 0 0000 Ct Ratio 0 0000 20kHz 0 0000 Scaling Factor 6 0000 6 0006 The menu does not appear for elements without modules If the sensor input module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for element 4 does not appear Selecting the line filter 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Line Filter of element 1 4 Press the SELECT
166. 3 1 with respect to the fundamental signal of the voltage of element 1 U1 1 U1 I1 The phase difference of the fundamental signal of the current of element 1 11 1 with respect to the fundamental signal of the voltage of element 1 U1 1 U1 l2 The phase difference of the fundamental signal of the current of element 2 12 1 with respect to the fundamental signal of the voltage of element 1 U1 1 U1 I3 The phase difference of the fundamental signal of the current of element 3 13 1 with respect to the fundamental signal of the voltage of element 1 U1 1 Harmonic measurement function of the average or of the sum of the power measurement modules lt function The following six types of numerical data can be determined For details related to the determination of the measurement function see Appendix 2 Chars and numbers inside Measurement Function de 1 k All No UX Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Numerical data exist IX _ Yes Yes Yes Yes PX Yes Yes Yes Yes Sx Yes Yes Yes Yes Qy Always 0 Yes Yes Yes AX Yes Yes Yes Yes Measurement functions having parentheses have the following meanings depending on the characters or numbers that are inside the parentheses dc Indicates numerical data related to the DC component 1 Indicates numerical data related the fundamental signal k Indicates numerical data related to the 2nd to Nth order harmonics N is the upper lim
167. 3770 104 235m Rs 1 2 29685m 2 01449m 2 35409m 0 000 ZA ZB 5 1290 5 1124 4 5265 4 5112 1 1136 1 1657 5 0068 4 9914 4 9235 4 9043 4 9231 4 9039 0 0434 0 0394 4 9233 4 9041 0 056 0 0485 25 253 25 073 25 253 25 073 0 00220 0 00193 90 126 90 111 1 04173 1 04244 2 29685m 2 01449m ejeq 1 22 IM 253710 01E 1 5 Numerical Display a Changing the displayed items By selecting the display item the numerical data value that is displayed at the position 2 can be changed s Urms1 5 0517 V Urms1 5 0517 V Ummi 5 0516 VY Changing the measurement Umni 5 0516 V Udc1i 0 0315 function of the third item R Umi 5 0516 VY Uaci 5 0516 V Uaci 5 0516 VY Irnsi 5 0530 A Irnsi 5 0536 A Inni 5 6551 A Inni 5 9551 A Urns1 5 0517 V clomentof the third nonn Ummi 5 0516 U Udc2 0 0307 V Uaci 5 0516 V Irnsi 5 0530 A Inni 5 0551 A Numerical display during the harmonic measurement mode For procedures see section 8 4 8 5 Selecting the number of displayed items You can select either eight or 16 for the number of displayed items When the numerical data and waveform are displayed at the same time only half of the selected number of items are displayed All items cannot fit on one screen Thus a scroll function is provided so that all data can be viewed Example in which eight items are displayed U1 5 0545 V ae 4 7348 A 8 Pt 0 067 W amp 5 Sl 0 082 VA 3 YQl 0 047 var UD 4 0427
168. 4 ABORT CHT VOLTAGE P i rt CH8 cuRRENT SS CO JCC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key WUOUUUUB cna ona ens Procedure 1 Press the MISC key to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Information Graph Color 4 4 GPIB RS2Z32 Text Color 4 SCSI ID M Date Time Config Selftest WUUUUUUU 14 4 IM 253710 01E 14 3 Setting the Display Colors of the Screen Graph Color 4 Text Color Setting the color of graphical items 3 4 COND oa Selecting default or user Press the Graph Color soft key to display the graphics color setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to set the Mode to Default or User Setting user colors Press the User Color soft key to display the graphics color setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the item you wish to set Press the SELECT key The color level setting box appears Turn the jog shuttle to select the color level from 0 to 7 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Graph Color M Graph Color lode J wl Node Default Default d User Color W User Color CH3 CH4 CHSMathi CH6 Math2 CH CH8 WJUUUUUUU WJUUUUUUU
169. 482 932 21 0 0002 0 673 22 0 0006 2 175 Pthd 268 053 23 0 0003 0 993 24 6 0006 1 956 Cispa L Uthe Error 25 0 0007 2 248 26 0 0003 1 051 Fornat thf Error 2 68 0005 1 813 28 0 0004 1 263 or utif 8 000 29 0 0894 1 305 38 6 0003 8 957 q2 0 000kuvar 47 0 0063 21 224 48 0 0025 8 365 Nuner ic Itif 0 000 31 6 0902 0 791 32 6 0001 0 456 A2 0 81938 6 0005 1 739 5 0 0004 1 512 her 9 194 3 8 0002 0 517 3x 6 9005 1 631 145 022 51 0003 1 028 52 60 0007 2 389 Ten Anount hef 6 210 35 0 0005 2 100 36 6 0008 2 897 Uthd 1434 261 53 0 0014 4 713 54 0 0011 3 797 3 0 0011 3 768 38 6 0008 2 739 Ithd 8 230 55 06 0009 3 024 56 0 0006 1 688 Single List w 00017kU 39 0 00910 3 396 409 6 0022 7 29 Pthd 0 135 5 0 0012 4 229 58 0 0013 4 514 12 69 787 A 41 0 0016 5 296 42 0 0022 7 572 Uther Error 59 6 0006 2 003 68 6 0011 3 589 P2 0 001kU 43 0 09099 3 068 44 0 0054 18 201 Ithf Error 61 0 0906 2 112 62 0 0009 3 092 List Itens s2 0 001kUA 45 60 0035 11 721 46 00169 57 463 Utif 8 000 63 6 0008 2 081 64 8 0006 1 946 Itif 6 114 65 6 0008 2 823 66 0 0009 3 049 we 9 208 6 0 0006 2 173 68 0 0005 1 801 jg Order het 0 001 69 0 0004 1 516 70 0 0003 1 045 71 0 0094 1 265 72 6 0003 8 873 34 us 000821kU 73 8 0006 2 048 74 8 0002 9 580 13 o oiz A 75 0 0002 0 542 76 0 0007 2 291 0 0011 3 710 P3 0 0000ku 77 0 0005 2 087 78 0 0005 1 640 Page up 0 0005 1 753 s3 e000kUN 79 0 8011 3 778 B 0 0007 2 484 Scroll Exec 0 0008 2 104 g 0 0000kuar 681 8 0009 3 027 62
170. 5 Rs 1 26 Xs 1 27 Rp 1 28 Xp 1 29 Pc 1 30 n 1 31 1 1 32 F1 1 33 F2 1 34 F3 1 35 F4 1 36 AUrms 1 37 AUmn mean 1 38 AUdc 1 39 AUac 1 40 Alrms 1 41 Almn mean 1 42 Aldc 1 43 Alac 1 441050 wnt ene Displayed only for element 1 The following data are displayed when the motor module is installed Order Measurement Function Element 44 Speed 1 45 Torque 1 46 Sync 1 47 Slip 1 48 Pm 1 49 mA 1 50 nmB 1 App 14 IM 253710 01E Appendix 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data For the harmonic measurement mode 9 a o 2 Measurement Function Element Harmonic Order ONOaRWND 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 to 50 N22 e PONV COHHNnTV C Rs Xs Rp Xp Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf hef U1 U2 2 U1 U3 2 oU1 11 oU1 122 oU1 13 2 F172 F2 2 F3 F4 Total Total Total Total Total 1 Harmonic orders are displayed inside parentheses 2 Displayed only for element 1 The following data are displayed when the motor module is installed Order Measurement Function Element Harmonic Order 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Speed Trq dc Sync Slip Pm nmA nmB 1 EE E E E cor E a IM 253710 01E App 15 i x pu ddy Appendix 5 ASCII Header File Format INOKOGAWA ASCII FILE FORMAT PublicInfo FormatVersion Mo
171. 6 9005 1 532 a 3 8 27261 63 6 0009 2 997 84 8 00065 2 179 93 105 820 8S 6 0011 3 681 86 6 0010 3 481 Page Doun Uthd 1113 390 87 0999 3 095 88 6 0009 3 070 Scroll Exec Ithd 837 963 89 6 0014 4 775 8 0007 2 310 Pthd 33 279 91 40 0072 24 558 32 0 0146 49 630 Uthf Error 33 0 0947 15 875 1940 0019 6 411 C Page Up Scroll Exec Boun Scroll Exec IM 253710 01E 8 15 Aejdsiq jeouewnyn e 8 4 Displaying Harmonic Measurement Data Explanation For the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation and appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions For details regarding the wiring methods A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method Example The voltage of the 20th order harmonic of element 2 U2 20 20th order Element 2 Voltage The average of the current corresponding to the 30th order harmonic of the power measurement modules element that are wired using wiring method B I gt BBCSO 30th order function of wiring method B Current Selecting the display format Select the display format of the numerical data from the following choices No data conse are displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or there are no numerical data Numeric Only numerical data are displayed Numeric Wave The numerical data and waveform are displa
172. 619 V 3 0163 V 3 4937 V mns 4 97212 A m 4 97151 A ver 0 03889 A rer 4 97197 A mA Jik 5 000 A 15 00 A u 4567 or 0 0011 wa E 100 36 A 4 120 PP 0 4584 u Gi 90 53 a si 0 4584 wa W 0 3730 w ee L o pe e iiin eooo esa LLL amen IM 253710 01E 2 13 sled JO s sn pue soweN D 2 4 Input Modules Power Measurement Module Model 253751 Voltage input terminal Wire the voltage measurement cable Section 3 7 to 3 10 Current sensor input connector Connect the external sensor cable from the external current sensor Section 3 8 Current input terminal Wire current measurement cables Maximum rating is 5 Arms Sections 3 7 3 9 Model 253752 Voltage input terminal Wire the voltage measurement cable Section 3 7 to 3 10 Current sensor input connector Connect the external sensor cable from the external current sensor Section 3 8 Current input terminal Wire current measurement cables Two terminals are available for maximum ratings of 5 Arms and 20 Arms Sections 3 7 3 9 2 14 IM 253710 01E 2 4 Input Modules Sensor input module Model 253771 motor module Revolution sensor signal Input connector CH7 Connect a cable from an external revolution sensor Section 15 1 Torque meter signal Input connector CH8 Conne
173. 710 01E 7 3 Setting the Edge Trigger Explanation Setting the trigger level Note Selecting the trigger type Select the trigger type from the following choices Here select Edge Edge Sets the trigger type to edge trigger A trigger occurs when the trigger source rises above or falls below a preset trigger level Window Sets the trigger type to window trigger A certain window width is set and a trigger occurs when the trigger source level enters this window IN or exits from this window OUT For window trigger see section 7 4 Setting the Window Trigger Selecting the trigger slope Slope refers to the movement of the signal such as the movement from a low level to a high level rising or the movement from a high level to a low level falling When the slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope Select the trigger slope from the following choices The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal rises above the trigger level from a lower level The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal falls below the trigger level from a higher level 4 The trigger occurs on both the rising and falling cases Trigger level refers to the level that is used to judge the passing level of the trigger slope or the condition of the trigger source When the trigger type is set to Edge you specify the passing level of the trigger slope with the trigger level Se
174. 8 Aldc 0354 nmB 0400 nmB 00A8 Alac 0154 Alac 0200 Alac 02AC Alac 0358 NAN 0404 NAN Note This format is fixed regardless of the number of modules that are installed 258 data points 43 functions x 6 elements are saved even when there is one module installed The same data are saved for n 1 y and F1 to F4 on all elements regardless of whether or not the modules are installed In places where measurement functions are not computed or are NAN 0x7FC00000 is saved 0x7F800000 and OxFF800000 are saved when the data values are positive infinity and negative infinity respectively IM 253710 01E App 21 Ea xipueddy Appendix 6 Float File Format For harmonic measurement mode When the measurement function is U I or P The measured values of the harmonics and the harmonic distortion factors are saved Address Numerical Data Address Numerical Data 0000 Measured value Total 0004 Measured value DC component 07D8 Harmonic distortion factor of the DC component 0008 Fundamental component 07DC Harmonic distortion factor of the fundamental component 1st order 000C 2nd order harmonic component 07E0 Harmonic distortion factor of the 2nd order harmonic component L 07D4 500th order harmonic component OFAC Harmonic distortion factor of the 500th order harmonic component Note Even if the upper limit of the harmonic order under analysis is less than 500th order data up to 500th order are saved The data of the harmonic
175. 87 0 396 mr I1 4 7348 A a 0 0144 0 285 3 0 0182 0 384 f Pi 0 067 U 4 6 0068 0 135 4 0 0180 0 381 io 31 0 08 Ila 5 0 0059 0 11 5 0 0191 0 404 oO Qi 8 04 T 6 6 6048 6 056 6 6 0201 6 425 gt Al 0 8162 5 0 0037 0 072 0 0192 0 405 mr 1 5 27 4 8 0 0041 6 080 8 0 0223 0 472 oO Uthd 75 04 3 q 0 0021 0 041 J 0 0231 0 489 Q Ithd 7524 62 s 10 6 0021 0 043 10 0 0226 0 477 Pthd 3 05 5 di 0 0022 6 044 11 0 0282 0 596 o Uth Erre 12 6 0022 6 043 12 6 0289 6 611 ov Ithf Errc 9 13 8 9022 6 043 13 0 0294 0 621 Utif 1 56 O 14 0 0016 0 032 14 0 0399 0 844 gt Itif 4999 00 15 0 0018 0 035 15 0 0432 0 913 D wf 0 42 Q 16 0 0014 0 029 16 0 0470 0 992 hef 0 22 2 1 0 0009 6 018 1 0 0750 1 585 3 y 18 6 0013 6 026 18 6 1627 2 168 uz 5 0383 V 19 0 0015 0 030 13 0 1741 3 678 5 I2 0 0011 A 20 0 0012 0 023 20 4 7228 99 746 P2 0 000 U 21 9 0007 0 013 21 9 1928 4 072 i 32 0 000 VA 22 0 0012 0 023 22 0 0755 1 594 Harmonic distortion factor Numerical data of each harmonic gt list z Element and wiring method oO Elementi Elenent2 Elenent3 Elenent4 A B D u ty l1 4 0523 4 0364 4 0490 4 0520 4 0523 4 0364 c I tA 1 0 00074 6 005m 9 004m 8 0042 8 00074 6 605n P i l1 0 001 8 86862 0 00002 0 00002k 0 001 6 98002 oO 3 tA J 0 003 0 00002 0 00002 0 00002k 0 003 0 00002 3 Q var 1 0 003 0 00000 0 00000 0 0000ik 0 003 0 00000 o A E 1 6 33571 6 99896 6 99904 0 30485 0 33571 6 99896 5 o ad 1 109 616 2 620 2 509 a seesaaa
176. 99701710 04 15 NUMEROGO CSU 1993701703 17 46 Property WAVEOOO HDR 1999701703 17 39 R WAVEGOS WUF 1999701703 17 39 P 19993701710 04 15 NUMEROOO CSU 1993701703 17 46 Property WAVEOGO HDR 1999701703 17 39 R WAVEGOO UUF 1999701703 17 39 Filter Filter E 3 Aly E 3 Aly Attribute Attribute Delete Exec Delete Exec UOOU0UU EE m Deleting the files 11 Press the Delete Exec soft key All files with the marks are deleted l OUOUUUU Delete Function z Delete Set Reset ALL Set EE Property Filter a 3 All Attribute Delete Exec HE Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and Viewing the properties in section 12 5 12 30 IM 253710 01E 12 8 Changing the File Attribute Deleting Files Explanation CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the mark is blinking It can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the medium and directory See the explanation given in Selecting the medium and directory in section 12 5 Selecting the file attribute Select the attribute for each file from the following choices RW Re
177. A For the procedure to set 20A in this case see the previous section Setting the Range Using the Full Screen Menu for Each Element Selecting the current range Turn the jog shuttle to select the I Range of element 1 Press the SELECT key to display the current range selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the current range from 10Apk to 0 1Apk and Auto or 100Apk to 1 Apk and Auto when the current input terminal is 5A or 20A respectively Press the SELECT key to confirm the new current range The I Range of all other modules that are set to the same current input terminal Terminal as element 1 are set to the same current range 5 8 IM 253710 01E 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input U Range Terminal I Range Sensor Ratio nya Line Filter Zero Cross Filter Scaling Pt Ratio Ct Ratio Scaling Factor Pover Module A11 Power Module ATT Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 Standard 26A Shunt Standard Standard Standard 20A Shunt Standard Standard Z2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk U Range 2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ m Sen ea Sen_Z0A EA Sm Terninal
178. C Item Amount Numer ic Single List Dual List Numer ic Disp Itens List JUUUUUUE Scrolling the display When the number of displayed items is set to 8 or 16 8 Press the Numeric Disp Items soft key to display the menu used to select the number of displayed items 9 Press the Harm Item No soft key 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the highlight to another measurement function The data number of the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Harm Item No section of the menu The symbol representing the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Function section of the menu The element wiring method of the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Element section of the menu The harmonic order of the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the order section of the menu that is used to select the number of displayed items Disp tay 4 Format Nuneric Itens warn Item No Numeric 4 Item Amount M Function None Kl Element Element 1 Reset Exec Nuner ic Disp Itens IM 253710 01E 8 13 Aejdsiq jeouewny e 8 4 Displaying Harmonic Measurement Data When Single List or Dual List is selected 8 Turn the jog shuttle to move the highlight over the data corresponding to a different order The harmonic order of the data being highlighted is displayed in the Order section of the
179. CH7 and CH8 that measures the revolution sensor and torque meter signals It eliminates harmonic noise The cutoff frequency can be selected from the list of choices below Selecting OFF disables the filter OFF 100Hz and 500Hz Selecting the zero crossing filter This filter is inserted only into the frequency measurement circuit Zero crossing refers to the point at which the input signal crosses the center level of the amplitude This filter is used to accurately detect the zero cross point This instrument detects the zero crossing point with a hysteresis of approximately 3 5 of the specified input range of the revolution sensor signal or torque meter signal see section 15 2 The cutoff frequency can be selected from the list of choices below When the zero crossing filter is OFF and the line filter above is ON the cutoff frequency specified by the line filter is used as a zero crossing filter OFF 100Hz and 500Hz Note The line filter and zero crossing filter functions of CH7 do not operate when the signal type of the revolution sensor is set to Pulse The input filter can be used to remove the noise from the signal when the revolution sensor signal or torque meter signal is used as a PLL source see section 6 4 for harmonic measurement 15 10 IM 253710 01E 15 4 Setting the Scaling Factor the Pulse Count and Unit Used to Measure the rotating speed CONFIGURATION serene psec ACQ DISPLAY MATH
180. Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor2 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move H cursor 2 Moving H cursor 1 and 2 simultaneously 11 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 12 Turn the jog shuttle to move H cursor 1 and 2 simultaneously The distance between them is kept constant Cursor Type D C CJ Fase C EE am W Se lect he Cursort IM 253710 01E 11 13 siskjeuy WAIOJOAeM z 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor When Vertical is Selected Selecting the waveform on which to place the V cursor 4 Press the Cursor1 Trace soft key to display the box used to select the waveform on which to place the V cursor 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform from CH1 to Math2 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Moving the V cursor Moving V cursor 1 T Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 I soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 1 8 Turn the jog shuttle to move V cursor 1 Moving V cursor 2 9 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 I soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor2 I 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move V cursor 2 Moving V cursor 1 and 2 simultaneously 11 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 I soft key to set the jog shuttle control to both Cursor I and Cursor2 I 12 Turn the jog shuttle to move V cursor
181. Default For input module 253751 Item Setting Setup Mode Normal Wiring 1P2W 1P2W Display Resolution 5 digits PLL Source Ch1 Input U Range 2000Vpk Terminal 5A Range 10Apk Sensor Ratio 10 0000 Line Filter Off Zero Cross Filter Off Scaling Off Pt Ratio 1 0000 Ct Ratio 1 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 Measure Normal Mode On Period Zero Cross Sync Source Elementi Ch2 Element2 Ch4 Element3 Ch6 Element4 Ch8 AMeasure Off User Function Function Mode Off Unit V Expression URMS E1 Function2 Mode Off Unit A Expression IRMS E1 Function3 Mode Off Unit V Expression UPPK E1 Function4 Mode Off Unit A Expression IPPK E1 S Formula Urms Irms Averaging Mode Off Count 2 Phase 180Lead Lag PcFormula Pc Formula IEC76 1 1976 P1 0 5000 P2 0 5000 App 10 IM 253710 01E Appendix 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Item Setting Measure Harmonics Start Pos 0 User Function Function Mode Off Unit V Expression U E1 OR1 Function2 Mode Off Unit A Expression I E1 O0R1 Function3 Mode Off Unit Ww Expression P E1 OR1 Function4 Mode Off Unit VA Expression S E1 OR1 Min Order 1 Max Order 100 Thd Formula Total Trigger Mode Off Source Ch1 Type Edge Edge Slope Rise Level 0 0 Window Condition In Center Level 0 0 Width Level 25 0 Position 0 Delay 0 0us Display Format Numeric Wave Item Amount 8 Numeric Disp Items Norm Item No 1 Function Urms
182. Display setting menu mispraz ___ C Fornat or or or mL mun 5 0545 dc 1 0429 20 633 uneric PLL onun 5 0545 4 7348 49 1gio427 raise Z 3 0339 60 023 Freq 49Hz dc 1 0429 20 633 dc 0 0530 1 120 3 0 0144 0 285 4 0 0068 0 135 A Tien Anount f4leszezaise 1 0 017 2 0 363 ut 5 0545 U 5 0 0059 0 117 6 0 0048 0 096 ut 5 0545 U 2 3 0333 60 023 2 0 0187 0 396 It 4 7349 A 7 0 0037 0 072 amp 0 0041 0080 Single List It 4738A 3 0 0144 0 285 3 0 0182 0 304 Pi 0 057 3 z 0 041 10 0 0021 0 043 Pi 0 067 U 4 6065 0 135 48 0180 0 381 st 6 002 UA 11 0 0822 6 044 12 0 0022 0 043 st 6 002 UA 50 0059 0 117 5 0 0191 0 404 at 0 047 var 13 0 0022 6 043 14 0 0016 6 032 List Itens at 0 047 var 6 0 0048 0 096 6 0 0201 0 425 Al 0 81634 15 0 0018 0 635 16 0 0014 6 029 M 0 81634 7 0 0037 0 072 7 0 0192 0 405 o 35 279 17 0 0009 0 018 18 0 0013 0 026 o 35 279 8 0041 0 080 8 0 0223 0 472 ut 25 048 19 0 0015 0 030 20 0 0012 0 023 Order Uthd 75 048 9 0021 0 041 9 0 0231 0 489 Ithd 7524 63 21 0 0002 0 013 22 0 0012 0 023 Ithd 7524 63 10 0 0021 0 043 10 0 0226 0 477 Pthd 3 055 23 0 0012 0 023 24 0 000 0 014 1 Pthd 3 055 11 0 0022 0 044 11 0 0282 0 5 Uth Error 25 0 0004 0 008 26 0 00911 0 022 Uth Error 12 0022 0 043 12 0 0289 0 611 the Error 27 0 0008 0 016 28 0 0014 0 028 ithe Error 13 0 0022 0 043 13 0 0294 0 621 utif 1 960 29 0 0008 0 015 3 0 0007 0 014 Page up utif 1 960 14 0 0015 0 032 14 0 0399 0 844 Itif 4999 054 31
183. EG NEG C1 Add a minus sign to the specified waveform DIF DIF C1 The differentiation of the specified waveform TINTG TINTG C1 Integration of the specified waveform TREND TREND C1 C2 The trend of the specified waveform TRENDM TRENDD and TRENDF can also be specified in a similar fashion For details see section 1 8 AVG2 AVG2 C1 C2 The average waveform of the specified waveform attenuation constant of 2 AVG4 AVG4 C1 C2 The average waveform of the specified waveform attenuation constant of 4 AVG8 AVG8 C1 C2 The average waveform of the specified waveform attenuation constant of 8 AVG16 AVG16 C1 C2 The average waveform of the specified waveform attenuation constant of 16 AVG32 AVG32 C1 C2 The average waveform of the specified waveform attenuation constant of 32 AVG64 AVG64 C1 C2 The average waveform of the specified waveform attenuation constant of 64 SSP SSP Synchronous speed waveform SLIP SLIP Slip waveform PM PM Waveform of the motor output FFT FFT C1 The FFT of the specified waveform see section 11 3 Functions TRENDM TRENDD TRENDF SSP SLIP and PM are applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later IM 253710 01E 11 2 Setting the Equation Converting the Scale of the Computed Waveform Number and type of characters that can be used in the equation Number of characters 50 characters or less Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or a space
184. Effect Fae Effect 1000 i 7 l 9 A 800 5 600 l a i S 400 Smaller effect T F 200 i 0 001 Effect e O 0 i 1 L L L L of 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Ss 1A ___ gt Measured current A When the measured current is relatively small Wire so that the current measurement circuit is connected to the load side In this case the voltage measurement circuit measures the sum of the load voltage e and voltage drop e across the current measurement circuit e is the amount of error in this case The input resistance of the current measurement circuit of the instrument is 100 mQ and 11 mQ for the 5 A and 20 A terminals respectively For example if the load resistance is 1 kQ then the effects on the measurement accuracy is 0 01 for the 5 A terminal 100 mQ 1 KQ and 0 0011 for the 20 A terminal 11 mQ 1 KQ SOURCE ae LOAD th U H oor L Tenai cay er QMO l i e i IM 253710 01E 3 5 For Making Accurate Measurements Effects of Stray Capacitance The effects of stray capacitance on the measurement accuracy can be minimized by connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close to the earth potential of the power source SOURCE The internal structure of the instrument is as follows The voltage and current measurement circuits are each enclosed in shielded cases These shielded cases are placed inside the outer case The shielded case o
185. Element 1 Wave Setting Wave Format Single Interpolate Line Graticule Grid H Sacle Value On Trace Label Off Mapping Auto Bar Bar Item No 1 Function U Element 1 Bar Marker1 1 order Bar Marker2 13 order Start Order 0 End Order 100 Vector Numeric On IM 253710 01E App 11 Ea xipueddy Appendix 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Item Setting Math Mode Off Math1 Function Off Expression C1 Unit V Scaling Auto Upper 1 0000E 2 Lower 1 0000E 2 Math2 Function Off Expression C2 Unit A Scaling Auto Upper 1 0000E 2 Lower 1 0000E 2 Start Point 0 000ms End Point 100 000ms FFT Points 1000 FFT Window Rect Cursor Type Off Cursor1 Trace Ch1 Cursor2 Trace Ch1 Zoom Mode Main Zoom Format Main Allocation All On Zi Z1 Mag x2 5 Z1 Position 25 000ms Z2 Z2 Mag x2 5 Z2 Position 75 000ms App 12 IM 253710 01E Appendix 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data For input module 253752 Only the input setting items are listed All other items are the same as for input module 253751 Item Setting Input U Range 2000Vpk Terminal 5A Range 10Apk Sensor Ratio 10 0000 Line Filter Off Zero Cross Filter Off Scaling Off Pt Ratio 1 0000 Ct Ratio 1 0000 Scaling Factor 1 0000 For motor module 253771 Only the input setting items are listed All other items are the same as for input module 253751 Item Setting INPUT Range S
186. Elements and Wiring Examples in section 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement IM 253710 01E 3 15 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 8 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Note Check that the power measurement modules are installed in order starting from the element number 1 slot If you leave the slots that have smaller element numbers empty measurements will not be made properly For example do not install a power measurement module into the element number 2 slot and leave the element number 1 slot empty Do not install power measurement modules into element number 1 and 3 slots and leave the element number 2 slot empty For the procedures on installing the modules see section 3 3 Installing the Input Module When the sensor input module is installed into the element number 4 slot only up to three power measurement modules can be installed In this case you cannot select a wiring method that uses four power measurement modules After wiring the wiring method must be selected See section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current The current sensor input transformation function can be used to transform the input signal to data that correspond to direct measurements For the procedures see section 5 4 Se
187. Exec M User Def ined g Phase 180 Lead Lag Min Order 1 jax Order M Pc Formula Min Order a 1 I Max Order 1 M Thd Formula Total Fundamental 000000 10 24 IM 253710 01E 10 8 Selecting the Equation for the Distortion Factor Explanation When determining the measurement functions Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd and Pthd of the harmonic measurement mode select the denominator of the equation from the following choices See Appendix 2 for the equation Total All harmonic measurement data from the minimum to the maximum harmonic order up to the upper limit harmonic order under analysis become the denominator Fundamental The data of the fundamental signal component 1st order become the denominator Note The minimum and maximum harmonic orders under analysis are the components selected in section 10 7 IM 253710 01E 10 25 suonendwog jeonawny g Chapter 11 Waveform Analysis 11 1 Setting the Computation Region Re computing Procedure CONFIGURATION TRIG D za ca ACQ REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT f Li i COPY NULL AL MENU FIL 3 SINGLE Sitge stantistop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME a M ooun CHT VOLTAGE e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC k
188. Exec NS Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box 10 Press the Filter soft key to select Item or All OUUUUUUU Viewing the properties 10 Inthe File List dialog box turn the jog shuttle to select the desired file 11 Press the Property soft key to display the property window of the file 12 Press the ESC key to close the property window Property File Name SET1006 SET File Size BB Date Time 1999 63 18 12 23 File Nane SETL Attribute RU Connent Property Filter Iten A11 Save Exec WJUUUUUUU WJUUUUUUU Save Exec 12 12 IM 253710 01E 12 5 Saving and Loading Setup Parameters Loading the Setup Parameters 4 Press the Load soft key to display the load setting menu and the File List dialog box Selecting the source medium 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the source medium displayed with 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Selecting the source directory When there are directories on the medium 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the source directory displayed with lt gt 8 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection The Path box on the top left corner of the File List dialog box displays the selected medium directory File W File Item Setup Load Save Utility m File List Path FDO Space
189. FILTER FILTE R FILTER FILTER Y SINGLE SINGLE START STOP ABORT VOLTAGE ZN CURRENT Q d Co IC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key COOOOCLE 1 Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to select ON 3 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Turn ON OFF the averaging function 4 Press the Averaging soft key to select ON or OFF Setting the attenuation constant 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the attenuation constant Measure M 5 Formula Measure Mode Y ON OFF DN UrnssIrms M Period Averaging at zero Cross le Count M Sync Source M Phase 186 Lead Lag M Pc Formula Measure Exec M 4d Measure OFF g User Def ined ULUUEUL 10 18 IM 253710 01E 10 5 Averaging Explanation The numerical data can be exponentially averaged using the specified attenuation constant Turning ON OFF the averaging function Select whether or not to perform the specified averaging function OFF Does not perform the averaging function ON Performs the averaging function The averaging is performed according to the following equation Mn Dn 1 K Dn Displayed value at the nth time that has been exponentially averaged The displayed v
190. G VOLTAGE E amp A CURRENT e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Set the trigger mode to a mode other than OFF For procedures see section 7 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode 1 Press the TRIGGER key to display the Trigger setting menu Check that Mode is set to something other than OFF Setting the trigger type 2 Press the Type soft key to select Window and set the trigger type to window trigger Selecting the trigger source condition 3 Press the Condition soft key to select In or Out rage Condition M Dut Center Level 8 0 Width Level 9 04 Position ox D Delay 8 0us 7 8 IM 253710 01E 7 4 Setting the Window Trigger Setting the window Setting the center level 4 5 Edge m Condition keCenter Level Width Level 9 0 Position Press the Center Level Width Level soft key to select Center Level Turn the jog shuttle to set the center level For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Out 8 0 oz Delay a us Setting the window width 6 7 Edge M D Condition Center Level 6 0 W Width Level Position Press the Center Level Width Level so
191. H1 cH3 cH5 cH7 fvorrace IAN m __ _A CURRENT 0000000 e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Select a display format to display the waveforms For the procedures see section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Check that Format is set to Wave Numerict Wave Wave Bar or Wave X Y X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Wave 3 Press the desired channel key from CH1 to CH8 The channel setting menu is displayed 4 Press the V Zoom soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom factor CH1 Wave Display m o 4 U Range 2000Upk l Y Zoom xO 1 9 18 IM 253710 01E 9 8 Zooming on the Waveform Zooming horizontally Selecting the type of zoom display 3 Press the ZOOM key to display the Zoom setting menu 4 Press the Mode soft key to display the menu used to select the type of zoom display 5 Press one of the soft keys from Main to Z1 amp Z2 to select the type of zoom display Selecting the number of split windows in the zoom display
192. HIR Fe x ECACC E UAUEGOS WUF Filter I Item Aly Attribute Property Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and Viewing the properties in section 12 5 IM 253710 01E 12 39 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes G 12 10 Changing the Directory File Name Creating a Directory Explanation CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the mark is blinking It can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the medium and directory See the explanation given in Selecting the medium and directory in section 12 5 Selecting the file attribute See the explanation given in Selecting the file attribute in section 12 8 Changing the medium directory file name The assignment of names when changing the medium directory file name is the same as the explanation given in File name comment in section 12 5 Creating a directory A new directory can be created on a medium The assignment of the directory when creating a new directory is the same as the explanation given in File name comment in section 12 5 Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box See the explanation given in Specifying the file to be displayed in
193. I is dissipated The product Ul is called the apparent power S The unit is VA volt ampere Apparent power is used to express the electrical capacity of the devices that run under AC power Of the apparent power the true power that is dissipated by the device is called the active power or effective power P This power is the same as the AC power described earlier S UI VA P Ulcoso W cos represents the ratio of the true power with respect to the apparent power and this ratio is called the power factor A Reactive power When the current lags the voltage U by 0 the component of the power in the same direction as the voltage U is expressed as Icoso and the component of the power perpendicular to the voltage U is expressed as Isino The active power P Ulcoso is the product of the voltage U and the current component Icos Conversely the product of the voltage U and the current component Isind is called reactive power Q and its unit is var Q Ulsino var Apparent power S active power P and reactive power Q are related in the following way S P Q IM 253710 01E App 29 i xipueddy Appendix 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Harmonics Harmonics are sine waves that have frequencies that are integer multiples of the frequency of a fundamental signal generally a 50 60 Hz sinusoid in the field of power The current power that flows through the power
194. L SHIFT copy mui cau MENU FILTER FILTER FIL 3 cH c 3 ons cx Ct on _ ed OUOUU0UB e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation SINGLE Satgte stantistop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME VOLTAGE CURRENT e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Press the FILE key to display the File setting menu 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the Utility setting menu and the File List dialog box 3 Press the Function soft key to display the file function selection menu File File Item Setup Load Save Utility WJUUUUUUE Fornat d Function Format Media Info Format JUUUUUUU IM 253710 01E 12 37 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 10 Changing the Directory File Name Creating a Directory Changing the Directory File Name 4 Press the Rename soft key to display the rename menu File List Renane Path SCONPZ M Function Space 2612315646 byte File Name Size Tate Attribute Rename a COCUGCoo Delete Copy File Nane 1999 01 13 69 54 1999 61 08 05 27 1999 61 68 05 27 O 1999701710 03 47 1999 01 16 03 47 Renane 6 1999781718 04 15 1999701710 04 15 M NUMEROGO CSU 199393701703 17 46 Property WAVEOOO HDR 1999 01 63 17 39 R WAVEGOS WUF 1999 61
195. L and C connected in parallel Corrected Power W Pct Applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Efficiency 1 n Efficiency of wiring B with respect to wiring A Efficiency 2 1 Efficiency of wiring A with respect to wiring B 17 2 IM 253710 01E 17 4 Measurement Function Measurement Item Measurement function of the motor module For details related to the determination and equations of measurement functions see Chapter 15 Motor modules can be used on only products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later Item Symbol and Meaning Rotating speed Speed Motor s rotating speed Torque Torque Motor s torque Synchronous speed Sync Slip Slip Motor output Pm Motor s mechanical output mechanical power Motor efficiency nmA or nmB Ratio of the motor output versus the power consumption of the motor Total efficiency nmA or nmB Ratio of the motor output versus the power consumed by the motor as well as the converter through which power is fed to the motor The symbols nmA and nmB are assigned to either the motor efficiency or total efficiency depending on the circuit wiring to elements 1 2 and 3 and the selected wiring method A B For details see section 15 8 IM 253710 01E 17 3 h Ey suoleoyioeds 17 4 Measurement Function Measurement Item Measurement function in the harmonic measurement
196. M 5 Formula Mode PFE ON OFF DN Urns Irms M Period Averaging at zero Cross Count 2 M Sync Source M Phase 186 Lead Lag M Pc Formula Measure Exec Mo 4d Measure OFF g User Def ined IM 253710 01E 10 15 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 4 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power and Corrected Power Setting the equation for corrected power 4 Press the Pc Formula soft key to display the equation setting dialog box for corrected power Selecting the applicable standard Do Turn the jog shuttle to select the standard for Pc Formula Press the SELECT key to select either IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 or IEC76 1 1993 Setting the coefficient When the applicable standard of the equation is IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 ON 10 11 12 13 14 Measure Wo 5 Formula Urms Irns Averaging 180 Lead Lag Wo Pc Formula Pe Formula TEC 6 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC 6 1 1993 Pi _9 5000 PZ 6 5686 Turn the jog shuttle to select P1 Press the SELECT key A box used to set coefficient P1 appears Turn the jog shuttle to set coefficient P1 For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Turn the jog shuttle to select P2 Press the SELECT k
197. Marker Jump i 0000000 Selecting the waveform on which to place the marker Selecting the waveform on which to place the marker 4 Press the Cursor1 Trace soft key to display the box used to select the waveform on which to place the marker 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform from CH1 to Math2 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Selecting the waveform on which to place the x marker 7 Press the Cursor2 Trace soft key to display the box used to select the waveform on which to place the marker 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform from CH1 to Math2 9 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Moving the marker Moving the marker 10 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 x soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the marker Moving the x marker 12 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 x soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor2 x 13 Turn the jog shuttle to move the x marker Moving the and x markers simultaneously 14 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 x soft key to set the jog shuttle control to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 x 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the and x markers simultaneously The distance between them is kept constant Type Marker J Type Marker W Se lect Eg CH2 Cursori Trace CH1 9 00ms Jump Type x to Main Ea H1 CI CHi
198. Measure the Torque cccseceeeeeees 15 14 15 6 Setting the Motor s Number of Poles Used to Compute the Synchronous Speed andthe Slip nics ccnvts teed at innata a aaNet ate eas 15 16 15 7 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Compute the Motor Output 15 18 15 8 Computing the Motor Efficiency and Total Efficiency 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeees 15 20 Chapter 16 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 16 12 TroubleShOOtinG icc ees tetv eee ees een bitte te ester dete 16 1 16 2 Error Messages and Corrective ACtiONS ccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeaeeteaeeeaeesnaeetieeenaeenies 16 2 16 3 Performing a Self test t0 2h gen nied siti get Mais dines a eae 16 5 16 4 Checking the System Conditions eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeseaeeeaeenias 16 8 ZA 16 5 Replacing the Power Fse enro a Aa EE a E a 16 9 16 6 Recommended Replacement Parts cscceesseeeesneeeeeneeeeseeeeeneeeseneeeeseneeessneeeeenneees 16 10 Chapter 17 Specifications WCW ae E AE E T 17 1 17 2 Displ y in aa a a ied ee A i tee eee a deen eh 17 1 VS TIMEAXIS piii n capes dead aE aa e a Eaa aE a bende thd Eig 17 1 17 4 Measurement Function Measurement Item eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeetenaeeeeeaeeeeenaeeeee 17 2 W735 tae oI a E EEEE T E AET 17 6 Measurement Mode and Wiring Method Data Acquisition Frequency Measurement 17 6 Trigger Numerical Display Waveform Display
199. Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods a External trigger setting The measurement computation period is set to the first period of time in which the signal applied to the external trigger input connector is in the specified Hi or Lo condition suoljun External trigger e a i lt gt Measurement Measurement This section is not computation computation considered for period period measurement or computation During the harmonic measurement mode Cursor setting is the only method available to select the period The numerical data are measured or computed from the sampled data in the specified period The period is 8192 sampled points between the vertical cursors placed on the screen You can set the measurement computation period while viewing the displayed waveform and moving the cursor Wiring Method For procedures see section 5 2 The wiring method is the method by which the signals that are input to each element are combined Different selections are possible depending on the number of elements that have power measurement modules installed In some cases only one type of wiring method can be selected while in other cases two types of wiring methods can be selected The following five wiring methods are available 1P2W single phase two wire 1P3W single phase three wire 3P3W three phase three wire 3V3A three voltage three current 3P4W three phase four wire Wh
200. N Pt Ratio 1 0000 1 0000 __1 0000 Ct Ratio 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Scaling _ Factor 1 0900 1 0000 IM 253710 01E 5 23 obuey pue spoy Jusweinseay oy bumas eo 5 5 Setting the Scaling Function when using an External PT or CT Explanation Measurements can be made by connecting the output of the secondary side of the PT and the output of the secondary side of the CT to the same voltage and current input terminals that are used when directly inputting a signal Turning ON OFF the scaling function You can select whether or not to multiply the voltage U current I and power P S Q by the PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient respectively ON The voltage U current I and power P S Q are multiplied by the PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient OFF The voltage U current and power P S Q are not multiplied by the PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient The output values of the external PT and CT are read directly as numerical data in this case Setting the PT ratio Set the ratio in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Setting the CT ratio Set the ratio in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Setting the power coefficient scaling factor Set the power factor in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Note If the result of multiplying the PT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient scaling factor to the measurement ran
201. ON O SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER copy mui ca 5 a E S FILTER F TRIG D ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT FILTER 1 2 WUUUUUUB cH cna cn rot CS CH7 CH8 VOLTAGE CURRENT SINGLE SHEE sTaRT SToP ABORT CJC Cd e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 1 Press the FILE key to display the File setting menu 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the Utility setting menu and the File List dialog box 3 Press the Function soft key to display the file function selection menu 4 Press the Delete soft key to display the delete setting menu File W File Item Setup Load Save OOUO0OUUU Utility Fornat W Function Delete Format Media Info copy Renane MakeDir Format Format JUUUUUUE UUUUUU0 12 28 IM 253710 01E 12 8 Changing the File Attribute Deleting Files Selecting the medium and directory 5 The procedures are the same as Selecting the source medium and Selecting the source directory in section 12 5 Changing the file attribute 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file 7 Press the Attribute soft key The attribute o
202. ONSUMPTION 0 00 ee eee eee e tee eeeeeteeeeteeteeenneees 17 12 p wer factor ec frcdesstenecivedectsctevsiaviedsesieasieretbevsestsseivicennds App 29 POWGPAUSC avni anpa apa aA NE 16 9 Mode 5 1 7 1 9 19 power loss 3 8 anote le PEE A E AAN 16 8 power measurement module s sssssessersesresrrerrerrerrrerrnrrnes model Godee a aaa AAAA A aeS AEAEE EASA ii Power Module sssseseseesiesrerinerrerenrrnens module configuration ssssesssesiesirerrerrsrreerrnrrnsrrsrrerrrerrens 16 8 POWER ranges is sensn clei asc cevaeticssaneceessgegevdassestbactan motor efficiency power spectrum Motor evaluation oo eee eee eee eeeee tees eeeeeseeeeeeseeeeaes power SWIICHN sisse sipe ii ea ia rasiat E ia a it Motor MOGUIC i iccccctecvsrscesedescnes coateesreneivecancensetevsreuteavexecs PFO tlIQQO cirine aidaa motor output precaution motor s number of poles printer cover problem PlOPSMt ave n a EAA N PPan eiri a N A nile enti ain erent normal measurement mode PT ratio NULL function a cctcse ee sasttavsceieer j pulse number of displayed item 00 0 eee eect 8 16 pulse count Number Of poles oes cescesessessesseeseeseeseesesstsstesesseesesaeesess 15 17 PulSeANpUN snosi anikdanadi Tarate aaan Numeric Numeric Disp Hem ssesesesesessseieerrerrerrnerrerrnrreeresrenes R N meric Bar isein a a a Numeric Wave oc cccccccsecseseecncesseneeescsteceseensceseceesesseoneescees R a L E aE E Aana A
203. P INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER 560 CL DISPLAY MATH cursoR zoom CJ REMOTE L FILE misc HELP LocAL SHIFT L copy nu ca f MENU L cmm gt j FILTER FILTE ILTER lt 7 SINGLE C SNE start stop ABORT C VOLTAGE ZN CH4 CH6 CH8 current Q TS e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the measurement mode selection menu 3 Press the Normal or Harmonics soft key to select the measurement mode COCO Setup g Node Normal Ea Harmonics 4 Wiring M Wiring 1P2W 1P2U 1P2W 1P2U Display Resolution Bdgts 6dgts Initialize Display Resolution pdgts 6dgts Initialize UOOUUU0H There are two measurement modes normal measurement and harmonic measurement The handling of the sampled data and the types of measurement functions vary depending on the mode For details see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods Selecting the measurement mode Select from the following choices Normal The mode is set to normal measurement Harmonics The mode is set to harmonic measurement Note The measurement mode cannot be switched while the data acquisition is in progress IM 253710 01E 5 1 obuey pue spo Jusweinse
204. PZ4000 Power Analyzer USER S MANUAL Si et i laa Yokogawa Elec IM 253710 01E 2nd Edition Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage http www yokogawa com tm PIM 103 01E Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No BA32 2nd Edition April 2000 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA PZ4000 Power Analyzer This User s Manual contains useful information about the precautions functions and operating procedures of the instrument To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises The following two manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the PZ4000 Manual Name Manual No Description PZ4000 Power Analyzer IM 253710 01E This manual Explains all functions and procedures User s Manual of the PZ4000 excluding the communication functions PZ4000 Power Analyzer IM 253710 11E Explains the communication functions of the GP IB Communication Interface and serial interfaces User s Manual The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in
205. S ACG DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE SHIFT copy wut ca MENU CELEWENTS MENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER 7 SINGLE STAAF START STOP 1 4 ABORT m CH3 cH5 cH7 voLtaGE CH4 CH6 CH8 curRENT NA CJC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key WUUUUULE Procedure Setting the Scaling Function for Each Element Sets the scaling function of the power measurement module for each element 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 only the Power Module soft key appears 2 Press the Power Module Each soft key to display the power module setting dialog box The menu does not appear for elements without modules If the sensor input module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for element 4 does not appear Turn ON OFF the scaling function 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Scaling of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF Setting the PT ratio 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the PT Ratio of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to display the PT ratio setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the PT ratio For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shut
206. S SINGLE SHE sTaRT SToP E ABORT E CH7 VOLTAGE a a CH4 CH6 CH8 curRENT all CJC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key OUO0000 Procedures Press the NULL key to activate the NULL function The indicator on the NULL key lights Explanation NULL value When the NULL function is turned ON the NULL values are set to the Udc and Idc values numerical data of the simple average of the voltage and current during the normal measurement mode U dc and I dc during the harmonic measurement mode as well as Speed and Torque when using the motor module and the input signal from the sensor is a DC voltage that were measured the previous time If the previously measured Udc and Idc as well as Speed and Torque values do not exist such as when the NULL function is turned ON without making a measurement after turning ON the power Udc and Idc are set to zero Note When setting the NULL value we recommend the voltage and current measurement ranges be set as small as possible The measurement resolution is higher when the measurement range is small which results in a more accurate measurement of the NULL values Measurement functions that are affected by the NULL function The NULL values are subtracted from the sampled data Therefore all measurement functions are affected by the NULL values IM 253710 01E 4 7
207. S ttt accessory AOE EE EE A T P E TAA acquisition MEMOTY ssssssssressessrssenrranreerrsarnnrraernsenanrucenaenn 1 4 active power aliasing Allocation ig amplituda AXIS 4 aeai aatia nai aroi kodea poas i aas R eain nas analoga raa e a E analog input apparent power ASCII header attenuation Constant eee cee eee eceeeeseetseeteeeeaes 10 19 AltriDULS Treny a Eea Te ne NEAN a aE TE auto naming auto tange aee ra e aani ae aeaa Ea auto scaling aisinn naia e adea Tar eiiie ea Rii aVoragiNg sessist eves AV Gil techs oneee N NOA uN aT B l Te E E E AEE E E EEA 9 31 bar graph display B r ten NO 3 cccscclevsieeveedeececzeedsavesesterencetscevitesesstedapertecdeaee 9 29 B r Setting Hoseini a eE E block diagram Driggs Seez eonna e raa aaa aae anean a eaae aaa built in printer capacitance center level centronics interface aa CHANNEL E TT T tncavedpede color external printer ssesssseesseriesesrrerinerrerrnrreerenrreee color screen image 08 command type external printer COMMENE osise n COMPEX FUNCTION o oo eee naiera aaaea aaan ana COMMIPFOSSION AEE AT E computation computation region ssesssssssesessssesrrinsrnerrasruerearrnsenastnsenne computed Point sssrini de aie ia Condition ka a a oad i lino araa COMMOECHING ieten aan ae aaaeaii converting the scale cop
208. SETUP key Initialize settings select the measurement mode select the wiring method select the PLL source and select the number of displayed digits Sections 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 4 8 1 rINPUT key Set the measurement range set the PT and CT ratios set the power coefficient and select the input filter Sections 5 3 to 5 6 TRIGGER key Set the trigger Chapter 7 SHIFT TRIGGER ACQ key Select the record length and time base Chapters 6 2 6 3 CONFIGURATION ACQ j ES N era war enn z000 f aie J SINGLE START key FILE Acquires the data once Chapter 4 3 coPY nn CAL EE START STOP key MeN Start Stop data acquisition Data can be acquired continuously FILTER Fif TER FITER FILTER SIS emaner by starting the acquisition with this key Chapter 4 3 i 11 o SHIFT SINGLE START ABORT key Feat cha lens len voinae Abort data acquisition Chapter 4 3 CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8 CURRENT ROTARY knob CAL key Set the observation time Chapter 6 1 Perform zero level compensation Section 4 4 NULL key Activate the NULL function Section 4 5 CH key Turn ON OFF the waveform display set the measurement range set waveform labels and set the vertical zoom Sections 5 3 5 4 9 1 9 7 9 8 IM 253710 01E sled JO s sn pue soweN D 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle and Rotary Knob Set Numerical Display and Waveform Display DISPLAY key Disp
209. Sensor that inputs voltage signals from an external current sensor The other way utilizes a current input terminal I which is used to directly input the current signal There are three systems on the 253752 two current input terminals and one current sensor For current sensor input the input voltage is normalized using the voltage divider and OP amp For the direct input the signal applied to the current input terminal is converted to voltage using a current divider and then is normalized in the same manner as the current sensor input The normalized voltage is then input to an A D converter and zero crossing detector of the same type and configuration as those to which voltage signals are sent The A D converter samples the voltage current input signals using the sampling clock provided by the internal circuit of the 253710 converting the signals to digital data The sampling rate is fixed to 5 MS s for the normal measurement mode and integer multiples of the PLL source for the harmonic measurement mode approx 80 k to 160 kS s The sampling operation can also be carried out using a clock signal that is applied to the external clock input connector When measuring harmonics the fundamental frequency must be determined in order to analyze the higher orders The PLL phase locked loop source is the signal that is used to determine the fundamental frequency IM 253710 01E 1 3 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Mot
210. Single list Measurement function D PLL CHAUL 5 0545 dc 1 0429 20 633 3 Freq 46 Hz 1 4 0427 79 982 2 3 0339 60 023 iw 3 0 0144 0 285 4 0 0068 0 135 vy UL 5 0545 Y 5S 0 0059 0 117 6 0 0048 0 096 on a IL 4 7348 A 0 0037 0 072 6 0 0041 0 080 PL 0 067 WU 3 0 0021 0 041 10 0 0021 0 043 5 i 51 E inas 11 0 0022 0 044 12 6 6622 9 043 a o Qi 6 6 13 0 0022 0 043 14 0 0016 0 032 D AL 6 816 15 0 0018 0 035 16 0 0014 0 029 a l 35 2 17 0 0009 0 018 18 0 0013 0 026 o R Uthd 75 0 3 19 0 0015 0 030 20 6 6612 0 023 O Ithd 7524 6 O 21 0 0007 0 013 2E 0 0012 0 023 N o Pthd A Se 23 0 0912 0 023 24 0 0007 0 014 Uthf Err 25 0 0004 0 008 26 0 0011 0 022 eo D Ithf Err 27 0 0008 0 016 28 6 0014 0 028 Utif 1 90 29 6 0068 0 016 30 0 0007 0 014 ge gt Itif 4999 6 a 31 6 6069 0 018 32 0 0010 0 021 o o hyf 0 4 ro 33 0 0008 0 016 34 0 0006 0 011 f heft 0 2 ag 35 0 0010 0 019 36 0 0010 0 020 pra 3 Vv 3 8616 6 626 38 6 6667 6 614 2 o uz 5 0383 U 39 0 0005 0 010 46 0 0007 0 014 5 12 9 0011 A 41 0 0902 0 004 42 0 0004 9 007 P2 6 000 U 43 0 0006 0 011 44 0 0005 0 010 Hy 82 0 000 UA 45 0 0004 0 009 46 0 0007 0 014 Harmonic distortion factor Numerical data of each harmonic Dual list Measurement function PLL CHi U1 5 0545 4 7348 Freg 49 Hz dc 1 6429 20 633 dc 0 0530 1 126 o 1 4 0427 79 982 1 0 0172 0 363 D u 5 0545 U 2 3 0339 60 023 2 0 01
211. T key to select either Auto or Manual Setting the upper and lower limits for manual scaling 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select Upper 15 Press the SELECT key to display the upper limit setting box 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper limit For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 17 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box 18 Turn the jog shuttle to select Lower 19 Press the SELECT key to display the lower limit setting box 20 Turn the jog shuttle to set the lower limit For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 21 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Math1 Mathi Mathi Function PFF _ON_ Function DFT _ON_ Function PFF _ON_ Expression C TREND Expression C TREND Expression C TREND Unit a Unit a unit Scaling uto Manual Scaling utoj _ Manual Scaling Auto Manual Upper L 6 0000E 66__ Upper i 0 0000E 00 Upper es Lower Lower C 6 0000E oo_T Lower 0 0000E 09 sishjeuy wojne M 2 11 2 Setting the Equation Converting the Scale of the Computed Waveform Explanation An equation can be created by combining the symbols of each channel Then the waveform of the equation can be displayed T
212. TA6 Print data bit 6 17 SLCTIN select in 9 DATA7 Print data bit 7 18to25 GND Back side Selecting the output command type Select the output command type for the external printer from the following list of choices ESC P ESC P2 for printers that support ESC P raster commands e BJ e PCL5 LIPS3 Turning ON OFF the color output PR201 PC PR201 When the output command type is ESC P ESC P2 BJ or PCL5 select whether or not to print in color OFF Prints the waveforms in black and white ON Prints the waveforms in color 256 colors Setting comment See the explanation given in Setting Comment in section 13 2 Note You cannot print while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON 13 10 IM 253710 01E 13 4 Saving Screen Images to Floppy Disk and SCSI Device CONFIGURATION SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER EST erue a SE DISPLAY MATH cursor zoom f sirr venu ELEMENTS TAIG D ACQ REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL WUUUU00 oH cna cw cH7 e as SS a MM FILTER FILTER FILTER VOLTAGE CURRENT i FILTER SINGLE g SINGLE START STOP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g S A e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedure Oly Copy K Copy t
213. TAA EAA numerical computation oo eect eee eeeeeeeeteeeenaes RN siege a cated ten is toe teeth rea a eRe numerical computation mode rack mount i numerical data issii resteneteoens rangel aeea a E N E numerical display harmonic measurement mode 1 23 2 8 rated supply voltage oe eee eee etree tee eeeeereeeeeaeeees 17 12 numerical display normal measurement mode 1 22 2 6 rated supply voltage frequency cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeees 17 12 re computing numerical data eee 1 36 10 7 re computing waveform oo eee cece eee eeeeetteeeeaeenaees 1 41 O FEACTIVE DOWET OT App 29 ObServation tiMe ceccccccccccoceccccceccecceceececcesceccecees 1 15 6 2 App 1 rear PANE ose eeseceseeeeeseeeeetecssteeeesesecesseeseseeeessseeecaeeesseneees 2 1 ON OFF the waveform display cccsseseeseeeseessens 1 28 oe 6 3 OP AMP aaa r A EA 1 3 record lEN9th ssssssistsrtrrsrsstnrrstnnsnteresenrrnnnn tnt 1 15 6 4 App 1 Operating AltitUde niine RE RER 17 12 rectangular WINGOW sssstitiireteteeeteeeeereeseennnnnnnn 1 40 11 9 Operating ConditiON siei a 17 12 rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value 0 1 6 operation key rod ciNg svete erar i a an aa Eaa aE operator user defined FUNCTION ssessseessessecsteeseeeseens 10 14 release arm operator waveform COMputation csseecseecsessseeseeeseeees 11 6 removing input module cere teseeseeseetees Option ee EE ii Rename nae EN opti
214. TE SHIFT copy wu cu MENU ELEME FILTER 1 CHT VOLTAGE cn2 cH4 cn6 cn8 curren baa CO CC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key gt S 8 FILTER FILTER FILTER y SINGLE Saar START STOP ABORT 0000000 Procedure Select a display format to display the waveforms For the procedures see section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Check that Format is set to Wave Numerict Wave Wave Bar or Wave X Y X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Wave 3 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the waveform menu 4 Press the Interpolate soft key to select or Ae Display g Format 4 wave Display Wave 4 Wave Format Single Tnterpolate a Graticule Scale Value DFF ON Trace Label PFF ON Mapping Fixed Wave Setting UUUUGUU 9 10 IM 253710 01E 9 4 Interpolating the Display Explanation When there are less than 500 points of sampled data on the
215. The range switches automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal The conditions for which the range changes and the precautions are the same as the description given in section 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input The different ranges used in the auto mode are the same as those available for fixed range selection as shown above Setting the current sensor transformation ratio The ratio can be set in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 5 18 IM 253710 01E 5 4 Setting the Measurement Range when Using an External Current Sensor Configuration example of the current sensor range and transformation ratio For example when using a current sensor that outputs 10 mV when 1 A of current is flowing to measure a current with a maximum value of 100 Apk the equation becomes 10 mV A x 100 Apk 1000 mVpk Therefore set 1000 mVpk for the current sensor range and 10 mV A for the current sensor transformation ratio Note When attempting to directly read the current of the circuit under measurement by multiplying the output of the external current sensor by the transformation ratio turn OFF the external PT CT scaling function see section 5 5 If it is turned ON the value will be multiplied by the CT ratio IM 253710 01E 5 19 obuey pue spo Jusweinseay oy bumas eo 5 5 Setting the Scaling Function when using an External PT or CT For a functional description see section 1 3 1 z 5
216. To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key oogun Procedure Setting the Range Using the Full Screen Menu for Each Element Sets the range of the power measurement module for each element 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 only the Power Module soft key appears 2 Press the Power Module Each soft key to display the power module setting dialog box The menu does not appear for elements without modules If the sensor input module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for element 4 does not appear Selecting the current sensor input connector 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Terminal of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to select Sen Selecting the current sensor range 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the I Range of the element you wish to set 6 Press the SELECT key to display the current sensor range selection box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 1000mVpk to 100mVpk and Auto 8 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new current sensor range 5 14 IM 253710 01E 5 4 Setting the Measurement Range when Using an External Current Sensor Cm Power Moduie Power Modu te Bach Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 k 20A Shunt C Z A Shunt 20A Shunt 20A Shunt Powe rates U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ CZV
217. V 8 IW 0 0172 A S pid 0 069 W Example in which 16 items are displayed 3 0545 V w 0 070 VYA 4 7348 A 0 007 var amp 0 067 W i 0 99552 0 082 VA 5 423 u 0 047 var 8 0 134 w 4 0427 V w 99 075 a 0 0172 A t 0 000mHz w 0 069 W a 0 000mHz uoipuny u sw aINnNsSe N u IM 253710 01E 1 23 1 5 Numerical Display Changing the displayed items By selecting the display item the numerical data value that is displayed at the position can be changed U10 111 P140 S140 List display For each measurement function the numerical data of the fundamental and all harmonics can be displayed in two columns When the numerical data and waveform are displayed at the same time approximately half of the data is displayed 0 0094 V 0 0002 A 0 000 W 0 000 VA Single list The data of one measurement function are displayed by separating the even and odd harmonics in each column You can select the following measurement functions U I P S Q A b oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp and Torque sjeubis s1uowey e 34 0 paea eead Changing the measurement function of the third item Changing the element of the third item ULM Il gt gl S1 U10 111 P21 S10 order 0 0094 V 0 0002 A 130 853 0 000 VA 0 0094 V 0 0002 A 0 001kKW 0 000 VA Changing the harmonic U11 111 P230 S101 0 0094 V 0 0002 A 0 000k W 0 000 VA This is app
218. V Approx 9 M depends on the input signal conditions Takes tens of minutes to save the data Float FLD Approx 400 K 100 k x 4 For the harmonic measurement mode Same as in the normal measurement mode Waveforms that are saved When the data type is Binary or ASCII the displayed waveform is saved When the data type is Float the selected waveform from CH1 to CH8 MATH1 and MATH2 can be saved The setup parameters of the waveform such as the vertical axis the horizontal axis and the trigger are also saved To reproduce the computation result Binary data of all channels are necessary Save the data with the display of all channels turned ON 12 20 IM 253710 01E 12 6 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Selecting the range of the waveform to be saved Select the range region of the waveform from the following choices The only data that can be loaded are those data that are saved by specifying Binary in Selecting the data type file extension data size described earlier and Main for the range Main The range of the Main waveform It is the range defined by the display record length range displayed on the screen e Zi The range of zoom waveform Z1 Z2 The range of zoom waveform Z2 Selecting the medium and directory See the explanation given in Selecting the medium and directory in section 12 5 File name and comment See the explanation given in File name and comment in
219. Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave X Y X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Wave Turning ON OFF the label name 6 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the waveform menu 7 Press the Trace Label soft key to select ON or OFF Dispiay M Format 4 wave Display Wave 4 Wave Format Single Tnterpolate Ed Graticule Scale Value DFF ON Trace Label Waye setting DFF ON Mapping Fixed Setting the label name Set the label name of each channel using eight characters or less Turning ON OFF the label name Select whether or not to display the label name channel name of the waveform ON Displays the label name OFF Does not display the label name ae Z 000A cHe 10 00 A i Waveform label Iche 10 00 A CH2 2 00 8 oos i doo oons IM 253710 01E 9 17 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 8 Zooming on the Waveform Procedure Zooming vertically For a functional description see section 1 6 1 z 5 S CONFIGURATION O OO SETUP INPUT WEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH cuRsoR ZooM REMOTE Led SHIFT coor ron an MENU ELEMENT R FILTE i FILTEI R FILTER FILTER START STOP 1i 2l alas ABORT OBSERVATION TIME c
220. _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 characters all characters includes spaces Note Upper and lower case letters are not distinguished for file names They are distinguished in comments In addition the following five file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK When using the GP IB or serial interface commands to enter a file name the following symbols that do not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used The keyboard that is displayed when creating equations for user defined functions and waveform computations is as follows Long function names can be selected by pressing one key Long equations can be temporarily held in the internal memory so that it can be used in other equations The procedure to store equations in the internal memory is as follows 1 After setting the equation select ENTER on the keyboard 2 When the SELECT key is pressed the equation is confirmed as well as temporarily stored The procedure to recall equations from the memory is as follows 1 Press the key on the keyboard and press the SELECT key to open a window 2 A list of stored equations is displayed Select the desired equation and press the SELECT key The equation appears in the entry box on the keyboard Take note of the following points 1 When the equation is not correct and an error message is displayed it is still stored in the memory 2 If there is a character string in the e
221. _ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ Terninal bal Sen_2oa A Sen_20a pa Sen_20a BA Sen_20n 1 Range AGApk Jw Select L_10Apk Sensor Rat iocmy ad 6 9000 APK 6 8000 Line Filter OFF 4Apk Zero Cross Filter zapk scaling P tapk Pt Ratio 6 0000 4Apk Ct Ratio 8 ZApk Scaling Factor L 6 0000 1Apk 6 0000 0 0000 7 0000 Auto IM 253710 01E obuey pue spo Jusweinseay y bumas eo 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Setting the Range Using the Full Screen Menu for All Elements Sets the range of the power measurement module for all elements at once This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later 1 2 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu Press the Power Module All soft key to display the All power module setting dialog box The menu does not appear for elements without modules If the sensor input module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for element 4 does not appear Setting the voltage range 3 4 5 6 Power Module C Each Power Module CALL Turn the jog shuttle to select the U Range of element 1 Press the SELECT key to display the voltage range selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 2000Vpk to 30Vpk and Auto Press the SELECT key to confirm th
222. a format from the following list of choices The file extension is automatically attached to the file name Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes TIFF TIF Approx 350 K Color data compression OFF BMP BMP Approx 50 K Color data compression ON PostScript PS Approx 80 K These are reference values For PostScript there are no color and data compression selections Selecting color output When the data format is TIFF or BMP select from the following list of choices Color Saves the screen image data in color 256 colors Reverse Saves the screen image in color with the background and text set to white and black respectively OFF Saves the screen image data in black and white Turning ON OFF the data compression When the data format is TIFF or BMP select from the following list of choices OFF Saves without compressing the data ON Saves by compressing the data using LZW and RLE for TIFF and BMP formats respectively File name and comment See the explanation given in File name and comment in section 12 5 Auto naming function See the explanation given in Auto naming function in section 12 5 Note You cannot save while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON IM 253710 01E 13 13 ejyeq abew use19S Gulyyndjno g Chapter 14 External Trigger Output and Other Operations 14 1 External Trigger Output AN CAUTION Do not apply an external voltage to
223. aa EN 9 17 lagiii Aa eea iee eredita i eiaeia 1 35 language 14 2 LCD Brighth SS irana a e aE 14 2 LEF Co EAA E E A A EEE EET A AEE 1 35 LING TING aiie e E E ENST 1 14 5 27 listdiSpl y pescvesecivecrcsveaenerenenrnesteaveteveceneereesteventevtes 1 24 8 16 lock release lever ssssssssssssssssersessrresrnssrrrsessnresrnnsrennsssne 13 2 M Make Dir e arar Le een Ls he manual scaling mapping marke isernia ae ee ete ase tad Mark r jump isarap o a e es MATH MEASURE csi heeds ena a ea measurement function ccccccccceeeessteeeeeeeseensteeeeeeess 1 5 1 7 measurement function harmonic measurement mode 17 4 measurement function normal measurement mode 17 2 measurement item ooo cece eee e eee teeeeeeeeeaeeteeeeeaeeeeaes measurement MOE 00 cece eee eeee tees eeeeeteeeteaeenees measurement range ou eee eee eee eee e cee teeteeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeeeaee measurement computation period Media Info nicest pean a A ASAE Index 2 IM 253710 01E MOCIUIN asiependa cit neve consenesetnnnenserecservatarerteee memory testing MESSAGE eee a message language cseccscseessseeeseesserseneeneeessseesseeeoneessees 14 3 MIN Ord 6h ain aten a N TETA 10 22 MISC 12 3 14 2 16 5 POSttJJ Eronni enia 1 21 POWED D SiChsdiuse nnsa a ooa a eaae iaa App 25 power coefficient 1 14 5 24 POWEF C
224. active power TREND C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 Urms Irms and P C7 C8 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 Rectified mean value calibrated TRENDM C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 to the rms value Umn and Imn C7 C8 Simple average Udc and Idc TRENDD C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 Frequency fU and fl TRENDF C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 Functions TRENDM TRENDD and TRENDF are applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The synchronizing signal varies depending on the channel symbol that is entered in the parentheses of each function Channel Symbol Synchronizing_ Signal C1 C2 C1 C2 Signal selected for ELEMENT1 in the zero crossing setting of the measurement computation period C3 C4 C3 C4 Signal selected for ELEMENT2 in the zero crossing setting of the measurement computation period C5 C6 C5 C6 Signal selected for ELEMENTS in the zero crossing setting of the measurement computation period C7 C8 C7 C8 Signal selected for ELEMENT4 in the zero crossing setting of the measurement computation period If the motor module is installed in slot 4 C7 C8 C7 C8 cannot be specified IM 253710 01E 1 37 suonoun4 1 8 Waveform Analysis Example of an equation used to display the TREND waveform of Umn of element 1 and the waveform Equation TRENDM C1 signal When the rising slope of the When the rising slope of the synchronizing signal is two or more synchronizin
225. actor Procedure Measure Mode E o For a functional description see section 1 7 This section applies when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement OBSERVATION TIME CONFIGURATION 7 TAIG D SETUP INPUT fueasurdraicGER ACA Gp CJ DISPLAY MATH cursor zoom f C REMOTE FILE msc HELP LOCAL N SHIFT l copy nuit ca CLEMENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER 7 SINGLE Sgt start stop 4 ABORT E F i e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Set the measurement mode to harmonic measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Harmonics Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Press the Thd Formula soft key to display the menu used to select the equation for the distortion factor 6 Press either the Total or Fundamental soft key to select the equation CP ON Measure Mode Measure M 5 Formula Measure 5 Formula Orr N Urns Irns Urms Irns Averaging Averaging Ni ON Ww Start Pos 16 00ms Measure
226. actor hvf Applicable standard IEC34 1 1996 Harmonic current factor hef Determined in the same way as hvf PLL source frequency fU or fl Displays the frequency of the signal selected for the PLL source The unselected signal displays no data 1 1 kis an integer in the range from 0 to the upper limit of the harmonic analysis Oth order is the DC component The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 500 by the frequency of the PLL source 2 Total is a value determined according to the equation given in Appendix 2 from the fundamental signal 1st order and all harmonic components 2nd to the upper limit The DC component can also be included 3 Total harmonic is a value determined according to the equation given in Appendix 2 from all harmonic components 2nd to the upper limit 4 Measurement functions specific to the IEC or IEEE standard For details see Appendix 2 17 4 IM 253710 01E 17 4 Measurement Function Measurement Item Measurement function indicating the phase difference of the fundamental voltage and current between elements 1 to 3 Item Symbol and Meaning Phase difference U1 U2 U1 U2 Phase difference of the fundamental voltage U2 1 of element 2 with respect to the fundamental voltage U1 1 of element 1 Phase difference U1 U3 U1 U3 Phase difference of the fundamental voltage U3 1 of element 3 with respect to U1 1 Phase d
227. ad and write possible e R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file Selecting the files to be deleted You can delete all files that have a mark to the left of the file name There are two methods available to select the files that are to be deleted Selecting the files one at a time Place marks to the left of the file names one at a time using the Set Reset soft key Selecting all files at once Place marks to the left of the file names all at once using the All Set soft key There are three methods to place the marks all at once e Selecting a file and pressing the All Set soft key places marks on the directory containing the selected file and all files in that directory Selecting a directory and pressing the All Set soft key places marks on the selected directory and all files in that directory Selecting a medium and pressing the All Set soft key places marks on all the directories and files on the selected medium Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box You can specify the type of files to display Item Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item selection menu and the data type selection menu All Displays all the files on the medium IM 253710 01E 12 31 eea y Buipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 8 Changing the File Attribute Deleting Files Properties See the explanation given in Properties in section 12 5 Note Yo
228. ade in Japan iv IM 253710 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories for the Input Module The following standard accessories are supplied with the input module Part Name Part Number Qty Notes External sensor cable B9284LK 1 Provided with the 253751 and 253752 A Optional Accessories Sold Separately The following optional accessories are available for purchase separately Part Name Part Number Q ty Notes 1 Serial port adapter 366971 1 9pin to 25 pin adapter 1 EIA 574 Standard 2 EIA 232 Standard RS 232 2 BNC alligator clip 366926 1 42 V or less length 1 m measurement lead 3 BNC BNC 366924 1 42 V or less length 1 m measurement lead 366925 1 42 V or less length 2 m 4 Measurement lead 758917 1 Two leads in one set used with the separately sold adapter 758922 or 758929 length 0 75 m ratings 1000 Vrms 5 Alligator clip 758922 1 Two pieces in one set for the measurement lead adapter set 758917 Rated voltage 300 V 6 Alligator clip 758929 1 Two pieces in one set for the measurement lead adapter set 758917 Rated voltage 1000 V 7 Fork terminal 758921 1 Two pieces in one set for the measurement lead adapter set 758917 Rated current 25 A 1 2 3 Spare Parts Sold Separately The following spare parts are available Part Name PartNumber Q ty Notes 1 Print
229. aeaaaee e Aeara 5 24 scaling factor motor output sssesssseseeerrerrernerrerrrereens 15 19 IM 253710 01E Index 3 a an Index scaling factor revolution sensor eee eects 15 13 scaling factor torque scaling function 2 SCNEGM EN EAT atg Atoa a et te nets fs SCHOMING iei araia dirs firien SCSI SCSI ID SCSI specification eee z2 Selecting current sensor range 5 18 selecting measurement mode eeeseeerieseeerresrrseee 5 1 selecting wiring method SelistOSt erpa onn e a EEN AN AR Sense Type isso ah apard aaide aeiia Sensor Range Sensor Ratio mV A serial interface simple average Simultaneous display c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeetsaeees SlOP hatara aea papira aidai asarak SOUCO rue n Sian ee spare part Speed n n split screen standard ACCESSONY ceecccsccvscscesecuedeevoutenseaverdensstacuressaeendncccoess iii standard operating condition eee ee eee teste eeeeee 17 12 Star gt Delta vis 10 10 START STOP verei cities oid atleast Ega 4 4 static capacitance App 32 Storage environment oe eee eee eee eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaees 17 12 Storage locatis asirini a N 3 2 stray Capacitant sisial aaeeio ariaa iiet 3 9 SUTIX Coded er aana ai de ii SIde ME EE AEE EA a E vi symbol of measurement FUNCTION eee eects App 4 SYNC SOULCE oo eeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeecaeeea
230. aeeeseeceesseseeseeseetersersietentaneats Av 3 4 Wiring Precautions 2 c g 82e sai si aes eceetieds diese eet chassis eeenien de a eai 3 5 For Making Accurate Measurement eeccceeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeneeeeenneeeseneeeeeneeeeees A 3 6 Connecting the Power Supply ceccecceceeceereeeeeeceeeeeeaecaeeaeeaecaeeeseaeeaneeseetatenseeteneats 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetee Wiring to the voltage current input terminal of the power measurement module 3 8 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Wiring to the current sensor input connector of the power measurement module 3 9 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement 000 Wiring to the voltage current input terminal of the power measurement module A 3 10 Wiring a Circuit with Voltage Input Exceeding 600 V c cecceeceeteeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeenees 3 11 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch ccccecceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee 3 12 Setting the Date and Time 0 eee eee cecceneceeeeeaeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeteaeeseaeteaeetea Chapter 4 Common Operations 4 1 Entering Values and Strings c cccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeseeeesseeeeaeesaeeseaeessaeeeseeseaeeeeetes 4 2 hnitializing the Settings vi e5 sescpiiede iste aati nat din a dann 4 3 Starting Stopping Data A
231. ainly created by the load that is supplied with power In general when there is only resistance in the load the phase difference is zero when there is inductance coil in the load the current lags behind the voltage when there is capacitance in the load the current leads the voltage When the current lags the voltage When the current leads the voltage The vector display is used to show the amplitude and phase relationships of the voltage and current Taking the positive vertical axis to be the reference an angle in the counter clockwise direction is taken to be positive To clearly indicate that the graph is showing a vector a dot is placed on the top of the symbol representing the value The amplitude of the vector represents the rms value When the current lags the voltage When the current leads the voltage A ut The vector display of the voltage and current of a three phase AC signal would look something like the following figure Uia IM 253710 01E App 27 Ea xipueddy Appendix 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit AC power Because a phase difference depending on the load exists between the voltage and current AC power is not as easily determined as DC power When the instantaneous voltage is u Umsinat and the instantaneous current is i Imsin t the instantaneous power p is p u Xi Umsinat x Imsin t o Ulcos Ulcos 2at 6 whe
232. al data are displayed at the highlighted position Changing the element wiring method 9 Press the Element soft key to display the element wiring method selection box 10 11 and numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position Changing the harmonic order 12 Press ESC key to return to the Display setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the element wiring method from Element to B Press the SELECT key The symbol for the selected element or wiring method 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select the order The display is scrolled to show the selected order and numerical data You can also page scroll see section 8 4 OUOU0UEU List Ttens List Item No l 1 Se lect Function u Element Element 1 g List Itens OList Item No l 1 Function U Select Elenent 2 Elenent 3 Element 4 A zB BUQUUEBUL M Efenent Element 1 Disp tay 4 Format Numeric 4 Item Amount Single List 4 List Items Page Up Scroll Exec Page Doun Scroll Exec UUUOUUU IM 253710 01E 8 21 Aejdsiq jeouewny e 8 5 Changing the Displayed Items of the Harmonic Measurement Data Explanation For the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation and appendix 2 Symbols and Determ
233. alue D on the first time is M4 Dn 1 Display value at the n 1st time that has been exponentially averaged Mn Measured data at the nth time K Attenuation constant see Setting the attenuation constant Dn Dn 1 Measurement functions that are averaged The measurement functions that are directly averaged are shown below Other functions that use these functions in their computation are also affected by the averaging For details regarding the determination of each measurement function see Appendix 2 For the normal measurement mode Urms Irms Umn Imn Udc Idc P For the harmonic measurement mode U k I k P k Q k k harmonic order Setting the attenuation constant Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 Note The following measurement functions are not affected by averaging For the harmonic measurement mode fU fl U pk U pk I pk I pk For the harmonic measurement mode oU k ol k 6U1 U2 6U1 U3 pU1 11 U1 12 U1 13 k harmonic order If the data acquisition is stopped while averaging is in progress and the acquisition is restarted the averaging process continues Averaging cannot be turn ON when the user defined function is turned ON or when the Mode of the waveform computation see section 11 2 is ON and either Math1 or Math2 is ON IM 253710 01E 10 19 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 6 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Diff
234. ame as the 5 A terminal The peak value is 10 A or the Instantaneous max RMS value is 7 A which ever is shown above less 20 A terminal The peak value is 100 A or the RMS value is 30 A which ever is less AN CAUTION Use measurement cables that have adequate margins of withstand voltage and current capacity with respect to the voltage or current being measured It should also have proper ratings that are suited to the measurement Example When making measurements on a current of 20 A use copper wires that have a conductive cross sectional area of 4 mm Note After wiring the wiring method must be selected See section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method When measuring large currents or voltages or currents that contain high frequency components take special care in dealing with mutual interference and noise when wiring Keep the measurement cables as short as possible to minimize the loss between the circuit under measurement and the instrument The thick lines on the wiring diagrams shown in sections 3 7 and 3 10 are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current In order to make accurate measurements of the voltage of the circuit under measurement connect the cable to the circuit as close as possible In order to make correct measurements separate the measurement cables as far away from the earth ground wires and the instrument s case as
235. ample The true RMS value of the voltage of element 1 Urmst1 L Element 1 True RMS value Voltage The simple average of the current of the power measurement modules elements that are wired using wiring method A ldclA L ztunction of wiring method A Simple average Current IM 253710 01E Aejdsiq jeouewnyn e 8 2 Displaying Normal Measurement Data Selecting the display format Select the display format of the numerical data from the following choices No data conse are displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or there are no numerical data Numeric Only numerical data are displayed Numeric Wave The numerical data and waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the waveform display see sections 9 1 to 9 8 Numeric Bar The numerical data and bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows The bar graph is useful when making harmonic measurements For the procedures related to setting the bar graph display see section 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data Numeric X Y The numerical data and X Y waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the X Y waveform display see section 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later Selecting the number of di
236. and 17 pF Maximum allowable input 50 Vpk or 25 Vrms whichever is less Continuous maximum common 600 Vrms CAT II mode voltage For other specifications see chapter 17 IM 253710 01E 15 1 Sa NpoW 100 0 B Qeoi ddy uolOUNY uonenjerg 1010 15 1 Inputting Signals of rotating speed and Torque Precautions when displaying the measurement functions of the motor module in the harmonic measurement mode For the meanings of the measurement function symbols used in the explanation below see section 15 2 and the following sections or appendix 2 The numerical data of Speed Torque Sync Slip Pm nmA and nmB are Oth order DC components The default setting of the minimum order Min Order in the harmonic measurement mode is 1 To display the numerical data of Speed Torque Sync Slip Pm nmA and nmB the minimum order must be set to 0 The numerical data of Torque in the normal measurement mode are simple averaged values The numerical data of each harmonic component and the total of Torque in the harmonic measurement mode are RMS values The numerical data that correspond to the same value as the normal measurement mode are displayed at Trq dc The Oth DC component of Speed and Pm are displayed as total numerical data The numerical data of Sync and Slip are displayed only when the PLL source PII Source and frequency synchronization source Sync Speed Source are set to the same channel nmA displays t
237. ands when constructing the equation as described in section 11 2 For FFT functions only one operand can be used from the following C1 to C8 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 or C7 C8 Selecting the number of computed points Select the number of points from the following choices The FFT is taken over the specified number of points from the start point of the waveform computation set in section 11 1 1000 2000 10000 Selecting the time window Select the time window from the following choices Rect The time window is set to a rectangular window This window is best suited to transient signals such as impulse waves in which the signal attenuates completely inside the window Hanning The time window is set to a hanning window This window is best suited to continuous signals Note The FFT cannot be performed when the display record length is less than the number of computed points If a channel of an element that has no module installed is used as an operand in the equation the computation result displays no data The maximum frequency displayed on the horizontal axis of the FFT display is the Nyquist frequency which is half the frequency of the module s sampling rate When the measurement is made at rates of 5 MS s and 100 kS s the displayed frequencies are 2 5 MHz and 50 kHz respectively If the input signal contains a frequency component that is higher than half the sampling rate aliasing occurs Note that a display c
238. art Point 0 00MS I End Point _s s 9 BOms M FFT Points 1000 M FFT Window Rect Math Exec Re computing 11 Press the Math Exec soft key The waveform computation is performed over the specified region 19 00ms End Point LW 80 ms H FFT Points 1006 Math Exec 11 2 IM 253710 01E 11 1 Setting the Computation Region Re computing Explanation Select the computation region for performing waveform computations that are described later See section 11 2 or select the start point for the FFT see section 11 3 Turning ON OFF the waveform computation mode Select whether or not to perform waveform computations OFF Does not perform waveform computations ON Performs waveform computations The menu used to set the waveform computation is also displayed Setting the computation region The waveform computation region is set to the region between the two cursors start and end points that are placed on the screen When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the start position dot dashed line and end position dotted line can be moved in the range from 0 s the left end of the screen to the observation time the right end of the screen When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the start and end positions can be moved in the range defined by the number of data points in
239. asurement Range during Direct Input Setting the current range Selecting the current input terminal 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Terminal of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to select 5A or 20A 20A cannot be selected on the power measurement module 253751 Selecting the voltage range NO Turn the jog shuttle to select the I Range of the element you wish to set Press the SELECT key to display the current range selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the current range from 10Apk to 0 1Apk and Auto or 100Apk to 1Apk and Auto when the current input terminal is 5A or 20A respectively 8 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new current range Power Module Elenent 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 290A Shunt 2 A Shunt ZOA Shunt 2GA Shunt U Range Zo00Upk__ _2606Upk__ _2000Upk Terninal pA Sen_20A pa Sen_zoa pA Sen_zon Q I Range A6Apk 16Apk AGApk Sensor Rat iocnua 6 0000 0 0000 5 0000 Line Filter OFF OFF Zero Cross Filter OFF OFF Scaling Prr ON OFF ON Pt Ratio 6 0000 6 0000 3 0000 Ct Ratio C 0 0000 Scaling Factor 0 0000 3 5505 0 0000 3 0000 0 0000 Power Module Element 1 Element Z Elenent 3 Element 4 ZOA Shunt 20A Shunt 290A Shunt 2A Shunt U Range Z600Upk_
240. at is created by the PZ4000 on the SCSI device while the PZ4000 SCSI device and PC are connected In such case reconnect the devices according to the procedures given in Procedure to connect the PZ4000 SCSI device and PC via SCSI see above However if the PC is running Windows 95 98 the files will be recognized by taking the following steps 1 On Windows 95 98 open the Settings tab in the Properties dialog box for the connected drive and select the Removable check box Select My Computer Control Panel System Device Manager Disk Drive Select the relevant drive from the drive list that appears when Disk Drive is opened Open the Properties dialog box of the selected drive and select the Settings tab A dialog box containing the Removable check box appears The drive letter of the selected drive is displayed under Current Drive in the dialog box 2 Reboot the PC 3 After creating a new file with the PZ4000 select Refresh in the file list window Explorer for example 12 4 IM 253710 01E 12 4 Formatting the Disk CONFIGURATION TAIG D 3 SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy wut ca MENU ELEMENTS SINGLE SHE sTaRT SToP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME UOU00U8 g S cH2 cH4 cH6 cH8 current SA CJC e The __ mark indic
241. ate Select from the following rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps For detailed specifications related to the serial interface see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM253710 11E 17 10 Centronics Interface Item Specification Connector type D Sub25 pin receptacle Electrical specifications Conforms to Centronics specifications Supported printers ESC P printers that support ESC P raster commands BJC 80V PCL5 LIPS3 PC PR201 17 11 SCSI Option Item Specification Standard type SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector Half pitch 50 pin pin type Connector pin assignments Unbalanced single end built in terminator SCSI devices that are HD drive MS DOS ver3 3 or later or SCSI HD drive that can be formatted using EZ SCSI supported MO drive 128 230 640 MB drive MO medium uses semi IBM format ZIP drive PD drive For further information please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 17 12 Built in Printer Option Item Specification Printing system Thermal line dot method Dot density 8 dots mm Paper width 112 mm Printing width 104 mm IM 253710 01E 17 11 h Ey suoleoyioeds 17 13 General Specifications Item Specification Standard operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 3 C Ambient humidity 50 10 RH Power voltage and frequency Less than 5 of the rated voltage
242. atean aa h ade a e eaa Ta aA te 1 3 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeneees 1 5 Normal Measurement Mode and Measurement Function Types of Numerical Data 1 5 Harmonic Measurement Mode and Measurement Function Types of Numerical Data ce eeseeeesseeseneeeeeneeereeneeereneeees 1 7 Measurement Computation Period c cescesecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeteaeesaeeseaeesieeenaeeeaaes 1 10 Wiring Method Number of Displayed Digits 0 0 0 0 eee eeeseeeeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeeeneeeeenneeeneneeees 1 11 1 3 Acquiring Data Voltage and Current Signals ecceeceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeetseeeeaeerses 1 12 Sampled Data Input module Element and Channel cccccceeeeeeeeesneeeeseeeeeeneeeeees 1 12 Measurement Range of Voltage Current and Power Scaling sscceeeseeeeseeeeees 1 13 Input Filter Line Filter and Zero Crossing Filter ccceeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeetneeeeeeeeeeens 1 14 Observation Time Record length cccccccecceeesscceeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeseneeseeeeescaeeesssueessenees 1 15 Dividing the record length Time Base 0 0 eeeceeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeereneeeeesaeeeesaeeeteneeeeenaeeeenaes 1 16 Zero Level Compensation NULL Function cccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeessneeeessneesseanees 1 17 dA Migger sieo a ea See ae a Ae 1 18 Trigger Source Trigger Slope Trigger Level Trigger Type seeceesceeeteeeeeeetete
243. ates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedure i Press the FILE key to display the File setting menu 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the Utility setting menu and the File List dialog box 3 Press the Function soft key to display the file function selection menu OOUE e eq y Buipeo7 pue Burnes Ey File File List Format M File Item i File Nane Size Space Wo Function 1457664 1387008 Format 2146009008 2612315648 Setup Nedia Info Load Format save Utility OUOUUUU IM 253710 01E 12 5 12 4 Formatting the Disk Selecting the medium to be formatted 4 Press the Format soft key A list of media is displayed in the File List dialog box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the medium to be formatted If no external SCSI devices are identified and a floppy disk is inserted in the floppy disk drive only FDO is displayed JUUUUUUU File List Format File Nane Size Space Wo Function Delete 1457664 1348096 Format 2146009088 2012315648 Copy Media Info Renane MakeDir Format Selecting the FD format 6 Press the Format soft key to display the format selection menu 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the format from 2DD 640K to 2HD 1 44M Go to step 9 Fornat W Function F
244. ation Max rated voltage Max rated current Type Standard Power supply 250 V 6 3A Time lag UL VDE certified SCSI board 250 V 800 mA Time lag VDE SEMKO certified The user cannot replace this fuse because it is located inside the case If you believe the fuse is blown contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 17 12 IM 253710 01E 17 13 General Specifications Item Specification Accessories Power cord 1 piece Spare power fuse 1 piece Attached to the fuse holder Cover plate 4 pieces Attach cover plates on unused slots using screws see below Current input protective cover 1 piece Screw 20 pieces M3 length 5mm for fixing cover plates and current input protective covers in place Printer roll paper 1 roll only provided with option B5 Rubber feet 2 sets User s manual 1 piece this manual Communication Interface User s Manual 1 piece Safety standard Complying standard EN61010 1 apply for 253710 253751 253752 Overvoltage category Installation category II Pollution degree 2 Emission Complying standard EN55011 Group1 Class A apply for 253710 253751 253752 This product is a Class A for industrial environment product Operation of this product in a residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference EN61000 3 2 apply for 253710 253751 253752 Cable requirement e Measuring Input To bundle the wires between source and load f
245. available When the trigger mode is HF Auto or HF Normal edge trigger is the only trigger type available In addition the trigger level cannot be set 7 2 IM 253710 01E 7 2 Selecting the Trigger Source Procedure This section applies when the trigger mode is set to a mode other than OFF CONFIGURATION MENU COPY NULL 3 SETUP INPUT MEASURE DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM CAL TRI 5B lf d gt E M E3 REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT Doung Set the trigger mode to a mode other than OFF For procedures see section ont cnaf ons cn7 CH8 E E E E e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key VOLTAGE CURRENT For a functional description see section 1 4 SINGLE Suge start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME rr Gl N A 7 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode 1 Press the TRIGGER key to display the Trigger setting menu Check that Mode is set to a mode other than OFF Press the Source soft key to display the source selection box 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the source from CH1 to Ext 4 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new source J Trigger Node Auto Se lect CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CH6 CH CH8 Ext M Source IM 253710 01E
246. axis values and Y axis values of each cursor can be measured The four cursors are set on the same waveform Y1 Y axis value of Cursor1 Y2 Y axis value of Cursor2 AY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 X1 X axis value of Cursor3 X2 X axis value of Cursor4 AX The difference between the X axis values of Cursor3 and Cursor4 1 AX The inverse of the difference between the X axis values of Cursor3 and Cursor4 Note ____ When the measurement mode is harmonic and the time base is set to internal clock the unit of the horizontal axis becomes frequency Hz if the waveform on which to place the marker is set to Math1 or Math2 that is computing FFTs The converting equation is as follows f Hz fs x N Max Order where fs is the sampling rate see appendix 1 N the harmonic order and Max Order the maximum harmonic order under analysis see section 10 7 When the measurement mode is normal or harmonic and the time base is set to external clock the unit of the horizontal axis becomes harmonic order if the waveform on which to place the marker is set to Math1 or Math2 that is computing FFTs AY AX and 1 AX are computed when the units for Cursor1 and Cursor2 are the same time or frequency for example IM 253710 01E 11 17 sishjeuy WAIOJOAe z 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor Movement range of the marker The markers move along the selected waveform When the measurement mode is no
247. ay ceeeeeeees 1 31 2 11 9 25 vector display of an AC Signal eeeceeeeereeneeeeeees App 27 vertical AXIS nesre a cateciedetoereties eave Na 1 26 voltage input terminal ssssessesiesserresirerrerrnrrrerrnriesrrerrnere 2 14 v lt gg PANGS iaeia neitar aa A aaran rinane Eapana aaria KIRARA AEAN 5 10 W WAV O arda a ae A R N Wave Display wevecavecevesivcsteccsencssiestendcececonseovestsassaveuncoteevees Wave Setting 00 ee eeeeesscesesseceeeeseceeeeaeeeeeaeseeeeaeeaeeeaes Wave Bar waveform analysis waveform computation 2 waveform computation MOdE sessesssersesrserrerisrresrrerreere waveform display sessessesssesiesissrrerinsinsirnsinsirerinrinerrnernert waveform label waveform mapping window trigger Window Width veccccssesevscnvecnvereescscvercneececouavoneacreacesenntenscvnenss WINO aa A AR wiring example current sensor wiring example directly eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeees wiring example exceeding 600 V eee eee eeeeeeeees 3 22 wiring example PT or CT eeeeeeceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaees 3 20 wiring method cece eeeeee eects eeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeaeeete 1 11 3 12 5 2 wiring precaution cccsecssscosseetoneecteceonsenestedsucoesetoseeneesaenee 3 6 Z 7d OKH COLTA O PEE EA T TT 10 6 zero crossing detector s sssserrsseserusserrenennsrenenenrasensrnnenae 1 3 zero crossing filter oo e
248. ay oy Buas eo 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method Procedure Explanation For a functional description see section 1 2 TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER DISPLAY MATH cursor zoom REMOTE SHIFT cor muja MENU ELEME FILTER 1 gt S 8 FILTER FILTER FILTER y SINGLE Sant START STOP ABORT CHT VOLTAGE cH2 cH4 cH6 cn8 current baa JUJUL e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 0000000 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Press the Wiring soft key to display the wiring method selection menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the wiring method Press the SELECT key to confirm the wiring method Select Mode AP2W 1P2W Normal 1P2W 1P3U PO NS 1P2W 3P3U arzu e 1P2W 3P4U 1P3W 1P2U 1P3W 1P3U 1P2W 1PZU 1P3W 3P3U Display Resolution 3P3W 1P2U bdgts Gdgts 3P3W 1P3W 3P3W 3P3U 3V3A 1P2U Initialize JUUUUUUU The wiring method is the method by which the signals that are input to each element are combined The numerical data of Xfunctions are determined according to the wiring method The selectable wiring methods vary depending on which element slots have power measurement modules installed The wiring method can be selected f
249. ayed When the data acquisition is aborted using the SHIFT SINGLE START ABORT key the acquisition stops immediately when the key is pressed Therefore numerical data cannot be measured computed or displayed and the waveform cannot be displayed This condition can be avoided by dividing the record length For information on dividing the record length see section 6 2 Selecting the Record Length for Acquiring Data Conditions in which the START STOP key and SINGLE START key are void During Remote mode REMOTE indicator is lit While printing While accessing the medium Note If the acquisition conditions are changed and the measurement is started any previously acquired data in the acquisition memory are cleared Attempting to access the storage medium while data acquisition in progress results in error When the acquisition is stopped the averaging operation is also stopped When the acquisition is restarted the averaging operation continues IM 253710 01E suoneiedg uowwog 4 4 Performing Zero level Compensation Procedures Explanation ONFIGURATION TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACG DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE misc HELP LOCAL ag SHIFT copy nuLL cat MENU FILTEI FILTER FILTER i 2 3 4 UOU0UU8 CH7 ont on3 oH5 o cH2 cH4 cne cng e The __ mark indicates t
250. aying Normal Measurement Data Resetting the order of the displayed items If the number of displayed items is set to something other than ALL the order of the displayed items can be reset to a preset order For details regarding the reset information see Appendix 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Scrolling the display Because all the data cannot fit on one screen a scroll function is provided When the number of displayed items is set to something other than All Turn the jog shuttle to move the highlight to another measurement function The menu items that are displayed change as follows Norm Item No The data number of the highlighted measurement function is displayed Function The symbol representing the highlighted measurement function is displayed When None is displayed an item without a selected measurement function is being specified using the jog shuttle In this case the area for displaying the measurement function and data displays no data Element The element wiring method of the highlighted measurement function is displayed When the number of displayed items is set to All Turn the jog shuttle to move the highlight to another measurement function The symbol representing the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Function section of the menu no data is displayed in places where there are no numerical data Note For
251. bar graph display see section 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data Display a Se lect Hi Format Nuner ic Numeric Wave Item Amount Bar 8 Vector Numer ic Wave funeric Bar Reset Wave Bar Exec Numeric Disp Itens puuugugg Displaying numerical data and X Y waveform 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric X Y 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later For the procedures related to setting the X Y waveform display see section 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform Disp tay Format Numeric Tten Amount B Reset Exec Nuner ic Disp Items iSelect Numeric Wave X Y Bar Vector Nuner ic Wave luner ic X Y Numer ic Bar Wave X Wave Bar DOULE IM 253710 01E Aejdsiq jeouewny e 8 2 Displaying Normal Measurement Data The following procedures are given with the premise that Displaying only the numerical data was selected in the previous section Selecting the number of displayed items 6 Press the Item Amount soft key to display the displayed item number selection menu 7 Press one of the keys from 8 to All to select the number of displayed items Resetting the order of the displayed items If the number of displayed items is set to something other than ALL the order of the di
252. c Al Alrms Almn Aldc Alac This is called delta computation For the equation see Appendix 3 The measurement and computation periods are the same as those described in section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods Select the type of delta computation from the following list of choices OFF No delta computation is performed e ul u2 Computes the difference between the voltage of element 1 and the voltage of element 2 For example AU1 AUrms1 AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 can be determined for the circuit shown in the diagram below e i1 i2 Computes the difference between the current of element 1 and the current of element 2 For example Al1 Alrms1 Almn1 Aldc1 Alac1 can be determined for the circuit shown in the diagram below l r 3P3W gt 3V3A Computes various data when the wiring method is changed from a three phase three wire system 8P3W to a three voltage three current system 3V3A AU1 AUrms1 AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 AU3 AUrms3 AUmn3 AUdc3 AUac3 Al1 Alrms1 Almn1 Aldc1 Alac1 Al3 Alrms3 Almn3 Aldc3 Alac3 Primary Secondary R OH l U U D AU3 Transform IM 253710 01E 10 9 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 2 Selecting the Delta Computation Delta gt Star Usi ng the data from a three phase three wire system or a three voltage three current system the various data of a star c
253. c distortion The ratio of the rms value of all harmonics to the rms value of the fundamental signal or total signal App 30 IM 253710 01E Appendix 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Interference caused by harmonic signals Harmonic signals adversely affect electric devices and facilities The following are some examples Phase advance capacitor or series reactor The reduction of circuit impedance caused by the harmonic current causes excessive current to flow resulting in vibration humming overheating and burnouts Cable Overheating of the neutral conductor caused by harmonic currents flowing through it in a three phase four wire system Potential transformer Causes magnetostrictive noise of the iron core which leads to increased iron and copper losses Breaker and fuse Erroneous operation caused by excessive harmonic current Causes fuse to blow Communication Causes noise voltage from electro magnetic induction e Control device Erroneous operation caused by distorted control signals Audio visual equipment Deterioration of performance and life span Flicker caused by video noise Malfunction of parts IM 253710 01E App 31 Ea xipueddy Appendix 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Resistance Current i when the instantaneous value of u Umsinat of AC voltage is applied to load r
254. case 50 MQ or more at 500 VDC Between current input terminals and case 50 MQ or more at 500 VDC Between voltage input terminals and current input terminals 50 MQ or more at 500 VDC Withstanding voltage Between voltage input terminals and case 2200 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between current input terminals and case 2200 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Between voltage input terminals and current input terminals 3700 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Weight Approx 1 1 kg Voltage input Input terminal type Plug in terminal Input format Floating input resistive voltage divider Input impedance Input resistance Approx 1 MQ Input capacitance Approx 5 pF Measurement range Select from Auto 2000 Vpk 1200 Vpk 600 Vpk 300 Vpk 200 Vpk 120 Vpk 60 Vpk 30 Vpk Frequency range DC to 2 MHz Instantaneous maximum 2000 Vpk or 1000 Vrms whichever is less CAT II allowable input 1 s Continuous maximum Same as the instantaneous maximum allowable input allowable input Continuous maximum 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz CAT II common mode voltage CMRR Short input terminals apply 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz between input Influence from common terminals and case 0 005 of range or less at 10 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz mode voltage Maximum range measurement range x 0 0002 x f of range or less for other frequencies designed value f is the frequency in kHz Line filter Select from OFF 500
255. ce f Hz wave measurement mode 20 40 f x 4096 2 500 50 40 80 f x 2048 4 500 50 80 160 f x 1024 8 500 50 160 320 fx512 16 200 25 320 640 f x 256 32 100 25 640 1280 f x 128 64 50 10 1280 2560 f x 64 128 30 10 2560 6400 fx 32 256 15 Accuracy For the accuracy corresponding to bandwidths for which the accuracy of the normal measurement mode does not apply add 0 001 x f x harmonic order of reading designed spec f is the frequency kHz of the harmonic order being measured 1 The items of the fundamental frequency of the PLL source have hysteresis band widths 2 When the PLL source is set to a channel between CH1 and CH8 For the accuracy during the normal measurement mode see the specifications of each input module Save and Load data Save setup parameters waveform data and numerical data to floppy disk or external SCSI device Load the setup parameters or waveforms from the floppy disk or external SCSI device SCSI is an option Output Screen Image Data Output the screen image data to the built in printer external Centronics printer or floppy disk or external SCSI device Built in printer and SCSI are options IM 253710 01E 17 9 h Ey suoleoyioeds 17 6 External Trigger I O Section Item Specification External trigger input Connector type BNC connector EXT TRIG IN Input level CMOS Minimum pulse width 1 us Logic rising edge falling e
256. ch column You can select 1 or 2 for the list item No Changing the measurement function Select the measurement function to change from the following choices Note no measurement function U I P S Q A oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp Torque This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot Changing the element wiring method It is the same as the description given for When the number of displayed items is set to 8 or 16 on the previous page The measurement function Torque is applicable only to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later when the motor module installed in the element number 4 slot Therefore the selected element is set to some measurement function other than Torque Changing the harmonic order It is the same as the description given for When the number of displayed items is set to 8 or 16 on the previous page Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation and appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions For details regarding the wiring methods A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method 0 no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or there are no numerical data You
257. cord length are the same but when the observation time is short the display record length becomes shorter than the record length When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the display record length and record length are always equal Note When the time base see section 6 3 is set to external clock the record length of data is acquired by sampling at the rate of the external clock Dividing the record length You can select whether or not to divide the acquisition memory in half ON Divide the memory so that it appears as though there are two memories The data can be acquired to each memory separately The record length of each memory is half the total record length OFF Do not divide the memory 6 4 IM 253710 01E 6 3 Selecting the Time Base TRIG D CONFIGURATION O serur INPUT MEASURE rRIGGER ESC L ACQ DISPLAY MATH cursoR zoom REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL copy nui caf MENU CELEMENTS OOOO FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER 1 3 4 ont cna ows cn Cot E E cH at ee Doou i VOLTAGE CURRENT For a functional description see section 1 3 SINGLE SNE start stop S ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g y amp A e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedu
258. cquisition Name of the file for saving data Files are automatically named with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 You can specify a common name up to five characters that is placed before the three digit number The common name up to five characters is the file name that is specified during the save operation of various data see chapters 12 and 13 Ifa file with the same name exists at the destination an error message is displayed and the file is not saved Note The number of files that can be saved varies depending on the data size of the file and the free space at the save destination 14 10 IM 253710 01E Chapter 15 Motor Evaluation Function Applicable to Motor Modules 15 1 Inputting Signals of rotating speed and Torque Signals from revolution sensors and torque meters can be input to channels 7 and 8 of the PZ4000 For revolution sensors the signal is the DC voltage analog signal or the pulse count that are proportional to the rotating speed of the motor For torque meters it is the DC voltage analog signal that is proportional to the torque of the motor By using the active power and frequency that are measured using the power measurement module and the rotating speed and torque data input through the motor module the PZ4000 can compute parameters such as motor output synchronous speed slip motor efficiency and total efficiency CAUTION When the PZ4000 is ON do not apply a voltage that exceeds the
259. cquisition 0 ec eceeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeseaeeeaeeteaeeteeeteaeetaeeeaeete 4 4 Performing Zero level Compensation cecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeesteeeeaeeeneeees 4 5 Using the NULL Function a iiair a E a E a 4 6 Usingithe Help Function cc 2 cece ccc psecsccesdaaeesahestesevecheaadscasideesndvetessetaenesciegseiigessisedtact Chapter 5 Setting the Measurement Mode and Range 1 9 Saving Loading the Data and Other Useful Functions ccccscceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees Saving Loading data from a Floppy Disk Saving Loading from a SCSI Device Initialization Outputting Screen Image Data ec eeeeesecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeteeeeeeeteaee Selecting the Message Language Setting the Brightness of the LCD monitor Setting the Display Colors Action on Trigger Self test Function Confirming the System Condition of the Instrument 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode eecceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeseaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeete 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method ecceeceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeesaeeeaeeeneeesieeseaeeeeeee 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input cc eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeneeeee 5 4 Setting the Measurement Range when Using an External Current Sensot 5 5 Setting the Scaling Function when using an External PT or CT sasse 5 6 Selecting the Input Filter i 6 c esctesds cece cede eertehan eosteeedinet acne ee sereea
260. ct a cable from an external torque meter Section 15 1 IM 253710 01E sled JO s sn pue soweN D Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements 3 1 Precautions on the Use of the instrument Safety Precautions Safety Precautions If you are using this instrument for the first time make sure to thoroughly read the Safety Precautions given on pages v to vi Do not remove the cover from the instrument Some sections inside the instrument have high voltages that are extremely dangerous For internal inspection or adjustment contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Abnormal Symptoms Never continue to use the instrument if there are any symptoms of trouble such as strange smells or smoke coming from the instrument In such cases immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord Also turn OFF all devices under measurement that are connected to the input terminals Then contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Power cord Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull the cord itself Always hold the plug and pull it If the power cord is damaged contact your dealer for replacement Refer to page ii for the part number when placing an order General Handling Precautions Never place anything on top of the instrument Never place another instrument or any objects containing water on top of the instrument T
261. ction and the section after the trigger position is called the post trigger section If the observation time described earlier is changed the display range changes around the trigger position suoljun Trigger point Pre trigger _ Post trigger Acquisition memory I lt Displayed record gt length Displayed on the screen Trigger position Trigger point N N Pre trigger Post trigger Trigger Delay For procedures see section 7 6 The trigger position matches the trigger point when the trigger delay is set to 0 s This function allows you to display the waveform that is acquired the specified amount of time after the trigger point delay time When the trigger delay is set to 0 s When a trigger delay is set Trigger position Trigger position ie Delay time Trigger point e Trigger point IM 253710 01E 1 21 1 5 Numerical Display The numerical data can be displayed The display format varies depending on whether the measurement mode is set to normal measurement or harmonic measurement In addition the screen can be divided into top and bottom halves so that the numerical data and waveform can be displayed at the same time Waveform display is explained later Numerical display during the normal measurement mode For procedures see section 8 2 8 3 Selecting the number of displayed items You can select the number of displayed items in the range from eight to all W
262. cur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In this case let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using the instrument When storing the instrument avoid the following places Where the relative humidity is 80 or more In direct sunlight Where the temperature is 60 C or higher Near heat sources Where the level of mechanical vibration is high Where corrosive or explosive gas is present Where an excessive amount of soot dust salt and iron are present Where water oil or chemicals may splash It is recommended that the instrument be stored in an environment where the temperature is between 5 and 40 C and the relative humidity is between 20 and 80 3 2 IM 253710 01E 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation position Desktop Place the instrument on a flat even surface as shown in the figure below If the instrument is installed in a horizontal position rubber feet can be attached to prevent slipping Two sets four pieces of rubber feet are included in the package Rack mount To rack mount the instrument use the rack mount kit that is sold separately Name Model Notes Rack mount kit 751535 E4 For EIA Rack mount kit 751535 J4 For JIS An outline of the attachment procedures is given below For details regarding the attachment procedures see the i
263. d for analyzing signals that include components other than integer multiples of the fundamental signal distorted waves and noise It can be used to display the power spectrum with a frequency resolution of 500 1000 or 5000 points 1 40 IM 253710 01E Re computing the Waveform of the FFT Cursor measurements For procedures see section 11 1 With the data acquisition stopped the starting and ending points of the computation or waveform computation setting can be changed for re computation of the waveform and For procedures see section 11 4 1 8 Waveform Analysis suoljoun By placing markers or cursors on the displayed waveform the values at the point can be measured and displayed It can be used to measure the voltage and current for various sections of the waveform or the data on the horizontal axis X axis Cursor measurements are performed on the data that are displayed on the screen Marker and x marks are displayed on the specified waveform These are markers The vertical value and the horizontal value from the left edge of the screen for each marker as well as the differences between the vertical values and the horizontal values of the markers can be measured H cursors horizontal cursors Two dotted horizontal lines are displayed These are H cursors The vertical value of each H cursor and the difference between them can be measured V cursors vertical cursors Two dotted vert
264. d to be 100 For details see Setting the trigger level on page 7 7 Setting the window width Set the level in the range from 0 0 to 200 with respect to the center level described above Half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen is considered to be 100 e Measurement range 300 Vpk e Trigger source condition In e Center level 25 Window width 100 Note 100 300 Vpk yp tigger occurs Center level 25 75 Vr Window width 100 300 V y J 100 300 Vpk The window trigger setting is void when the trigger mode is set to OFF HF Auto or HF Normal In addition the window trigger is not selectable when the trigger mode is set to AT Level The trigger level setting is void when the trigger source is set to Ext When the specified window width exceeds the display range of the screen the window width is set to the display range 7 10 IM 253710 01E 7 5 Setting the Trigger Position Procedure For a functional description see section 1 4 This section applies when the trigger mode is set to a mode other than OFF CONFIGURATION MENU COPY NULL 3 SETUP INPUT MEASURE DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM CAL RI 5B If d gt E M zJ REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT Doung ont cnaf ons cn7 E E E on E E E VOLTAGE CURRENT
265. del Endian DataFormat GroupNumber TraceTotalNumber DataOffset Group1 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Group2 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit 1 11 PZ4000 Big Trace 4 16 0 4 1 Ch1 500 4 5777764E 03 3 3738281E 00 IS2 V 32767 32768 2 0000000E 07 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 4 A Ch5 500 7 6296274E 02 2 5000000E 03 IS2 V 32767 32768 2 0000000E 07 0 0000000E 00 s Ch2 500 3 8148137E 04 8 2995603E 02 IS2 A 32767 32768 2 0000000E 07 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 Ch6 500 3 8148137E 04 1 2500000E 01 IS2 A 32767 32768 2 0000000E 07 0 0000000E 00 S Ch3 500 7 6296274E 02 2 5000000E 03 IS2 V 32767 32768 2 0000000E 07 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 Ch7 500 7 6296274E 02 2 5000000E 03 IS2 V 32767 32768 2 0000000E 07 0 0000000E 00 S Ch4 500 3 8148137E 04 1 2500000E 01 IS2 A 32767 32768 2 0000000E 07 0 0000000E 00 s 1999 01 03 20 36 59 Ch8 500 3 8148137E 04 1 2500000E 01 IS2 A 32767 32768 2 0
266. dge f t rising falling edge Trigger delay time Within 2 us 1 sampling period External trigger output Connector type BNC connector EXT TRIG OUT Output level CMOS Output logic format LT Negative logic Output delay time Within 1 us 1 sampling period Output hold time Low level 200 ns or more For the specifications of external clock input see section 17 3 Time Axis 17 7 Internal Floppy Disk Drive Item Specification Number of drives 1 Size 3 5 floppy disk Capacity 640 KB 720 KB 1 2 MB 1 44 MB 17 8 GP IB Interface Item Specification Electrical and mechanical Conforms to IEEE St d 488 1978 specifications Functional specifications SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO Protocol Complies with IEEE St d 488 2 1987 Used code ISO ASCII code Mode Addressable mode Address 0 to 30 Clear remote mode Clear remote mode using LOCAL key except during Local Lockout For detailed specifications of the GP IB interface see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM253710 11E 17 10 IM 253710 01E 17 9 Serial RS 232 Interface Item Specification Connector type D Sub9 pin plug Electrical specification Complies with EIA 574 Standard EIA 232 RS 232 Standard for 9 pin Connection format Point to point Communication format Full duplex Synchronizing format Start stop asynchronous transmission Baud r
267. ding 0 1 of range 0 1 Hz lt f lt 10Hz 0 0 2 of reading 0 05 of range 10 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 2 of reading 0 025 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 025 of range 1 kHz lt f lt 10 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 04 of range 10 kHz lt f lt 50 kHz 0 2 of reading 0 05 of range 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 0 6 of reading 0 1 of range 100 kHz lt f lt 200 kHz 1 5 of reading 0 15 of range 200 kHz lt f lt 400 kHz 1 5 of reading 0 15 of range 400 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz 0 1 0 009 x f of reading 0 15 of range 500 kHz lt f lt 1 MHz 0 1 0 009 x f of reading 1 5 of range The unit of f in the equation for the reading error is KHz One year accuracy reading error measurement range error x 1 5 calibration period is one year Power factor coso A influence When coso 0 45 to 66 Hz Add apparent power reading x 0 0015 Other frequencies Add apparent power reading x 0 0002 x f designed value However add at least apparent power reading x 0 0015 f is the frequency kHz When 0 lt cosd lt 1 45 to 66 Hz Add 0 15 x tan of reading Other frequencies Add 0 02 x f x tano of reading designed value However add at least 0 15 x tano of reading fis the frequency kHz Influence from the amplitude o
268. ding designed value U input voltage kV f frequency kHz Line filter influence Add 0 5 of reading to the input signal whose frequency is 1 10th of the cut off frequency when the line filter is ON Measurement range influence As shown in the above table when the input signal is a sinusoid and its rms value is between 5 and 55 of the measurement range As shown in the above table when the input signal is a DC signal and the value is between 55 and 55 of the measurement range The reading error is doubled when the input signal is a sinusoid and its rms value is between 55 and 70 of the measurement range The reading error is doubled when the input signal is a DC signal and the value is between 100 and 55 or 55 to 100 of the measurement range Temperature coefficient Add 0 01 of reading C in the range from 5 to 20 C or 26 to 40 C However only when the input signal is 10 kHz or less Other Designed value for frequencies of 10 Hz or less and 1 MHz or more in the above table Only applicable for current sensor input and voltage input of 1 MHz or more Add designed value 1 10th of the reading error x 5 number of cycles x 10 k number of words of sampled data of reading when the input signal contains less than 5 cycles and there are less than 10 k words of sampled data For accuracy of cursor measurements see Cursor Measurement in section 17 5 Functions
269. ducts PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The position can be set in the range from 0 000 to 130 000 When the vertical zoom factor is 1 see section 9 8 half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen is considered to be 100 With the center of the vertical axis taken to be the zero amplitude line the upper and lower limits of the screen are 100 and 100 respectively 100 Position Y 50 F gt Position 50 100 Note Vertical position of computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 cannot be moved To expand and view a section of the waveform we recommend the following procedure 1 Set the zoom factor to 1 2 Move the vertical position so that the desired section of the waveform is at the center position according to the procedure described in this section 3 Set the vertical zoom factor see section 9 8 9 6 IM 253710 01E 9 3 Splitting the Screen and Displaying the Waveforms For a functional description see section 1 6 CONFIGURATION TAIG D z SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy nut ca MENU ELEMENTS SINGLE SHAE sTaRT STOP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME oo0uuuug g S cH2 cH4 cH6 cH8
270. e displayed as ratios Example n 80 ETA 0 8 IM 253710 01E 10 13 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 3 Setting the User Defined Function During harmonic measurement mode U U 1 1 P P S S Q Q 4 LAMBDA 0 PHI oU UPHI ol IPHI Z Z Rs RS Xs XS Rp RP Xp XP Uhdf UHDF Ihdf IHDF Phdf PHDF Uthd UTHD Ithd ITHD Pthd PTHD Uthf UTHF Ithf ITHF Utif UTIF Itif ITIF hvf HVF hef HCF fU FU fl FI 0U1 U2 PHIU1U2 oU1 U3 PHIU1U3 601 11 PHIU111 0U1 I2 PHIU112 oU1 I3 PHIU113 Torque TORQUE Speed SPEED Slip SLIP Sync SYNC nmA MAETA nmA MBETA A symbol representing the element to which the measured signal is to be applied is entered on the left side of the parentheses containing a comma OR followed by the harmonic order is entered on the right side E1 OR2 is an example Elements 1 2 3 4 ZA and XB are represented by the symbols E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 and E6 respectively One symbol from E1 to E6 can be entered in the parentheses for U to LAMBDA One symbol from E1 to E4 can be entered in the parentheses for PHI to FI E5 or E6 can be entered in the parentheses for PHIU1U2 to PHIU113 For operands that do not have a comma inside the parentheses no harmonic order needs to be specified Set an harmonic order for TORQUE
271. e Alt U Range Terninal I Range Sensor Rat io mWvAa Line Filter Zero Cross Filter Scaling Pt Ratio Ct Ratio Scaling Factor Element 1 Standard Element Z 26A Shunt Element 3 Standard Element 4 Standard Z000Upk__ Z000Upk__ Z000UpK Z000UpK Esa pen J Ca per zoa L 5A pen J 1000mUpk_ 1000mUpk_ 1000mUpk_ 10 0000 Corr a E l 16 0600 0000 IFF D IFF wF r Pe ON PE ON 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 C 1 000 C rowe 1 0000 C 1 0000 C oE 1 5000 Setting the Range Using the Channel Setting Menu Select the desired channel key from the CH2 CH4 CH6 and CH8 keys The 1 channel setting menu appears If the CH8 key is pressed when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for the torque signal input appears For the procedure see chapter 15 Selecting the current sensor input connector Press the Sensor Range soft key to display the current sensor range selection Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 1000mVpk to 100mVpk and Press the SELECT key to confirm the new current sensor range l UUOUOUU CHEZ Wave Display mo o Terminal 5A ZOA H Sensor Range 1600nUpk le Sensor Ratio miAd 2 Press t
272. e ESC key 1 Press the MISC key to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Config soft key to display the configuration menu Selecting the message language 3 Press the Message soft key to display the message language selection menu 4 Press ENG or JPN to select the language Setting the brightness of the screen 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the LCD Brightness value from 1 to 3 Brightness L Brightness LJ LJ C LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ C L C L 5 5 ai 14 2 IM 253710 01E 14 2 Selecting the Message Language Setting the Brightness of the Screen Explanation Selecting the message language An error message is displayed when an error occurs Select the language to use to display the message from the following choices The error codes for the error messages are the same For details on the error messages see section 16 2 ENG Displays the messages in English JPN Displays the messages in Japanese Setting the brightness of the screen Set the brightness of the screen between 1 and 3 The darkest setting is 1 and the brightest is 3 IM 253710 01E 14 3 z suo1 1 d0 194 0 pue nd no 13611 jeusayxXy 14 3 Setting the Display Colors of the Screen TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE SHIFT orr maa MENU ELEMENTS 2 SINGLE grant START STOP
273. e Slip function Slip is one of the measurement functions of the motor module PM Displays the waveform changes over time of Pm motor output mechanical power Pm is one of the measurement functions of the motor module Display Scaling of aComputed Waveform For procedures see section 11 2 In general when displaying a computed waveform auto scaling can be used With auto scaling the upper and lower limits of the screen are determined from the maximum and minimum values of the computed result However if necessary manual scaling can also be used in which the upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily 1 39 IM 253710 01E 1 8 Waveform Analysis FFT For procedures see section 11 3 The power spectrum of the voltage current and active power can be displayed by taking the FFT Fast Fourier Transform This function is useful for checking the frequency distribution of the voltage current and active power Power spectrum gt waveform A rectangular window or Hanning window can be selected as the time window The rectangular window is best suited for transient signals such as impulse waves in which the signal attenuates completely inside the window The Hanning window gently attenuates the signal near the ends of the window providing continuity in the signal The extreme ends of the window are set to zero level The Hanning window is best suited for continuous signals A FFT
274. e cutoff frequency can be selected from the following choices When the zero crossing filter is OFF and the line filter above is ON the cutoff frequency specified by the line filter is used as a zero crossing filter OFF 500 Hz 20 kHz IM 253710 01E 5 27 obuey pue spoy Jusweinseay oy bumas eo Chapter 6 Setting the Time Axis 6 1 Setting the Observation Time For a functional description see section 1 3 CONFIGURATION TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER EST erue meur SES ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL ba SHIFT ELEMENT TER FILTER 7 SINGLE Sant START STOP ABORT ont cw on8 OBSERVATION TIME VOLTAGE N CH4 cH6 CURRENT Q E j e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 000000 CH7 CH8 Cc Procedure During the normal measurement mode Turn the OBSERVATION TIME rotary knob The selected observation time is displayed in the top right corner of the screen During the harmonic measurement mode The observation time is automatically determined by the sampling rate which can be determined from the fundamental frequency and the record length IM 253710 01E 6 1 sIxy sul y uUM S a 6 1 Setting the Observation Time Explanation Note The observation time represents
275. e motor input to elements 2 and 3 Select 1P2W 3P3W for the wiring method _ Motor output W Motor efficiency nmB x 100 y nmB SBW Total efficiency nmA Motor output W x 100 ZA W Motor output derived in section 15 7 ZA P1 IB P2 P3 F Converter z Motor output Power consumption Power consumption by the motor and by the motor converter 15 20 IM 253710 01E 15 8 Computing the Motor Efficiency and Total Efficiency When the Converter Input Is a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W and the Motor Input Is a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W Wire the motor input to elements 1 and 2 and the converter input to element 3 Select 3P3W 1P2W for the wiring method Motor output W Motor efficiency nmA x 100 xA W Total efficiency nmA Motor output Ny x 100 B W Motor output derived in section 15 7 2B P3 XZA P1 P2 Converter Motor output Power consumption Power consumption by the motor and by the motor converter Note With this wiring method delta computation function see section 10 2 can be used to carry out 3P3W gt 3V3A transformation or Delta gt Star transformation From the 3P3W gt 3V3A transformation you can determine one set of line voltage and common mode current that is not being measured From the Delta gt Star transformation three common mode voltages can be determined from three line voltages When
276. e new voltage range The U Range of all other modules that are displayed are set to the same voltage range Pover Module Alt Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 Standard Standard Standard Standard U Range 2600Upk___T Se lect Terninal pA Sen_ ZoGeUpK I Range _i0Apk__ 1200Upk Sensor Ratio mlyA 10 6060 6O0Upk Line L2000Upk__ _20000pk LI ToAapk__ 10 0000 FF or rr prr on Q 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Fitter 300vpk Zero Cross Filter OFF Z20Upk Scaling E t2zevp Pt Ratio 1 6600 66Upk Ct Ratio 1 0000 36Upk Scaling Factor 1 0000 Auto DUUUGO Setting the current range 3 4 NoN Selecting the current input terminal Turn the jog shuttle to select the Terminal of element 1 Press the SELECT key to select 5A or 20A The Terminal of all other modules that are displayed are set to the same value 5A or 20A 20A cannot be selected on the power measurement module 253751 Even when 20A is selected for the power measurement module 253752 of element 1 other modules that are not 253752s are not set to 20A When element 1 is a power measurement module 253751 20A cannot be selected Thus other modules even if they are 253752s cannot be set to 20
277. e observation time and record length Chapter 7 Setting the Trigger Describes how to set the trigger which determines the timing of the voltage current signals acquisition Chapter 8 Numerical Display Describes how to display measurement function data numerical data Chapter 9 Waveform Display Describes how to display the waveforms of the voltage and current signals Chapter 10 Numerical Computations Describes how to set numerical computations such as the delta computation user definitions and averaging Chapter 11 Waveform Analysis Describes how to set waveform computations such as FFTs and cursor measurements Chapter 12 Saving and Loading the Data Describes how to save and load numerical and waveform data from the instrument Chapter 13 Outputting Screen Image Data Describes how to output the screen image data Chapter 14 External Trigger Output and Other Operations Describes how to set the external trigger output function message language and display color Chapter 15 Motor Evaluation Function Applicable to Motor Modules Describes how to set the instrument in order to determine various motor characteristics by inputting signals from revolution sensor and torque meter Chapter 16 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection Describes the possible causes of problems and their appropriate corrective measures Describes the messages that are displayed on the screen Describes maintenance and i
278. e tip of a Philips screwdriver in the dented section of the fuse holder on the power connector side and move the driver in the direction of the arrow to remove the fuse holder 4 Take out the shortened fuse that is attached to the tip of the fuse holder 5 Attach a new fuse to the holder and then place the fuse holder back in its original position Fuse holder Note ______ The user cannot replace the fuse that is located inside the case If you believe the fuse inside the case is blown contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer The ratings of the fuse that is used inside the case are shown below Location Max Rated Voltage Max Rated Current Type Standard SCSI board 250V 800 mA Time lag VDE SEMKO certified IM 253710 01E 16 9 g uonsedsu pue asueuazuien HunooysajqnoiL 16 6 Recommended Replacement Parts The three year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument starting from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items nor expendable items items which wear out The replacement period for expendable items varies depending on the conditions of use Refer to the table below as a general guideline Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Part Name Recommended Replacement Period Built in printer Under normal usage 120 rolls of paper part No B9850NX Cooling fan 10000 hours LCD backlight 3 years Backup battery Lithium battery 3 years
279. e unit of power is W watts When 1 joule of work is done over a period of 1 second the electrical power is equal to 1 W DC power DC power P W can be determined by the product of the applied voltage U V and the current I A P UI W In the following figure electrical energy indicated in the above equation is taken from the power source and dissipated at R Q load AC alternating current The electricity supplied by the power company is an alternating current The waveform is sinusoidal The amplitude of an AC signal an be expressed in terms of the instantaneous values maximum values rms values and mean values In general it is expressed in terms of rms values The instantaneous value of the current of a sine wave i is expressed as Imsinat Im max value of current angular velocity where 2zf f frequency of the AC signal The heating effect of the AC signal is proportional to i and varies as shown in the following figure Refers to the electrical energy being converted to heat energy due to current flowing through the resistor i Imsinot Rms value effective value The rms value effective value is the value of the DC signal that generates the same heating effect as the AC signal If the value of the DC signal that generates the same heating effect is expressed as then P 2 l y Mean over one period ofi Because this value is equal to the square root of the mean of the square
280. e waveform display frame only the values related to the time axis are displayed IM 253710 01E 11 19 sishjeuy wojne MA z Chapter 12 Saving and Loading the Data 12 1 Precautions on the Use of the Floppy Drive Floppy Disks that can be Used The following types of 3 5 inch floppy disks can be used The floppy disk can be formatted using the instrument 2HD 1 2 MB or 1 44 MB MS DOS format 2DD 640 KB or 720 KB MS DOS format Inserting the Floppy Disk into the Drive With the label side facing left insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Insert the disk until the eject button pops up Removing the Floppy Disk from the Drive Check that the access indicator is OFF then press the eject button Access indicator CAUTION Removing the floppy disk while the access indicator is blinking can damage the magnetic head of the drive and destroy the data on the floppy disk General Handling Precautions of the Floppy Disk For the general handling precautions of the floppy disk see the instructions that came with the floppy disk IM 253710 01E 12 1 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 2 Connecting SCSI Devices SCSI Specifications Option Item Specifications Interface standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector type 50 pin half pitch pin type Electrical specifications Single ended See the chart below for pin assignments A terminator is built in
281. e waveform mapping 6 Press the Wave Mapping soft key to display the waveform mapping selection box On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 press the Mapping soft key to select Auto or Fixed 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select Mode 8 Press the SELECT key to select Auto Fixed or User If you select User proceed to step 9 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the desired channel 10 Press the SELECT key to display the display position number selection box 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select the position from 0 to 3 12 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new display position Wave Display M Wave Format Single Interpolate Ei Graticule Wave Mapping Fixed User a Scale Value cH2 o_ w on CH4 1 Trace Label CHE z m o che 3g g Mathi Math Wave Mapping 9 8 IM 253710 01E 9 3 Splitting the Screen and Displaying the Waveforms Explanation The screen can be evenly divided and the waveform corresponding to each channel can be assigned to one of the divided windows Selecting the number of divisions Select the number of divisions from the following list of choices Single No division Dual Two divisions Triad Three divisions Quad Four divisions Depending on the number of divisions the number of displayed points in the vertical direction varies as
282. easurement mode is set to harmonic measurement 9 9 Displaying the Vectors of the HarmMonics cceseeeeseeeeeeneeeenneeeeeneeeeeeneeessaeeeeeneeeneaes 9 24 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data 00 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeaeeeneeee 9 27 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform cc ccceseceeceseeeeeeseeeeneneesesesenesseeeeneneeseseeenenaeesnenseeseenens 9 32 xii IM 253710 01E Contents Chapter 10 Numerical Computations 10 1 Setting the Measurement Computation Period Re computing cc eeeeeeteetteeeteeeeees 10 1 10 2 Selecting the Delta Computation 0 eceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeteeeetaeeseaeesieeeeaeenaes 10 8 10 3 Setting the User Defined Function ee ecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeteaeeteaestaeeseaeeneeneas 10 11 10 4 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power and Corrected Power cesceeeteeeeeees 10 15 10 5 CAVeraging iren a i a eee 10 18 10 6 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference sseeeeeeeeeesreeeeererreereerreeeeee 10 20 The following sections apply when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement 10 7 Setting the Harmonic Orders under Analysis c csecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeesas 10 22 10 8 Selecting the Equation for the Distortion Factor cceceeeceeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeteeeeeneetens 10 24 Chapter 11 Waveform Analysis 11 1 Setting the Computation Region Re computing 0 2 0 eee cece eee
283. ecently selected is used When pulse waveforms that are not periodic are input during auto range the range may not remain constant In this case use a fixed range setting Power range The measurement ranges power range of active power P apparent power S and reactive power Q are as follows Wiring Method Power Range 1P2W single phase two wire voltage range x current range 1P3W single phase three wire voltage range x current range x 2 3P3W three phase three wire when the voltage and current ranges on the 3V3A three voltage three current corresponding elements are set to the same range 3P4W three phase four wire voltage range x current range x 3 when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range When the result of the voltage range x current range exceeds 1000 W VA or var the displayed unit changes to kW kVA or kvar The maximum displayed value is 99999 5 digits or 999999 6 digits For digit selection see section 8 1 Selecting the Number of Displayed Digits Note Because the voltage and current ranges switch independently according to the input conditions different power ranges may be set for the same power value IM 253710 01E obuey pue spoy Jusweinseey y bumas eo 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input The actual values of the combinations of the voltage and current ranges and the power range are lis
284. ecord length gets shorter You can select different zoom factors for Z1 and Z2 the two zoom sections When there are less than 500 points of sampled data on the time axis because the display record length is less than the number of displayed points or the waveform is expanded too much the display points are interpolated To set the zoom factors of Z1 and Z2 simultaneously Z1 and Z2 must both be selected as described in the previous section Selecting the type of zoom display Maximum Zoom Factor along the Time Axis When the record length is not divided When Rec Division is turned OFF in the ACQ menu When the record length is divided When Rec Division is turned ON in the ACQ menu Record Length Record Length 1 M Word option 4 M Words 100 k words option 1 M Word 100 k words option 4 M Words option Selectable Steps x10000 x10000 x100000 x100000 x100000 x100000 x50000 x20000 x5000 x100000 x100000 1 2 5 5 steps 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x50000 x100000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x50000 x100000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x20000 x100000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x50000 x100000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x50000 x100000 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x20000 x100000 1 2 5 5 steps x10000 x100000 x100000 x50000
285. ed if the record length or the module configuration differs from the setting that existed at the time the data were saved This is also true if the waveform data were saved using an incompatible version of firmware 12 21 eea y Buipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 7 Saving Numerical Data Procedure TRIG D CONFIGURATION O SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCA SHIFT COPY NULL CAL MENU E O MENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER E stanrisroP 1 ABORT CJC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 2 WUUUUUUB i CHT VOLTAGE amp A CH 8 CURRENT E 1 Press the FILE key to display the File setting menu 2 Press the File Item soft key to display the File Item setting menu 3 Press the Numeric soft key to select numerical data n i mC rera C WA File Item setup Setup C e C C a i C C 7 e C a C 4 cng C ii C ESS 12 22 IM 253710 01E 12 7 Saving Numerical Data Selecting the data type 4 Press the Data Type soft key to display the data type selection menu 5 Press the ASCII or Float soft key to select the data type File File Item Numeric Data Type Float W List Ite
286. ed Trigger is activated Window y F Window i width ij width Center level Center level L Trigger is I L activated uh 1 18 IM 253710 01E 1 4 Trigger EH Trigger Mode For procedures see section 7 1 The trigger mode is used to set the conditions for updating the display There are two main modes OFF mode and ON mode suoljun OFF mode In this mode the display record length of data is acquired to the memory from the point at which the acquisition is started regardless of the trigger conditions The resultant data are displayed This mode has the advantage of not requiring one to set trigger conditions However a stable waveform display cannot be maintained start acquisition Acquisition memory lt Display record length gt Displayed on the screen ON mode There are five types of ON modes When the condition for the specific mode is satisfied the trigger occurs and the waveform display is updated As an example we will consider the case when the trigger position described in the next section and the trigger point are matched and the trigger position is located on the left end of the screen In this case when a trigger occurs after the data acquisition is started an amount of data equal to the display record length is displayed starting from the trigger point Note The following figure indicates the schematic of acquiring sampled data when a trigger occurs and displaying the waveform on
287. ed mean value calibrated to the rms value This function rectifies one period of the voltage or current signal determines the average and multiplies the result by a coefficient The coefficient is the number that when applied to a sinusoidal input signal gives the true rms value When the input signal is a distorted or is a DC waveform these values will differ from the true rms values Let f t represent the input signal as a function of time and let T be the period of the signal T 1 Umn or Imn e tty lat 24 2 T 0 Udc Idc simple average These are the average values over one period of the voltage and current signal This function is useful when determining the average value of a DC input signal or a DC component that is superimposed on an AC input signal 1 T Udc or Idc Lf f t dt Tho Uac lac AC component These are the AC components of the voltage and current They are the rms values of the difference of the square of the true rms values of the input signal and the square of the DC component Uac y Urms Udo Or lac y Irms Idc Element number When an input module is installed in a slot that is located on the rear side of the main unit the slot combined with the input module is referred to as an element The main unit can contain up to four elements which are numbered from one to four On power measurement modules one voltage and current pair can be input to each element The element number
288. ed to prevent minor or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Note Provides important information for the proper operation of the instrument Symbols used on pages describing operating procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 16 the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Indicates the key related to the operation Follow the steps indicated with numbers The procedures are given with the premise that the user is carrying out the steps for the first time Depending on the operation not all steps need to be taken Explanation This section describes the setting parameters and the limitations regarding the procedures It does not give a detailed explanation of the function For details on the function see chapter 1 IM 253710 01E ix Contents Chapter 1 Checking the Contents of the Package cecceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeesnaeeeneeeeaeene ii Safety Precautions 2 ei cieeien dinate aa a aE e a deni aaa ana vi How to Use this Manual 2scscce scgcics cecacedccenceastgcceeseecennadeiedeagcigeseseategeabencdenaodeejenaabeascgsiveaslieeedeeiss viii Functions 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram ccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeteeeeeaeeenatend 1 1 System Configuration i senian aenn a e e E a EA 1 1 Blo kdia taMisnrena nan iin a eae dete 1 2 Signal Flow ANd PTOGE SS riitas
289. ee eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeaee 1 14 5 27 ZEFO CFOSSING STING eee ee eee eee eee eteeeeeteeteeeeeaeeeeee 1 10 zero input line 1 26 ZELO OVE AE E T T T 1 10 zero level COMpensation ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeteteees 1 17 4 6 ZOOM DOX Taaa a a a E a DEE zoom display ZOOM facto anaia eara EA aa Zoom Format iinn nai iiaiai zoom position 1 30 9 23 ZOOMING een eaa e ent a E Ea 1 29 9 21 IM 253710 01E
290. eeeeeeeneeteaeeeneeteaeeteeeeenees 11 1 11 2 Setting the Equation Converting the Scale of the Computed Waveform 00 11 4 11 3 Performing the EET naccstiieee nian dA en ee eed 11 8 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor ccceeecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeseeeeaeeseeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeas 11 10 Chapter 12 Saving and Loading the Data 12 1 Precautions on the Use of the Floppy Drive eeeseeesseeeesneeeeeneeeeesaeeessaeeeeeneeereaes 12 1 12 2 Connecting SCSI DEV CE Sranie aiarar a a aeaa ea ada 12 2 12 3 Changing the SCSI ID Number ee ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeeeaeeeneeeeaeesneeeenees 12 3 12 4 Formatting the Disk ici cc iia ees teddies en ie He a ed ede et decd 12 5 12 5 Saving and Loading Setup Parameters eeceesceeeceeeeeeseeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeas 12 10 12 6 Saving and Loading Waveform Data eecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeas 12 16 12 7 Saving Numerical Data ce eeeeeeseceneeeeeeeeneeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeesaeeeaeeseeeeeeeseaeesieeseeeseeeeaas 12 22 12 8 Changing the File Attribute Deleting Files 20 0 0 ee eeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeaes 12 28 12 9 COPVING RIGS oaren enea rE EAA a e E eerie eaves lien eae eu ieee 12 33 12 10 Changing the Directory File Name Creating a Directory eceecceeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeeetees 12 37 Chapter 13 Outputting Screen Image Data 13 1 Installing the Paper Roll into the Built in Pr
291. eeeeeneeees 1 18 Trige MOG ease cee vss a aa aa aeaa aa a Arai aeaaea aaa Aaaa aAa pA AEAEE ETE RAE 1 19 Trigger Position Trigger Delay 0 eeesceeeeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaeeeteeeeeeeneeeseaeeeseneeeeneaeeeeeaes 1 21 1 5 Numerical Display hieni acaehag hs rei ecezast a aa E a E Aaaa P aE paa eaaa 1 22 Numerical display during the normal measurement Mode ssseseeererreerrreerrrerreere 1 22 Numerical display during the harmonic measurement mode cccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeees 1 23 Resetting the Numerical Display eesceeeseeeesneeeeeneeeeeneeeenaeeeeeeeesenneeeseeeeeennteneaes 1 25 16 Waveform Display s icccedsescvavees sede civse huss ie evens Tene e es a ee E E 1 26 Vertical Amplitude Axis and Horizontal Time AX S 0 eeceeesseeeseneeeeeseeteeneeereneeees 1 26 Turning ON OFF the Waveform Display Vertical Position of the Waveform Split Screen of the Waveform Display Interpolation of the Waveform cee 1 28 ZOOMING ON the WaVvelOrm ces secs a eatiees eee eee a iive dan ete teats 1 29 Vector Display Of Harmonics eeceeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeneaeeeseaneeseaeeeseaeeessnneerenneees 1 31 Bar Graph Display of the Harmonic Data X Y Waveform Display cceseeeeeeees 1 32 Other Display Settings inienn niaaa a tie janceensaged AEE a eR a aaia 1 33 1 7 Numerical Computation nanses ea a a aE aaa 1 34 Delta Computation User defined Functions Equation for the Apparent Power
292. eft end of the display record length lies in the memory Display offset the value is equal to 1 when the record length the display record length PhaseShift Phase information advance delay PTraceName Bit information of logic waveforms For details on 1 to 7 see the next page App 18 IM 253710 01E Appendix 5 ASCII Header File Format Creation of ASCII Header Files When waveform data are saved to the floppy disk the following two files are automatically created in the same directory Waveform data file WVF ASCII header file HDR Of the two files only the waveform data file can be loaded by the instrument However the ASCII header file HDR must also exist The ASCII header file that is being described in this section cannot be opened with the instrument This file can be used when analyzing waveforms on a PC for example 1 Endian mode when the file was saved Big Motorola 68000 series data 2 Storage format of the waveform data of the BINARY file Trace Format in which blocks are organized for each waveform 3 Start position of the waveform data of the BINARY file The offset from the beginning of the file This value is always O for the PZ4000 4 Maximum number of blocks of a group When the number of blocks varies for each waveform this number is the maximum number of blocks This value is always 1 for the PZ4000 5 Y axis converting equation of each waveform Y axis value VResol
293. elated to all waveforms including the fundamental and harmonics Element number When an input module is installed in a slot that is located on the rear side of the main unit the slot combined with the input module is referred to as an element The main unit can contain up to four elements which are numbered from one to four On power measurement modules one voltage and current pair can be input to each element The element number is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Harmonic measurement function on each power measurement module so that the correspondence can be seen For example U1 2 represents the 2nd order harmonic voltage of element 1 Wiring method The wiring method is the method by which the signals that are input to each element are combined Different selections are possible depending on the number of elements that have power measurement modules installed In some cases only one type of wiring method can be selected while in other cases two types of wiring methods can be selected When two types of wiring methods are selected A or B is appended to the symbols that were defined in the earlier section Harmonic measurement function of the average or the sum of the power measurement modules xfunction so that the correspondence can be seen For example UXA 2 represents the average value of the 2nd order harmonic voltage of power measurement modules that are combined
294. ement mode 180 Lead Lag With the positive vertical axis set to zero degrees this format displays using 180 notation with a lead indicated by the counter clock wise direction and a lag by the clockwise direction 360 degrees With the positive vertical axis set to zero degrees this format displays using 360 in the clockwise direction Note The display format in the harmonic measurement mode is fixed regardless of the selection as follows Measurement function is displayed using 360 representation in the clockwise direction Measurement functions oU and ol are displayed using 180 representation with respect to the fundamental waves U 1 and I 1 The counter clockwise direction is negative and clockwise direction is positive When the voltage or current input is less than or equal to 0 25 of the measurement range an error Error is displayed When both the voltage and current are sinusoids and the ratio of the voltage and current inputs do not differ greatly with respect to the measurement range the phase difference 6 of lead D and lag G are detected and displayed correctly When the computation result of power factor exceeds 1 is displayed as follows When the power factor is greater than 1 001 and less than equal to 2 000 displays zero When the power factor A is greater than 2 001 displays an error Error IM 253710 01E 10 21 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 7 Se
295. en determining the functions such as voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor and phase difference how the elements and numerical data are combined varies depending on the wiring method For details pertaining to the relationship between the wiring method and xfunctions see Appendix 2 Number of Displayed Digits For procedures see section 8 1 The maximum number of displayed digits highest display resolution for the various items such as voltage current active power apparent power reactive power and power factor can be set to five or six digits However the actual number of displayed digits may sometimes be smaller than the specified number depending on the combinations of the voltage and current ranges or the carry over operation For details see chapter 16 IM 253710 01E 1 11 1 3 Acquiring Data Voltage and Current Signals Sampled Data The instrument samples the voltage and current signals at a given sampling rate and stores the sampled data in the acquisition memory The sampled data are processed and converted to the numerical data of measurement functions and into data used to display the waveform on the screen In addition the sampled data can be saved ona recording medium as waveform data The saved waveform data can also be loaded from the recording medium and displayed on the screen or used to calculate specific numerical data The sampling rate indicates the number of data
296. en determining the measurement computation period Sections 7 2 10 1 External trigger output connector Outputs an external signal when a trigger occurs Section 14 1 r External clock input connector Used when setting the external clock signal as the time base or when inputting the synchronization signal of the Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 e 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 a measurement computation period Sections 6 3 10 1 External printer connector Centronics printers are connected here Section 13 3 Sections 3 7 3 9 3 10 GP IB and Serial RS 232 connectors For communication functions see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM253710 11E SCSI option External SCSI devices are connected here Chapter 12 Section 13 4 Power connector Section 3 6 Power fuse Section 16 5 A sensor input module can be installed into the element number 4 slot The input terminal or connector type varies depending on the type of sensor input module that is installed For details related to the connector types see section 2 4 IM 253710 01E sled JO s sn pue soweN D 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top View Top View Rear panel Vent holes Section 3 2 Built in printer option Sections 13 1 13 2
297. ength the marker sometimes goes out of the waveform display fra fra me In such cases the marker can be jumped back to the center of the display me The markers can be jumped in the following ways to Main Jump marker Cursor 1 to the center of the main waveform display frame to Zi Jump marker Cursor 1 to the center of the Z1 zoom waveform display frame to Z2 Jump marker Cursor 1 to the center of the Z2 zoom waveform display frame x to Main Jump marker x Cursor 2 to the center of the main waveform display frame xto Z1 Jump marker x Cursor 2 to the center of the Z1 zoom waveform display frame x to Z2 Jump marker x Cursor 2 to the center of the Z2 zoom waveform display frame Cursor measurements of X Y waveforms Note The types of markers and cursors and the measurement items are the same as the T Y waveform normal waveform The movement range of markers and H cursors are the same as the T Y waveform The range of the V cursor is from the right edge 100 0 to the left edge 100 0 of the screen with the center of the X Y waveform display frame set as zero The selectable steps and the procedure to move the two cursors are the same as for the T Y waveform Cursor measurements can be performed on the active display format of the X Y waveform However when the display format is Wave X Y the V cursor on the X Y waveform cannot be moved This is because the unit of the V cursor on the T Y wave
298. ent function is displayed Function The symbol representing the highlighted measurement function is displayed When None is displayed an item without a selected measurement function is being specified using the jog shuttle In this case the area for displaying the measurement function and data displays no data Element The element wiring method of the highlighted measurement function is displayed Order The harmonic order of the highlighted measurement function is displayed Total or dc Oth order up to 500th order When Single List or Dual List is selected Total or dc Oth order up to 500th order is displayed in the order section of the Display setting menu When the selected measurement function is U I or P the harmonic distortion factor Uhdf Ihdf or Phdf is displayed respectively When the measurement function is some function other than U I or P no data is displayed in place where the harmonic distortion factor is to be displayed IM 253710 01E 8 17 Aejdsiq jeouewnyn e 8 4 Displaying Harmonic Measurement Data When List is selected Total or dc Oth order up to 500th order is displayed in the order section of the Display setting menu The measurement functions U I P S Q A and so on for the harmonic order are displayed Page scrolling the display You can page scroll when Single List or Dual List is selected You can page scroll to list the numerica
299. entially sampled and stored in the acquisition memory Aliasing When the sampling rate is comparatively low with respect to the input signal frequency the measurement may be in error In this case some of the harmonics will appear at low frequencies due to the effects described by the Nyquist sampling theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing Aliased signal Input signal Sampling point IM 253710 01E 1 27 1 6 Waveform Display Turning ON OFF the Waveform Display For procedures see section 9 1 The waveform of each channel corresponding to the element that has an input module installed can be turned ON OFF The computation waveform described in section 1 8 Waveform Analysis can also be turned ON OFF This feature can make the viewing of important waveforms much easier due to the absence of clutter from unimportant waveforms Vertical Position of the Waveform For procedures see section 9 2 The displayed position of the waveform vertical position can be moved vertically to the desired position such as when the section of the waveform you wish to view goes out of the display frame due to vertical zoom 100 T Position f 50 7 F gt Position 50 100 Split Screen of the Waveform For procedures see section 9 3 The screen can be equally divided and the waveform of each channel can
300. enu On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 or when the motor module is not installed in the element number 4 slot the revolution sensor input range setting menu does not appear Selecting the revolution sensor signal type 2 Press the Sense Type key to select Analog or Pulse Selecting the input range of the revolution sensor signal When Analog is selected in the previous section Selecting the revolution sensor signal type 3 Press the Sensor Range soft key to display the input range selection box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 50Vpk to 1Vpk and Auto 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new input range When Pulse is selected in the previous section Selecting the revolution sensor signal type The input range is fixed to 5Vpk Selecting the frequency input range of the revolution sensor signal The menu appears when Pulse is selected in the previous section Selecting the revolution sensor signal type 6 Press the Freq Range soft key to display the frequency input range selection box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 2k 200kHz to 1 40Hz and Auto 8 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new frequency input range CH7 Wave Display DFF DN Sense Type Analog Pulse M Sensor Range Soupk Position 8 6 CH7 Wave Display DFF pry Wave Display OFF Dn Se lect Saup 20Upk 10Up
301. er Designed value for frequencies less than or equal to 10 Hz in the table on the previous page Add designed value 1 10th of the reading error x 5 number of cycles x 10 k number of words of sampled data of reading when the input signal contains less than 5 cycles and there are less than 10 k words of sampled data External Dimensions PUD Unt mm 73 66 242 Attachment surface AAAAAA Aaa WF YOY D YOROGANAG 145 17 24 IM 253710 01E 17 17 Motor Module 253771 Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Input format Floating input resistive voltage divider Input impedance Input resistance Approx 1 MQ Input capacitance Approx 17 pF Insulation Resistance Between voltage input terminals and case 10 MQ or more at 500 VDC Withstanding voltage Between voltage input terminals and case 3700 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Weight Approx 1 1 kg DC voltage analog input Number of input channels 2 Revolution Sensor Signal Input 1 CH7 Torque meter signal input 1 CH7 Measurement range Select from Auto 50 Vpk 20 Vpk 10 Vpk 5 Vpk 2 Vpk and 1 Vpk Effective input range 100 of the meas
302. er ic Wave Reset Numer ic X Y Exec Numeric Bar fH Numeric Wave X Y Disp Itens Wave Bar UOOU0Uo 9 2 IM 253710 01E 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display The following procedures are given with the premise that Display only the numerical data was selected in the previous section 5 6 Press the Wave Setting soft key to display the waveform menu Press the Wave Display soft key to display the waveform display selection box Turn ON OFF the waveform display of each channel includes computed waveforms Turn the jog shuttle to select the desired channel Press the SELECT key When the button to the left of the channel in the waveform display selection box is highlighted the waveform of that channel is displayed If it is not highlighted the waveform is not displayed 7 8 Turn ON OFF the waveform display for all channels includes computed waveforms simultaneously Turning ON the waveforms simultaneously Turn the jog shuttle to select All ON Press the SELECT key All the buttons to the left of the channels in the waveform display selection box are highlighted and the waveforms of all 7 8 9 10 channels are displayed Turning OFF the waveform simultaneously Turn the jog shuttle to select All OFF Press the SELECT key All the buttons to the left of the channels in the waveform display selection box are no longer highlighted and the waveforms
303. er is carried out once IM 253710 01E 14 9 g suo1 1 d 0 194 0 pue yndyno 13611 jeusayxXy 14 4 Setting the Action on Trigger Explanation You can have a specified action to be carried out when a trigger occurs Saving the numerical data waveform data and setup parameters You can select whether or not to save the data specified in chapter 12 numerical data waveform data or setup parameters when a trigger occurs The save destination is the medium specified in chapter 12 ON Saves the data OFF Does not save the data Outputting or saving screen image data You can select whether or not to output or save the screen image data when a trigger occurs The output save destination is the destination specified in chapter 13 ON Outputs or saves the data ON Does not output or save the data Action count 1 to 65536 Action on trigger terminates after performing the action the specified number of times Infinite The action is repeated until the data acquisition is stopped with the START STOP key The action count cannot be changed while action on trigger is in progress Executing Stopping action on trigger Executing action on trigger Action on trigger is executed when waveform acquisition is started with the START STOP or SINGLE START key When the SINGLE START key is pressed the action on trigger is carried out once e Stopping action on trigger Press the START STOP key to stop the data a
304. er roll paper B9850NX 5 One roll is one set thermal sensitive paper total length 30 m 2 Power fuse A1354EF 2 250 V 6 3 A time lag Note We recommend you keep the packing box The box is useful when you need to transport the instrument IM 253710 01E v Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class instrument provided with terminal for protective earth grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual gt Alternating current Both direct and alternating current ON power OFF power In position of a bistable push control xf Out position of a bistable push control vi IM 253710 01E Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Not complying might result in injury death of personnel Power Supply Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Power Cord and Plug To
305. er the motor efficiency or total efficiency depending on the circuit wiring to elements 1 2 and 3 and the selected wiring method A B For details see section 15 8 IM 253710 01E 17 5 as Ey suoljeoioeds a 17 5 Functions Measurement Mode and Wiring Method Item Specification Measurement mode Select either normal measurement or harmonic measurement mode Wiring method Select one or two from 1P2W single phase two wire 1P3W single phase three wire 3P3W three phase three wire 3V3A three voltage three current and 3P4W three phase four wire Motor Evaluation This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot Item Specifications Measurement function Speed rotating speed Torque Sync synchronous speed Slip Pm motor output or mechanical power motor efficiency and total efficiency Data Acquisition Item Specification Observation time See section 17 3 Time Axis Record length Select the record length of the acquisition memory from 100 k word 1 M word option and 4 M word option Dividing record length The acquisition memory can be divided in half The sampled data can be acquired to each half Measurement range Depends on the input module See the specifications of each input module Scaling Set the PT ratio CT rati
306. erence For a functional description see section 1 7 CONFIGURATION T TRIG D ES 2 ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT or maa TA MENU 1 F fal S m ELEMENTS LTE iLTER SINGLE Suge stant sToP ABORT VOLTAGE CURRENT A a A J e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key WUUUUUUE Procedure Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Press the Phase soft key to display the menu used to select the display format of the phase difference 5 Press either the 180 Lead Lag or 360 degrees soft key to select the display format Poy Measure Measure Measure Measure Mode Mode M 5 Formula 3 Formula ON OFF pn Urns Irms Period Averaging zero Cross a aunt wl Count M Sync Source M Phase 186 Lead Lag M Pc Formula Measure Exec M A Measure OFF g User Def ined U0BALUL 10 20 IM 253710 01E 10 6 Selecting the Display Format of the Phase Difference Explanation Select the display format of the phase difference of the voltage and current from the following choices This is valid during the normal measur
307. ermined from record length sampling rate of the PLL S s Source f Hz For 100 k words For 1 M word For 4 M words 20 40 fx 4096 Approx 0 6 to 1 6 Approx 6 1 to 16 3 Approx 24 4 to 65 1 40 80 fx 2048 Approx 0 6 to 1 6 Approx 6 1 to 16 3 Approx 24 4 to 65 1 80 160 fx 1024 Approx 0 6 to 1 4 Approx 6 1 to 14 0 Approx 24 4 to 55 8 160 320 fx 512 Approx 0 6 to 1 6 Approx 6 1 to 16 3 Approx 24 4 to 65 1 320 640 f x 256 Approx 0 6 to 1 6 Approx 6 1 to 16 3 Approx 24 4 to 65 1 640 1280 fx 128 Approx 0 6 to 1 6 Approx 6 1 to 16 3 Approx 24 4 to 65 1 1280 2560 fx64 Approx 0 6 to 1 4 Approx 6 1 to 14 2 Approx 24 4 to 56 8 2560 6400 fx32 Approx 0 5 to 1 4 Approx 4 9 to 14 2 Approx 24 4 to 56 8 When the record length is divided When Rec Division of the Acq menu is set to ON Fundamental Sampling Observation Time s Frequency Rate Can be determined from record length 2 sampling rate of the PLL S s Source f Hz For 100 k words For 1 M word For 4 M words 20 40 fx 4096 Approx 0 3 to 0 8 Approx 3 1 to 8 1 Approx 12 2 to 32 6 40 80 fx 2048 Approx 0 3 to 0 8 Approx 3 1 to 8 1 Approx 12 2 to 32 6 80 160 fx 1024 Approx 0 3 to 0 7 Approx 3 1 to 7 0 Approx 12 2 to 27 9 160 320 fx 512 Approx 0 3 to 0 8 Approx 3 1 to 8 1 Approx 12 2 to 32 6 320 640 f x 256 Approx 0 3 to
308. es connected to the SCSI chain Make sure not use duplicate ID numbers on any of the connected devices SCSI is an option Range of SCSI ID numbers Select the OWN ID PZ4000 in the range from 0 to 7 The default value is 6 Note Assign numbers that are different from the ID number of the instrument for the external SCSI devices When changing the SCSI ID number make sure to press the Initialize SCSI soft key The ID numbers of the external SCSI devices are automatically identified Procedure to connect the PZ4000 SCSI device and PC via SCSI 1 Check that the power switch of the PZ4000 SCSI device and PC are OFF 2 Connect the PZ4000 and the SCSI device and connect the SCSI device and the PC using SCSI cables 3 Turn ON the SCSI device and then the PZ4000 4 After the PZ4000 boots up check that the PZ4000 detects the connected SCSI device Press the keys in the following sequence File key Utility soft key Function soft key and Delete soft key The File List dialog box appears Check that the name of the medium inserted in the SCSI device appears in the File List dialog box 5 Turn ON the PC SCSI device Note Note that the PZ4000 will not operate properly if the PZ4000 is connected directly to a PC via SCSI cable without going through a SCSI device About the files created using the PZ4000 over the SCSI connection In some cases the PC will not recognize a new file th
309. esister R Q is expressed by the following equation Im denotes the maximum value of the current _ Um i sinat Imsinat R If expressed in terms of the rms value the equation becomes U R The current flowing through a resistive circuit has no phase difference with respect to the voltage Sits AO S 2 l U Inductance Current i when the instantaneous value of u Umsinot of AC voltage is applied to the load inductance L H is expressed by the following equation T ot gt Imsin 2 T ot gt Um i sin gt XL If expressed in terms of the rms value the equation becomes U XL where X oL X is called inductive reactance and its unit is Q Inductance has the effect of inhibiting the current from changing and consequently the current phase lags that of the voltage l L lu a Static capacitance Current i when the instantaneous value of u Umsinat of AC voltage is applied to the load capacitance C F is expressed by the following equation T ot Imsin _ Um i sin 5 Xc If expressed in terms of the rms value the equation becomes U Xc where Xc 1 C Xc is called capacitive reactance and its unit is Q When the polarity of the voltage changes the maximum charge current that has the same polarity as the voltage flows through the capacitor When the voltage decreases discharge current that has the opposite polarity as the voltage flows through the capacit
310. esult of the equation given in Appendix 2 When the power factor A is greater than 1 001 and less than equal to 2 000 A becomes 1 displays zero When the power factor is greater than 2 001 A and display errors Error Precautions when displaying the measurement functions of the motor module in the harmonic measurement mode For the meanings of the measurement function symbols used in the explanation below see section 15 2 and the following sections or appendix 2 The numerical data of Speed Torque Sync Slip Pm nmA and nmB are Oth order DC components The default setting of the minimum order Min Order in the harmonic measurement mode is 1 To display the numerical data of Speed Torque Sync Slip Pm 7mA and nmB the minimum order must be set to 0 The numerical data of Torque in the normal measurement mode are simple averaged values The numerical data of each harmonic component and the total of Torque in the harmonic measurement mode are RMS values The numerical data that correspond to the same value as the normal measurement mode are displayed at Trq dc The Oth DC component of Speed and Pm are displayed as total numerical data The numerical data of Sync and Slip are displayed only when the PLL source PII Source and frequency synchronization source Sync Speed Source are set to the same channel nmA displays the ratio of Pm total with respect to PXA total nmB displays the ratio of Pm total with respect to PZB
311. et the scaling factor For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box D Input Motor Modu te Power Module Each Speed Ch7 TorquetCh Pn Range Soupk__ SoUpk__ Power Module CALL Sense Type fmalog Pulse Freq Range Zk 200kHz Line Filter UFF zero Cross Filter OFF Motor Module r Scaling 1 0000 L unit Pulse N Pole Sync Speed Source JUUUOUUE lel 15 14 IM 253710 01E 15 5 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Measure the Torque Explanation Setting the unit of torque 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Unit under Torque Ch8 4 Press the SELECT key A keyboard appears 5 Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Motor Module SpeedtCh Torque Ch8 Pm Range Sense Ty Freq Ran REI 6 89 eresfalBiCIDTELF GLH L KELIM CPI EA E En A A H EA EA EA BA ex EEE ELEUDI elu Sync Speed source Setting the scaling factor You can specify the scaling factor used to transform the torque meter signal to the torque of the motor Select the value in the range from 0 00
312. etaeeeaesseeaetseeeateaseeeeas synchronous speed SYSLOM CONCILION cssccs sdieseizecceveceetsecescesesdersineedbereecestennsetoess system configuration 0 eee eee cence ree test eeeeeeeeeeeeenaees a Terminal sse atest eatin 5 7 5 9 5 14 5 17 LOXE COOP scien sea teva eria Eos eaaa edade an eaa aAa 14 7 Thd Formula 10 24 three constants App 25 TINTO aaa aA a N E 1 37 TOGU O siret payin 15 4 15 14 15 15 torque meter signal input channel sesseeesrsererrrerereren 15 1 total efficiency total harmonic distortion s seseseeeseeereereesrerrrerrerrnereene App 30 trigger delay mirisne iite 1 21 7 14 trigger level we 1 18 7 7 trigger mode we 1 19 7 2 trigger OULPUb eis k aici eens T 14 1 triggar POSION 0 0 cecsestessceteseeeesssoneenseneoseeteetenoees 1 21 7 12 trigger slope we 1 18 7 7 trigger source ww 1 18 7 4 trigger type we 1 18 7 7 troubleShoOoting iieri sei iaai tasted aaa 16 1 LUGA Ana TIO e AAE E E EE ATT 1 5 TYPE r O AEA A e EE 7 6 U UiRange Ascivesivssiien neti er een 5 6 5 9 UU a ae eaae a a aa a aa a 10 9 updat Tate ssc aiaee aaae ara aaa ai 17 1 Upper limit of harmonic order under analysis 4 17 9 User Colon nast atten ceinerveccecee dey 14 5 14 6 User Defined surina acti teiteiest venient 10 11 user defined function cccceccececessteeeeeeeeeeseaeee 1 34 10 12 Vo MV ZOOM E A T T T 9 18 vector displ
313. etween input Influence from common terminals and case fis the frequency in kHz mode voltage 0 005 of range or less at 10 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz Maximum range measurement range x 0 0002 x f of range or less for other frequencies designed value f is the frequency in kHz Line filter Select from OFF 500 Hz 20 kHz and 1 MHz Zero crossing filter Select from OFF 500 Hz and 20 kHz A D converter 12 bit Sampling rate 5 MS s maximum IM 253710 01E 17 21 h Ey suoleoyioeds 17 16 Power Measurement Module 253752 Item Specification Voltage and current Conditions accuracy Within 3 months after calibration Standard operating conditions Input signal Sine wave Common mode voltage 0 V Input signal is 5 cycles or less and there are 10 k words of sampled data or more within the observation time e DC accuracy is NULL function ON and line filter ON fis the frequency Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC 0 1 Hz lt f lt 10 Hz 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 10 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 45 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz 1 kHz lt f lt 10 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range 0 2 of reading 0 05 of range 10 kHz lt f lt 50 kHz 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 100 kHz
314. ey Select a display format to display the waveforms For the procedures see section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Check that Format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave X Y X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Wave Setting the computation region 3 Press the MATH key to display the Math setting menu 4 Press the Mode soft key to select ON IM 253710 01E sishjeuy WAOJOAe MA 2 11 1 Setting the Computation Region Re computing Setting the start point 5 Press the Start Point End Point soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Start Point 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start point on the waveform Setting the end point Press the Start Point End Point soft key to set the jog shuttle control to End Point 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end point on the waveform N Setting the start and end points simultaneously 9 Press the Start Point End Point soft key to set the jog shuttle control to both Start Point and End Point 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the computation region The distance between the start and end points is kept constant we St
315. ey A box used to set coefficient P2 appears Turn the jog shuttle to set coefficient P2 For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Pe Formula Pe Formula Pe Formula Pe Formula C TEC 6 1 1976 TEEE CS7 12 90 1993 EC 6 1 1976 IEEE C37 12 90 1993 L IEC76 1 1993 IEC 6 1 1993 a Pi mi 0 5000 Pi 9 5000 le P2 _6 5000 P2 o 9 5009 10 16 IM 253710 01E 10 4 Setting the Equations for Apparent Power and Corrected Power Explanation Selecting the equation for apparent power The apparent power in the normal measurement mode can be determined by the product of the voltage and current There are three types of voltages and currents when measuring in the normal measurement mode Select which voltage and current to use to determine the apparent power from the following list of choices Urms irms Determines the apparent power from the true rms values of voltage and current Umean lmean Determines the apparent power from the rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value of the voltage and current Udc ldc Determines the apparent power from the simple average of the voltage and current Setting the equation for corrected power Depending on the applicable standard when the load that is connected to
316. f the input signal and frequency For input voltages of 400 Vrms or more add reading error x 1 5 x U2 of reading For input voltages of 400 Vrms or more and frequencies of 100 kHz or more add an additional 0 005 x f x U2 of reading designed value For input currents of 10 Arms or more add 0 0002 x 1 of reading U input voltage kV input current A f frequency kHz Line filter influence Measurement range influence Add 1 of reading to an input signal whose frequency is 1 10th of the cut off frequency when the line filter is ON As shown in the above table when the input signal is a sinusoid and its rms value is between 5 and 55 of the measurement range As shown in the above table when the input signal is a DC signal and the value is between 55 and 55 of the measurement range The reading error is doubled when the input signal is a sinusoid and its rms value is between 55 and 70 of the measurement range The reading error is doubled when the input signal is a DC signal and the value is between 100 and 55 or 55 to 100 of the measurement range h Ey suoleoyioeds Power accuracy continues on next page IM 253710 01E 17 23 17 16 Power Measurement Module 253752 Item Specification Power accuracy continued Temperature coefficient Add 0 01 of reading C in the range from 5 to 20 C or 26 to 40 C However only when the input signal is 10 kHz or less Oth
317. f the motor module is not installed in the element number 4 slot the Motor Module menu does not appear Setting the Scaling Factor Used to Compute the Motor Output 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Scaling under Pm 4 Press the SELECT key to display the scaling factor setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the scaling factor For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Motor Module Power Module Each Speed Ch Torque Ch8 Pn Range Soupk__ 5oUpk__ Power Module CAML Sense Type fmalog Pulse Freq Range Zk 200kHz ine Motor Module Filter UFF Zero Cross Filter OFF Scaling e 1 0000 Unit rpm Nn J W PulseN C 60__ Pole Sync Speed Source 15 18 IM 253710 01E 15 7 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Compute the Motor Output Setting the unit of motor output 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Unit under Pm 4 Press the SELECT key A keyboard appears 5 Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Motor Module Speed Ch Torque Ch8 Pn Range Sense Ty Freq Ranj 2 BET ON CRTATBICIDLELF IGUAL TUITE 1
318. f the selected file changes to R or File List Delete Path SCONPZ M Function Space 2012315648 byte File Name Size Date Attribute Delete a Set Reset 1999 61 13 69 54 1999 01 08 05 27 1999 01 68 05 27 1999 01 10 03 47 1999 01 10 63 47 ALL Set 19997017190 64 15 1999 61 10 64 15 EE NUMEROG6 CSU 1999 01 03 17 46 Property WAVEGOO HDR 1999 01 03 17 39 WAVEGOS WVF 1999 01 63 17 39 Filter Md Item Aly Attribute Delete Exec OBUUUUU0 m Selecting the file to be deleted one at a time 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file 9 Press the Set Reset soft key If an mark is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List dialog box the file will be deleted If the is not displayed the file will not be deleted Go to step 11 File List Delete Path SCONPZ Function Space 2012315648 byte File Name Size Date Attribute Delete a l UOUUOU000 a Set Reset 1999 61 13 69 54 1999 61 08 05 27 1933701708 05 27 1999701710 03 47 1993701710 63 47 ALL Set 1999 61 18 64 15 1999 61 10 64 15 EE NUMEROG6 CSU 1999 01 03 17 46 Property WAVEGO HDR 1999 01 03 17 39 WAVEGOS WUF 19993701703 17 39 Filter hd Item Aly Attribute Delete Exec m IM 253710 01E 12 29 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 8 Chan
319. f the serial interface satisfy the specifications Check that the interface satisfies the electrical and mechanical specifications See the Communication Interface User s Manual IM253710 11E IM 253710 01E 16 1 g uonsedsu pue asueuazuien HunooysajqnoiL 16 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Error Messages There are cases in which error messages are displayed on the screen during operation This section describes the meanings of the messages and the appropriate corrective actions The messages can be displayed in English or Japanese see section 15 2 If the corrective action indicates servicing contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs In addition to the error messages listed in this section there are also communication related error messages These messages are described in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM253710 11E Error in Execution Codes Messages Actions Sections 601 Invalid file name or SCSI ID Check file name or SCSI ID 12 3 12 5 602 No media inserted or no SCSI device Make sure that the storage medium is 12 1 to 12 3 inserted if applicable and check the SCSI device connection and the SCSI ID 603 No SCSI device or no media inserted Check the SCSI device connection and the SCSI 12 1 to 12 3 ID and make sure that the storage medium is inserted if applicable 604 Media failure
320. f the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the terminal of the voltage input terminal and the shielded case of the current measurement circuit is connected to the terminal of the current input terminal Because the outer case is insulated from the shielded case stray capacitance Cs of approximately 100 pF exists The current generated by this stray capacitance Cs will cause errors Shielded case of the voltage measurement circuit Outer case Earth Shielded case of the current measurement circuit For example we will consider the case when one side of the power source and the outer case are grounded In this case two current flows can be considered load current iL and the current that flows through the stray capacitance ics iL flows through the current measurement circuit then through the load and returns to the power source shown with a dotted line ics flows through the current measurement source through the stray capacitance and then through the earth ground of the outer case and returns to the power source shown with a dot dash line Therefore the current measurement circuit ends up measuring the sum of iL and ics even though it wants to measure only iL ics is the amount of error in this case If the voltage applied to Cs is Vcs common mode voltage then ics can be found using the following equation Because the phase of ics is ahead of the voltage by 90 the effects of ics on the measuremen
321. form time is different from that of the V cursor on the X Y waveform voltage current etc When the marker is set to a waveform trace that is assigned to the X axis set using the Cursor1 Trace menu the marker will not be displayed because the waveform on which to move the cursor cannot be uniquely determined When the H cursor is set to a waveform trace that is assigned to the X axis set using the Cursor1 Trace menu the cursor will not be displayed because there are no data along the Y axis When the V cursor is set to a waveform trace that is assigned to the X axis set using the Cursor1 Trace menu the cursor will not be displayed because there are no data along the Y axis The waveform on which the V cursor is placed is fixed to the waveform trace that is assigned to the X axis The cursors can be set when only the numerical data are being displayed However since the original T Y waveform is not displayed the positions cannot be confirmed Change the display format in order to check the cursor positions However for X Y waveforms the V cursor on the X Y waveform will not move when the T Y waveform is also displayed Cursors cannot be placed on waveforms corresponding to a channel of an element that has no module installed The time axis value is measured from the left edge of the screen When there are data that cannot be measured is displayed in the measured value display area When the marker is outside th
322. form the computation of the equation ON OFF 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Function 5 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF Function Expression Unit Scaling Upper Lover prr On putoj Manual L 6 00000 Start Point 9 00ns End Point LW 166 66ns H FFT Points 1006 Math Exec UUUUUEU IM 253710 01E 11 2 Setting the Equation Converting the Scale of the Computed Waveform Setting the equation 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Expression 7 Press the SELECT key A keyboard appears 8 Use the keyboard to enter the equation For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Setting the unit 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Unit 10 Press the SELECT key A keyboard appears 11 Use the keyboard to enter the unit For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Mathi Mathi Function LDFF ON Function LDFF ON Expression TREND Ci CZ Expression TREND Ci CZ unit i Unit n a scaling facto Pamat Scaring furtol Pamat Upper L 0 00090E 00 _ Upper L 0 00090E 00 _ Lower O 0000E 00 Lower O 0000E 00 Converting the scale of the computed waveform Selecting auto scaling or manual scaling 12 Turn the jog shuttle to select Scaling 13 Press the SELEC
323. frequency After performing zero level compensation after the warm up time at least 30 min has passed Operating conditions Temperature 5 to 40 C Humidity 20 to 85 RH when not using the printer 35 to 80 RH when using the printer Operating altitude 2000 m or less Storage environment Temperature 25 to 60 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC range Rated supply voltage 50 60 Hz frequency Permitted supply voltage 48 to 63 Hz frequency range Power consumption 200 VA when using the printer Insulation resistance Between power plug and case 50 MQ or more at 500 VDC Withstanding voltage Between power plug and case 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute External dimensions For details see page 17 14 Approx 426 mm W x 177 mm H x 450 mm D when the printer cover is closed excludes the handle and other projections Weight Main unit only 253710 Approx 10 kg Main unit when four power measurement modules 253752 are installed Approx 15 kg Cooling method Forced air cooling Installation position Horizontal except the stand can be used Vertical position and stacking not allowed Battery backup Setup parameters and internal time clock are backed up with lithium batteries Fuse Loc
324. ft key to select Width Level Turn the jog shuttle to set the window width For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Out 9 04 ox Delay 6 0us IM 253710 01E 10661 y Bunjes 7 4 Setting the Window Trigger Explanation Selecting the trigger type Select the trigger type from the following choices Here select Window Edge Sets the trigger type to edge trigger A trigger occurs when the trigger source rises above or falls below a preset trigger level For edge trigger see section 7 3 Setting the Edge Trigger Window Sets the trigger type to window trigger A certain window width is set and a trigger occurs when the trigger source level enters this window IN or exits from this window OUT Selecting the trigger source condition Select the trigger source condition used to activate the trigger from the following choices In The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal enters the specified window width Out The trigger occurs when the trigger source signal leaves the specified window width Setting the window The window is set by specifying the center level Center Level and the window width Width Level with respect to the center level Setting the center level Set the level in the range from 0 0 to 100 0 Half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen is considere
325. g signal less than two Synchronizing 4 Measurement Computation period Signal under computation Trend waveform No trend waveform AVG The rms values of voltage and current and the instantaneous value sampled data of active power can be exponentially averaged using a specified attenuation constant and the waveform can be displayed The items are averaged according to the following equation Example of an AVG function AVG C1 C2 Displays the AVG waveform of the active power of element 1 dn Xn 1 k Xn Displayed value at the nth time The displayed value of x on the first time is d4 1 Display value at the n 1 time that has been exponentially averaged dn Sampled data at the nth time k Attenuation constant Select 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 Xn Xn 1 d a d4 di d5 Signal being computed AVG waveform lt a x3 x4 x5 d1 Exponential average Exponential average of x2 and d3 of x4 and d5 Exponential average Exponential average of x1 and d2 of x3 and d4 1 38 IM 253710 01E 1 8 Waveform Analysis SSP Displays the waveform changes over time of the Sync synchronous speed function Sync is one of the measurement functions of the motor module The waveform is a step function that changes every period of the synchronizing signal frequency measurement source see section 15 6 as in the TREND waveform suoljoun SLIP Displays the waveform changes over time of th
326. g the cables without turning OFF the power is dangerous Take special caution not to wire a current circuit to the voltage input terminal or a voltage circuit to the current input terminal Strip the insulation cover of the measurement cable so that when it is wired to the input terminal the conductive parts bare wires do not protrude from the terminal Also make sure to fasten the input terminal screws securely so that the cable does not come loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the voltage input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts such as a banana plug is dangerous when the terminal comes loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the current sensor input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts is dangerous when the terminal comes loose Some input modules have multiple systems of current input terminals Note that only one system one set of current input terminals can be used on a module at any given time Remove all other cables connected to the current input terminals or current sensor input connector When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the other current input terminals or current sensor terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When connecting measurement cables fr
327. ge during Direct Input Wiring Method Power Range 1P2W single phase two wire voltage range x current range 1P3W single phase three wire voltage range x current range x 2 3P3W three phase three wire when the voltage and current ranges on the 3V3A three voltage three current corresponding elements are set to the same range 3P4W three phase four wire voltage range x current range x 3 when the voltage and current ranges on the corresponding elements are set to the same range Scaling For procedures see section 5 5 When inputting current signals to the power measurement module via an external current sensor or inputting voltage or current signals via the external PT potential transformer or CT current transformer the transformation ratio and coefficient can be specified When inputting current signals via an external current sensor The output of current sensors such as shunts and clamps can be input to the current sensor connector of the power measurement module and be measured Set how many mV the current sensor outputs when 1 A of current flows transformation ratio Then the input signal can be made to correspond to the numerical data or display data that are obtained when the current is directly applied to the input terminals Measurement Function Transformation Data before Conversion Conversion Ratio Result Current E Is current sensor output Is E Active power P E Ps Ps E Apparent
328. ge exceeds 99999M the display frame of the numerical data will display OF As described later in waveform computation see section 11 2 the power coefficient scaling factor is not applied when computing the product of the voltage and current C1 C2 for example The specified PT ratio CT ratio and power coefficient take effect when the data acquisition is started or when numerical computation is executed 5 24 IM 253710 01E 5 6 Selecting the Input Filter For a functional description see section 1 3 1 z 3 S CCONFIGURATON z ACQ DISPLAY MATH cursoR zoom FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIT copy nu ca MENU TEMEI FILTER FILTE ILTEI 7 R FILTER SINGLE i Sant START STOP ABORT CH7 VOLTAGE ZN rt Et CH8 curRENT SH CC Oe e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 1 fl S S m 1 QUUUUUUE Procedure Selecting the Input Filter for Each Element Selects the input filter of the power measurement module for each element 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 only the Power Module soft key appears 2 Press the Power Module Each soft key to display the power module setting dialog box The menu does not appear for elements without mod
329. ger condition _ alr L e a gt Measurement Measurement This section is not computation computation considered for period period measurement or computation Selecting the external trigger condition Select the external trigger condition from the following choices For the specifications of the external trigger see section 7 2 Selecting the Trigger Source tf The measurement computation period is set to the period when the external trigger is in the Lo condition FL The measurement computation period is set to the period when the external trigger is in the Hi condition Re computing The measurement computation period and numerical computation settings can be changed while the data acquisition is stopped and the numerical data can be re computed All computations including the measurement function data are redone except for averaging Note To improve the accuracy of the measurement and computations it is recommended that the measurement computation period be set as long as possible so that the number of cycles of the input signal becomes large When the measurement computation period is changed do a re computation IM 253710 01E 10 7 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 2 Selecting the Delta Computation Procedure For a functional description see section 1 7 This section applies when the measurement mode is set to normal measurement
330. gger source is CH1 to CH8 Set the level in terms of a percentage 100 from the center of the screen The resolution is 0 1 When the trigger source is External trigger CMOS level For the specifications related to the external trigger see External Trigger Input in section 17 6 External Trigger I O Section When the trigger source is HF auto or HF normal the trigger level is approx 3 5 of the measurement range Trigger slope Select from f rising falling and ft rising falling Window trigger Trigger mode Select from OFF auto and normal Trigger source Select from CH1 to CH8 Window Select whether to activate the trigger when the trigger source level enters or leaves the specified window Trigger position Set in the range from 0 to 100 where the entire display screen represents 100 The resolution is 1 Trigger delay Set in the range from 0 0 to 1000000 0 us The resolution is 0 5 us Numerical Display Item Specification Displayed items Displays the numerical data of the measurement functions described in section 17 4 Number of displayed digits Select five display resolution 99999 or six display resolution 999999 for the maximum number of displayed digits for the numerical data However the displayed resolution of frequency phase difference and cursor measurement are 99999 360 00 and 99999 respectively regardless of the selection In addition the display resolution of maximum and minimum values
331. ging the File Attribute Deleting Files Selecting all files to be deleted 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file directory or a medium 9 Press the All Set soft key Depending on whether a file directory or medium is selected before pressing the All Set key the marks are either displayed to the left of the directory containing the selected file and all files in that directory displayed next to the selected directory and all files in that directory or displayed next to all directories and files on the selected medium see the Explanation These directories and files will be deleted The name of the All Set soft key changes to All Reset 10 Press the All Reset soft key The previously set marks are removed The directories and files will not be deleted The name of the All Reset soft key changes to All Set File List Delete L Path SCONPZ Function Space 2612315648 byte File Name Size Date Attribute Delete a pUQLALUL a a File List Delete L Path SCONPZ Function Space 2612315648 byte File Name Size Date Attribute Delete a Set Reset Set Reset 1999 61 13 69 54 1999 61 08 05 27 1999 61 08 05 27 1999701710 03 47 19993701710 63 47 199961716 64 15 1999 61 13 69 54 1999 61 08 05 27 1999 61 68 05 27 1999701710 03 47 1993701710 63 47 All Set A11 Reset EE EE R 1999701710 64 15 UUF 19
332. gits 12 0000W 24 0000W 48 0000W 80 0000W 120 000W 240 000W 480 000W 800 000 W 5 digits 24 000W 48 000W 96 000W 160 00W 240 00W 480 00W 960 00W 1 6000 kw a 6 digits 24 0000W 48 0000W 96 0000W 160 000W 240 000W 480 000 w 960 000 W 1 60000 kw 5 digits 60 000W 120 00W 240 00W 400 00W 600 00W 1 2000kW 2 4000kW 4 0000 kw 6 digits 60 0000 W 120 000 W 240 000W 400 000 W 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 40000 kW 4 00000 kw 5 digits 120 00W 240 00W 480 00w 800 00 Ww 1 2000kw 2 4000kW 4 8000 kW 8 0000 kw 2 6 digits 120 000W 240 000W 480 000W 800 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 40000 kw 4 80000 kW 8 00000 kw 5 digits 240 00W 480 00wf 960o 00wf 160 00W 2 4000kW 4 8000kW 9 6000kW 16 000 kw 4 6 digits 240 000W 480 000W 960 000W 160 000 W 2 40000 kW 4 80000 kw 9 60000 kW 16 0000 kw 5 digits 600 00 Wf 1 2000kW 2 4000kW 4 0000 kw 6 0000 kw 12 000 kw 24 000kW 40 000 kw a 6 digits 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 40000 kW 4 00000 kW 6 00000 kW 12 0000 kW 24 0000 kW 40 0000 kw 5digits 1 2000kW 2 4000kW 4 8000kW 8 0000kW 12 000kW 24 000kW 48 000kW 80 000 kw 2g 6 digits 1 20000 kW 2 40000 kW 4 80000 kW 8 00000 kW 12 0000 kW 24 0000 kW 48 0000 kW 80 0000 kw m 5 digits 2 4000kW 4 8000kW 9 6000kW 16 000kW 24 000kW 48 000kW 96 000kW 160 00 kw 6 digits 2 40000 kW 4 80000 kW 9 60000 kW 16 0000 kW 24 0000 kW 48 0000 kW 96 0000 kW 160 000 kw doo Edaits 6ooookw 12 000kw
333. he Terminal soft key to select Sen Selecting the current sensor range 3 box 4 Auto 5 ss Wave Display Terminal ee Se lect 4 Sensor Range 460mnUpk 1660mUpk Z260nUpk O Sensor 100MUpk Ratio m Ad C o Auto wm zom EI K Label C A IM IM 253710 01E obuey pue spo Jusweinseay oy bumas a 5 4 Setting the Measurement Range when Using an External Current Sensor Setting the current sensor transformation ratio 6 Press the Sensor Ratio mV A soft key 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the transformation ratio For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings CHZ Wave Display m o Terminal 5A zen 4 Sensor Range 1000nUpk B Sensor Ratio mU a 0 0000 U Zoom xO 1 Explanation The output of current sensors such as shunts and clamps can be input to the current sensor connector of the input module so that they can be measured Selecting the current sensor input connector To measure the current using the input signal from the current sensor input connector Sen must be selected for the Terminal and then the current sensor range and current sensor transformation ratio must be set Selecting the current sensor range There are two types of ranges fixed and auto Fixed range Select 1000mVpk 400mVpk 200mVpk or 100mVpk Auto range Select Auto at the range setting to enable auto range
334. he Bar Graph of Harmonic Data Wave X Y The waveform and X Y waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the X Y waveform display see section 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later Selecting the display channel The waveform of each channel can be turned ON OFF The range of channels is from CH1 to CH8 which correspond to the elements that have input modules installed In addition computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 described later see chapter 11 can be turned ON OFF The indicator on the top left corner of the channel key lights when the display of the channel is turned ON Note Channels elements that do not have modules installed cannot be turned ON When a waveform is loaded from a storage medium the input waveform can no longer be displayed IM 253710 01E 9 2 Moving the Vertical Position Procedure CONFIGURATION TRIG D SETUP INPUT NEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy nu ca MENU UUOU0LE CACOCOCE e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key VOLTAGE CURRENT For a functional description see section 1 6 SINGLE Suge star
335. he Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Normal IM 253710 01E 10 1 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 1 Setting the Measurement Computation Period Re computing 4 Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu 5 Press the Mode soft key to select ON 6 Press the Period soft key to display the period setting menu 7 Press the Zero Cross soft key to select the zero crossing setting ae e ie m o oF N or i 4 Period Zero Cross 4 Sync Source Cursor Ext Trigger Wo d Measure M 4 Measure OFF OFF g User Def ined g User Def ined Selecting the synchronization source 8 Press the Sync Source soft key to display the element selection box 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the element from Element1 to Element4 to set the synchronization source 10 Press the SELECT key to display the synchronization source selection box 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select the source from CH1 to Ext Clk 12 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Go to step 13 on page 10 5 Measure Mode Measure Mode r N Period OFF g Period Zero Cross zero Cross Element 1 Element 1 Select M Sync Source M Sync Source Element 2 Element 2 Elenent 3 Element 4 Measure Exec Elenent 3 Element 4 Measure Exec Mo 4 Measure DFF A User Def ined A User Def ined
336. he beginning harmonic order of the bar graph Setting the last harmonic order of the bar graph 19 Press the Start Order End Order soft key to set the jog shuttle control to End Order 20 Turn the jog shuttle to set the last harmonic order of the bar graph Bar Item No 1 d Function U J Element Element 1 Bar Markeri 6 order Bar Markerz x o order i Start Order i Start Order End order End order nn pe 6 9 30 IM 253710 01E 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data Explanation With the harmonic order assigned to the horizontal axis and the amplitude of the harmonics assigned to the vertical axis the amplitudes of the harmonics can be displayed using a bar graph Selecting the display format Select the display format of the bar graph from the following list of choices Bar Displays only the bar graph Numeric Bar The numerical data and the bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the numerical display see chapter 8 Wave Bar The waveform and the bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the waveform display see sections 9 1 to 9 8 Selecting the bar graph to be configured Two bar graphs can be configured Select either 1 bar graph 1 or 2 bar graph 2 Selecting the measurement function Select the measurement function f
337. he equation for distortion factor Chapter 10 TRIG D SS entre ACQ REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT CAME MENU ER FILTER 7 SINGLE i Sant START STOP ABORT i rot I cH Co IC Ze D0000 VOLTAGE CURRENT SA 2 4 IM 253710 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle and Rotary Knob Save and Load data and Set Other Functions a UUOUUUE FILE key Format disks save and load setup parameters and waveform data save numerical data change file attributes delete files copy files change the name of director file and create directories Sections 12 4 to 12 10 MISC key Change SCSI ID numbers select the message language set the brightness of the LCD monitor set displayed colors action on trigger perform self tests confirm system conditions Sections 12 3 14 2 14 3 14 4 16 3 16 4 i TRIG D sete ere ACQ ost nr esr zoom heuer COPY key LocaL N f Output screen image data Chapter 13 COPY NULL CAL orfu l CFS SHIFT COPY MENU key ELEMENTS E Feed printer paper set the output of screen image data sitet stanrisror to the built in printer external Centronics printer floppy disk or ABORT als SCSI device Chapter 13 L E CH8 cuRRENT SS Se E IM 253710 01E sled JO s sn pue soweN D
338. he keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key VOLTAGE CURRENT SINGLE Siugte lt sran stor ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g y 4 Press the CAL key Zero level compensation is performed Zero level compensation This function creates a zero input condition using the instrument s internal circuitry and then sets the zero level to that value Zero level compensation must be performed to meet the specifications of this instrument see chapter 17 Pressing the CAL key performs the zero level compensation Zero level compensation is performed the first time a measurement is made after changing the measurement mode measurement range input terminal and input filter Note For making accurate measurements we recommend zero level compensation be performed after warming up the instrument for at least 30 minutes In addition the ambient temperature needs to be within the specifications see chapter 17 and be stable If the measurement mode measurement range and input filter are not changed over a long period of time the zero level may change due to changes in the environment surrounding the instrument We recommend zero level compensation be performed in this case 4 6 IM 253710 01E 4 5 Using the NULL Function TRIG D ACQ REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copyy nrf ca MENU ELEMENTS
339. he observation time the right end of the screen When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the start and end positions can be moved in the range defined by the number of data points in the record length For example if the record length is 100 k words then the range is from data point O the left end of the screen to data point 100 k the right end of the screen Because the cursor position is displayed in the menu in terms of time when the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the start and end positions can be set by specifying the times even when the waveform is not displayed When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the start and end positions can be set in steps of observation timeAAdisplay record length When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the start and end positions can be set in steps of one data point To move the start and end positions simultaneously which keeps the distance between them constant the jog shuttle must be set to control both Start Pos and End Pos 10 6 IM 253710 01E 10 1 Setting the Measurement Computation Period Re computing External trigger setting The measurement computation period is the period defined while the signal applied to the external trigger input connector is in the specified condition Hi or Lo External trig
340. he printer Check connectors 701 Cannot be executed while running Press START STOP key to stop acquisition 4 3 702 703 There is no undo data Undo is not possible since data which was present before initialization and auto set up is now not available 704 Can not be executed while running Press START STOP key to stop acquisition 4 3 705 Can not operate while accessing medium Wait until access has completed F 706 Can not operate during hard copy Wait until output has completed 707 Can not Start while data out Wait until output is completed E 708 Can not data out while running Press START STOP key to stop acquisition 4 3 709 Unable to start Accessing the medium Wait until the access to the medium completes B 710 File not found Check the file 711 File operation not allowed during hard copy Wait until the hard copy completes 712 Can not compress this hardcopy image Turn off compression switch 13 4 713 Not enough data points for taking the FFT Make the observation time longer or widen the 11 1 11 3 computation region Error in Setting Codes Messages Actions Sections 800 Illegal date time Set the correct date and time 3 12 801 Illegal file name The file name contains characters which are not 12 5 allowed or the file name is not a valid MS DOS file name Enter another file name 802 Cannot be set in the normal measurement mode Set the measurement mode to harmonic 5 1 803 Cannot be set in the harmonic measurement Set
341. he ratio of Pm total with respect to PXA total nmB displays the ratio of Pm total with respect to PZB total 15 2 IM 253710 01E 15 2 Setting the Input Range of Revolution Sensor and Torque Meter Signals Procedure CONFIGURATION serene psec ACQ DISPLAY MATH cursor zoom FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT 1 z 5 S 7 1 a fy S S m I E a 2 E E COPY NULL CAL MENU FILTER i 1 2 3 L R FILTE SINGLE STAAT START STOP 4 ABORT VOLTAGE cH2 cH4 cH6f cH8 current SNA E U e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key OUOUU0U8 CH7 Setting the Input Range Using the Full Screen Menu 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu 2 Press the Motor Module soft key to display the motor module setting dialog box On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 only the Power Module soft key appears and you cannot set the motor module In addition if the motor module is not installed in the element number 4 slot the Motor Module menu does not appear Selecting the input range of the revolution sensor signal When Analog is selected in the latter section Selecting the revolution sensor signal type Turn the jog shuttle to select Range under Speed Ch7 Press the SELECT key to display the input range
342. he user defined function computation OFF Does not compute the equation ON Computes the equation Setting the unit Number of characters The unit can be set using eight characters or less However when all numerical data are being displayed only the first six characters are displayed Types of characters You can use the characters that are displayed on the keyboard or a space 10 12 IM 253710 01E 10 3 Setting the User Defined Function Setting the equation The combination of the measurement function and element number Urms1 for example can be used as an operand to create up to four equations F1 to F4 for each measurement mode normal and harmonic There can be up to 16 operands in one equation Measurement functions for computation Measurement functions The measurement functions are shown in the form of operands symbols used when defining equations as follows During normal measurement mode Urms URMS Umn UMN Udc UDC Uac UAC Irms IRMS Imn IMN Idc IDC lac IAC P P S S Q Q A LAMBDA o PHI fU FU fI FI U pk UPPK U pk UMPK I pk IPPK l pk IMPK CfU CFU Cfl CFI FfU FFU Ffl FFI Z Z Rs RS Xs XS Rp RP Xp XP Pe PC n ETA 1 DIVETA AUrms DELTAURM AUmn DELTAUMN AUdc DELTAUDC AUac DELTAUAC Alrms DELTAIRM Almn DELTAIMN Aldc
343. hen the numerical data and waveform are displayed at the same time only half of the selected number of items is displayed All items cannot fit on one screen Thus a scroll function is provided so that all data can be viewed Example in which eight items are displayed Urms1 3 1290 V Umn1 4 5265 V Udel 1 1130 V Uacl 5 0068 V Irms1 4 9235 A Imn1 4 9231 A Idc1 0 0434 A Iac1 4 9233 A ead uoi pun JUSLUBANSeS Example in which all items are displayed Element and wiring method Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 Urms 1 5 1290 5 1124 5 1293 5 1466 Um V 1 4 5265 4 5112 4 5263 4 5548 9 Udc U 1 1 1130 1 1057 1 1140 1 1801 o Uac U 5 0068 4 9914 5 0069 5 0088 c Irmsf A 1 4 9235 4 9043 4 9430 49 369 Im A 1 4 9231 4 3039 4 3427 43 363 oO Idc A 1 0 0434 0 0394 0 0446 0 527 3 Iac A 1 4 9233 4 9041 4 9428 49 366 o P W 1 0 056 0 048 0 058 0 00939k 5 3 VA 25 253 25 073 29 354 25405k Gaa Q var 25 253 25 073 25 354 25405k A I 1 6 66226 0 00193 0 00227 0 00155 i C E 1 90 126 930 111 30 130 30 089 s fU THz 1 50 00 50 50 00 50 01 o fI Hz 1 1 000k 1 000k 1 000k 1 000k U pk U 1 9 8400 9 7992 9 8399 9 9583 o U pk 1 7 7564 7 7789 7 7748 7 6748 s I pk A 1 7 0828 7 0622 1137 70 618 I pki 1 7 1689 7 1589 7 2174 71 533 cru 1 1 919 1 91 1 918 1 935 CFI 1 1 456 1 460 1 460 1 449 FFU 1 1 259 1 259 1 259 1 255 Fel C 1 1 111 1 111 1 111 1 111 z i 1 1 04173 1 04244 1 0
344. hes the trigger point when the trigger delay is set to 0 s This function allows you to display the waveform that is acquired the specified amount of time after the trigger point delay time Setting the trigger delay Set the trigger delay in the range from 0 0 to 1000000 0 us with 0 5 us resolution When a trigger delay is set Trigger position Delay time Trigger point Note The trigger delay setting is retained even if the observation time is changed 7 14 IM 253710 01E Chapter 8 Numerical Display 8 1 Selecting the Number of Displayed Digits For a functional description see section 1 2 CONFIGURATION T TARD qy SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER Og N S ZZ ESC gt Ss 8 DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCA SHIFT copy nu ca f MENU SINGLE SNE start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME VOLTAGE CH4 CH6 CH8 currENT SNA JC _JU_JULJ e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key FILTE ELEMENT ER FILTER FILTER FILTER WOU0000 Procedure 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu 2 Press the Display Resolution soft key to select 5dgts or 6dgts Setup g Mode Normal q Wiring 1P2W 1P2U Display Resolution Bdgts 6Gdgts Initialize Explanati
345. his may cause problems Keep electrically charged objects away from the instrument Keep electrically charged objects away from the input terminals They may damage the internal circuits Do not damage the LCD The LCD is very vulnerable to scratches Therefore be careful not to damage the surface with sharp objects Also do not apply vibration or shock to it When not using the instrument for a long time When the instrument is not being used for an extended period of time unplug the power cord from the outlet When moving the instrument First turn OFF the devices under measurement and remove the measurement cables Then turn OFF the instrument and remove power and other cables To carry the instrument use the handle or carry it using both hands Cleaning When cleaning the case or the operation panel first turn OFF the circuit under measurement and the instrument and remove the instrument s power cord from the outlet Then wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation IM 253710 01E 3 1 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Conditions Install the instrument in a place that meets the following conditions Flat even surface If the instrument in not installed on a stable horizontal surface the printer s recording quality may degrade and precise measurements may be impeded Well ventilated location Ve hol at
346. ical lines are displayed These are V cursors The horizontal value from the left edge of the screen to each V cursor and the horizontal value difference between them can be measured Markers H Cursors Cursor 1 Curson 2 9725 6mMU 9725 6nU O00kU Xe 16 046ns Xx 36 666ns AX 19 954ms 174x 50 116 HZ fi CHT KEKE CHS 60 00 V cH 50 00 leu 16 97 4 Cursor 1 9741 1mU 2172 200 11 913 V V Cursors Measured values H amp V Cursors Measured values ERT EREE ICHS 60 00 V cH 50 00 leu 16 37 4 lt Cursor 1 lt Cursor 2 xi 10 t00ms XZ 36 166ms Ax 29 666ms 174X 50 000 HZ it CHT Trea eT CH3 6000Y j IcHS 60 00 y CH1 16 970 Cursor 3 lt Cursor 4 Cursor 1 5741 inv 2172 2mU d 14 913 V xi 10 100ns xZ 36 100ns AX 29 00ONS 174x 50 000 Hz if I Measured values I Measured values IM 253710 01E 1 41 1 9 Saving Loading the Data and Other Useful Functions Saving Loading data from a Floppy Disk For procedures see chapter 12 A floppy disk drive comes standard with the instrument Numerical data waveform data as well as setup parameters can be saved and loaded as necessary In addition screen image data can be saved in TIFF BMP and PS PostScript formats The screen image data can be attached to documents using a word processing application
347. ifference U1 I1 U1 I1 Phase difference of the fundamental current 11 1 of element 1 with respect to U1 1 Phase difference U1 12 U1 l2 Phase difference of the fundamental current 12 1 of element 2 with respect to U1 1 Phase difference U1 I3 U1 I3 Phase difference of the fundamental current 13 1 of element 3 with respect to U1 1 Measurement functions functions that are determined for each selected wiring method A B For details related to the determination of and the equations of functions see Appendix 2 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V UX k rms value of the order harmonic voltage of order k UZ Total rms value of the voltage signal Current A IX k rms value of the harmonic current of order k I Total rms value of the current signal Active power W P2 k Active power of the harmonic signal of order k P Total active power Apparent power VA SX k Apparent power of the harmonic signal of order k SX Total apparent power Reactive power var Qz k Reactive power of the harmonic signal of order k QE Total reactive power Power factor AZ k Power factor of the harmonic signal of order k AZ Total power factor 1 kis an integer in the range from 0 to the upper limit of the harmonic analysis Oth order is the DC component The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 500 by the frequency of the PLL source 2 T
348. igger Source Note Two PZ4000s can be synchronized using the external trigger output function For details see 14 1 External Trigger Output IM 253710 01E 10661 y Bunjes 7 3 Setting the Edge Trigger For a functional description see section 1 4 This section applies when the trigger mode is set to a mode other than OFF CONFIGURATION wn REMOTE SHIFT COPY NULL CAL SINGLE SHE sTaRT sToP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g G E VOLTAGE amp A CURRENT e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Procedure Set the trigger mode to a mode other than OFF For procedures see section 7 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode 1 Press the TRIGGER key to display the Trigger setting menu Check that Mode is set to something other than OFF Selecting the trigger type 2 Press the Type soft key to select Edge to set the trigger type to edge trigger Selecting the trigger slope 3 Press the Slope soft key to select f or Setting the trigger level 4 Press the Level soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings OUBEALBQ 7 6 IM 253
349. iles will be copied The name of the All Set soft key changes to All Reset 11 Press the All Reset soft key The previously set marks are removed The directories and files will not be copied The name of the All Reset soft key changes to All Set UUUUUOUU File List Copy Path SCO PZ Function Space 2612315648 byte File Name Size Date Attribute Copy a Set Reset 1999701713 09 54 1999 01 08 05 27 1999701708 05 27 1999701710 03 47 All Set 1999701710 03 47 1999701710 04 15 1999701710 04 15 K File List Copy L Path SCONPZ A Function Space 2612315648 byte File Name Size Date Attribute copy La Set Reset 1999781713 69 54 1999 61 08 05 27 1999 01 68 05 27 6330 1999 01 10 03 47 A11 Reset 1993701710 03 47 6 19997817168 04 15 a 1999 61 18 04 15 K NUMEROGG CSU 1999701703 17 46 Property NUMEROOO CSU 19933701703 17 46 Property WAVEOOO HDR 1999701703 17 39 R WAVEGOO HDR 1999701703 17 39 WAVEGOG WUF 1999701703 17 39 WAVEGOO UUF 1999701703 17 39 Filter Filter M Md Iten fll Iten Aly Attribute Attribute 4 4 Dest Dir Dest Dir UUUU0UUU 12 34 IM 253710 01E 12 9 Copying Files Selecting the copy destination 12 Press the Dest Dir soft key to display the copy execution menu and the copy destination file list dialog box File Li
350. inal 5A pen 54 Ben 208 CsA pen J I Range 1000mUpk_ _1680mUpk_ _1000nUpk_ _1000nUpK Sensor Ratio nvAil 10 0000 C 10 0000 L 10 9000 C 10 0009 Line F oF F Filter UFF OFF OFF Scaling FF ___ON FF __ON FE __ON Pt Ratio 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 d Ct Ratio 1 001 C 1 0000 scaling Factor 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Setting the power coefficient 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Scaling Factor of element 1 4 Press the SELECT key to display the power coefficient setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the power coefficient For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box The Scaling Factor of all other modules that are displayed are set to the same power coefficient Power Module All Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 Standard 260A Shunt Standard Standard U Range 2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _20000pk Terminal 5A pen 54 Ben 208 CsA pen I Range 1000mUpk_ _16G6mUpk_ _1800nUpk_ _1000mUpK Sensor Ratio nv AdL 10 0000 C 10 0000 10 0000 L 10 0000 Line Orr Orr Orr Filter OFF OFF OFF Scaling FF __ON FF __ON FF __O
351. inal binding post are M6 screws Either wind the wire around the screw or pass the crimp on lugs through the screw axis then tighten firmly by holding the terminal knob Combination of Wiring Methods and Elements The combination of the selectable wiring methods and elements varies depending on the number of installed power measurement modules For details see Combination of Wiring Methods and Elements and Wiring Examples in section 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement IM 253710 01E 3 19 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 9 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Note Check that the power measurement modules are installed in order starting from the element number 1 slot If you leave the slots that have smaller element numbers empty measurements will not be made properly For example do not install a power measurement module into the element number 2 slot and leave the element number 1 slot empty Do not install power measurement modules into element number 1 and 3 slots and leave the element number 2 slot empty For the procedures on installing the modules see section 3 3 Installing the Input Module When the sensor input module is installed into the element number 4 slot only up to three power measurement modules can be installed In this case you cannot select a wiring method that uses four power measurement modules After wiring the
352. ination of Measurement Functions For details regarding the wiring methods A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method When the number of displayed items is set to 8 or 16 Changing the measurement function The types of measurement functions that can be selected are indicated in Measurement Function in section 1 2 excluding the function and User defined Function in section 1 7 You can also select not to display the measurement functions None Changing the element wiring method Select the element wiring method from the following choices Elementi Element2 Element4 Element4 A B Changing the harmonic order You can specify the harmonic order from Total or dc Oth order up to 500th order U1 111 P140 S10 0 0094 V U1 1 0 0094 V 0 0002 A Changing the measurement 1 1 0 0002 A 0 000 W function of the third item gt p10 130 853 0 000 VA 1 0 000 VA U11 0 0094 V Changing the ON 111 0 0002 A element of the third item P21 0 001kW S11 0 000 VA Changing the harmonic order U10 0 0094 V 111 0 0002 A P236 0 000k W S11 0 000 VA 8 22 IM 253710 01E 8 5 Changing the Displayed Items of the Harmonic Measurement Data When Single List or Dual List list is selected Selecting the item to change Two types of lists can be specified For Single List the list of item No 1 is displayed in two columns For Dual List both lists are displayed in ea
353. inter Option Paper Feeding 06 13 1 13 2 Printing to the Built in Printer Option ecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeteaeeseeeenaees 13 5 A 13 3 Printing to an External Centronics Printer ccccecceeceeceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeeeeeaees 13 8 13 4 Saving Screen Images to Floppy Disk and SCSI Device cccccesesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 13 11 Chapter 14 External Trigger Output and Other Operations AX 14 1 External Trigger Outputs nosicie iiei ei adoi 14 1 14 2 Selecting the Message Language Setting the Brightness of the Screen ee 14 2 14 3 Setting the Display Colors of the Screen ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesneeeeeeeneeenaees 14 4 14 4 Setting the Action on Trigger cecceeeceeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeteaeeeeeteaeecsaeeeaeeseeeeaeessaeeseeeseaeenaae 14 8 IM 253710 01E xiii oh 7 Contents Chapter 15 Motor Evaluation Function Applicable to Motor Modules 15 1 Inputting Signals of rotating speed and Torque eee cee eee eee tee tree testes teeeeeeteeeeas 15 1 15 2 Setting the Input Range of Revolution Sensor and Torque Meter Signals 00 15 3 15 3 Selecting the Input Filter i5 n2sccs hie ieee edict cei adel de ateetieneccciee 15 9 15 4 Setting the Scaling Factor the Pulse Count and Unit Used to Measure the rotating SPCC eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeteneeeeenaeeeees 15 11 15 5 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to
354. ion interface IM 253710 01E 1 43 Chapter 2 Names and Uses of Parts 2 1 Front Panel Handle Use the handles both sides when moving the instrument Section 3 1 Rear Panel Current sensor input connector Connect the external sensor cable from the external current sensor Section 3 8 Input module Section 2 4 Current input terminal Wire current measurement cables ESC key Clears and escapes from the current menu 24000 Fam va Front Panel Rear Panel and Top View Operation Keys Keys that are pressed first when carrying out an operation Displays the first menu of the corresponding key setting Section 2 2 Jog shuttle Used when selecting setup parameters and setting values Section 2 2 Floppy disk drive LCD E Used when saving or loading data Power switch Section 3 11 Filter indicator Soft keys Chapter 12 Section 13 4 Vent holes Rotary knob Section 3 2 Used when setting the observation time Section 6 1 Lights when the line filter is turned ON Section 5 6 Used when selecting setup parameters in a menu Voltage input terminal Section 3 7 to 3 10 Element 1 Section 3 3 Wire the voltage measurement cable External trigger input connector Used when triggering off of an external signal or wh
355. ion Torque Current Item under measurement Complies with EIA 574 Standard EIA 232 RS 232 Standard for 9 pin IM 253710 01E 1 1 suonoun4 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Block diagram Power measurement module Model 253751 253752 Voltage input circuit Crossing Detector Crossing 253752 Detector Speed data Crossing Detector Zero Crossing Data Torque data Zero Crossing Crossing Data Detector 1 2 IM 253710 01E 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram EH PZ4000 main unit Model 253710 Acquisition DSP A SRAM Optional Memory 1 MW 4 MW CH p Processing suoljoun Element 4 0 data 1 u1 Standard ACQ memory 100 kW CH CPU Acquisition e Main memory Display 6 4 Color EXT TRG OUT pP ASIC T EXT TRG IN EXT CLK IN Display RAM Internal Printer option FDD Optional Memory 1 MW 4 MW CH SCSI option Standard ACQ memory Serial RS 232 100 KWICH Signal Flow and Process Power measurement module Model 253751 253752 A voltage signal that is applied to the voltage input terminal U of the power measurement module is normalized using the voltage divider of the input circuit and an operational amplifier OP AMP It is then input to the A D converter and the zero crossing detector There are two ways in which current signals can be input to the 253751 One way utilizes a current sensor input connector Current
356. ions Uhdf Ihdf Phdf Uthd Ithd and Pthd of the harmonic measurement mode have two defining equations The appropriate equations can be selected For the equations see Appendix 2 Corrected Power For procedures see section 10 4 Depending on the applicable standard when the load that is connected to the potential transformer is extremely small the active power of the potential transformer that is measured need to be compensated The compensating equation and the coefficient can be selected IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Pr Pe vans po P t ome rs Umn Umn Pc Corrected Power P Active power Urms True rms voltage Umn Voltage rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value P4 P2 Coefficient as defined in the applicable standard Re computing the numerical data For procedures see section 10 1 With the data acquisition stopped the measurement computation period or numerical computation setting can be changed for re computation All computations are performed again including the measurement function data 1 36 IM 253710 01E 1 8 Waveform Analysis The displayed waveform can be added or subtracted A FFT can be performed to display the power spectrum Furthermore a cursor can be placed on the waveform to measure the value at that point Waveform Computation For procedures see section 11 2 An equation can be created by combining the symbols of each channel and
357. ire systems can be set up elements 1 and 2 and elements 3 and 4 The combination of elements that can be wired to the input terminals in the figure are as follows The rest of the elements can be wired to single phase two wire systems Input Terminal 1 Input Terminal 2 Element 1 Element 2 Element 2 Element 3 Element 3 Element 4 R SOURCE LOAD LOAD Input Terminal 1 Input Terminal 2 Wiring Example of a three voltage three current system 3V3A The combination of elements that can be wired to the input terminals in the figure are as follows The rest of the elements can be wired to single phase two wire systems Input Terminal 1 Input Terminal 2 Input Terminal 3 Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 R SOURCE LOAD st T LOAD Input Terminal 1 Input Terminal2 Input Terminal 3 Wiring Example of a three phase four wire system 3P4W The combination of elements that can be wired to the input terminals in the figure are as follows The rest of the elements can be wired to single phase two wire systems Input Terminal 1 Input Terminal2 Input Terminal 3 Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 SOURCE LOAD Zana Inp
358. irmware version 2 01 or later IM 253710 01E 8 19 Aejdsiq jeouewny e 8 5 Changing the Displayed Items of the Harmonic Measurement Data Display 4 Fornat Numeric Nuneric Disp Items Nuneric Ttens WpHarm Item No The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Numeric When the number of displayed items is set to 8 or 16 3 Press the Numeric Disp Items soft key to display the menu used to select the number of displayed items Selecting the item to change oa Press the Harm Item No soft key Turn the jog shuttle to select highlight the item to change Changing the measurement function 6 Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the measurement function You can also select not to display the measurement functions None 8 Press the SELECT key The symbol for the selected element or wiring method and numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position Changing the element wiring method 9 Press the Element soft key to display the element wiring method selection box 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select the element wiring method from Element to B 11 Press the SELECT key The selected element number or wiring method symbol Zfunction and the numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position Changing the harmonic order 12 Press the Order
359. is performed on the sampled data of 1000 2000 or 10000 points to give 500 1000 or 5000 points of data respectively and the result is displayed Window Sine wave NAP aa ae a Rectangular window W t u t u t T u t Step function Product Hanning window W t 0 5 0 5 cos 27 Note FFT The power spectrum is expressed using the following equation Take the complex function of the voltage after taking the FFT to be U Ur jUj and the complex function of the current to be I Ir jlj J 2 2 Voltage power spectrum este 24 4 2 Current power spectrum i Power spectrum of the active power Urr Uili Ur Ir Real Part Uj Ij Imaginaly Part The difference between a harmonic measurement and a FFT on this instrument In the harmonic measurement the signal is sampled at a sampling rate that is in sync with the PLL source The signal components that are integer multiples of the fundamental signal are measured Therefore the harmonic measurement is best suited to measuring signals that contain a fundamental frequency component with its associated harmonics It can be used to determine the impedance for each harmonic order as well as the sum of all harmonic signals With the FFT the signal is sampled at a fixed sampling rate determined by the observation time and the memory size The FFT contains frequency information up to half the bandwidth of the sampling rate Therefore the FFT is best suite
360. istance Approx 100 mQ Input reactance Approx 0 07 uH Current sensor input Input resistance Approx 10 kQ Measurement range Direct input 5 A Select from Auto 10 Apk 4 Apk 2 Apk 1 Apk 0 4 Apk 0 2 Apk 0 1 Apk Current sensor input Select from Auto 1000 mVpk 400 mVpk 200 mVpk 100 mVpk Frequency range DC to 2 MHz Instantaneous maximum Direct input 5 A 30 Apk or 15 Arms whichever is less allowable input 1 s Current sensor input 2 Vrms Continuous maximum Direct input 5 A 10 Apk or 7 Arms whichever is less allowable input Current sensor input 2 Vrms Continuous maximum 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz common mode voltage CMRR Open input terminals apply 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz between input Influence from common terminals and case f is the frequency in kHz mode voltage 0 005 of range or less at 10 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz Maximum range measurement range x 0 0002 x f of range or less for other frequencies designed value f is the frequency in kHz Line filter Select from OFF 500 Hz 20 kHz and 1 MHz Zero crossing filter Select from OFF 500 Hz and 20 kHz A D converter 12 bit Sampling rate 5 MS s maximum 17 16 IM 253710 01E 17 15 Power Measurement Module 253751 Item Specification Voltage and current accuracy Conditions Within 3 months after calibration Standard operating conditions Input signal Sine wave Common mode voltage 0 V Input
361. it of the harmonic order under analysis The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 500 by the frequency of the PLL source All No parenthesis is appended after the measurement function This indicates numerical data related to all waveforms including the fundamental and the harmonics 1 8 IM 253710 01E 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods a Measurement function of the motor module The following seven types of numerical data can be determined For details related 9 to the determination of measurement functions see Chapter 15 or Appendix 2 o ao Chars and numbers inside Measurement Function de 1 k All No Torque Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Numerical data exist Speed Sync Slip Pm Motor efficiency No No No Yes nmA or nmB Total efficiency NMA or nmB The meaning of measurement functions with parentheses varies depending on the characters or numbers that are inside the parentheses as follows dc Indicates numerical data of the DC component Indicates numerical data of the fundamental wave k Indicates numerical data from 2nd to Nth order harmonics N is the upper limit of the harmonic order under analysis see section 17 5 The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 500 by the frequency of the PLL source All No parentheses are appended after the measurement function Indicates numerical data r
362. it the menu during operation press the ESC key PO iN TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER zT ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE SHIFT copy nut cau ELEMENTS CH8 SINGLE SHE sTaRT SToP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g amp A Press the MISC key to display the Misc menu Press the Selftest soft key to display the self test menu Press the Test Item soft key to display the test item selection menu Press the Memory or Key Board soft key to select the test item If you selected Memory go to paragraph Testing the memory on the next page If you selected Key Board go to paragraph Testing the keys and the keyboard on the next page Information 4 GPIB RS2Z32 SCSI ID M Date Tine Conf ig Selftest Selftest Test Item Henory 4 Menory Test System Test Exec N OUUUULOL Key Board Test Exec JUUUUUUE g uonsedsu pue asueuazuien HunooysajqnoiL IM 253710 01E 16 5 16 3 Performing a Self test Testing the memory 5 Press the Memory Test soft key to display the memory selection menu 6 Press one of the soft keys from System to VRAM to select the memory 7 Press the Test Exec soft key to execute the test Selftest M Test Item Memory M Memory Test System JUUUUOUL Test Exec
363. ixed range Select from the following frequency input ranges 2k 200kHz 250 8kHz 16 800Hz and 1 40Hz Auto range Select Auto for the frequency input range setting to enable auto range The range changes automatically depending on the frequency of the input signal The switching conditions and precautions are indicated below The different ranges used in the auto mode are the same as those available for fixed range Frequency Input Range Conditions for Stepping Up or Down the Range 2k 200kHz Stepping down There is at least one data point that is less than or equal to 2 kHz within the observation time No change All data points are greater than 2 kHz within the observation time 250 8kHz Stepping up There is at least one data point that is greater than or equal to 5 kHz within the observation time Stepping down There is at least one data point that is less than or equal to 250 Hz within the observation time No change All data points are greater than 250 Hz and less than 5 kHz within the observation time or There is at least one data point that is less than or equal to 250 Hz and another point that is greater than or equal to 5 kHz within the observation time 16 800Hz Stepping up There is at least one data point that is greater than or equal to 312 5 Hz within the observation time Stepping down There is at least one data point that is less than or equal to 15 625 Hz within the observation time No cha
364. jog shuttle to select Sync Speed Source 4 Press the SELECT key to display the frequency measurement source setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel from CH1 to CH8 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new frequency measurement source Motor Module Speed Ch7 TorquetCh8 Pn Range soUpk j select Sense Type Analog Pul Freq Range 2k Z00KHz Filter Zero Cross Filter scaling 1 0000 Unit Pulse N Pole Sync Speed Source CRZ Explanation Setting the motor s number of poles Select the value in the range from 1 to 99 This sets the number of poles for the motor being measured Setting the frequency measurement source Select from the following list of choices CH1 to CH6 Normally set the input channel for the voltage or current supplied by the motor If a frequency other than that of the voltage and current supplied by the motor is specified the synchronous speed may not be determined correctly CH7 or CH8 Normally the rotating speed and torque signals are input to CH7 and CH8 You can select the signal input to these channels as the frequency measurement source but the synchronous speed will not be determined correctly Equation for deriving the synchronous speed The equation when the unit of synchronous speed Sync is rpms is indicated below 120 x Frequency of the frequency measurement source Hz Sync r
365. k 5Upk ZUpk 1Upk Auto Sense Type malog Pulse H Sensor Range 50Upk Positim 0 02 eeSe lect 250 8kHz 16 800 Hz 1 40 Hz futo Sense Type prarog Sensor Range 5Upk Freq Range Label CH IM 253710 01E 15 5 SajNpoW 10101 0 lqe2ddy uonouny uonenjesra 10 0N 15 2 Setting the Input Range of Revolution Sensor and Torque Meter Signals Setting the Input Range of the Torque Meter Signal Using the Channel Setting Menu 1 Press the CH8 key to display the channel setting menu On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 or when the motor module is not installed in the element number 4 slot the torque meter input range setting menu does not appear Selecting the input range of the torque meter signal 2 Press the Sensor Range soft key to display the input range selection box 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 50Vpk to 1Vpk and Auto 4 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new input range Lm Wave Display OFF M eoSe lect BOUpK 20Upk Sensor Range 10Upk 50Upk 5Upk 2Upk 1Vpk Auto xi Position 8 0 Label CH8 Explanation Signals from revolution sensors and torque meters can be input to channels 7 and 8 of the PZ4000 for making measurements For revolution sensors the signal is the DC voltage analog signal or the pulse count that are proportional to the rotating speed of
366. k or 0 1Apk For the 20 A current input terminal Select 100Apk 40Apk 20Apk 10Apk 4Apk 2Apk or 1Apk Note To set the range refer to the peak value of the input signal For example if a 100 Vrms sinusoid is to be applied the peak value is approximately 141 V Thus set the range to 200Vpk Auto range Select Auto for the range setting to enable auto range The range switches automatically depending on the amplitude of the input signal as follows The different ranges used in the auto mode are the same as those available for fixed range selection Increasing the range When the numerical data U pk and U pk exceed 80 of the current voltage range the voltage range is increased for the next data acquisition When the numerical data I pk and I pk exceed 80 of the current current range the current range is increased for the next data acquisition Decreasing the range When the numerical data U pk and U pk fall below 15 of the current voltage range the voltage range is decreased for the next data acquisition When the numerical data l pk and I pk fall below 15 of the current current range the current range is increased for the next data acquisition 5 10 IM 253710 01E 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input Note When numerical data are not measured or computed see section 10 1 auto range cannot be used You can select Auto from the menu but it is not activated The range that was most r
367. kHz to 250 kHz Input level CMOS Minimum pulse width 1 us for both High and Low Measured value under standard operating conditions see section 17 13 IM 253710 01E 17 1 as Ey suoleoyioeds 17 4 Measurement Function Measurement Item Measurement function in the normal measurement mode Measurement functions that are determined for each element power measurement module For details related to the determination of and the equations of measurement functions see Appendix 2 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V Urms true rms value Umn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Udc simple average Uac AC component Current A Irms true rms value Imn rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Idc simple average lac AC component Active power W P Apparent power VA S Reactive power var Q Power factor A Phase difference o Frequency Hz fU voltage frequency fl current frequency Voltage max and min V U pk Voltage maximum U pk Voltage minimum Current max and min A I pk Current maximum I pk Current minimum Crest factor CfU Voltage crest factor Cfl Current crest factor Form factor FfU Voltage form factor Ffl Current form factor Impedance Q of the load Z circuit Resistance and reactance Rs Resistance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in
368. key to display the line filter selection box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the filter from OFF to 1MHz 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the line filter The Line Filter of all other modules that are displayed are set to the same line filter The FILTER indicator in the ELEMENT group on the front panel lights Selecting the zero crossing filter 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Zero Crossing Filter of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to display the zero crossing filter selection box a Turn the jog shuttle to select the filter from OFF to 20kHz 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the zero crossing filter The Zero Cross Filter of all other modules that are displayed are set to the same zero crossing filter Power Module Alt Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 Standard 26A Shunt Standard Standard U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk Terminal 5A pen J 54 Ben 208 CsA pen J I Range 1000mUpk_ _1660mUpk_ _1e0enUpk_ Sensor Ratio n ail 10 0000 10 0000 10 0000 Line Filter OFF Select Zero Cross Filter oF scaling PFF oN SOGHZ Pt Ratio 1 0009 2OkHzZ 1 9000 Ct Ratio 1 0006 AMHz 1 0000 Sca Ling Factor 1 0000 1 0000 Power Module AIT Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Elemen
369. l Urms Irms Voltage form factor FfU Voltage form factor FfU Current form factor Ffl Current form factor Ffl 2V2 tinh 2V2 imn T T Upk Ipk Voltage crest factor CfU Voltage crest factor CfU Current crest factor Cfl Urms Irms Upk U pkl or IU pkl which ever is larger lpk Il pkl or II pkl which ever is larger Active power P W ee Luo i t dt Apparent power S VA Reactive power Q var Urms Irms Umn Imn Udc Idc Can combine rms mn and dc See section 10 4 Power factor A Phase difference 6 P S P cos S The display format of the phase difference can be switched between Lead Lag format and 360 format See section 10 6 Impedance of the load circuit Urms Z Q Irms Serial resistance of the load circuit P Rs 9 Irms Serial reactance of the load circuit Q Xs Q Irms Parallel resistance of the load circuit Urms Rp 9 1 G P Parallel reactance of the load circuit Urms Xp 9 1 B Q IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 P Umn Urms Corrected power Pc W P1 P2 Urms y P i Um Umn P1 P2 Coefficients as defined in the applicable standard Note The period T is determined by the measurement computation period setting t 0 is the start point and t T is the end point For details see section 10 1 u t and i t denote the sampled data of the voltage signal and the current signal
370. l clock is specified in units of time The display range when the time base is set to external clock or during the harmonic measurement mode is specified in units of data points When the T Y waveform and X Y waveform are displayed simultaneously the start position dot dashed line and the end position dotted line are displayed within the display frame of the T Y waveform This allows you to check the display range of the X Y waveform The range of movement of the start and end positions during the normal measurement mode when the time base is set to internal clock is from 0 s left end of the screen to the observation time right end of the screen The range of movement of the start and end positions when the time base is set to external clock or during the harmonic measurement mode is the number of data points equal to the specified record length For example if the record length is set to 100 k words the range is from 0 left end of the screen to data point 100 k right end of the screen The resolution of the display range during the normal measurement mode when the time base is set to internal clock is equal to observation time display record length The resolution of the display range when the time base is set to external clock or during the harmonic measurement mode is one data point In order to move the start and end positions simultaneously without changing the distance between the two the jog shuttle control must be set to b
371. l data corresponding to harmonic orders that are higher than those currently displayed up to 500th order You can page scroll to list the numerical data corresponding to harmonic orders that are lower than those currently displayed down as far as Total or dc Oth order Note For the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation and appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions For details regarding the wiring methods A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method You can display the harmonic order from Total or dc Oth order up to 500th order However numerical data that correspond to harmonic orders up to the upper limit of the analysis determined by the frequency of the PLL source are actually determined from the harmonic measurement no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or there are no numerical data If the measurement computation results cannot be displayed using the specified decimal point position or unit OF overflow is displayed When the frequency of the measured value is outside the measurement range or when the input signal is less than or equal to approximately 3 5 of the measurement range fU or fl will display an error Error The phase difference during the harmonic measurement mode is displayed according to the r
372. lay normal measurement data harmonic measurement data and waveforms split the screen set display interpolation change the graticule display upper and lower limits display waveform labels display vector graphs and bar graphs of harmonic signals Sections 8 2 to 8 5 9 1 to 9 7 9 9 9 10 and 9 11 ZOOM key Vertically zoom on the waveforms Section 9 8 CONFIGURATION gt 7 TAIG D sefup weur ueasure raidceR gt FZ S AtQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT COPY NULL CAL MENU ELEMENTS OOOO FILTER Ve WS FILTER SINGLE i SINGLE START STOP ABORT 2 WUUOU0UE L e i I cH2 cH4 cH6 cH8 current SH Ss Ss es CH key Displays the waveforms and waveform labels and vertically zooms on the waveforms Sections 9 1 9 2 9 7 9 8 Set Numerical Computation and Waveform Analysis r MATH key Set the waveform computation region re compute waveforms set waveform equations convert scales perform FFTs and cursor measurements Chapter 11 r MEASURE key Set the measurement computation period re compute numerical data select delta computation set user defined functions select the equation for apparent power and corrected power perform averaging operation select the display format of the phase difference set the harmonic order for analysis and select t
373. le to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and Viewing the properties in section 12 5 IM 253710 01E 12 35 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 9 Copying Files Explanation CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the mark is blinking It can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the medium and directory of the copy source and copy destination See the explanation given in Selecting the medium and directory in section 12 5 Selecting the file attribute See the explanation given in Selecting the file attribute in section 12 8 Selecting the copy source files You can copy all files that have a mark to the left of the file name There are two methods available to select the files that are to be copied Selecting the file one at a time Place marks to the left of the file names one at a time using the Set Reset soft key Selecting all files at once Place marks to the left of the file names all at once using the All Set soft key There are three methods to place the marks all at once e Selecting a file and pressing the All Set soft key places marks on the directory containing the selected file and all files in that directory Selecting a directory and pressing the All Set
374. lect Numer ic Vector Nuner ic Wave Nuner ic X Nuner ic Bar Wave X Wave Bar ater Display Format x HE X Trace CH1 Start Pos a 1000900 Interpolate End Pos OUUUUUG0 9 32 IM 253710 01E 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform Displaying numerical data and X Y waveform 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric X Y 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection For the procedures related to setting the numerical display see chapter 8 Display Select q Format Nuner ic XY Wave H X Trace HY CH1 Bar Start Pos Vector End RK 100000 Numer ic Wave Interpolate Auner ic X wae Sd Numer ic Bar Wave X Y Wave Bar OUUUUU00 Displaying waveform and X Y waveform 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Wave X Y 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection For the procedures related to setting the waveform display see sections 9 1 to 9 8 Display Se lect g Format Nuner ic XY Wave g X Trace X Y CH1 Bar Start Pos Vector End RS 100000 Numer ic Wave Interpolate Numer ic X wae Ed Numer ic Bar Wave X Y Wave Bar UUUUUUG0 IM 253710 01E 9 33 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform The following procedures are given with the premise that Displaying waveform and X Y waveform wa
375. licable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot CH1 U1 6 Numerical data of each harmonic 1 0429 3 0339 0 0068 9 135 0 0048 0 096 6 0041 0 080 6 6621 9 043 6 6622 9 043 0 0016 0 032 0 0014 0 029 0 0013 0 026 0 0012 0 023 0 0012 0 023 0 0007 0 014 6 0011 0 022 6 6614 0 028 0 016 30 6 6007 9 014 9 018 32 06 6010 9 021 0 016 34 6 6006 9 011 6 019 36 6 6010 9 020 9 026 38 0 0007 9 014 0 010 46 6 6007 9 014 0 004 42 0 0004 9 007 0 011 44 6 6005 0 010 0 0007 0 014 Harmonic distortion factor When the selected measurement function is U I or P Uhdf Ihdf or Phdf is displayed respectively 1 24 IM 253710 01E 1 5 Numerical Display a Dual list The data of two measurement functions are displayed in its own column You can select the following measurement functions U I P S Q A 6 oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp and Torque This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot suoljun s Q D 3 PLL CH1 U1 GOONS 4 FAR oO Freq 49 Hz dc 1 0429 20 633 dc 0 0530 1 120 2 1 4 0427 79 982 1 0 0172 0 363 o Ui 5 0545 U 2 3 0339 60 023 2 0 0187 0 396 a I1 4 7348 A 3 0 0144 8 285 3 0 0182 0 384 P1 0 067 U 4 9 0068 8 135 4 9 0186 0 381 o 31 O 5 0 0059 0 117 5 0 0191 0 404 Qi ot T 6 0 0048 0 096 6 0 0201 0 425 g
376. lock input 5 V 100 Q External clock signal 4 us or longer me 1 us or longer 1 us or longer External clock signal I Sampling edge Note The external clock must be a continuous clock Burst signals cannot be used There is no function available to frequency divide the external clock signal on this instrument If the time base is set to external clock the observation time cannot be changed If you wish to change the displayed range of the time axis change the record length or zoom horizontally If the time base is set to external clock the time measured using the cursor is in terms of clock counts of the clock signal No units are displayed If the time base is set to external clock the trigger delay setting is void If the time base is set to external clock the TINTG function for waveform computation see section 11 2 computes sampling data as one second data The external clock signal is used for the following purposes in addition to providing data sampling timing PLL source see section 6 4 Measurement Computation period setting see section 10 1 In order to measure the harmonics of higher orders more accurately the input signal must be sampled using a clock signal that has a frequency that is an integer multiple of the fundamental frequency of the input signal The instrument generates the clock signal from the input signal that is selected as the PLL source and samples the input signal By
377. lt f lt 200 kHz ar 200 kHz lt f lt 400 kHz at 0 6 of reading 0 2 of range 0 6 of reading 0 2 of range 1 of reading 0 2 of range 400 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz 0 1 0 006 x f of reading 0 2 of range 500 kHz lt f lt 1 MHz 0 1 0 006 x f of reading 2 of range 1 MHz lt f lt 5 MHz 0 1 0 006 x f of reading 2 of range The unit of f in the equation for the reading error is KHz One year accuracy reading error measurement range error x 1 5 calibration period is one year Influence from the amplitude of the input signal and frequency For input voltages of 400 Vrms or more add reading error x 1 5 x U of reading For input voltages of 400 Vrms or more and frequencies of 100 kHz or more add an additional 0 005 x f x U of reading designed value For input currents of 10 Arms or more add 0 0002 x 1 of reading U input voltage kV input current A f frequency kHz Line filter influence Add 0 5 of reading to the input signal whose frequency is 1 10th of the cut off frequency when the line filter is ON Measurement range influence As shown in the above table when the input signal is a sinusoid and its rms value is between 5 and 55 of the measurement range As shown in the above table when the input signal is a DC signal and the value is between 55 and 55 of the measurement range The reading error is doubled when the i
378. ly These filters are used for this purpose Line filter This filter is inserted into the measurement circuit It removes the noise from the inverter and from distorted waveforms The cutoff frequency can be selected Zero crossing filter This filter is inserted only into the frequency measurement circuit Zero crossing refers to the point at which the input signal crosses the center level of the amplitude This filter is used to accurately detect the zero cross point The cut off frequency can be selected This instrument can detect the zero crossing point with a hysteresis of approximately 3 5 of the measurement range The zero crossing detection is used to determine the measurement computation period measure frequency determine the period of a PLL source and is used as a trigger condition for the HF auto mode and HF normal mode explained later IM 253710 01E 1 3 Acquiring Data Voltage and Current Signals c Observation Time For procedures see section 6 1 The observation time represents the time span of one screen suoljoun During normal measurement mode The selectable range is from 10 us to 1 ks The sampling rate changes depending on the observation time The sampling rate is used to acquire the data to the acquisition memory For information on the waveform display see section 1 6 Waveform Display 1 ks denotes 1000 s 16 minutes 40 seconds During the harmonic measurement mode The observation ti
379. matting a medium containing data erases the data completely The time it takes to format a floppy disk is approximately one and a half minutes A floppy disk cannot be formatted if it is write protected Never format when the instrument is connected to a PC via a SCSI cable Floppy disks having a format other than the ones listed in this section cannot be used If an error message appears after the format operation the floppy disk may be damaged Disks formatted to MS DOS format on a PC can also be used The Quick logical format only clears initializes the directory entry and FAT information If you need to check for bad tracks do a physical format Normal When data are written to an external SCSI device that has bad tracks an access error 604 Media failure may occur in which case no more data can be written When you are using a medium for the first time or if the medium can no longer be read do a Normal format If you want to format a disk that you have been using before do a Quick format On products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later quick format of DVD RAM is possible Physical format Normal is not possible IM 253710 01E 12 9 eea y Huipeo7 pue Burnes G 12 5 Saving and Loading Setup Parameters TRIG D CONFIGURATION O SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM 2 REMOTE Esc FILE misc
380. max max Total harmonic distortion of current 2 2 K k k Ithd L Ado LK eine l 1 max max Total harmonic distortion of active power yy P k iy P k Pthd it 5400 2 _ 100 P P 1 Telephone harmonic factor of voltage max max Uthf Uthf Y t U K 100 Ithf 1 A k 1 k 100 Telephone harmonic factor of current U k 1 l m Ith k Coefficient as defined by the applicable standard IEC34 1 1996 Telephone influence factor of voltage 1 max 1 max Utif Utif T k U k Itif D T k I k Telephone influence factor of current U ke l kei nit T k Coefficient as defined by the applicable standard IEEE Std 100 1992 Harmonic voltage factor a F hvf 1 U k 1 I k Harmonic t Del factor hvf U y s 100 hef T 100 hef k 2 k 2 Voltage frequency fU FreqU Hz Current frequency fl Freql Hz Of the voltage fU and current fl the frequency of the signal that is selected as the PLL source is displayed The display of the signal that is not selected shows a bar Note k denotes harmonic order max denotes the upper limit See section 17 5 of the harmonic order under analysis The upper limit is automatically determined from the frequency of the PLL source maximum is 500 App 6 IM 253710 01E Appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Function The table below shows the case when elements 1 and 2 or 1 2 and 3 are co
381. me for the harmonic measurement mode is automatically determined from the sampling rate that is determined from the fundamental frequency of the PLL source see page 1 9 and the record length see next section For the relationship between observation time sampling rate and record length see Appendix 1 For the harmonic measurement mode the sampling rate depends on an external signal referred to as the PLL source signal under measurement or external clock signal and therefore the observation time cannot be set uniformly as in the normal measurement mode In the harmonic measurement mode the time it takes to store the record length of sampled data in the acquisition memory is the time displayed on one screen Record length For procedures see section 6 2 During the normal measurement mode On this instrument the record length refers to the data capacity of the acquisition memory per channel It can be selected as 100 k 1 M option or 4 M option words The sampled data in the acquisition memory are P P compressed see page 1 27 and displayed The number of data points displayed on the screen is referred to as the display record length The size of the display record length varies depending on the observation time setting and the maximum size is equal to the record length When the observation time is long the record length and display record length are the same but when the observation time is short the display record length bec
382. menu during operation press the ESC key VOLTAGE CURRENT SNA Operation when the START STOP key is pressed Pressing the START STOP key starts or stops the data acquisition operation Data acquisition is in progress when the indicator on the key is lit Operation when the SINGLE START key is pressed Pressing the SINGLE START key starts the data acquisition operation the indicator on the START STOP key lights After the data are acquired once according to the trigger settings the acquisition operation stops automatically the indicator on the START STOP key turns off i when the SHIFT SINGLE START ABORT key is pressed When data acquisition has been started with the START STOP key pressing the SHIFT SINGLE START ABORT key aborts the operation When data acquisition to the memory is stopped pressing the SHIFT SINGLE START ABORT key clears the previously acquired data in the acquisition memory Data related to numerical computation and waveform analysis are also cleared 4 4 IM 253710 01E 4 3 Starting Stopping Data Acquisition Explanation The difference between stopping the data acquisition using the START STOP key and the SHIFT SINGLE START ABORT key When the data acquisition is stopped using the START STOP key the acquisition operation stops after acquiring the display record length of sampled data Therefore numerical data can be measured computed and displayed and the waveform can be displ
383. n Save q Utility Selecting the numerical data to be saved The menu appears during the harmonic measurement mode If the measurement mode is set to normal measurement go to step 14 For the procedure related to setting the measurement mode see section 5 1 Setting the Measurement Mode 6 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Harmonics 7 Press the FILE key to display the File setting menu 8 Press the List Item soft key to display the numerical data selection dialog box File W File Item Numeric Tata Type Float List Iten W List Item Elenent Element i o Element 2 c Element 3 0 Element 4 Function U E 1 P By o g O A o w s z Re 4 amp s 5 Rp 5 xp List Save 7 Utility WUUUUUUU IM 253710 01E 12 23 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 7 Saving Numerical Data Selecting the element 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the desired element from Element1 to Element4 Element4 cannot be selected when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot 10 Press the SELECT key When the button to the left of the element in the numerical data selection dialog box is highlighted the numerical data of that element will be saved If the button is not highlighted the numerical data of that element will not be saved Selecting the measurement functio
384. n 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select the desired measurement function that is to be saved from U to List Torque can also be selected when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot 12 Press the SELECT key When the button to the left of the measurement function in the numerical data selection dialog box is highlighted the numerical data of that function will be saved If the button is not highlighted the numerical data of that measurement function will not be saved The numerical data of the measurement function that was highlighted in steps 11 and 12 of the element that was highlighted in steps 9 and 10 are saved 13 Press the ESC key to close the numerical data selection dialog box List Item Element Element 1 6 Element 2 c Element 3 o Element 4 Function I E E s A o o W s z Rs fe Xs amp Xp List 2 oaoa u Q I Rp Displaying the save setting menu 14 Press the Save soft key to display the save setting menu File WA File Item File List Numer ic Data Type ASCII Float W List Iten File Name Save Utility WJUUUUUUE Save Exec 12 24 IM 253710 01E 12 7 Saving Numerical Data Selecting the destination medium and directory 15 The procedures are the same as Selecting the destination medium and Selecting the destination directory in section 12 5 Setting the file name and comment 16 The pr
385. n The display record length varies depending on the record length and observation time For the relationship between the observation time sampling rate and record length see Appendix 1 Relationship between the Observation Time Sampling Rate and Record length suoljun Because the number of display segments number of displayed points on the screen is constant while the display record length changes there are times when the number of displayed points and the display record length do not match In these cases the following two scenarios occur When the display record length is larger than the number of displayed points For each time segment the instrument performs P P compression P P compression refers to the determination of the maximum and minimum values for each segment One raster will display these two points When the display record length is less than the number of displayed points The instrument interpolates the display For details see Display Interpolation of the Waveform cow Sampled data Display record length P P compression On the screen sixe BOILIO _ _ gt Time axis lt gt 0 501 rasters 500 Acquiring the sampled data The sampling rate changes when the measurement period is changed The data can be sampled at a maximum rate of 5 MS s The input signal is sequ
386. n 9 10 With the harmonic order assigned to the horizontal axis and the amplitude of the harmonics assigned to the vertical axis the amplitudes of the harmonics can be displayed using a bar graph The measurement function element and harmonic order can be specified You can select U I P S Q A oU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp and Torque for the harmonic measurement function The screen can be divided in half vertically so that the bar graph and numerical data can be displayed at the same time This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot Bar Graph Display of Harmonic Data The measured values of Am and x for bar graph 1 4 120 U 0 317 U mnt i i wf mit TI LWN Marker A Marker x lt The measured values of Ma marker and x for bar graph 2 Eg Harmonic order indicating the marker position Applicable to products with firmware version 2 01 or later Marker and x indicate that they are at the 1st order and 13th order positions respectively j X Y Waveform Display For procedures see section 9 11 The relationship between the amplitude levels between signals can be observed by assigning the amplitude of the input signal of the specified channel on the horizontal axis X axis and the amplitude level of another input signal signal that has the display turned ON
387. n external sensor cable Vv O Voltage input terminal LOAD Current sensor input connector Shunt type current sensor When the circuit under measurement is not grounded and the signal is high in frequency or large in power the effects of the inductance of the connection cable for the shunt type current sensor become large In these cases use an isolation sensor CT DC CT or clamp for the measurements Clamp type current sensor Vv 4 Voltage input terminal LOAD OY L Current sensor input connector 3 16 IM 253710 01E 3 8 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement The following wiring examples are for connecting shunt type current sensors When connecting a clamp type current sensor replace the shunt type current sensor with the clamp type For the combinations of the elements and the input terminals in the figures below see Wiring Examples in section 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement Wiring Example of a single phase two wire system 1P2W using a shunt type current sensor SOURCE LOAD SS oe A l a Earth side l OUTL Input terminal Current sensor input connector Wiring Example of a single phase three wire system 1P3W using a shunt type current sensor SOURCE LOAD our Pouri N
388. n in Properties in section 12 5 Note You cannot save or load while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON For the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 3 Determination of Delta Functions For details regarding the wiring methods A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method Inthe places where a measurement function is not selected or where there is no numerical data the following data are saved For ASCII files A character string NAN For Float files 0 x7FC00000 If you change the file extension on a PC for an example you will not be able to load that file Amaximum of 36 characters can be displayed in Path For file names upper and lower case letters are not distinguished For comments they are distinguished In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK When using the GP IB or serial interface commands to enter a file name the following symbols that do not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used IM 253710 01E 12 27 eea y Buipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 8 Changing the File Attribute Deleting Files Procedure 2 MENU ELEMENTS CONFIGURATI
389. nal and the phase difference between signals For a 3P4W three phase four wire For a 3V3A three voltage three current For a 3P3W three phase three wire wiring system wiring system wiring system U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are common mode U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are line voltages U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are line voltages voltages 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents However U3 1 and 13 1 are not actually measured for the three phase three wire method The vectors are displayed 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents Size of the peripheral circle range Lo through computation Wiring A SP4U C1 7 1226 Wiring A 3V3A 10 09 A a 11 2730 U Wiring A 11 2712 U Wiring B 1P2U 7 04063 A Wiring B 1P2U i HN 6 3143 A Wiring B 6 3133 A PLL Src CH 49 3779 W PLL Src CH14401 i P161 48 644 W PLL Src CH 48 645 U Frequency 0 1476 VA Frequency 60 005 Hz i S11 N 71 181 VA Freguency 71 158 UA gul u2 8 7523 var u1 U2 66 55 gic 51 967 var gui uz 51 935 var U1 U3 u1 U3 ALC AD G fF 0 68 eui I1 ui I1 11 gui 14 313 13 pui I2 gui 12 gui I2 E U1 1I3 U1 13 gui1 I3 sqtesses ss uac 3 y u3 u21 138 12 A398 U 13C1 0263 0 13 2c 254 0 P 2527 8 P31 59 042 W PHI P2 1 74 973 W o 74 955 U 5301 61 536 UA S31 al 21 77 173 VA 77 157 UA QILL y 17 344 var Q31 80 775 va 18 297 var 18 302 var ASCL 0 9352 D
390. nation The relationship between the amplitude levels between signals can be observed by assigning the amplitude of the input signal of the specified channel on the horizontal axis X axis and the amplitude level of another input signal signal that has the display turned ON on the vertical axis Y axis Simultaneous observation of an X Y waveform and a normal T Y waveform waveform display using time axis and amplitude level X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later Selecting the display format Select the X Y display format from the following list of choices e X Y Only the X Y waveform is displayed e Numeric X Y The numerical data and X Y waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the numerical display see chapter 8 Wave xX Y The waveform normal T Y waveform and X Y waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the waveform display see sections 9 1 to 9 8 Assigning the X axis horizontal axis and Y axis vertical axis X axis Specify any waveform trace CH1 to CH8 Math1 and Math2 Y axis Specify any waveform trace other than the one specified for the X axis The display of the waveform specified must be turned ON Setting the display range of the X Y waveform The display range during the normal measurement mode when the time base is set to interna
391. nction soft key to display the measurement function selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the measurement function Press the SELECT key The symbol of the selected measurement function and the bar graph are displayed Selecting the element 12 13 14 End order Press the Element soft key to display the element selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the element from Element1 to Element4 Press the SELECT key The symbol of the selected element and the bar graph are displayed Bar Item No Bar Item No 1 1 ha Se lect M Function M Function U select Element Element 1 Element 2 f Bar Markeri Elenent 3 Bar Marker2 x 9 order Element 4 Start Order 8 lo End Order End Order a 9 UUOUU0U UUUBUUL IM 253710 01E 9 29 Aejdsiq wiojonem el 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data Setting the marker position 15 Press the Bar Marker1 Bar Marker2x soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Bar Marker1 Bar Marker2x or both Bar Marker1 and Bar Marker2x 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the marker position in terms of harmonic orders Setting the bar graph display range Setting the beginning harmonic order of the bar graph 17 Press the Start Order End Order soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Start Order 18 Turn the jog shuttle to set t
392. nd capacitor C connected in series Xs k Reactance observed by the kth order harmonic signal of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Rp k Resistance observed by the kth order harmonic signal of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in parallel Xp k Reactance observed by the kth order harmonic signal of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in parallel Harmonic distortion factor Uhdf k The ratio of the harmonic voltage U k to U 1 or U expressed as a percentage Ihdf k The ratio of the harmonic current I k to I 1 or expressed as a percentage Phdf k The ratio of the active power P k of the harmonic signal to P 1 or P expressed as a percentage Total harmonic distortion Uthd The ratio of the total harmonic voltage to U 1 or U expressed as a percentage Ithd The ratio of the total harmonic current to I 1 or expressed as a percentage Pthd The ratio of the active power of the total harmonic signal to P 1 or P expressed as a percentage Telephone harmonic Uthf Telephone harmonic factor of voltage Ithf Telephone harmonic factor of current factor Applicable standard IEC34 1 1996 Telephone influence Utif Telephone influence factor of voltage Itif Telephone influence factor of current factor Applicable standard IEEE Std 100 1996 Harmonic voltage f
393. nd the trigger edge trigger is generated to update the displayed waveform Normal Sets the trigger mode to normal mode The display is updated when a trigger occurs Ifa trigger does not occur the display is not updated HF Auto Sets the trigger mode to HF auto The output of the zero crossing detector of the trigger source is used to detect the trigger condition Because the trigger occurs when the trigger source crosses the center level of the amplitude of the trigger source with a hysteresis of approx 3 5 of the measurement range and the display is updated the trigger level setting see section 7 3 is void The behavior with respect to the timeout period is the same as in the auto mode When the zero crossing filter is set the trigger becomes less susceptive to harmonic noise and unexpected triggers are prevented from occurring The PZ4000 may not operate properly when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot and the trigger source is set to CH7 or CH8 HF Normal Sets the trigger mode to HF normal The method in which the trigger is activated is the same as in the HF auto mode The behavior with respect to the timeout period is the same as in the normal mode The PZ4000 may not operate properly when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot and the trigger source is set to CH7 or CH8 Note When the trigger mode is AT Level edge trigger is the only trigger type
394. neously This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later suoljun Vector display when the wiring method is 3P4W three phase four wire U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are common mode voltages 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents Vector display when the wiring method is 3V3A three voltage three current U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are line voltages 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents 1 11 1 By moving the vectors U1 1 U2 1 U3 1 and U3 1 without changing their orientations so that the starting points of vectors are all at the origin the phase relationship can be observed in the same 6U3 U1 fashion as the three phase four wire method U1 U3 The PZ4000 does not provide a function for moving the vectors 13 1 The phase difference between the line voltages can be determined from the phase difference measurement functions U1 U2 and oU1 U3 12 1 U1 U2 This is the measurement function 6U1 U2 12 1 U2 U3 U1 U3 pU1 U2 180 oU3 U1 oU1 U3 Vector display when the wiring method is 3P3W three phase three wire U1 1 U2 1 and U3 1 are line voltages 11 1 12 1 and 13 1 are line currents However U3 1 and 13 1 are not actually measured for the three phase three wire method The vectors are displayed through computation IM 253710 01E 1 31 1 6 Waveform Display Bar Graph Display of the Harmonic Data For procedures see sectio
395. nfigured using the wiring method in the table If elements 2 and 3 or elements 3 and 4 are configured using the wiring method 1P3W or 3P3W in the table replace element numbers 1 and 2 in the equation with 2 and 3 or 3 and 4 respectively If elements 2 3 and 4 are configured using the wiring method 3V3A or 3P3W in the table replace 1 2 and 3 in the equation with 2 3 and 4 Measurement Equation Function Single phase Three phase Three voltage Three voltage Function three wire system three wire system three current system four wire system 1P3W 3P3W 3V3A 3P4W For the normal measurement mode Urms Urms1 Urms2 2 Urms1 Urms2 Urmss3 3 Umnz Umn1 Umn2 2 Umn1 Umn2 Umn3 3 U V Udc Udc1 Udc2 2 Udc1 Udc2 Udc3 3 Uac Uac1 Uac2 2 Uac1 Uac2 Uac3 3 For the harmonic measurement mode Ux U1 U2 2 U1 U2 U3 3 For the normal measurement mode Irms gt Irms1 Irms2 2 Irms1 Irms2 Irms3 3 Imn Imn1 Imn2 2 Imn1 Imn2 Imn3 3 l A Idc Idc1 Ide2 2 Idc1 Idc2 Idc3 3 lac lac1 lac2 2 lac1 lac2 lac3 3 For the harmonic measurement mode Ix 11 12 2 11 12 13 3 Px W P1 P2 P1 P2 P3 For the normal measurement mode S1 S2 NB s1 S2 V3 is S2 S3 S1 S2 S3 SZ VA 2 3 For the harmonic measurement mode af
396. ng Select the attenuation constant from 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 Phase difference display Select whether to display using lead and lag format or 360 format Equation for the distortion factor Set the denominator of the equation to the total waveform or fundamental waveform Corrected Power Correction of active power as defined by the applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 and IEC76 1 1993 Re computing of numerical data The measurement computation region can be reset and the measurement function and equation can be recomputed except for averaging Waveform Analysis Item Specification Waveform computation region Set the region for waveform computation using the cursor Set up to 100 k words Waveform computation Computes the waveforms of equations up to two equations that are created by combining the waveform symbols and operators Display scaling Set and display the upper and lower limits of the computed waveform Auto configuration is possible FFT Determines and displays the power spectrum using fast Fourier Transform Select the number of computation points from 1000 2000 and 10000 Cursor measurement Place markers horizontal and vertical cursors on the waveform and measure the values at those points The accuracy of one sampled data point is 2 of range designed value and does not include sampling resolution and analog bandwidth error
397. ng on the Waveform Explanation Zooming Vertically The displayed waveform of each channel can be expanded or reduced Select the zoom factor from the following choices 0 1 0 2 0 25 0 4 0 5 0 75 0 8 1 1 14 1 25 1 33 1 41 1 5 1 6 1 77 2 2 28 2 66 2 83 3 2 3 54 4 5 8 10 12 5 16 20 25 40 50 100 Zooming Horizontally All selected waveforms can be expanded horizontally time axis using two types of zoom factors Selecting the type of zoom display The Main waveform that is not zoomed and the zoomed waveforms Z1 and Z2 waveforms can be displayed in the following combinations e Main Displays only the Main waveform that is not zoomed e Main amp Z1 Displays the Main waveform in the top section and the zoomed version of the waveform inside zoom box Z1 in the lower section Z1 Only Displays only the zoomed version of the waveform inside zoom box Z1 Main amp Z1 amp Z2 Displays the Main waveform in the top section Displays the zoomed versions of the waveforms inside zoom boxes Z1 and Z2 in the lower left and lower right sections respectively Main amp Z2 Displays the Main waveform in the top section and the zoomed version of the waveform inside zoom box Z2 in the lower section Z2 Only Displays only the zoomed version of the waveform inside zoom box Z2 Z1 amp Z2 Displays the zoomed versions of the waveforms inside zoom boxes Z1 and Z2 in the top and bottom sections respectively lt Z1
398. nge All data points are greater than 15 625 Hz and less than 312 5 Hz within the observation time or There is at least one data point that is less than or equal to 15 625 Hz and another point that is greater than or equal to 312 5 kHz within the observation time 1 40Hz Stepping up There is at least one data point that is greater than or equal to 19 53125 Hz within the observation time No change All data points are less than 19 53125 Hz within the observation time Note When a frequency below the lower limit of each frequency input range 16 Hz of range 16 800Hz for example is input may be displayed During cursor measurement zero may be displayed When a signal with a frequency higher than the frequency input range is input the frequency cannot be measured correctly due to aliasing see section 1 6 This may cause erroneous operation to go undetected Consequently the measurement functions related to the revolution sensor signal may not be determined correctly Always input a signal within the selected frequency input range IM 253710 01E 15 7 Sa NpoW 100 0 B Qeoij ddy uolOUNY uonenjerg 1010 15 2 Setting the Input Range of Revolution Sensor and Torque Meter Signals Selecting the input range of the torque meter signal Two types of range settings are available fixed range and auto range Fixed range Select from the following input ranges 50Vpk 20Vpk 10Vpk 5Vpk 2Vpk and 1Vpk
399. nput signal is a sinusoid and its rms value is between 55 and 70 of the measurement range The reading error is doubled when the input signal is a DC signal and the value is between 100 and 55 or 55 to 100 of the measurement range Temperature coefficient Add 0 01 of the reading C in the range from 5 to 20 C or 26 to 40 C However only when the input signal is 10 kHz or less Other Designed value for frequencies of 10 Hz or less and 1 MHz or more in the above table Only applicable for current sensor input and voltage input of 1 MHz or more Add designed value 1 10th of the reading error x 5 number of cycles x 10 k number of words of sampled data of reading when the input signal contains less than 5 cycles and there are less than 10 k words of sampled data For accuracy of cursor measurements see Cursor Measurement in section 17 5 Functions 17 22 IM 253710 01E 17 16 Power Measurement Module 253752 Item Specification Power accuracy Conditions Within 3 months after calibration Standard operating conditions Power factor 1 Input signal Sine wave Common mode voltage 0 V Input signal is 5 cycles or less and there are at least 10 k words of sampled data within the observation time DC accuracy is NULL function ON and line filter ON f is the frequency Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC 2 of rea
400. ns becdneevheteweuneeedin dee IM 253710 01E x 7 Contents Chapter 6 Setting the Time Axis 6 1 Setting the Observation Time ceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeaeesieeseaeesieeeeeeseeeee 6 1 6 2 Selecting the Record Length for Acquiring Data ecceeceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeaes 6 3 A 6 3 Selecting the Time Base cc cceccceceececeeceseeeeceeeeeeeeaeceecaeceseceeeeaeeeesaeseaecaeseseeereeaeeereeas 6 5 The following section applies when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement A 6 4 Selecting the PLL Source for Harmonic Measurement cc cceceeeeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeteereees 6 7 Chapter 7 Setting the Trigger 7 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode 0 ceecesceseseeseeeeneeseeeeeaeeeseeseaeesaeeseaeeeeeseneeseaeseaeeseaeeneeeteaeen 7 1 A 7 2 Selecting the Trigger Source cecceeceescescceceeeceseeeeceaeeeeecaeseaeceeecaeseeeeaeseeesaeeeaeeareeeeeseas 7 3 7 3 Setting the Edge Trigger eeceseeeeeseeceeeeeneeeseeeeaeeeeeeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeteeseaeeteaeeeaeenaas 7 6 7 4 Setting the Window Trigger cceeceescceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeaeeeaeecaaeseaeeesaeeeseeseaeesseeseaeeeaeeteas 7 8 7 5 Setting the Trigger POSION arussnisn ieena ee tei ellen inks 7 11 6 Setting the Trigger Delayiiv sssi isoissa eoa onnea ASAE ea va ease dees eee tae 7 13 Chapter 8 Numerical Display 8 1 Selecting the Number of Displayed Digits 0 0 0 0
401. nspection issues such as how to perform self tests and replace power fuses Chapter 17 Specifications Describes the specifications of the main unit and of the input module in tables Appendix Describes the relationship between the observation time sampling rate and record length how to determine the measurement function and delta computation and the ASCII header file format Gives a list of initial settings Index Alphabetic and Symbol index of contents viii IM 253710 01E How to Use this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Unit k Denotes 1000 Example 15 kg 100 kS s K Denotes 1024 Example 720 KB Storage capacity of floppy disks Displayed characters Alphanumeric characters enclosed with refer to characters or setting values that are displayed on the screen SHIFT operation key means that the SHIFT key should be pressed so that the indicator on the top left of the SHIFT key lights followed by the pressing of the operation key The menu written below the pressed operation key is displayed Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual instrument and the operator must refer to the User s Manual The symbol is used in the User s Manual to indicate the reference WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent injury or death to the user Affixed to the instrument Indicates danger to personnel or CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observ
402. nstructions that are included with the rack mount kit 1 Remove the handle on each side of the instrument 2 Remove the four feet on the bottom of the instrument 3 Remove the plastic revet and the four seals covering the rack mount attachment holes on both sides of the instrument near the front 4 Places seals over the feet and handle attachment holes Attach the rack mount kit 6 Mount the instrument on the rack a Note _ When rack mounting the instrument allow at least 20 mm of space around the vent holes to prevent internal overheating Make sure to have adequate support for the bottom of the instrument However do not block the vent holes in the process IM 253710 01E 3 3 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 3 Installing the Input Module A WARNING To prevent shock and damage to the instrument when installing or removing input modules turn OFF the power supply of the circuit under measurement turn OFF the power switch of the instrument and remove all measurement cables from all input modules To prevent shock degradation of the measurement accuracy due to internal heating and electromagnetic interference attach cover plates on the slots that do not have input modules installed If the input module comes out of the slot while the instrument is in use it can cause electric shock or damage the instrument and input module Tighten the screws four locations top and bottom that came with
403. nting to the Built in Printer Option 6 7 8 Printing Display the screen that you wish to print Press the START STOP key to stop the data acquisition Check that the START STOP indicator is OFF Press the COPY key to print the screen image Canceling the printing operation Press the Abort soft key in the Copy setting menu Copy Copy to Printer Comment Paper Feed HL Abort BOUL Outputting numerical data lists applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later 4 5 4 Print Data List Exec Outputting the list Press the START STOP key to stop the data acquisition Check that the indicator above the START STOP key is turned OFF Press the Print Data List Exec soft key to output the numerical data list Copy Copy to Printer Comment Paper Feed 6 EE Abort NUUUU0U Canceling the output operation Press the Abort soft key in the Copy setting menu 13 6 IM 253710 01E 13 2 Printing to the Built in Printer Option Explanation Outputting screen image data Setting comment The comments appear at the bottom of the screen The comments are also output as screen image data Number and types of characters that can be used Item Number of characters Characters that can be used Comment 0 to 25 characters All characters including spaces Outputting numerical data list Ou
404. ntry box it is overwritten with the recalled equation 3 Up to five equations can be stored Beyond five for all successive equations the oldest equation is cleared The keyboard that is displayed when creating The window displaying the equation equations for user defined functions that is stored in the memory ABCDEFGH l ABCDEFGH IBCDEFGH The keyboard that is displayed when creating i A The key that is selected equations for waveform computations when displaying the above window 4 2 IM 253710 01E 4 2 Initializing the Settings Procedure Explanation ONFIGURATION TAIGO SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER 70 DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy mui ca MENU UOU00UE SINGLE Sight start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME VOLTAGE CURRENT i e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key Note you save the setup parameters see section 12 5 before initialization Confirm whether or not it is okay to initialize the settings before actually carrying out the initialization You cannot restore the settings after they are initialized We recommend that 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the Initialize soft key Setup g Mode Norma1 M Wiring
405. o Printer x Comment Paper Feed Abort cE JUUUUU00 Printer Centro File Comment Paper Feed P E Press the SHIFT COPY MENU to display the Copy setting menu Press the Copy to soft key to display the output medium selection menu Press the File soft key Copy q Copy to File File List M Fornat TIFF lj Color OFF File Name Abort pU Selecting the destination medium and directory 4 Press the File List soft key to display the File List dialog box 5 The procedures are the same as Selecting the source medium and Selecting the source directory in section 12 5 6 Press the ESC key to close the File List dialog box File List ath FDS path FDO File Name Size Date Attribute a FD J TA_060 TIF 38574 1999 03 02 16 31 RW IM 253710 01E 13 11 ejyeq afew use19S Bulyyndjno g 13 4 Saving Screen Images to Floppy Disk and SCSI Device Selecting the data format 7 Press the Format soft key to display the data format selection menu 8 Press one of the keys from TIFF to Post Script to select the data format If you select TIFF or BMP go to step 9 If you select Post Script go to step 11 Selecting color output This step applies if TIFF or BMP was selected in step 8 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select from Color to OFF If you
406. o and power coefficient in the range from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 when applying the output from an external current sensor PT or CT to the instrument Time base External clock can be selected See 17 3 Time Axis for the specifications of the external clock Zero level compensation NULL Compensates the zero level Frequency Measurement Item Specification Method Reciprocal method Measured item Normal measurement mode Voltage and current of all power measurement modules that are installed Harmonic measurement mode Voltage or current that is selected for the PLL source Display resolution 99999 Max display 2 5000 MHz Accuracy 0 1 of the reading 1 digit When the input signal is a sinusoid that has an observation time of 2 ms or more 10 Hz lt f lt 10 kHz f is the frequency and an input level that is greater than or equal to 15 of the measurement range there are at least 5 periods within the observation time and the frequency of the signal being measured is less than or equal to 1 2 5 of the sampling rate Filter for measuring frequency Zero crossing filter 17 6 IM 253710 01E 17 5 Functions Trigger Item Specification Edge trigger Trigger mode Select from OFF auto auto level normal HF auto and HF normal Trigger source Select from CH1 to CH8 and Ext external trigger input Trigger level When the tri
407. o the bottom 100 0 of the screen The H cursor position can be set in steps of 0 1 To move the two cursors while keeping the distance between them constant the jog shuttle must be set to control both cursors Movement range of the V cursor When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the V cursor can be moved in the range from 0 s the left end of the screen to the observation time the right end of the screen When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the V cursor can be moved in the range defined by the number of data points in the record length For example if the record length is 100 k words then the range is from data point 0 the left end of the screen to data point 100 k the right end of the screen When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the V cursor can be set in steps of observation time display record length When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the V cursor can be set in steps of one data point To move the two cursors while keeping the distance between them constant the jog shuttle must be set to control both cursors 11 18 IM 253710 01E 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor Making the marker jump inside the main or zoom waveform display frame When displaying the zoomed waveform or when the display record length is shorter than the record l
408. o the item under measurement or control unit vii How to Use this Manual Structure of the Manual This User s Manual consists of the following 16 chapters an appendix and an index Chapter 1 Functions Describes the functions of the instrument Operating procedures are not given in this chapter However reading this chapter will help you understand the operating procedures given in the chapters that follow Chapter 2 Names and Uses of Parts Describes the names and uses of each part of the instrument Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements Describes precautions for the use of the instrument how to install the instrument how to install the input module how to connect the power supply how to wire measurement circuits how to turn ON OFF the power switch and other preparations before starting measurements Chapter 4 Common Operations Describes common operations and functions of the instrument such as how to enter numerical values and strings initialize settings start stop the measurement acquisition perform zero level compensation and the NULL function Chapter 5 Setting the Measurement Mode and Range Describes how to set the voltage current input conditions or the handling of the input signal such as the measurement mode select normal harmonics the wiring system the measurement range and filter Chapter 6 Setting the Time Axis Describes how to set the input conditions for the time axis such as th
409. ocedures are the same as Setting the file name and comment in section 12 5 Saving the file 17 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the saving operation 18 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the saving operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec File List Save Menu Path FDS Space 895488 byte File Name SIZE Tate Attribute a FD6 1 File Nane NUM Property Filter Kter A11 Save Exec Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and Viewing the properties in section 12 5 IM 253710 01E 12 25 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 7 Saving Numerical Data Explanation CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the mark is blinking It can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the data type file extension data size Select the data type from the following list of choices The file extension is automatically attached to the file name e ASCII The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in ASCII format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC
410. ods available for setting the measurement computation period One method can only be used in the normal measurement mode The other method can be used both in the normal measurement and harmonic measurement modes CCONFIGURATION D SETUP INPUT WEASURE i ACG DISPLAY MATH cursor zoom FILE MISC HELP LOCA SHIFT COPY NULL CAL MENU z z s 1 2 z 2JS int FILTER FILTER SINGLE SHELE start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME cm1 cna cw e of it TE SSS SS e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key WUUUUOUE CH7 VOLTAGE g S Select a display format to display the waveforms For the procedures see section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Check that Format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave X Y X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Wave Setting the period using zero crossing points Set the measurement mode to normal measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 3 Press the SETUP key to display t
411. of heat Take note of the following points Storage precautions The paper starts changing color at around 70 C It is affected by heat humidity light and chemicals regardless of whether the paper has been used of not Note the following points Store the paper in a cool dry and dark place After opening the package use it quickly If the paper is left in contact for long periods of time with plastic film such as a vinyl chloride film or Scotch tape containing plasticizers the paper will lose some of its ability to reproduce color As a result for example if you are going to store the paper in a folder use a folder made of polypropylene When using glue on the paper do not use a glue containing organic solvents such as alcohol or ether as they will change the color of the paper For prolonged storage we suggest you copy the roll chart Due to the characteristics of the thermal sensitive paper the recording section may lose color over time Precautions on use Use only rolls of paper provided by YOKOGAWA Touching the paper with sweaty hands can leave finger print marks or blur the printing Rubbing the surface with a hard object can cause the paper to change color due to the heat caused by friction If chemicals oil or other liquids come in contact with the paper the paper may change color or the printing may fade IM 253710 01E 13 1 ejyeq abew uses9s Gulyndjno g 13 1 Installing
412. of the instantaneous values i over one period in short rms the symbol rms is generally used to denote the effective value IM 253710 01E App 25 i xipueddy Appendix 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit For the mean value since taking the average over one period of a sine wave results in zero the mean is determined using the absolute value over one period of the signal As with the rms value if the mean value of the current of the instantaneous value i Imsinat is expressed as Imn then 27 1 f 2 Imn Mean over one period of i i dot Im 2T 5 T This relationship is the same for the voltage of the sine wave The maximum value rms value and mean value of an AC sine wave are related in the following way These values are used to calculate the crest factor and the form factor which are used to determine the trend of an AC signal Maximum value Crest factor Rms value Rms value Form factor Mean value App 26 IM 253710 01E Appendix 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Vector Display of an AC signal In general the instantaneous values of voltage and current are expressed by the following equations Voltage u Umsinat Current i Imsin at 6 The time offset of the voltage and current is called the phase difference and 6 is called the phase angle This time offset is m
413. om an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the other current input terminals or current sensor terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When using the external potential transformer PT or current transformer CT make sure it has enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage U being measured 2U 1000 V recommended Also make sure that the secondary side of the CT does not become an open circuit while the power is being applied Otherwise high voltage will appear at the secondary side of the CT making it extremely dangerous When using an external current sensor make sure to use a sensor that comes in a case The conductive parts and the case should be insulated and the sensor should have enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage being measured Using a bare sensor is dangerous because you might accidentally come in contact with it When using a shunt type current sensor as an external current sensor turn OFF the circuit under measurement If power is being applied the voltage of the circuit under measurement will be applied to the shunt type current sensor making it dangerous 3 6 IM 253710 01E 3 4 Wiring Precautions When
414. om the active power measured by the power measurement module and the motor output determined in section 15 7 the PZ4000 can compute the motor efficiency ratio of the motor output versus the power consumption by the motor and total efficiency ratio of the motor output versus the power consumption by the motor as well as the converter through which power is fed to the motor Computation examples are indicated below When the Motor Input Is a Three Phase Four Wire System 3P4W Wire see chapter 3 the motor input to elements 1 2 and 3 Select 3P4W for the wiring method see sections 3 7 and 5 2 Motor efficiency nmA Mot r g tput W x 100 XA W Motor output derived in section 15 7 XA P1 P2 P3 Power consumption by the motor il Motor output When the Converter Input and Motor Input Are Both Single Phase Two Wire Systems 1P2W Wire the converter input to element 1 and the motor input to element 2 Select 1 P2W 1P2W for the wiring method Motor output W Motor efficiency nmB x 100 y nmB SBW Total efficiency nmA Motor output W x 100 ZA W Motor output derived in section 15 7 XA P1 IB P2 Converter g Motor output Power consumption Power consumption by the motor and by the motor converter When the Converter Input Is a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W and the Motor Input Is a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W Wire the converter input to element 1 and th
415. omes shorter than the record length During the harmonic measurement mode The record length can be selected as 100 k 1 M option or 4 M option words For the harmonic measurement mode the display record length and record length are always equal IM 253710 01E 1 15 1 3 Acquiring Data Voltage and Current Signals Dividing the record length For procedures see section 6 2 The acquisition memory can be divided in half so that it appears as though there are two memories The data can be acquired to each memory separately When there is only one acquisition memory the acquisition memory is not divided and the data acquisition is aborted the sampled data are discarded The numerical data are not measured computed or displayed and the waveform is also not displayed If the operation is stopped normally the acquisition stops after acquiring the display record length of sampled data In this case the numerical data can be measured computed and displayed and the waveform can also be displayed If the acquisition memory is divided into two memories and the data are acquired alternately to those two memories then even when the data acquisition to one memory is aborted the previously sampled data remain in the other memory Therefore the numerical data can be measured computed and displayed and the waveform can be displayed based on those data The operation is the same when the acquisition is stopped normally The acqui
416. on Note You cannot feed the paper while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON 13 4 IM 253710 01E 13 2 Printing to the Built in Printer Option ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL COPY NULL CAL MENU ELEMENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER SINGLER SINGLER START STOP ABORT J CONFIGURATION D TAIG D qy SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER EST SS 3 OBSERVATION TIME cH2 cH4 cH6 cH8 current SS J e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key O00 Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT COPY MENU to display the Copy setting menu 2 Press the Copy to soft key to display the output medium selection menu 3 Press the Printer soft key Outputting screen image data Setting comment 4 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard appears 5 Use the keyboard to enter a comment For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Printer Centro Copy K Copy to Copy K Copy to Printer Printer File Comment Paper Feed Abort Comment Paper Feed Abort Comment Paper Feed Abort BUQUULEL PULUULEL E E E IM 253710 01E 13 5 ejyeq afew u ros Buiyndy no g 13 2 Pri
417. on The maximum number of displayed digits highest display resolution for the various items such as voltage current active power apparent power reactive power and power factor can be selected 5dgts Display resolution of 99999 6dgts Display resolution of 999999 Note The actual number of displayed digits may sometimes be smaller than the specified number depending on the combinations of the voltage and current ranges or the carry over operation The highest display resolution for frequency phase difference phase angle cursor measurement and pk is as follows regardless of the number of displayed digits that is selected Frequency 99999 Phase difference phase angle 360 00 Cursor measurement 99999 pk 99999 IM 253710 01E 8 1 Aejdsiq jeouewnyn e 8 2 Displaying Normal Measurement Data For a functional description see section 1 5 This section applies when the measurement mode is set to normal measurement CONFIGURATION TRIG D SETUP INPUT WEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE SHIFT COPY NULL CAL MENU FILTER y SINGLE i STAAF START STOP ABORT UUUUUUUE cH1 cH3 cH5 cn7 L iE e VOLTAGE cH2 cna cue CH8 cuRRENT SSH ey Jy e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key
418. onal accessory replacement part csecseccssneseeseesesersceseesesereeseesseesees order under analysis il replacement period eccsceeeseeseccesecseneeeeeseeneereseeesees output command type external printer ss 13 10 resetting displayed item OWN ID cecccceccccccceccecceccescecceccecceceesescessestestectatistesteseestesteseees 12 3 resetting numerical display seseessseseerseerrerrerrrereerrnens resetting order of the displayed item FESOIULION saisai firari teipe a itera eana P revolution sensor signal input channel PiP COmMpreSSiONs aaraa NNa aan Sensor signal Ype sreeseetterceis Page Down Scroll Exec Y 6 E AA E A E AST 9 Kiel at 1a Oaeeseecencrrortee ereetryerirreeterrercer tr corer erer reer rrercr aE ei eee A EEE A EE A O RA MOC vate oe asserere ELEA A iA i ae A ec ROM version rotary knob ate paper roll parallel circuit rotating SPCC neces sceccrsercessceneensienceseevecersrenieieastevernvecteveds ne RS 232 apaan n uea ee Eee EE eaten PAMITION Sinior ena ren se aeae hehe PRG Form la ssip aaier eire S parod aaa ae oaa a aa E a E EO 10 5 S phase difference eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeeee 1 35 10 21 photo solaio a 52sec nena eee AE a T 1 4 S Formula DINGO AE EA EE E E E E 12 2 sampled data sampling Pate efan irapis Scale Value oo eeceeeseceeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeseeeeatens scaling s 1 13 5 20 scaling FACTON skena raana ia Te
419. onnection are computed from the data of a delta connection delta star transformation AU 1 AUrms1 AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 AU2 AUrms2 AUmn2 AUdc2 AUac2 AU3 AUrms3 AUmn3 AUdc3 AUac3 Al4 Alrms4 Almn4 Aldc4 Alac4 Star gt Delta Using the data from a three phase four wire system the various data of a delta connection are computed from the data of a star connection start delta transformation AU AU AU 1 AUrms1 AUmn1 AUdc1 AUac1 2 AUrms2 AUmn2 AUdc2 AUac2 3 AUrms3 AUmn3 AUdc3 AUac3 Al4 Alrms4 Almn4 Aldc4 Alac4 Note If the sampled data used in the computation do not exist for example when the module is not installed the sampled data are considered to be 0 s for the computation It is recommended that the measurement range and scaling PT CT ratio and coefficients of the elements that are being computed delta computation be set the same as much as possible Using a different measurement range or scaling causes the measurement resolution of the sampled data to be different In effect the computation result will have errors The type of delta computation can be selected when the data acquisition is stopped and the various data can be recomputed For details see section 10 1 The number that is attached to the measurement function symbol of the delta computation has no relation to the element number For example if i1 i2 is selected from the delta computation
420. ons contain special keys See the Note on the next page Operating the keyboard 1 Turn the jog shuttle to select the character to be entered 2 Pressing the SELECT key enters the character in the entry area If there are strings already in the entry area as with the date and time use the arrow keys to select the entry position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters 4 After entering all the characters select ENT on the keyboard and press the SELECT key The string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears Save Entry box INSERT indicator FIFA EICIES Fa IE ARANAN e MERRE PE LEEA CDe IM 253710 01E suoneiedg uowwog a 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Keys other than the character keys DEL or BS Deletes the character before the entry position INS Switches the insert overwrite mode During the insert mode the INSERT indicator on the keyboard lights When a new character is entered in the insert mode the new character is placed at the entry position and all following characters are moved forward CLR Clears all displayed characters CAPS Switches between upper case and lower case SPACE Enters a space ENT Confirms the displayed characters Number of characters and types that can be used Item Number of Characters Characters that can be Used Date time Specified number 0 to 9 Filename 1 to 8 characters 0to 9 Ato Z
421. ontaining an aliased signal does not represent data that are actually measured IM 253710 01E sishjeuy WAOJOAe MA Ey 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor For a functional description see section 1 8 CONFIGURATION O TRIG D ACQ men rc mara ferso zoon REMOTE SHIFT coor Tro on MENU FILTER i SINGLE INAFE START STOP 4 ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g y 0000000 ont cna cns on A CO CC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key VOLTAGE amp A CURRENT CH8 e Procedure 1 Press the CURSOR key to display the Cursor setting menu Press the Type soft key to display the cursor type selection menu 3 Press one of the soft keys from Marker to H amp V to select the cursor type If you selected Marker go to step 4 on page 11 11 If you selected Horizontal go to step 4 on page 11 13 If you selected Vertical go to step 4 on page 11 14 If you selected H amp V go to step 4 on page 11 15 Cursor H Type OFF Marker Horizontal Vertical 11 10 IM 253710 01E 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor When Marker is Selected W Se fect Cursor Type Marker Cursori Trace Cursorg Trace ey Cursi 9 Cursorz x Jump Type x to Main
422. operators The resultant waveform of the equation can be displayed Two types of equations can be created using the operands C1 through C8 that correspond to CH1 through CH8 Up to 16 operands can be used in one equation The starting and ending points can be specified and the computation is performed over that region The operators are ABS absolute value SQR square SQRT square root LOG logarithm LOG10 common logarithm EXP exponent NEG minus sign DIF differentiation applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later TINTG TREND AVG SSP SLIP PM are available as special functions TINTG is counted as two operands TINTG The sampled data are integrated according to the following equation Xn Xn dn xt Xn nth display data The first display data x1 is di x t Xn 1 n 1th display data that has been integrated dn nth sampled data t sampling period inverse of the sampling rate When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic t 1 s TREND The instantaneous value sampled data of the measured signal can be computed in the same fashion as determining each measurement function for each cycle of the synchronized signal and the TREND waveforms of the following measurement functions can be displayed Measurement Function that Applicable Function Channel Symbol Placed Can Be Computed Inside the Parentheses True rms value and
423. or 15 1 attach the current input protective cover using the four screws provided M3 x 5 Element number Current input protective cover Tnfornat ion Mode 1 PZ4000 Versio 1 00 Information g xxnx Module Configuration aex GPIB RS232 Calibration Date Status Elementi 253752 26A Shunt 99 02 25 11 52 60 OK Element2 253752 20A Shunt 99 02 25 11 52 00 OK Elenent3 253752 20A Shunt 99 02 25 11 52 00 OK Element4 253752 Z20A Shunt 99 62 25 11 52 60 OK SCSI ID seeeccoeoe Pt LOTS ooseeesesesees ACQ Memory 4MWord CH Printer Yes SCSI No Ho Date Time config Link Date 99 02 25 Thu 11 39 Selftest Removal Procedure 1 Check that the power on the measurement circuit is turned OFF and remove the current input protective cover Remove all measurement cables from the input modules Check that the power switch is turned OFF on the instrument Loosen the four screws that secure the input module Hold the grip on the top and bottom of the module and pull the module out of the slot Attach a cover plate onto the slot akon D IM 253710 01E 3 5 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 4 Wiring Precautions A To prevent electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions below Employ protective earth ground before connecting measurement cables When wiring the circuit under measurement turn OFF its power Wiring or removin
424. or Thus the current phase advances with respect to the voltage ot gt c U a j u E i App 32 IM 253710 01E Appendix 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit R L C series circuit The voltage when resistance Rs Q inductance L H and static capacitance C F are connected in series is expressed by the following equation U 4 Urs UL Uc IRs IXt IXc lal Rs XL Xc Iy Rs Xs jo peta S 4 Rs Xs Rs i I Rs L Cc VV le Urs UL Uc U The relationships between resistance Rs reactance Xs and impedance Z are expressed as follows Xs XL Xc Z VR Xs R L C parallel circuit The current when resistance Rp Q inductance L H and static capacitance C F are connected in parallel is expressed by the following equation U U U 2 le oes N IRe IL Ic E X Xo a ay P hay UN Re x0 7 Xe UY Pe aed IRPXP _ RP 5 tan Xe Rp XP Cc Sj U IL L EANN IRe RP M A U The relationship between resistance Rp reactance Xp and impedance Z are expressed as follows _ _XiXc Xc XL p 2 Z RPXP x IM 253710 01E App 33 DOM ote os cosds Sh codshanaenextti E T uti i iees 12 12 AGC CIRCUIT sony errsennencnecegentie ees App 25 AG COMPONEN ciais riae eee aA ee Mines 1 6 AG power psina pae e apai an ta
425. or computed over the specified period of the sampled data as described later in Measurement Computation Period For information on the sampled data see section 1 3 Acquiring Data Voltage and Current Signals Measurement function types of numerical data Measurement function on each power measurement module The following 29 types of numerical data can be determined For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 2 U voltage Urms Umn Udc Uac current Irms Imn Idc lac P active power S apparent power Q reactive power power factor phase difference fU fl frequency of voltage current U pk U pk maximum minimum values of voltage I pk l pk maximum minimum values of current CfU Cfl crest factor of voltage current FfU Ffl form factor of voltage current Z impedance of the load circuit Rs Xs resistance reactance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Rp Xp resistance reactance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in parallel Pc Corrected Power Measurement function of the average or sum of multiple measurement modules function The following 19 types of numerical data can be determined For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Appendix 2 Ux voltage average Urmsz Umnz Udc Uacz I current average Irmsx Imnx Idcx lac P
426. or each phase and to separate the input signal wires by less than 50 mm between each phase and neutral line Attach a ferrite core YOKOGAWA A1179MN on the cable near the terminal External trigger input terminal Use a 3D2W BNC cable Trigger output terminal Same as the above external trigger input terminal External clock input terminal Same as the above external trigger input terminal RS 232 connector Use an RS 232 shielded cable Centronics interface connector Use a shielded cable for the connection SCSI connector Use a SCSI shielded cable GPIB connector Use a GPIB shielded cable and attach a ferrite core YOKOGAWA A1179MN on the cable near the terminal Tests 1 Main terminal disturbance voltage EN55011 class A 2 Electromagnetic radiation disturbance EN55011 class A 3 Main terminal harmonic current emission EN61000 3 2 Immunity Complying standard EN50082 2 1995 apply for 253710 253751 253752 Cable requirement Same as the above cable requirement about emission Tests 1 Electrostatic discharge IEC1000 4 2 8 kV air discharge 4 kV contact discharge 2 EM field immunity IEC 1000 4 3 80 MHz to 1 GHz 10 V m 3 Electrical fast transient burst IEC 1000 4 4 2 kV AC line and voltage and current Input 4 HF conducted immunity IEC1000 4 6 0 15 to 80 MHz 10 Vrms 5 Power frequency magnetic field IEC1000 4 8 50 Hz 30 A m 1 Emission immunity and safety standards apply to
427. or module Model 253771 The signal applied to the revolution sensor signal input connector CH7 and the torque meter signal input connector CH8 of the motor module is normalized using the voltage divider and the operational amplifier OP AMP The voltage is then input to the A D converter and the zero crossing detector When the signal from the revolution sensor and torque meter is a DC voltage analog input The A D converter samples the voltage current input signals using the sampling clock provided by the internal circuit of the 253710 converting the signals to digital data The sampling rate is fixed to 5 MS s for the normal measurement mode and integer multiples of the PLL source for the harmonic measurement mode approx 80 k to 160 kS s The sampling operation can also be carried out using a clock signal that is applied to the external clock input connector When the signal from the revolution sensor is a pulse signal A count value is output in place of digital data of the A D converter The counter counts the signal that is output by the zero crossing detector from the rising edge to the falling edge one period using the reference clock internal clock and updates the count value PZ4000 main unit Model 253710 The output from the A D converter and the zero crossing detector of the module is passed to the main unit of the 253751 via the photo isolator Up to eight channels of sampled data and zero crossing data are recorded in
428. ord length is not divided When Rec Division of the Acq menu is set to OFF Record Length Observation 100 k 1 M Option 4 M Option Time Sampling Display Sampling Display Sampling Display Rate Record Rate Record Rate Record S s Length S s Length S s Length Word Word Word 1ks 100 100 k 1k 1M 4k 4M 400s 250 100 k 2 5k 1M 10k 4M 200 s 500 100 k 5k 1M 20k 4M 100s 1k 100 k 10k 1M 40 k 4M 40s 2 5k 100 k 25 k 1M 100 k 4M 20s 5k 100 k 50 k 1M 200 k 4M 10s 10k 100 k 100 k 1M 250 k 2 5M 4s 25k 100 k 250 k 1M 1M 4M 2s 50 k 100 k 500 k 1M 1 25 M 2 5M 1s 100 k 100 k 1M 1M 2 5M 2 5M 400 ms 250 k 100 k 2 5 M 1M 5M 2M 200 ms 500 k 100 k 5M 1M 5M 1M 100 ms 1M 100 k 5M 500 k 5M 500 k 40 ms 2 5 M 100 k 5M 200 k 5M 200 k 20 ms 5M 100 k 5M 100 k 5M 100 k 10 ms 5M 50 k 5M 50 k 5M 50 k 4 ms 5M 20 k 5M 20k 5M 20 k 2ms 5M 10k 5M 10k 5M 10k 1 ms 5M 5k 5M 5k 5M 5k 400 us 5M 2k 5M 2k 5M 2k 200 us 5M 1k 5M 1k 5M 1k 100 us 5M 500 5M 500 5M 500 40 us 5M 200 5M 200 5M 200 20 us 5M 100 5M 100 5M 100 10 us 5M 50 5M 50 5M 50 IM 253710 01E App 1 Ea xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Observation Time Sampling Rate and Record length When the record length is divided When Rec Division of the Acq menu is set to ON Reco
429. orders that are not analyzed are saved as NAN 0x7FC00000 When the measurement function is other than those indicated above and List as described in the next paragraph Only the measured values of the harmonics are saved Address Numerical Data 0000 Measured value Total 0004 Measured value DC component 0008 Fundamental component 1st order 000C 2nd order harmonic component L L 07D4 500th order harmonic component Note Even if the upper limit of the harmonic order under analysis is less than 500th order data up to 500th order are saved The data of the harmonic orders that are not analyzed are saved as NAN 0x7FC00000 App 22 IM 253710 01E Appendix 6 Float File Format When the measurement function is List For products with firmware version before 2 01 Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 IA B Address Numerical Data Address Numerical Data seeds Numerical Data Saares Numerical Data Address Numerical Data alae Numerical Data 0000 Urms 006C Urms 00D8 Urms 0144 Urms 01BO Urms 021C Urms 0004 Irms 0070 Irms OODC Irms 0148 Irms 01B4 Irms 0220 Irms 0008 P 0074 P OOEO P 014C P 01B8 P 0224 P 000C S 0078 S 00E4 S 0150 S 01BC S 0228 S 0010 Q 007C Q 00E8 Q 0154 Q 01C0 Q 022C Q 0014 0080 A OOEC 0158 01C4 0230 0018 0084 OOFO 015C 6 01C8 0234 6 001C fU 0088 fU OOF4 fU 0160 fU 01CC fU 0238 fU 0020 fl 008C fl OOF8 fl 0164 fi 01D0 fl 023C fl 0024 Uthd 0090 Uthd OOFC Uthd
430. ornat W Function Fornat Format 4 4 Nedia Info Media Info Format i FD Format Fornat 2HD 1 44M WJUUUUUUU Duuu Format Exec 12 6 IM 253710 01E 12 4 Formatting the Disk Selecting the format type for the SCSI device 6 Press the Format soft key to display the format selection menu Selecting the number of partitions 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number from 1 to 10 5 for products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 Selecting the format type 8 Press the Format Type soft key to select Normal or Quick Fornat Wd Function Format Wd Functio Format Format Media Info Media Info Tornat l Partition Format 1 Format Type formal Quick Format Exec Executing and Canceling the format operation 9 Press the Format Exec soft key An Alert dialog box is displayed 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel 11 Selecting OK and pressing the SELECT key executes the format operation Selecting Cancel and pressing the SELECT key will not format the medium Format W Function Format Media Info Really Format FD Format FDO will be formatted by ZHD 1 44M Format OK Cancel 2HD 1 44M WJUUUUUUU Format Exec aN Viewing the information about the medium 6 Press the Media Info soft key to display the informa
431. ot affect XA and XB 1P2W 1P3W XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 XB Displays the numerical data when elements 2 and 3 are combined into a 1P3W system 1P2W 3P3W XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 XB Displays the numerical data when elements 2 and 3 are combined into a 3P3W system 1P3W 1P2W ZA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 1P3W system XB Displays the numerical data of element 3 3P3W 1P2W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 3P3W system XB Displays the numerical data of element 3 3V3A ZA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 2 and 3 are combined into a 3V3A system XB No numerical data 3P4W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 2 and 3 are combined into a 3P4W system XB No numerical data IM 253710 01E obuey pue spo Jusweinseay oy bumas eo 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method When the power measurement modules are installed in element number 1 2 3 and 4 slots Selectable Wiring Method A B Numerical Data of the Function 1P2W 1P2W XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 XB Displays the numerical data of element 2 Elements 3 and 4 are also handled as 1P2W They do not affect XA and XB 1P2W 1P3W XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 2B Displays the numerical data when elements
432. otal is a value determined according to the equation given in Appendix 2 from the fundamental signal 1st order and all harmonic components 2nd to the upper limit The DC component can also be included Measurement function of the motor module For details related to the determination and equations of measurement functions see Chapter 15 Motor modules can be used on only products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later Item Symbol and Meaning Rotating speed Speed Motor s rotating speed Torque Trq k Motor s torque of harmonic order k t U Total torque of the motor Synchronous speed Sync Slip Slip Motor output Pm Motor s mechanical output mechanical power Motor efficiency nmA or nmB Ratio of the motor output versus the power consumption of the motor Total efficiency nmA or nmB Ratio of the motor output versus the power consumed by the motor as well as the converter through which power is fed to the motor 1 kis an integer in the range from 0 to the upper limit of the harmonic analysis Oth order is the DC component The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 500 by the frequency of the PLL source 2 Total is a value determined according to the equation given in Appendix 2 from the fundamental signal 1st order and all harmonic components 2nd to the upper limit The DC component can also be included 3 The symbols nmA and nmB are assigned to eith
433. oth Start Pos and End Pos IM 253710 01E 9 35 Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform Setting the display interpolation No interpolation is performed Displays the X Y waveform using all sampled data Thus if there are many data points within the display range of the X Y waveform it will take a long time to display the X Y waveform Linearly interpolates between two points Displays the X Y waveform using the waveform display data obtained from P P compressing the sampled data When compared to the case when interpolation is not performed the time it takes to display the X Y waveform is shorter This is because the number of data points that need to be displayed is less However the marker may appear at some position off the interpolated line during cursor measurements section 11 4 Note The number of divisions of the T Y waveform display when the T Y waveform and X Y waveform are displayed simultaneously take on the value specified by Wave Format in section 9 3 Splitting the Screen and Displaying the Waveforms Zooming along the time axis is applicable only to the T Y waveform display You can vertically zoom in on the X Y waveform using the V Zoom soft key of the CH key 9 36 IM 253710 01E Chapter 10 Numerical Computations 10 1 Setting the Measurement Computation Period Re computing Procedure For a functional description see section 1 2 There are two meth
434. ous settings the setup parameters must be saved For information on saving the setup parameters see 12 5 Saving and Loading Setup Parameters IM 253710 01E 3 3 Installing the Input Module Installation Procedure 1 Check that no measurement cables are connected to any of the input modules 2 Check that the power switch is turned OFF on the instrument 3 After checking the element number that is indicated on the top section of the slot on the rear side of the instrument in which the input module is to be installed install the input module along the guide While holding the grip on the top and bottom of the input module press the input module firmly into the slot until it clicks If there is a cover plate on the slot remove the cover plate first then install the input module 4 Tighten the screws four locations top and bottom that came with the input module to secure the module in place 5 Turn ON the instrument 6 In the information screen check to see that the correct model name for the input module is displayed at the element number in which the input module was installed If it is not correct remove the module according to the Removal Procedure described below and re install the module according to the above steps 1 to 5 For details regarding the information screen see section 16 4 Checking the System Condition 7 After connecting the measurement cable according to sections 3 4 to 3 10
435. p of the roll sheet is showing from the opening in the printer cover When closing the printer cover press the cover firmly until it clicks Note After the paper roll is installed follow the steps on the next page to check that the paper is feeding properly If it is not feeding evenly continue to feed the paper for another 30 cm The paper will straighten out IM 253710 01E 13 3 ejyeq afew use19S Bulyndjno g 13 1 Installing the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option Paper Feeding Paper Feeding CONFIGURATION comro ACQ DISPLAY MATH cuRSOR zoom REMOTE Fie msc HELP Loca 1 mt 2 s w SINGLE Sight start stop AB VOLTAGE CURRENT gt i e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key SS R ORT WUOUU0U8 Procedure Press the SHIFT COPY MENV to display the Copy setting menu Press the Copy to soft key to display the output medium selection menu Press the Printer soft key Press the Paper Feed soft key The paper is fed while the Paper Feed soft key is being pressed PON Copy K Copy to Printer Comment Paper Feed Abort NOUUUUBG E Explanation You can feed the chart when checking to see whether the roll of paper is properly installed or when you want to skip over a dirty secti
436. peak is 99999 Number of displayed items Normal measurement mode of numerical data Select from 8 16 42 78 and All Harmonic measurement mode 8 16 single list dual list and list Scrolling of displayed items Normal measurement mode Scroll to display the numerical data of measurement functions that cannot be displayed on one screen Harmonic measurement mode Scroll to display the numerical data of measurement functions that cannot be displayed on one screen Page scrolling of single and dual lists is possible Reset numerical data Reset the display order of the numerical data to default display Waveform Display Item Specification Waveform display ON OFF Turn OFF CH1 to CH8 individually Waveform display format 1 2 3 and 4 split window displays are possible Display Interpolation of the Select dot or linear display waveform Vertical zoom on the Zoom in out vertically for each channel Set a zoom factor in the range from 0 1 to 100 waveform Horizontal zoom on the Zoom in out horizontally The maximum zoom factor depends on the display record length and waveform observation time see section 9 8 Select up to two positions to be zoomed Graticule Select the display of grid and scales Auxiliary display ON OFF Turn ON OFF the upper and lower limits scale value and the waveform label IM 253710 01E 17 7 h Ey suoleoyioeds 17 5 Functions Vector Bar Graph Display
437. peed Ch7 50Vpk Torque Ch8 50Vpk Sense Type Analog Frequency Range 2k 200kHz Line Filter Off ZeroCross Filter Off Scaling Speed Ch7 1 0000 Torque Ch8 1 0000 Pm 1 0000 Unit Speed Ch7 rpm Torque Ch8 Nm Pm WwW Pulse N 60 Pole 2 Sync Speed Source CH2 Items that are not reset to their factory default settings when the instrument is initialized These items are saved as setup parameters However they do not change the instrument s settings when loaded Item Setting Communication GPIB Address 1 RS232 Baud Rate 19200 Format 8 No 1 Rx Tx No No Terminator Cr Lf SCSI ID Own ID 6 Date Time The time of shipment Message English LCD Brightness 2 File File Item Setup Wave Type Binay Range All Copy Copy To Printer IM 253710 01E App 13 Ea xipueddy Appendix 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Display Order of the Numerical Data When the order of the numerical data is reset the measurement function data are displayed in the order given in the next table The measurement function data of element 1 2 3 4 ZA XB are displayed in that order For the normal measurement mode Order Measurement Function Element 1 Urms 1 2 Umn mean 1 3 Udc 1 4 Uac 1 5 Irms 1 6 Imn mean 1 7 Idc 1 8 lac 1 9 P 1 10 S 1 11 Q 1 12 A 1 13 o 1 14 fU FreqU 1 15 fl Freql 1 16 U pk 1 17 U pk 1 18 l pk 1 19 l pk 1 20 CfU 1 21 Cfl 1 22 FfU 1 23 Ffl 1 24 Z 1 2
438. planation Turning ON OFF the date time display You can select whether or not to display the date and time in the lower right corner of the screen OFF Do not display the date and time e ON Display the date and time Setting the date and time Setting the date You can set the date in the form YY MM DD year month day Set the lower two digits for the year Set 00 to 98 for years 2000 to 2098 and 99 for the year 1999 Setting the time You can set the time in the form HH MM SS hour minute second The hour is set using a 24 hour clock Confirming the new settings When the date time is turned ON OFF it is immediately reflected on the screen However if you are changing the date and time you must confirm the new settings If you do not abort the operation the new settings will not take effect Note ee The date and time information is backed up with the lithium battery when the power is turned OFF The instrument contains leap year information The instrument determines the leap year calendar when the new settings are confirmed If you enter 2 29 on a non leap year an error message will be displayed 3 26 IM 253710 01E Chapter 4 Common Operations 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Entering Values Entering Strings By using the rotary knob The observation time can be set regardless of the displayed menu SEE cstanrsror ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g SI S A By using the jog shuttle Af
439. pm lt MMMM Motor s number of poles Equation for deriving the slip The equation when the unit of rotating speed or synchronous speed is rpms is indicated below Slip Synchronous speed rpm Rotating speed rmp x 100 Synchronous speed rpm Rotating speed derived in section 15 4 Note Please select a stable voltage or current supplied by the motor with small distortion or noise for the frequency measurement source Set the zero crossing filter see section 5 6 as necessary IM 253710 01E 15 17 SajnNpoW A0 JOW 0 lqe2ddy uolNoUNY uonenjesra 10 0 15 7 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Compute the Motor Output CONFIGURATION ACQ 1 2 ie s DISPLAY MATH cuRSOR zoom FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy mui ca MENU 1 F fy S m i e SINGLE i Sant START STOP ABORT CHT VOLTAGE y i rt S CH8 cuRRENT SK T Ss e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key CICACA WUOUUUUE Procedure 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu 2 Press the Motor Module soft key to display the motor module setting dialog box On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 only the Power Module soft key appears and you cannot set the motor module In addition i
440. possible to minimize the static capacitance to earth ground IM 253710 01E 3 7 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 5 For Making Accurate Measurements Effects of Power Loss By using an appropriate wiring method that matches the load the effects of power loss on measurement accuracy can be minimized We will consider the current source SOURCE and load resistance LOAD below When the measured current is relatively large Wire so that the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the load side The current measurement circuit measures the sum of current iL flowing through the load of the circuit under measurement and the current iy flowing through the voltage measurement circuit Because the current flowing through the circuit under measurement is iz iv is the amount of error The input resistance of the voltage measurement circuit of the instrument is approximately 1 MQ If the input is 1000 V iv is approximately 1 mA 1000 V 1 MQ If the load current iL is 10 A or more load resistance is 100 Q or less then the effect of iv on the measurement is 0 01 or less If the input is 100 V and 10 A iv 0 1 mA 100 V 1 MQ then the effect of iv on the measurement accuracy is 0 001 0 1 mA 10 A LOAD OW Input terminal ELEMENT H iv As a reference the relationship of the voltages and currents that produce effects of 0 1 0 01 and 0 001 are shown in the figure below Fes
441. power switch is OFF 2 Connect the plug of the accessory power cord to the power connector on the rear panel of the instrument 3 Plug the other end of the power cord into a power outlet that satisfies the conditions below The AC outlet must be a three pole type that has a protective earth terminal Item Specification Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption when using the printer 200 VA On some instruments the direction of the power connector may be as shown below LS 3 pin outlet NY Power cord included in the package 3 10 IM 253710 01E 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement The measurement cable is wired directly from the circuit under measurement to the voltage current input terminal of the power measurement module To prevent electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 4 Wiring Precautions Connecting to the Input Terminal Voltage input terminal Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input terminal Current input terminal Power module 253751 has 5 A terminals Power module 253752 has two types of terminals 5 A and 20 A terminals but only one system of current input one set of cu
442. ppear Display f Format Elementi ElenentZ Elenent3 Element4 ZA UrmsIU 1 5 0517 10 2107 00000k 0 00000k 5 0517 Um IY 1 5 0516 11 3412 6 66600k 6 6000Gk 5 6516 Udc IU 1 0 0315 0 0307 6 00000k O 60000k 0 0315 Uac U 5 0516 10 2107 0 00000k 0 00000k 5 0516 Numeric Irmsta 49 805 0 0000 0 0000 6 0000 49 865 Alt Im A 49 799 6 9000 8 0000 6 9000 49 799 Iac A 0 823 6 0034 8 0000 9 0000 0 823 lac A 49 798 0 0000 0 9000 0 0909 49 798 P UW 19 25151k 6 000 0 0000k 0 0000 0 25151k S UA 18 25160k 6 000 6 0000k 6 0000k 6 25160k Q var 1 0 00653k 0 009 8 0000k 6 0000k 8 00653k je Function L 9 Error Error Error 0 99966 None E Error Error Error 1 488 2 00 k 6 666n 6 666n 2 000k 9 000m 0 000m 6 990m 7 1817 16 2648 Error Error 7 2653 10 3346 Error Error 73 196 0 0346 Error Error 71 762 0 0265 Error Error 1 438 1 012 Error Error 1 470 Error Error Error 1 111 1 000 Error Error 1 111 Error Error Error ee m 101 4310 Error Error Error 101 431m Error 101 396n Error Error Error 101 396n Error UOUOU0U For the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 3 Determination of Delta Functions For details regarding the wiring methods A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method Ex
443. prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse Do not operate the instrument when the protective earth or the fuse might be defective Also make sure to check them before operation Fuse To prevent fire only use a fuse that has a rating voltage current and type that is specified by the instrument When replacing a fuse turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord Never short the fuse holder Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers Some areas inside the instrument have high voltages Do not remove the cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only External Connection Connect the protective grounding before connecting t
444. products having the CE Mark For all other products please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual 2 Overvoltage Categories define transient overvoltage levels including impulse withstand voltage levels Overvoltage Category Applies to equipment supplied with electricity from a circuit containing an overvoltage control device Overvoltage Category II Applies to equipment supplied with electricity from fixed installations like a distribution board 3 Pollution Degree Applies to the degree of adhesion of a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates withstand voltage or surface resistivity Pollution Degree 1 Applies to closed atmospheres with no or only dry non conductive pollution Pollution Degree 2 Applies to normal indoor atmospheres with only non conductive pollution 4 The cable length is less than 3 m IM 253710 01E 17 13 s Ey suoleoyioeds 17 14 External Dimensions 253710 ay Unit mm Rear Panel 0 0 jj _0 0 os 0 0 6 lC _ ol elje z ES go 42 428 78 61
445. r eee ee AUrm AUrms1 AUrms3 wee eee eee AUmn AUmni AUmn3 sekas Basis eee AUdc AUdc1 _ AUdc3 wee wee masss 3P3W AUac AUaci AUac3 wenn ee ee D3V3A Alrm Alrmst1 Alrms3 teen eee wee Almn Almnt1 ss Almn3 weet eee wee Alde Aldct Alde3 ween eee gt Alac Alact Alac3 ween eee ee AUrm AUrms1 AUrms2 AUrms3 wee wee wee AUmn AUmn1 AUmn2 AUmn3 wee wee eee AUdc AUdc1 AUdc2 AUdc3 wee wee Delta AUac AUac1 AUac2 AUac3 Hee ta gt Star Arm wweee weer wee Alrms4 ss wee ee wee Almn weer eee eee Almn4 wees Alde weer ee Aldc4 weer wees Alacer ee Alac4 twee ween AUrm AUrms1 AUrms2 AUrms3 eee tee AUmn AUmn1 AUmn2 AUmn3 Heese es AUdc AUdc1 AUdc2 AUdc3 caram wee ee Star AUac AUac1 AUac2 AUac3 went wee gt Delta Arm teen eee eee Alrms4 ss ww weee wees Almn weer ee Almn4 ween wees PN 0 oi Aldc4 we eee 0 we eee Alac weer ee eee Alacd wenn wwe ee Note During All display the result of the delta computation is displayed at the position of each element as shown above but the number attached to the symbol has no relation to the element number For example if i1 i2 is selected from the delta computation menu the true rms value of i1 i2 is computed and displayed at Alrms1 IM 253710 01E App 9 Ea xipueddy Appendix 4 List of Initial Settings and Display Order of Numerical Data Initial Settings Factory
446. r selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the filter from OFF to 500Hz2 Press the SELECT key to confirm the line filter The same filter is set for CH7 and CH8 Selecting the zero crossing filter 3 oar Power Module C Each J Pouer Module CALL 4 Motor Module JUUUUUUU Turn the jog shuttle to select Zero Cross Filter Press the SELECT key to display the zero crossing filter selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the filter from OFF to 500Hz Press the SELECT key to confirm the zero crossing filter The same filter is set for CH7 and CH8 Motor Module Motor Module Speed Ch Torque Ch8 Pm Speed Ch Torque ChB Pm Range 5Upk__ _ 50Upk__ Range 5Upk___ __50Upk__ Sense Type Analog__Pulse J Sense Type Analog_ Pulse Freq Range 2k ZO kHz Freq Range Line Line Filter OFF Select Zero Cross Filter pFF Filter Select 1 0000 Scaling pFF 1 0600 W Unit y Pulse N scaling Unit Pulse N Pole Pole Sync Speed Sync Speed Source Source IM 253710 01E 15 9 SajnpoW 10101 0 B Qeol ddy uoloOUNY uonenjesra 10 0 15 3 Selecting the Input Filter Explanation The following two types of filters are available on the motor module Selecting the line filter This filter is inserted into the circuit
447. rd Length Observation 100 k 1 M Option 4 M Option Time Sampling Display Sampling Display Sampling Display Rate Record Rate Record Rate Record S s Length S s Length S s Length Word Word Word 1ks 50 50k 500 500 k 2k 2M 400 s 125 50k 1 25 k 500 k 5k 2M 200 s 250 50k 2 5k 500 k 10k 2M 100 s 500 50k 5k 500 k 20 k 2M 40s 1 25 k 50k 12 5k 500 k 50k 2M 20s 2 5k 50k 25k 500 k 100 k 2M 10s 5k 50k 50k 500 k 200 k 2M 4s 12 5k 50 k 125k 500 k 500 k 2M 2s 25k 50k 250 k 500 k 1M 2M 1s 50 k 50 k 500 k 500 k 1 25 M 1 25 M 400 ms 125k 50k 1 25 M 500 k 5M 2M 200 ms 250 k 50k 2 5 M 500 k 5M 1M 100 ms 500 k 50k 5M 500 k 5M 500 k 40 ms 1 25 M 50k 5M 200 k 5M 200 k 20 ms 2 5 M 50k 5M 100 k 5M 100 k 10 ms 5M 50 k 5M 50 k 5M 50 k 4ms 5M 20 k 5M 20k 5M 20k 2 ms 5M 10k 5M 10k 5M 10k 1 ms 5M 5k 5M 5k 5M 5k 400 us 5M 2k 5M 2k 5M 2k 200 us 5M 1k 5M 1k 5M 1k 100 us 5M 500 5M 500 5M 500 40 us 5M 200 5M 200 5M 200 20 us 5M 100 5M 100 5M 100 10 us 5M 50 5M 50 5M 50 App 2 IM 253710 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Observation Time Sampling Rate and Record length For Harmonic Measurement Mode The record length that appears in the tables below can be selected from 100 1 M option 4 M option When the record length is not divided When Rec Division of the Acq menu is set to OFF Fundamental Sampling Observation Time s Frequency Rate Can be det
448. re 1 Press the SHIFT TRIGGER ACQ key to display the Acq setting menu 2 Press the Time Base soft key to select Int or Ext Acq g Record Length 166k Rec Division an Tine Base mt Ext Explanation With the default setting of the instrument the data sampling timing is controlled by the clock signal that is generated by the internal time base circuit This setting can be changed so that the timing is controlled by an external clock signal Selecting the time base Select the time base from the following choices Int The internal clock signal becomes the time base The observation time that was set in section 6 1 becomes effective Ext The clock signal applied to the external clock input connector becomes the time base The observation time that was set in section 6 1 becomes ineffective IM 253710 01E s xy sul y uM S a 6 3 Selecting the Time Base When the time base is set to Ext Apply a clock signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK IN on the rear panel that meets the following specifications EXT CLK IN Item Specification Connector type BNC connector Frequency range 1 kHz to 250 kHz Input level CMOS Minimum pulse width 1 us for both High and Low AN CAUTION Applying a signal to the external clock input connector EXT CLK IN that is outside the 0 to 5 V range may damage the instrument Circuit diagram and timing chart of the external c
449. re U and represent the rms values of the voltage and current respectively p becomes the sum of the time independent term Ulcos and the AC component of twice the frequency of the voltage or current Ulcos 2at 6 The mean value of power over one period is called the AC power Taking the mean over one period the AC power P becomes P Ulcoso W The power varies depending on the phase difference even when the voltage and current are the same As shown in the figure below the section above the horizontal axis represents positive power power supplied to the load and the section below the horizontal axis represents negative power power delivered from the load The difference between the two is the power dissipated by the load As the phase difference between the voltage and current increases negative power increases At 7 2 the positive and negative powers become equal and no power is dissipated in the load When the phase difference between the voltage and current is 0 Positive power Mean power P UI 0 T 2r at When the phase difference between the voltage and current is Positive power Mean power P Ulcos 2 0 Positive and negative powers are equal App 28 IM 253710 01E Appendix 7 Power Basics Power Harmonics Three Constants Related to the AC Circuit Active power and the power factor Not all of the power represented by the product of the voltage and current U
450. re determined from the maximum values of voltage and current are also measured or computed over the entire screen Zero crossing setting The measurement computation period is set to the period between the first point on the screen where the reference input signal crosses the zero level the center value of the amplitude on a rising slope to the last point on the screen where the signal crosses the zero level on a rising slope When there is only one or there is no rising slope on the screen the measurement computation period is set to the entire width of the screen When using the zero crossing setting you can specify which input signal to use to synchronize to the zero crossing point for each element The synchronizing signal can be selected as CH1 through CH8 or as the external clock Slope refers to the movement of the signal such as the movement from a low level to a high level rising or the movement from a high level to a low level falling k gt 1 k Measurement computation Measurement computation Measurement computation period period period Entire screen Cursor setting The measurement computation period is set to the period between the two vertical cursors placed on the screen t1 t2 You can set the measurement computation period while viewing the displayed waveform and moving the cursor Cursor 1 Cursor 2 tk t2 Measurement computation period IM 253710 01E 1 2
451. re the change Setting the unit of rotating speed Number of characters Eight characters or less Types of characters Characters that are displayed on the keyboard or a space IM 253710 01E 15 13 Sa Npo W 10101 0 B QeoI ddy uolNOUNY uonenjesrg 10 OJ 15 5 Setting the Scaling Factor and Unit Used to Measure the Torque CONFIGURATION ACQ 1 2 ie s DISPLAY MATH cuRSOR zoom FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy mui ca MENU 1 F fy S m i e SINGLE i Sant START STOP ABORT CHT VOLTAGE y i rt S CH8 cuRRENT SK T Ss e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key CICACA WUOUUUUE Procedure 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu 2 Press the Motor Module soft key to display the motor module setting dialog box On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 only the Power Module soft key appears and you cannot set the motor module In addition if the motor module is not installed in the element number 4 slot the Motor Module menu does not appear Setting the scaling factor used to transform the torque meter signal 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Scaling under Torque Ch8 Press the SELECT key to display the scaling factor setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to s
452. reading error is doubled when the input signal is a DC signal and the value is between 100 and 55 or 55 to 100 of the measurement range Power accuracy continues on next page 17 18 IM 253710 01E 17 15 Power Measurement Module 253751 Item Specification Power accuracy continued Temperature coefficient Add 0 01 of reading C in the range from 5 to 20 C or 26 to 40 C However only when the input signal is 10 kHz or less Other Designed value for frequencies less than or equal to 10 Hz in the table on the previous page Add designed value 1 10th of the reading error x 5 number of cycles x 10 k number of words of sampled data of reading when the input signal contains less than 5 cycles and there are less than 10 k words of sampled data External Dimensions RLN Unt mm 242 73 66 Attachment surface 145 IM 253710 01E 17 19 ol Ey suoleoyioeds 17 16 Power Measurement Module 253752 Item Specification Number of input channels 2 Voltage 1 Current 1 Select from Direct input terminal 5 A Direct input terminal 20 A and current sensor input connector Insulation resistance Between voltage input terminals and
453. rectory File Name Creating a Directory Creating a Directory 4 Press the MakeDir soft key to display the menu for creating a directory Delete Copy Rename NakeDir File Name Tate File List Path SCONPZ Space 2612315646 byte Size NUMERO CSU WAVEOOG HDR WAVE OO WUF 6 1999701713 69 54 1999 61 08 05 27 1999 01 68 05 27 O 1999701710 03 47 1999 61 16 03 47 6 1999 61 18 04 15 1999701710 04 15 1999 61 63 17 46 1999 01 03 17 39 R 1999701703 17 39 Attribute la Makebir W Function MakeDir Dir Name Property Filter Item OUUOUUU0 Selecting the medium and directory Attribute p11 5 The procedures are the same as Selecting the source medium and Selecting the source directory in section 12 5 Changing the file attribute 6 The procedures are the same as Changing the file attribute in section 12 8 Creating the directory 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a medium or a directory 8 Press the Dir Name soft key A keyboard appears 9 Use the keyboard to enter a directory name For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings File List Makebir Path SCO PZ Function Space 2612315648 byte File Name Size Date Attributi MakeDir a l ouuUgugEuI Dir Name NUNEROGO CSU STUD WAVEOOO
454. rement mode is 1 To display the numerical data of Speed Torque Sync and Slip the minimum order must be set to 0 The numerical data of Torque in the normal measurement mode are simple averaged values The numerical data of each harmonic component and the total of Torque in the harmonic measurement mode are RMS values The numerical data that correspond to the same value as the normal measurement mode are displayed at Trq dc The numerical data of Sync and Slip are displayed only when the PLL source fU or fl and frequency synchronization source Sync Speed Source are set to the same channel IM 253710 01E App 5 Ea xipueddy Appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions Table 2 2 Measurement Functions in the Harmonic Measurement Mode Determination Equation The characters values inside the of the measurement function are either dc k 0 or k k 1 to max When the denominator of the equation When the denominator of the equation for the distortion factor is Fundamental for the distortion factor is Total Harmonic distortion factor of voltage U k 100 U k 100 Uhdf _ U U 1 Harmonic distortion factor of current I k I k 100 100 Ihdf l I 1 Harmonic distortion factor of active power P k P k 100 Phdf _ P P 1 max max Total harmonic distortion of voltage y U k 3 U k Uthd k 2 100 k 2 100 U U 1
455. rent data of elements 1 2 3 and 4 respectively App 8 IM 253710 01E Appendix 3 Determination of Delta Computation ited ted ae Equation gills j Equation 1 f AUrms 1j u t dt Alrms 1j i t dt T Io T Io ae oe ee Paes See eee AUmn i u t dt Almn z 1f i t dt 2V2 Tho 24 2 To T T AUde u t dt Alde 4 i t dt T Jo T Io AUac af AUrms AUdc Alac 4 Alrms Aldc Note If the sampled data used in the computation do not exist for example when the module is not installed the sampled data are considered to be 0 s for the computation It is recommended that the measurement range and scaling PT CT ratio and coefficients of the elements that are being computed delta computation be set the same as much as possible Using different measurement ranges or scalings causes the measurement resolution of the sampled data to be different In effect the computation result will have errors Delta Computation Menu Display Position during All display Delta Display Format during All display Computation Measurement Menu Function Symbol Elementi Element2 Element3 Element4 ZA xB AUrm AUrmst 00 tee ee AUmn AUmni tear eee ee aie AUde Midd aesa seed wee wees ceene AUac AUact tae ee Alrm Alrmst twee eee ee wa Almn Amat O esses jj sees j cbe j akas oeae i Alde Magi amas aa e e adios Alac Alact wee
456. rent to the current input terminals Connect the output of an isolation sensor CT DT CT or clamp to the current sensor input connector Follow the precautions given in section 3 4 Wiring Precautions When the isolation sensor is current output SOURCE ___ rc fe gt o ole When the isolation sensor is voltage output SOURCE _ m O gt o Input terminal S O Current sensor input connector Current sensor Note For wiring precautions see also sections 3 8 and 3 9 3 22 IM 253710 01E 3 11 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch Points to Check before Turning ON the Power Check that the instrument is installed properly see section 3 2 Installing the Instrument Check that the input module is installed properly see section 3 3 Installing the Input Module Check that the power cord is connected properly see section 3 6 Connecting the Power Supply Check that the circuit under measurement is wired properly See sections 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement 3 8 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement 3 9 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement and 3 10 Wiring a Circuit with Voltage Input Exceeding 600 V Location of the Power Switch The power switch is located in the lower left corner of the front panel
457. rk indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key CH 8 CURRENT lt i Procedure 1 Press the MISC key to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Action on trigger is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later B0QUUDUL Information Graph Color 4 4 GPIB RS232 Text Color 4 SCSI ID Action on Trigger M Date Time Config Selftest 14 8 IM 253710 01E 14 4 Setting the Action on Trigger Turning ON OFF the action used to save the numerical data waveform data and setup parameters 3 Press the Save to File soft key to select ON or OFF Turning ON OFF the action used to output or save the screen image data 4 Press the Hard Copy soft key to select ON or OFF Setting the number of times to perform the action 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the action count Action Save to File mA o Hard Copy on ACU Count Graph Color 4 Text Color Action Infinite on Trigger JUUUUUUU JUUUUUUU Executing Stopping action on trigger Press the START STOP key to execute action on trigger Action on trigger stops when the START STOP key is pressed again to stop the data acquisition or after performing the action the specified number of times When the SINGLE START key is pressed the action on trigg
458. rker1 and Bar Marker2x Setting the bar graph display range Set the range of the bar graph in terms of harmonic orders The bar graph display range of bar graphs 1 and 2 are the same The minimum value is Oth order dc However if the measurement function is set to o oU or ol there is no value for the Oth order Thus no bar is displayed there The maximum value is the upper limit of the harmonic analysis The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 500 by the frequency of the PLL source For details see section 16 5 IM 253710 01E 9 31 Aejdsiq wiojonem el 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform Procedure 0000000 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Displaying the X Y waveform TRIG D CONFIGURATION SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE bes SHIFT coor Tron on MENU ELEMENT VOLTAGE CURRENT icates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key For a functional description see section 1 6 X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or I Displaying only the X Y waveform 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select X Y 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Se
459. rmal and the time base is set to internal clock the marker can be moved in the range from 0 s the left end of the screen to the observation time the right end of the screen When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the marker can be moved in the range defined by the number of data points in the record length For example if the record length is 100 k words then the range is from data point 0 the left end of the screen to data point 100 k the right end of the screen When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the marker can be set in steps of observation time display record length When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the marker can be set in steps of one data point To move the two markers while keeping the distance between them constant the jog shuttle must be set to control both markers When two values maximum and minimum values are displayed on the same time axis the points are measured in the order of the sampled data as shown in the diagram below Sampled data atat utt m The numbers are in the order of the measurement sIxe BOILO A sixe A Horizontal axis X axis Movement range of the H cursor With the center of the waveform display frame set as the zero amplitude line the range is from the top 100 0 t
460. rms can be displayed in different combinations as follows lt Z1 gt lt Z2 gt lt Main gt lt Z1 gt IM 253710 01E 1 29 1 6 Waveform Display Zoom position and zoom box The zoom position can be set in units of time When the main waveform and Z1 or Z2 waveform are displayed at the same time a zoom box indicating the zoom position is displayed in the main waveform screen The center of the zoom box indicates the center of the zoomed waveform Z1 zoom box Z2 zoom box Main waveform gt display frame ron A Z1 waveform gt display frame 7500A Z2 waveform display frame Split screen of the zoomed waveform As described in the earlier section Split Screen of the Waveform the screen can be evenly divided and the waveform of each channel can be automatically assigned to the divided windows 1 30 IM 253710 01E 1 6 Waveform Display a Vector Display of Harmonics For procedures see section 9 9 During the harmonic measurement mode the phase difference and the amplitude rms relationships between the fundamental signal U 1 and the I 1 of the element that is wired using wiring method A can be displayed as vectors The vector of each input signal is displayed with the positive vertical axis representing zero degrees In addition you can zoom in on the vector or display the values of the amplitude and the phase difference between the signals simulta
461. roducts PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later a coefficient cannot be multiplied to the result of a FFT function 3 FFT for example When the computation region or the equation is changed do a re computation For information pertaining to changing the computation region and re computation see section 11 1 You can also set whether or not to display the upper and lower limits ON OFF For the procedures related to turning ON OFF the display see section 9 6 Turning ON OFF the Upper and Lower Limit Displays When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is set to harmonic the TINTG function performs computation by considering one sampled data point as one second data The Mode of the waveform computation as well as Math1 and Math2 cannot be turned ON when averaging see section 10 5 is turned ON IM 253710 01E siskjeuy wojne MA z 11 3 Performing the FFT Procedure For a functional description see section 1 8 CONFIGURATION TRIG D comica ELS ACQ REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy wu cu MENU ELEMENTS FILTER 1 CHT VOLTAGE cn2 cH4 cn6 cn8 curren baa CO CC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key FILTER FILTER SS FILTER 7 SINGLE j Suge start stop JORT AB
462. rom the following choices U I P S Q A OU ol Z Rs Xs Rp Xp Torque This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later when the motor module is installed in the element number 4 slot Selecting the element Select the element from the following choices Element1 Element2 Element3 Element4 The measurement function Torque is applicable only to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later when the motor module installed in the element number 4 slot Therefore the selected element is set to some measurement function other than Torque Setting the marker position Two markers and x are displayed in each graph bar graphs 1 and 2 The marker position can be set in terms of harmonic orders Bar graph 2 displays the harmonic order that indicates the marker position The position of the marker of graph 1 is the same as the position of that of graph 2 The same holds true for the x marker The minimum value is Oth order dc However if the measurement function is set to o oU or ol there is no value for the Oth order Thus no bar is displayed there The maximum value is the upper limit of the harmonic analysis The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 500 by the frequency of the PLL source For details see section 17 5 To set the markers of bar graph 1 and 2 simultaneously to the same harmonic order the jog shuttle must be set to control both Bar Ma
463. rom the table below The wiring symbols used in the table have the following meanings 1P2W single phase two wire system 1P3W single phase three wire system 3P3W three phase three wire system 3V3A three voltage three current system 3P4W three phase four wire system When the power measurement module is installed only in the element number 1 slot The selection menu is not displayed Wiring Method Numerical Data of the Function A B 1P2W XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 xB No numerical data 5 2 IM 253710 01E 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method When the power measurement modules are installed in element number 1 and 2 slots Selectable Wiring Method A B Numerical Data of the 2Function 1P2W 1P2W XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 XB Displays the numerical data of element 2 1P3W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 1P3W system XB No numerical data 3P3W XA Displays the numerical data when elements 1 and 2 are combined into a 3P3W system B No numerical data When the power measurement modules are installed in element number 1 2 and 3 slots Selectable Wiring Method A B Numerical Data of the 2Function 1P2W 1P2W XA Displays the numerical data of element 1 XB Displays the numerical data of element 2 Element 3 is also handled as 1P2W It does n
464. rrent input terminals can be used on each input module at one time To prevent electric shock and damage to the instrument do not wire measurement cables to multiple current input terminals simultaneously The screws used on the terminal binding post are M6 screws Either wind the wire around the screw or pass the crimp on lugs through the screw axis then tighten firmly by holding the terminal knob IM 253710 01E sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement Combinations of Wiring Methods and Elements The combination of the selectable wiring methods and elements varies depending on the installation position of the power measurement modules as follows Elements that has Selectable wiring methods Combination power measurement of elements modules installed Only 1 1P2W 1 1 and2 1P2W 1P2W 1 2 1P3W 1 and 2 3P3W 1 and 2 1 2 and3 1P2W 1P2W 1 2 3 All three elements are handled as single phase two wire systems 1P2W 1P3W 1 2 and 3 1P2W 3P3W 1 2 and 3 1P3W 1P2W 1 and 2 3 3P3W 1P2W 1 and 2 3 3V3A 1 2 and 3 3P4W 1 2 and 3 1 2 3 4 1P2W 1P2W 1 2 3 4 All four elements are handled as single phase two wire systems 1P2W 1P3W 1 2 and 3 4 Elements 1 and 4 are handled as single phase two wire systems 1P2W 3P3W 1 2 and 3 4 Elements 1 and 4 are handled as single phase two wire systems 1P2W 3V3A 1 2 3 and 4 1P2W 3P4W 1 2 3 and 4 1P3W 1P2W 1 and 2 3
465. rrent range Power Module AIT Power Module C Each Element 4 Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Standard 260A Shunt Power Module Call Standard Standard U Range Z000Upk__ Zo00Upk__ Z000Upk__ Z000UpK Terninal 5A Fen J gt Se lect L5A pen I Range Sensor Rat io nva d Line Filter Zero Cross Filter Scaling Pt Ratio Ct Ratio Scaling Factor TOOORUpK 10 0000 C OFF CFF m 1 6000 fesonUpr 400mUpk Zoenupk 100nUpk Auto 1000mUpk_ 16 0606 OFF 1 0000 1 8008 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 E EA 1 0000 1 5000 1 66606 Setting the current sensor transformation ratio 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Sensor Ratio mV A of element 1 10 Press the SELECT key to display the current sensor transformation ratio setting box 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the transformation ratio For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 12 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box The Sensor Ratio mV A of all other modules that are displayed are set to the same transformation ratio 5 16 IM 253710 01E 5 4 Setting the Measurement Range when Using an External Current Sensor Power Modul
466. s Item Specification Vector display Applicable during the harmonic measurement mode Displays vectors of the phase difference of the fundamental signals Bar graph display Applicable during the harmonic measurement mode Displays the bar graph of the amplitude of each harmonic Simultaneous display Displays a combination of two displays from numerical waveform and bar graph in the top and bottom halves of the divided screen Numerical computation Item Specification Measurement computation period Set the period over which the measurement function or numerical computation is performed Select the method from zero crossing cursor and external trigger and set period for each However cursor can only be used during the harmonic measurement mode For the specifications on the external trigger input see section 17 6 External Trigger I O Section Delta computation Applicable only during the normal measurement mode Compute other numerical data of the measured circuit from the computed results of the difference of the instantaneous values User defined function Compute numerical data of equations up to four equations that are created by combining the measurement function symbols and operators Equation for the apparent power Applicable only during the normal measurement mode Select the equation from Urms x Irms Umn x Imn and Udc x Idc Averaging Exponential averagi
467. s Re computing the waveform FFT Reset the computation region and re compute the waveform and FFT 17 8 IM 253710 01E 17 5 Functions Harmonic Measurement Item Specification Method PLL synchronization method Frequency range Fundamental frequency between 20 Hz and 6 4 kHz Measurement function See section 17 4 Measurement Functions Record length Same as for the normal measurement mode Number of points for the 8192 Arbitrarily set the start point of analysis in the acquisition memory FFT FFT processing word 32 bit length Window function Rectangular PLL source Select the voltage or current of an element that has a power measurement module installed or an external clock input The frequency range of the external clock when used as a PLL source is 20 Hz to 6 4 kHz For other specifications see section 17 3 Time Axis External clock operation without using the PLL is also possible 1 4096 of the external clock frequency is the fundamental frequency PLL source filter zero crossing filter Antialiasing filter Line filter Relationship between the sampling rate window width and harmonic order being analyzed with hysteresis Fundamental Sampling Window width Upper limit of Maximum harmonic frequency of rate S s Number of cycles harmonic order order having the same the PLL of the fundamental under analysis accuracy as the normal sour
468. s 1 displays zero When the power factor A is greater than 2 001 and display errors Error IM 253710 01E 8 7 Aejdsiq jeouewnyn e 8 3 Changing the Displayed Items of the Normal Measurement Data Procedure For a functional description see section 1 5 This section applies when the measurement mode is set to normal measurement o 0000000 gt f 8 DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE Og Y SHIFT R ORT CONFIGURATION TAIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER WS ff on ua gt MENU ELEMENT FILTER 1 CHT VOLTAGE cH2 cH4 cn6 cn8 current Bi CJJ e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key FILTER FILTER FILTER lt 7 j START STOP AB Set the measurement mode to normal measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Normal Set the display format of the numerical data to something other than All For the procedures see section 8 2 Displaying Normal Measurement Data 2 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu Check that Format is set to Numeric Numeric Wave Numeric Bar or Numeric X Y Check that Item Amount is set to 8
469. s 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Wave Bar Display Format Bar Iten No K Function Element Element 1 Start Order a End order a For the procedures related to setting the numerical display see chapter 8 OUUUUUG0 5 Press the SELECT key confirm the selection Two bar graphs are displayed For the procedures related to setting the waveform display see sections 9 1 to 9 8 iSelect Numeric Wave Bar Vector Nuner ic Wave Numer ic Bar Wave Bar Display Format Bar Tten No K Function Element Element 1 Bar Markeri 6 order Bar Marker2 x order Start Order a End Order a UUUUUU00 9 28 IM 253710 01E 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data Display g Format Wave Bar Wave Setting Bar Setting The following procedures are given with the premise that Displaying the waveform and the bar graphs was selected in the previous paragraph 6 Press the Bar Setting soft key to display the Bar menu Selecting the bar graph to be configured 7 8 Press the Bar Item No soft key Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 or 2 1 represents the bar graph displayed at the top of the bar graph display region 2 represents the bar graph displayed at the bottom of the bar graph display region Selecting the measurement function 9 10 11 Press the Fu
470. s can be installed In this case you cannot select a wiring method that uses four power measurement modules Select the wiring method that matches the actual wiring of the circuit The method in determining the Xfunctions varies depending on the wiring method If the wiring method selection is not correct for the circuit the measurement computation results will not be correct When the data acquisition is stopped and you wish to determine the Zfunctions for the case when the wiring method is switched re compute the numerical data see section 10 1 For details pertaining to the relationship between the wiring method and xfunctions see Appendix 2 IM 253710 01E 5 5 obuey pue spo Jusweinseey oy bumas eo 5 3 Setting the Measurement Range during Direct Input For a functional description see section 1 3 1 z 5 S CONFIGURATION ACG DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE ue se ret iocar SAFT CAMES MENU i CEES D FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER 2 SINGLE SHE stant sToP 1 2 3 4 ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g S UOUUUUB ext ore ons oar E i cH2 cH4 cHe CH8 curRENT SK e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key VOLTAGE Procedure Setting the Range Using the Full Screen Menu for Each Element Set
471. s have the following meanings depending on the characters or numbers that are inside the parentheses dc Indicates numerical data related to the DC component 1 Indicates numerical data related to the fundamental signal k Indicates numerical data related to the 2nd to Nth order harmonics N is the upper limit of the harmonic order under analysis The upper limit is determined automatically maximum is 500 by the frequency of the PLL source All No parentheses are appended after the measurement function Indicates numerical data related to all waveforms including the fundamental and the harmonics Uhdf to hcf are measurement functions that indicate characteristics that are specific to the harmonics For details related to the determination of measurement functions see Appendix 2 Displays the frequency of the signal fU voltage or fl current that is selected as the PLL source The display of the signal that is not selected is shown as no data IM 253710 01E 1 7 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods Harmonic measurement function that indicates the phase difference of the voltage and current between the power measurement modules U1 U2 The phase difference of the fundamental signal of the voltage of element 2 U2 1 with respect to the fundamental signal of the voltage of element 1 U1 1 U1 U3 The phase difference of the fundamental signal of the voltage of element 3 U
472. s selected in the previous section 6 Press the X Y Setting soft key to display the X Y menu Selecting the X axis horizontal axis 7 Press the X Trace soft key to display the X axis selection box 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select the X axis from CH1 to Math2 9 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new X axis Setting the display range of the X Y waveform Setting the start position 10 Press the Start Pos End Pos soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Start Pos 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start position on the T Y waveform Setting the end position 12 Press the Start Pos End Pos soft key to set the jog shuttle control to End Pos 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end position on the T Y waveform Setting the start and end positions simultaneously 14 Press the Start Pos End Pos soft key to set the jog shuttle control to both Start Pos and End Pos 15 Turn the jog shuttle to set the display range of the X Y waveform without changing the distance between the start and end positions Setting the display interpolation 16 Press the Interpolate soft key to select or A X F 4 Format Wave X Start Pos Start Pos a E End Pos End Pos 100999 100000 Tmterpolate Tnterpolate Fa Nv Fa Aw Wave Setting XY Setting UUUO0UU 9 34 IM 253710 01E 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform Expla
473. s the range of the power measurement module for each element 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu On products PZ4000 with firmware version before 2 01 only the Power Module soft key appears 2 Press the Power Module Each soft key to display the power module setting dialog box The menu does not appear for elements without modules If the sensor input module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for element 4 does not appear Setting the voltage range 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the U Range of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to display the voltage range selection box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 2000Vpk to 30Vpk and Auto 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new voltage range Power Module C Each Power Module Element 1 Element Z Elenent 3 Element 4 ZOA Shunt 20A Shunt 290A Shunt 2A Shunt U Range Z2000Upk__w Select L2006Upk__ Terminal BalSen_zoa fo000px sen_zoa Q 1 Range AGApk 1206Upk L_16Apk Sensor Rat io mUa 6 6600 606Upk 6 6000 TF OFF Line Filter OFF 300Upk Zero Cross Filter 200Upk Scaling Or N 120Upk Pt Ratio 60Upk Ct Ratio 30Upk Scaling Factor L 9 0000 g Power Module C All auto 0 0000 C 0 0009 5 6 IM 253710 01E 5 3 Setting the Me
474. section 12 5 Auto naming function See the explanation given in Auto naming function in section 12 5 Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box You can specify the type of files to display Item Displays only the waveform data files Binary ASCII or Float All Displays all the files on the medium Properties See the explanation given in Properties in section 12 5 Note You cannot save or load while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON If you change the file extension on a PC for a example you will not be able to load that file A maximum of 36 characters can be displayed in Path For file names upper and lower case letters are not distinguished For comments they are distinguished In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK When using the GP IB or serial interface commands to enter a file name the following symbols that do not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used The waveform data loaded from a file overwrites the data in the acquisition memory Once the memory is overwritten the old data cannot be recovered It is recommended that the current waveform data be saved before loading data from a file Even when the data type was set to Binary data cannot be loaded if the range of the waveform that was saved was Z1 or Z2 Waveform data cannot be load
475. series Q of the load circuit Xs Reactance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Rp Resistance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in parallel Xp Reactance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in parallel Corrected Power W Pc Applicable standard IEC76 1 1976 IEEE C57 12 90 1993 IEC76 1 1993 Measurement functions functions that are determined for each selected wiring method A B For details related to the determination of and the equations of functions see Appendix 2 Item Symbol and Meaning Voltage V Urmsz true rms value Umnz rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Udcz simple average Uacd AC component Current A Irmsz true rms value Imnz rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value Idcz simple average lac AC component Active power W Px Apparent power VA Sz Reactive power var Qz Power factor AD Phase difference ox Impedance Q of the load Zz circuit Resistance and reactance Rsz Resistance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Q of the load circuit Xsz Reactance of the load circuit that has a resistor R inductor L and capacitor C connected in series Rpz Resistance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in parallel Xpz Reactance of the load circuit that has a R
476. signal is 5 cycles or less and there are 10 k words of sampled data or more within the observation time DC accuracy is NULL function ON and line filter ON f is the frequency Frequency Accuracy reading error measurement range error DC 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 0 1 Hz lt f lt 10 Hz 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 10 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 2 of reading 0 05 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range 1 kHz lt f lt 10 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range 10 kHz lt f lt 50 kHz 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 50 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 0 6 of reading 0 2 of range 100 kHz lt f lt 200 kHz 0 6 of reading 0 2 of range 200 kHz lt f lt 400 kHz 1 of reading 0 2 of range 400 kHz lt f lt 500 kHz 0 1 0 006 x f of reading 0 2 of range 500 kHz lt f lt 1 MHz 0 1 0 006 x f of reading 2 of range 1 MHz lt f lt 5 MHz 0 1 0 006 x f of reading 2 of range One year accuracy The unit of f in the equation for the reading error is KHz reading error measurement range error x 1 5 calibration period is one year Influence from the amplitude of the input signal and frequency For input voltages of 400 Vrms or more add reading error x 1 5 x U of reading For input voltages of 400 Vrms or more and frequencies of 100 kHz or more add an additional 0 005 x f x U of rea
477. sition is aborted and the numerical data and waveform are displayed based on the previous sampled data This function of dividing the record length can be used when you wish to analyze a waveform while viewing a waveform that is being continuously acquired When the memory is not divided Data are displayed Display record length One memory One memory Data acquisition aborted Data are not displayed Display record le on When the memory is divided Previously sampled data are displayed gt Display record Display record length length Two memories Two memories Data are displayed Display record length Display record Data acquisition aborted Time Base For procedures see section 6 3 With the default setting of the instrument the data sampling timing is controlled by the clock signal that is generated by the internal time base circuit This setting can be changed so that the timing is controlled by an external clock signal This feature is useful when measuring signals that have changing periods or when measuring a signal by synchronizing to the clock signal of the device being measured In addition for harmonic measurements accurate measurements can be made by synchronizing to an external clock signal that has a period that is an integer multiple of the fundamental frequency frequency of the fundamental signal IM 253710 01E 1 3 Acquiring Da
478. soft key 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select the order The selected order and numerical data are displayed at the highlighted position Nuneric Ttens Harn Item No l 1 PULUULEL e Se lect None Berea Function U Element Element 1 Order Numeric Ttens 0000000 Select Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 ZA zB UUEL Nuneric Itens Harn Item No l 4 4 Function Element Element 1 8 20 IM 253710 01E 8 5 Changing the Displayed Items of the Harmonic Measurement Data Display 4 Format Numeric 4 Item Amount Single List List Items w Order Total Page U Scroll Exec Page Doun Scroll Exec rl OUUUBUU0 L When Single List or Dual List is selected 3 Press the List Items soft key to display the menu used to change the display item List Itens 1 W Function U 4 Element Element 1 List Item No Selecting the item to change oo OND Press the List Item No soft key Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 or 2 The selected list item is displayed Changing the measurement function Press the Function soft key to display the measurement function selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the measurement function Press the SELECT key The symbol for the selected element or wiring method and numeric
479. splayed items Select the number of items that are displayed concurrently from the following choices 8 When the display format is Numeric eight items of numerical data are displayed in one column When the display format is other than Numeric four items are displayed e 16 When the display format is Numeric 16 items of numerical data are displayed in two columns When the display format is other than Numeric eight items are displayed 42 When the display format is Numeric 42 items of numerical data are displayed in three columns When the display format is other than Numeric 21 items are displayed 78 When the display format is Numeric 78 items of numerical data are displayed in three columns When the display format is other than Numeric 39 items are displayed All When the display format is Numeric a table is displayed containing the numerical data corresponding to the 25 measurement function items vertically and six symbols indicating the element and wiring method horizontally When the display format is other than Numeric a table is displayed containing the numerical data corresponding to the 12 measurement functions items vertically and six symbols indicating the element and wiring method horizontally The sixth horizontal item ZB is hidden behind the menu You can view the hidden data by clearing the menu by pressing the ESC key IM 253710 01E 8 2 Displ
480. splayed items can be reset 8 Press the Reset Exec soft key to reset the order Dispiay Disp tay J Format 4 Format Numeric L Item Amount Numeric 4 Item Amount 42 Reset Exec Nuner ic Disp Itens Jonon 78 Scrolling the display When the number of displayed items is set to something other than AIl 8 Press the Numeric Disp Items soft key to display the menu used to select the number of displayed items 9 Turn the jog shuttle to move the highlight to another measurement function The data number of the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Norm Item No section of the menu The symbol representing the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Function section of the menu The element wiring method of the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Element section of the menu Nuneric Ttens weNorm Item No 1 M Function urns M Element Elenent 1 Nuner ic Disp Itens B0QUULEL IM 253710 01E 8 2 Displaying Normal Measurement Data Explanation When the number of displayed items is set to All 8 Turn the jog shuttle to move the highlight to another measurement function The symbol representing the highlighted measurement function is displayed in the Function section of the menu 9 Press the ESC key to clear the menu The numerical data of the sixth item will a
481. ss Filter Power Module CALL Motor Module OFF g Scaling oj 1 0009 f 0900 C 1 0000 TPN Unit J m y Pulse N 60 Pole Sync Speed source IM 253710 01E 15 11 Sa NpoO A0JOW 0 B QeoI ddy uolOUNY uonenjesra 10 0 15 4 Setting the Scaling Factor the Pulse Count and Unit Used to Measure the rotating speed Setting the pulse count per rotation when the revolution sensor signal type is set to Pulse 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Pulse N 4 Press the SELECT key to display the pulse count setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the pulse count For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Motor Module Speed Ch7 Torque ch8 Pm Range 50VPk_ DoUpk__ Sense Type maTo Pulse Freq Range _ 2k 200KHzZ_ Line Filter Zero Cross Filter I Scaling cL 1 0000 Unit rpm Nn y 3 Pulse N 1 0000 1 0000 Pole sync Speed Source Setting the unit of rotating speed 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Unit under Speed Ch7 4 Press the SELECT key A keyboard appears 5 Use the keyboard to set the unit For keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Motor Module
482. ss the Mode soft key to display the trigger mode selection menu 3 Press one of the keys from OFF to HF Normal to select the trigger mode Trigger g Mode OFF Auto AT Level Norma 1 HF Auto HF Normal IM 253710 01E 10661 y Bunjes 7 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode Explanation The trigger mode is used to set the conditions for updating the display Select the trigger mode from the following choices OFF Sets the trigger mode to OFF The display is updated regardless of whether or not the trigger conditions are met When set to OFF the other menus in the Trigger setting menu are not displayed Auto Sets the trigger mode to auto The waveform is updated when a trigger occurs within the timeout period approx 100 ms If the trigger does not occur within the timeout period the waveform display is automatically updated when the timeout period elapses When the period of the trigger signal is greater than 100 ms the above two conditions are met alternately and the display is updated In this case set the mode to normal AT Level Sets the trigger mode to auto level mode If a trigger occurs within the timeout period the waveform is displayed in the same way as in the auto mode Ifa trigger does not occur within the timeout period the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source is detected the trigger level is automatically changed to the center value a
483. st Copy Path SCO PZ Function Space 2612315648 byte File Name Size Date Attributi Copy a Copy W Function Copy F0 1 Set Reset sco 1 Set Reset 3 gt 1999761713 69 54 RYU B HDR 6330 1999 01 08 05 27 R U File List All Set Path SCONPZN DIRPZ All Reset L Path SCONPZN DIRPZ File Name Size Date Attribute 4 ja H Property F J Property sce 1 a 1999701708 18 38 RW Filter Filter teen pul C Bil Attribute C Attribute Copy Dest Dir Copy Exec lw Selecting the destination medium and directory 13 The procedures are the same as Selecting the destination medium and Selecting the destination directory in section 12 5 Executing the copy operation 14 Press the Copy Exec soft key to copy all source files that have marks File List Copy Path SCONPZ M Function space 2012315648 byte File Name Size Date Attribute copy a l B0uguUUDI Set Reset ion gt O 1999 01713 09 54 RW B HDR 6330 1999701708 05 27 RW File List Path SCONPCNDIRP2 All Reset Path SCONPZNDIRPZ File Name Size Date Attribut jaj i Property 1999 01 08 18 38 R U Filter Item Attribute COPY Copy Exec M Specifying the fi
484. sum of active powers SX sum of apparent powers Q sum of reactive powers A power factor average phase difference average Z impedance average of the load circuit Rs Xsz average of the resistance reactance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in series Rpx Xpz average of the resistance reactance of the load circuit that has a R L and C connected in parallel Pc sum of Corrected Powers Efficiency Xfunction n Efficiency 1 1 y Efficiency 2 See Efficiency on the next page Measurement function of the motor module The following seven types of numerical data can be determined For details related to the determination of measurement function data see Chapter 15 Speed rotating speed Torque Sync synchronous speed Slip Pm motor output or mechanical power motor efficiency nmA or nmB total efficiency mA or nmB Determining the voltage and current There are four types of measurement functions for voltage U and current I Urms Irms true rms value These values are the true rms values of the voltage and current The instantaneous values over one period are squared and averaged Then the rms value is determined Let f t represent the input signal as a function of time and let T be the period of the signal 1 Urms or Irms 1i f t dt T 0 IM 253710 01E suonoun4 E 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods Umn Imn rectifi
485. t The value of coefficient VOffset of the Y axis converting equation of each waveform VDataType Waveform data type of the BINARY file of each waveform VUnit The unit used on the Y axis of each waveform no influence on the data VPlusOverData When the BINARY data of each waveform are equal to or greater than this value the data are erroneous VMinusOverData When the BINARY data of each waveform are equal to or less than this value the data are erroneous VMaxData Maximum value of the BINARY data of each waveform VMinData Minimum value of the BINARY data of each waveform HResolution The value of coefficient HResolution of the X axis converting equation of each waveform HOffset The value of coefficient HOffset of the X axis converting equation of each waveform HUnit The unit used on the X axis of each waveform no influence on the data Date The date that the trigger occurred Time The time that the trigger occurred Privatelnfo Model specific information ModelVersion Model version No Form Internal clock frequency for pulse count Additional information only when the motor module is installed MathBlockNo Block No being computed FormMath1 The waveform of Math1 being computed and its information FormMath2 The waveform of Math2 being computed and its information DisplayBlockSize Data length that is displayed on the screen display record length DisplayPointNo Value indicating where the l
486. t AL 6 B1E Q 6 0037 6 072 6 6192 6 465 o 1 6A 8 0 0041 0 080 8 0 0223 0 472 Uthd 75 6 3 3 0 0021 0 041 9 0 0231 9 489 D Ithd 7524 6 10 0 0021 0 043 10 0 0226 0 477 _ Pthd 34 5 li 6 6022 6 644 11 6 6282 6 596 gt Uthe Er 12 9 0022 6 043 12 9 0289 0 611 Ithf Err 9 13 0 0022 0 043 13 9 0294 0 621 Utif s e l4 0 0016 0 032 14 0 039 0 844 3 Itif 4999 6 Z3 15 0 0018 6 635 15 6 6432 6 913 e Wwf 6 4 Q 16 0 0014 8 029 16 8 0476 6 992 5 heft QZ 2 17 0 0009 0 018 17 9 0750 1 585 a y 18 0 0013 0 026 18 0 1027 2 168 uz 5 0383 U 19 0 0015 0 030 19 0 1741 3 678 on Iz 6 6611 A 26 8 0012 8 023 26 4 7228 99 746 a P2 0 000 U 21 9 0007 6 013 21 9 1928 4 072 5 32 0 000 VA 22 0 0012 0 023 22 0 0755 1 594 gt ao Numerical data of Harmonic distortion factor each harmonic When the selected measurement function is U I or P Uhdf Ihdf or Phdf is displayed respectively ZList Displays the measurement function data such as U I P S Q A and p of each element and wiring methods A and B for the selected harmonic orders Element and wiring method gt Elementi Element2 Element3 Elenent4 zA EB U Y 1 4 0523 4 0364 4 0490 4 0520 4 0523 4 0364 I A 1 0 00074 6 665m 6 664m 0 0042 0 00074 6 665n P W 1 0 001 00002 0 00002 0 00002k 0 001 00002 5 UA 1 6 663 4 66602 6 66662 6 60602k 6 603 6 60002 Q var 0 003 0 00000 0 00009 0 00091k 0 003 0 00000 AC 1 0 33571 0 99896 0 99904 0 90485 0 33571 0 39896 p p 1 199 6
487. t 4 Standard 26A Shunt Standard Standard U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk Terminal 5A pen J 54 Ben 208 CsA pen I Range 1000mUpk_ _1660mUpk_ _1e00nUpk_ Sensor Ratio nv Aail 10 0000 10 0000 10 0000 Line Filter Orr Orr F zero Cross Filter UF elect F scaling FF ___ON a FF __ON Pt Ratio 1 0009 S OHZ 1 9000 Ct Ratio 1 0006 20kHz 1 0000 Sca Ling Factor 1 0000 1 0000 5 26 IM 253710 01E 5 6 Selecting the Input Filter Explanation The following two types of filters are available on the power measurement module For selecting the input filter of the motor module see section 15 3 Selecting the line filter The line filter is inserted into the circuit under measurement It removes the noise from the inverter and from distorted waveforms The cutoff frequency can be selected from the following choices Selecting OFF disables the filter OFF 500 Hz 20 kHz 1 MHz Selecting the zero crossing filter This filter is inserted only into the frequency measurement circuit Zero crossing refers to the input signal crossing the center value of the amplitude of the input signal This filter is used to accurately detect the zero crossing point This instrument detects the zero crossing point with a hysteresis of approximately 3 5 of the measurement range Th
488. t Ratio 5 0000 0 0000 5 0000 Ct Ratio 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Scaling Factor 6 0000 6 0000 0 0000 IM 253710 01E 5 15 5 4 Setting the Measurement Range when Using an External Current Sensor Setting the Range Using the Full Screen Menu for All Elements Sets the range of the power measurement module for all elements at once This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later 1 Press the INPUT key to display the Input setting menu 2 Press the Power Module All soft key to display the All power module setting dialog box The menu does not appear for elements without modules If the sensor input module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for element 4 does not appear Selecting the current sensor input connector 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Terminal of element 1 4 Press the SELECT key to select Sen The Terminal of all other modules that are displayed are set to Sen Selecting the current sensor range 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the I Range of element 1 6 Press the SELECT key to display the current sensor range selection box 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the range from 1000mVpk to 100mVpk and Auto 8 Press the SELECT key to confirm the new current sensor range The I Range of all other modules that are set to the same current input terminal Terminal as element 1 are set to the same cu
489. t accuracy increases as the power factor gets smaller ics Vcs x 2nf x Cs LOAD When measuring high frequencies as in this instrument this error ics cannot be ignored By connecting the current input terminal of the instrument to the side that is close to the earth potential of the power source SOURCE the terminal of the current measurement circuit of the instrument approaches the earth potential Thus Vcs becomes approximately zero and very little ics flows As a result the effect on the measurement accuracy is minimized IM 253710 01E 3 9 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 6 Connecting the Power Supply Before connecting the power A Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock and damage to the instrument Connect the power cord only after confirming that the voltage of the power supply matches the rated electric power voltage for the instrument Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned OFF To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA Always use protective earth to prevent electric shock Connect the power cord of the instrument to a three pole power outlet that has a protective earth terminal Never use an extension cord that does not have protective earth otherwise the protection function will be compromised Connecting Procedure 1 Check that the
490. t g Format Nuner ic Numeric Wave Item Amount Bar 8 Vector Numer ic Wave funeric Bar Reset Wave Bar Exec H Numeric Disp Itens puouuguaN Displaying numerical data and X Y waveform 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select Numeric X Y 5 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later For the procedures related to setting the X Y waveform display see section 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform Display Select g Format Nuner ic Numeric Wave Item Amount X Y BH Bar Vector Numer ic Wave Reset Muneric xX Exec Numer ic Bar Numeric Wave X Y Disp Itens Wave Bar PUULE 8 12 IM 253710 01E 8 4 Displaying Harmonic Measurement Data The following procedures are given with the premise that Displaying only the numerical data was selected in the previous section Selecting the number of displayed items or list display 6 Press the Item Amount soft key to display the menu used to select the number of displayed items 7 Press one of the keys from 8 to List to select the number of displayed items Resetting the order of the displayed items If the number of displayed items is set to 8 or 16 the order of the displayed items can be reset 8 Press the Reset Exec soft key to reset the order Display J Format Display 4 Format Numeric
491. t stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g Gl amp Aj Select a display format to display the waveforms For the procedures see section 9 1 Selecting the Channel to Display 1 Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display setting menu 2 Press the Format soft key to display the display format selection box Check that Format is set to Wave Numeric Wave Wave Bar or Wave X Y X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later The following procedures are given with the premise that the display format is set to Wave Movement of the vertical position is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later 3 Press the desired channel key from CH1 to CH8 The channel setting menu is displayed 4 Press the Position soft 5 Turn the jog shuttle to move the vertical position of the waveform For the procedures related to entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings CHI Wave Display OFF Dn H U Range 2000Upk Position 8 0 IM 253710 01E Aejdsiq wiojyonem el 9 2 Moving the Vertical Position Explanation The displayed position of the waveform vertical position can be moved vertically to the desired position such as when the section of the waveform you wish to view goes out of the display frame due to vertical zoom This is applicable to pro
492. t the level in the range from 0 0 to 100 0 Half of the total vertical span of the waveform display screen is considered to be 100 With the center of the vertical axis taken to be the zero amplitude line the upper and lower limits of the screen are 100 and 100 respectively The upper and lower limits of the display screen correspond to the measurement range if scaled the range after scaling of the voltage current that is set for each channel 10661 y Bunjes e Measurement range 300 Vpk e Trigger level 25 Trigger position Trigger point 100 300 Vpk x Zero input line Trigger level 25 75 V The center of the vertical axis 100 300 Vpk The trigger level setting is void when the trigger mode is OFF HF Auto or HF Normal It is also void when the trigger mode is AT Level and the trigger does not occur within the timeout period The trigger level setting is void when the trigger source is set to Ext When the trigger mode is HF Auto or HF Normal the trigger level cannot be set IM 253710 01E 7 4 Setting the Window Trigger Procedure For a functional description see section 1 4 This section applies when the trigger mode is set to a mode other than OFF CONFIGURATION wn REMOTE SHIFT COPY NULL CAL SINGLE SHE sTaRT sToP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g
493. ta Voltage and Current Signals c Zero Level Compensation For procedures see section 4 4 Zero level compensation refers to the operation of adjusting the level to zero using an internal circuit of the instrument Zero level compensation must be performed in order to meet the specifications of the instrument see chapter 17 When the measurement mode measurement range and input filter are changed zero level compensation is performed automatically However if these parameters are not changed over a long period of time the zero level may change due to changes in the environment surrounding the instrument In such cases the zero level can be forcibly compensated suoljoun NULL Function For procedures see section 4 5 The Udc and Idc numerical data of the simple average of the voltage and current in the normal measurement mode as well as Speed and Torque when using the motor module and the input signal from the sensor is a DC voltage that have been measured when the NULL function is turned ON are set as NULL values The null values are subtracted from the voltage and current data Therefore all measurement functions are influenced by the NULL value When setting the NULL value we recommend that the voltage and current measurement ranges be set as small as possible The measurement resolution is higher when the measurement range is small which results in a more accurate measurement of the NULL value IM 253710 01E 1 17
494. ta 14 6 GQrauiCules ws ois ee iA a R aA eee ee Meike 1 33 9 12 H hanning Window c ccccsceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 1 40 11 9 Harm Item No eeeeee harmonic distortion factor cece eee cee eee eeeeeeee App 30 harmonic measurement MOE cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaee 1 7 harmonic order seccecssstessseeesesceeesesseneeetssenseeneoneenees App 30 higher harmonic ee NOMS ARPA E We aie Bilao Gaver 16 9 horizontal AXIS srecna uniesie i e 1 26 increasing range sseesssssssessrsaserrresressraerasenasrnsrennensrenne 5 10 INDUCLANCE a a Aaaa Information initial setting list Initializing INPUT os chatted adoa aE ea Ee e a input TING minaaa araa aaas anea e ae ae iari input module ou eee eee input range revolution sensor input range torque meter Installation condition 0 ee cece eee eeeee tee eeeeeeeeeeeaees installation POSITION 0 ee eee eee eter eteee tees teeeeeeetenees installing input module i internal ClOCK piaig aa aa AE E interpolation irana aetati ISOLATION SONSOM c ccscsccccessevectececedcencosevenianeacdoeentenseedrscaes Rem AMO N neiise ienirt aneti J JOQ SHUG oo eee dauana miinan i ipasara bonaire e Pasadan a 2 3 K kay TESTING pairar daei aN 16 7 keyboard testing ssssessssssssressruernseresenseracensransnnrrnnsnnneanea 16 7 L label E E E E E E 1 33 9 16 label MAME crna a
495. ta values are positive infinity and negative infinity respectively IM 253710 01E App 23 i x pu ddy Appendix 6 Float File Format For products with firmware version 2 01 or later Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 ZA mB Address Numerical Data Address Numerical Data Address Numerical Data Adee Numerical Data Address Numerical Data Address Numerical Data 0000 Urms 005C Urms 00B8 Urms 0114 Urms 0170 Urms 01CC Urms 0004 Irms 0060 Irms OOBC Irms 0118 Irms 0174 Irms 01DO Irms 0008 P 0064 P 00CO P 011C P 0178 P 01D4 P 000C S 0068 S 00c4 S 0120 S 017C S 01D8 S 0010 Q 006C Q 00C8 Q 0124 Q 0180 Q 01DC Q 0014 A 0070 A OOCC A 0128 0184 01E0 0018 0074 OODO 012C 0188 01E4 001C Z 0078 Z 00D4 Z 0130 Z 018C Z 01E8 Z 0020 Xs 007C Xs 00D8 Xs 0134 Xs 0190 Xs 01EC Xs 0024 Rs 0080 Rs OODC Rs 0138 Rs 0194 Rs 01FO Rs 0028 Xp 0084 Xp OOEO Xp 013C Xp 0198 Xp 01F4 Xp 002C Rp 0088 Rp 00E4 Rp 0140 Rp 019C Rp 01F8 Rp 0030 FU 008C fU OOE8 fU 0144 FU 01A0 FU 01FC FU 0034 FI 0090 fl O0EC fl 0148 FI 01A4 FI 0200 FI 0038 Uthd 0094 Uthd OOFO Uthd 014C Uthd 01A8 Uthd 0204 Uthd 003C Ithd 0098 Ithd OOF4 Ithd 0150 Ithd 01AC Ithd 0208 Ithd 0040 Pthd 009C Pthd OOF8 Pthd 0154 Pthd 01BO Pthd 020C Pthd 0044 Uthf OOAO Uthf OOFC Uthf 0158 Uthf 01B4 Uthf 0210 Uthf 0048 Ithf OOA4 Ithf 0100 Ithf 015C Ithf 01B8 Ithf 0214 Ithf 004C Utif OOA8 Utif 0104 Utif 0160 Utif 01BC Utif 0218 Utif 0050 lItif OOAC Itif 0108
496. ted See section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method The thick lines on the wiring diagrams are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current Wiring Example of a single phase two wire system 1P2W If power measurement modules are installed into all four slots four single phase two wire systems can be set up SOURCE LOAD U OO SOURCE LOAD a Input terminal Nar SOURCE LOAD l i U SOURCE LOAD OO i ee Input terminal Wiring Example of a single phase three wire system 1P3W If power measurement modules are installed in all four slots then two single phase three wire systems can be set up elements 1 and 2 and elements 3 and 4 The combination of elements that can be wired to the input terminals in the figure are as follows The rest of the elements can be wired to single phase two wire systems Input Terminal 1 Input Terminal 2 Element 1 Element 2 Element 2 Element 3 Element 3 Element 4 SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD Input Terminal 1 Input Terminal 2 IM 253710 01E 3 13 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement Wiring Example of a three phase three wire system 3P3W If power measurement modules are installed in all four slots then two three phase three w
497. ted below according to the table on the previous page The tables show the different ranges for active power The same ranges are set for apparent power unit VA and reactive power unit var Just replace the unit with VA or var when looking at the tables For the number of displayed digits see section 8 1 Selecting the Number of Displayed Digits Wiring Method 1P2W Current Displayed Voltage Range Vpk Apk digits 30 60 120 200 300 600 1200 2000 5 digits 3 0000w 6 0000W 12 000W 20 000W 30 000w 6o oo0w 120 00w 200 00 W oa 6 digits 3 00000W 6 00000W 12 0000 W 20 0000W 30 0000W 60 0000W 120 000W 200 000 W 5 digits 6 0000W 12 000W 24 000W 40 000W 60 000W 120 00W 240 00W 400 00 W 0 2 6 digits 6 00000W 12 0000W 24 0000 W 40 0000 W 60 0000 W 120 000W 240 000 W 400 000 W 5 digits 12 000W 24 000W 48 o00wf 8o oo0owf 120 00wf 240 00w 480 00W 800 00 W a 6 digits 12 0000W 24 0000W 48 0000 w 80 0o000Ww 120 000W 240 000W 480 000 W 800 000 W 5 digits 30 000w 6o o00w 120 00w 200 00W 300 00w 600 00W 1 2000kW 2 0000 kw k 6 digits 30 0000W 60 0000 W 120 000 W 200 000W 300 000 W 600 000 W 1 20000 kW 2 00000 kw 5 digits 60 000W 120 00Ww 240 00W 400 00W 600 00W 1 2000kW 2 4000kW 4 0000 kw 6 digits
498. tension setup parameter extension waveform data eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneenees external clock eee external dimension 253710 external dimension 253751 external dimension 253752 external dimension 253771 external trigger oo ee external trigger input external trigger output we 17 10 external trigger Setting eee eee eeeeeeeees 1 11 10 7 P o o u uuu falling eiren eke Gene an dah 1 10 7 7 fast fourier transform 1 40 FET sisvcrsesetnresneneenvenves 1 40 EET ROWS oane a a eaa eaae 11 8 FET WINGOW Aisee dndi ea E Ei aa 11 8 FILE riinan 12 5 File 13 11 file attribute 12 31 File bista ui aa a N see 12 11 EA ateta ale EAE AET 12 14 Filter fixed range ee 1 13 5 10 5 18 floppy ISK ssiri eai 12 8 form factor sinsnede a App 26 formate et direneri aiiis raaa Format Type Freq RANGC i535 ccicccarcvenccescecvaccukarevnecucattersecodennimepenetnsndtsnees frequency input range revolution sensor s s s 15 7 frequency measurement source 15 17 TONE PANGS seise teeesycoredsecaveacearessdeneesdeanesdenetentverdeneleds 2 1 fundamental component cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeees App 30 fundamental frequency eee eee 1 16 17 9 App 30 fundamental wave 0 0 eee cece cee test eeeetseeeeeeneees App 30 TUSO sd ETAPA T E A vse atiaceuss 16 9 GPIB internata n een Sis ition ase 17 10 QrAPNICS COlOM Siiran aaraa ennaa panenna na
499. ter selecting the setup parameter with the soft keys and the SELECT key the value can be changed using the jog shuttle The outer shuttle ring can be used step through the values in large increments On some parameters the arrow keys below the jog shuttle can be used to move among the digits Input Pouer Module Power Module Elenent 1 Elenent 2 Element 3 Element 4 20A Shunt Z6A Shunt 20A Shunt 26A Shunt U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ __z0s0UpK Terminal pA Sen_20A pa Sen_2oA pa Sen_20A I Range A6Apk _10ApK AGApk Sensor Ratio mu ay 8 0000 6000 0 0000 Line Filter T oF Zero Cross Filter OFF OFF Scaling I P oFFy on Pt Ratio D 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Ct Ratio 0 6000 6 0000 0 0000 Scaling Factor 9 0000 0 0000 0 0000 JOUUUUOL JUUUUUUL Note The parameters that can be changed using the jog shuttle are reset to their initial values when the RESET key is pressed The date time file name and comment can be entered using the keyboard that is displayed on the screen The jog shuttle SELECT key and arrow keys are used to operate the keyboard to enter the character strings The keyboard that is displayed when creating equations for user defined functions and waveform computati
500. the Converter Input Is a Three Phase Three Wire System 3P3W and the Motor Input Is a Single Phase Two Wire System 1P2W Wire the converter input to elements 1 and 2 and the motor input to element 3 Select 3P3W 1P2W for the wiring method Motor output W Motor efficiency nmB x 100 B W Total efficiency nmA Motor output yy x 100 ZA W Motor output derived in section 15 7 XA P1 P2 2B P3 Converter Motor output Power consumption Power consumption by the motor and by the motor converter IM 253710 01E 15 21 S NpoN 10101 0 lqe2ddy uonouny uonenjesra 10 0N Chapter 16 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 16 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting For the appropriate corrective actions when a message appears on the screen see the following pages If servicing is required or if the instrument does not operate properly after taking the following corrective actions contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Problem and Corrective Action Sections Nothing is displayed when the power is turned ON Securely connect the power cord to the power connector of the instrument and the power outlet 3 6 Set supply voltage within the permitted range 3 6 Check the display settings 14 3 Check that the fuse is not blown 15 5 The displayed data are not correct Check that the ambient
501. the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option Paper Feeding Installing the Paper Roll 1 3 Open the printer cover by pulling up on the handle on the left side of the printer while pressing the lock release lever towards the arrow indicated by OPEN Printer cover Lock release lever Move the release arm located near the right front to the MAN FEED position Hold the roll of paper so that the inside of the paper not the glossy side is facing up While pressing the movable holder on the left side of the roll storage space to the left set the core in the right holder Then release the movable holder Release arm Insert the tip of the roll chart evenly in the space between the roller and the black guide and turn the feed knob away from you until 10 cm of the roll chart is showing at the top of the roller Release arm MAN FEE Turn the feed knob I Roll paper T Roller Guide 13 2 IM 253710 01E 13 1 Installing the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option Paper Feeding 4 Move the release arm to the Free position and straighten the roll chart Then move the release arm to the HOLD position If the release arm is not in the HOLD position an error message will be displayed at the time of printing In this case you will not be able to print 5 Move the printer cover from the back to the front and close the cover Make sure that the ti
502. the displayed data s ns sns s Observation time that has been changed nn CL When the time base see section 6 3 is set to external clock the record length of data is acquired by sampling at the rate of the external clock In this case the observation time is not displayed For the harmonic measurement mode the sampling rate depends on an external signal referred to as the PLL source signal under measurement or external clock signal and therefore the observation time cannot be set uniformly as in the normal measurement mode In the harmonic measurement mode the time it takes to store the record length of sampled data in the acquisition memory is the time displayed on one screen 6 2 IM 253710 01E 6 2 Selecting the Record Length for Acquiring Data Procedure For a functional description see section 1 3 CONFIGURATION TAIGD SETUP INPUT NEASURE TRIGGER LN CL DISPLAY MATH cursor zoom CJ REMOTE LJ FILE misc HELP LOCAL N I w7 mem L copy nut caf MENU J amm gt FILTER FILTER FILTER 7 SINGLE Cc SHAE start stop 1 3 4 ABORT LJ l ml CH3 CH5 cH7 voLtaGE CURRENT SA tena ra one ows e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 1 Press the SHIFT TRIGGER ACQ key to display the Acq setting menu Selecting the record
503. the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attribute and the comment for the selected file Note You cannot save or load while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON If you change the file extension on a PC for an example you will not be able to load that file A maximum of 36 characters can be displayed in Path For file names upper and lower case letters are not distinguished For comments they are distinguished In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK When using the GP IB or serial interface commands to enter a file name the following symbols that do not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used When the setup parameters are loaded from a file the setup parameters of each key are overwritten with the loaded settings and cannot be set back to their previous settings It is recommended that the current setup parameters be saved before loading setup parameters from a file The date and time communication parameters and SCSI ID numbers are not saved Therefore when setup parameters are loaded from a file these parameters do not change The setup parameters cannot be loaded if the record length or the module configuration differs from the setting that existed at the time the setup parameters were saved This is also true if the setup parameters were saved using an incompatible version of firmware
504. the input module to secure the module in place Do not put your hand inside the slot because there are protrusions along the module guide that may injure your fingers Types of Input Modules The following types of input modules are available MODEL Name Abbreviation Notes 253751 Power measurement module Voltage 1000 V current 5 A current sensor 500 mV 253752 Power measurement module Voltage 1000 V current 5 A amp 20 A current sensor 500 mV 253771 Sensor input module Motor module 2 channel input Input signals from revolution sensor or torque meter Precautions when Installing or Removing Input Modules Install the power measurement modules in numerical order starting from the slot of element 1 If you skip elements that have a smaller number measurements that use one of the available wiring methods may not be made properly see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method For example do not install a power measurement module in element 2 and leave element 1 empty Do not install power measurement modules in elements 1 and 3 and leave element 2 empty Install the sensor input module into the element number 4 slot It will not operate properly if it is installed into another slot When the sensor input module is installed only three power measurement modules can be installed If you replace an input module the setup parameters of that element are initialized when the power is turned ON To keep the previ
505. the meanings of the measurement function symbols see section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods 1 7 Numerical Computation appendix 2 Symbols and Determination of Measurement Functions and appendix 3 Determination of Delta Functions For details regarding the wiring methods A and B see section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method a eta no data is displayed in places where the measurement function is not selected or there are no numerical data If the measurement computation results cannot be displayed using the specified decimal point position or unit OF overflow is displayed When the voltage or current input is less than or equal to 0 25 of the measurement range Urms Umn Uac Irms Imn lac and all other measurement functions that are determined using these measurement functions will display zeroes A or will display an error Error When the frequency of the measured value is outside the measurement range or when the input signal is less than or equal to approximately 3 5 of the measurement range fU or fl will display an error Error When both the voltage and current are sinusoids and the ratio of the voltage and current inputs do not differ greatly with respect to the measurement range the phase difference 6 of lead D and lag G are detected and displayed correctly When the power factor is greater than 1 001 and less than equal to 2 000 become
506. the power measurement module To prevent electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 4 Wiring Precautions An external PT can be used to make measurements when the maximum voltage value of the circuit under measurement exceeds the maximum measurement range of the power measurement module 1000 Vrms or 2000 Vpeak An external CT can be used to make measurements when the maximum current value of the circuit under measurement exceeds the maximum current range of the power measurement module Power measurement module 253751 When the maximum current exceeds 7 Arms or 10 Apeak Power measurement module 253752 5 A terminal When the maximum current exceeds 7 Arms or 10 Apeak 20 A terminal When the maximum current exceeds 30 Arms or 100 Apeak Connecting to the Input Terminal Voltage input terminal Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input terminal Current input terminal The power measurement module 253751 has 5 A terminals Power measurement module 253752 has two types of terminals 5 A and 20 A terminals but only one system of current input one set of current input terminals can be used on each input module at one time To prevent electric shock and damage to the instrument do not wire measurement cables to multiple current input terminals simultaneously The screws used on the term
507. the record length For example if the record length is 100 k words then the range is from data point 0 the left end of the screen to data point 100 k the right end of the screen Because the cursor position is displayed in the menu in terms of time when the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the start and end points can be set by specifying the times even when the waveform is not displayed By using a display format that displays the waveform the start and end points can be set while viewing the waveform When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the start and end points can be set in steps of observation time display record length When the time base is set to external clock or when the measurement mode is harmonic the start and end points can be set in steps of one data point To move the start and end points simultaneously which keeps the distance between them constant the jog shuttle must be set to control both Start Point and End Point Re computing The computation region can be changed and waveform computations can be re performed while the data acquisition is stopped The upper and lower limits can be set on the computation waveform There are two methods available to set the upper and lower limits One method is auto scaling in which the upper and lower limits are automatically determined from the computed waveform The other method is man
508. the screen When the display record length is longer than the When the display record length is shorter than the remaining record length after the trigger point remaining record length after the trigger point Remaining Remaining Start record length Start record length armen Trigger point acquisition Trigger point Acquisition Acquisition memory i memory Display record _ length Continued data m Trigger position Displayed on the Trigger position Displayed on the Trigger point screen Trigger point screen AAA A 1 19 IM 253710 01E 1 4 Trigger Auto mode If a trigger occurs within a specified amount of time about 100 ms referred to as the timeout period the waveform display is updated If the trigger does not occur within the timeout period the waveform display is automatically updated Auto level mode If a trigger occurs within the timeout period the waveform is displayed in the same way as in the auto mode If a trigger does not occur within the timeout period the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source is detected the trigger level is automatically changed to the center value and the trigger is generated to update the displayed waveform 1 2 of the amplitude lt Trigger level Amplitude fiz of the amplitude Normal mode The waveform display is updated only when the trigger occurs If a trigger does not occur the display is not updated HF auto mode
509. the time span of one screen How the observation time is determined depends on the measurement mode Observation time Sampling rate 100ns 5MS7 Ss 4s Z5kS75 Display g Format During the normal measurement mode The selectable range is from 10 us to 1 ks in 1 2 4 steps The sampling rate changes depending on the observation time The sampling rate is used to acquire the data to the acquisition memory For details regarding the observation time sampling rate and record length see Appendix 1 1 ks denotes 1000 s 16 minutes 40 seconds During the harmonic measurement mode The observation time for the harmonic measurement mode is automatically determined from the sampling rate that is determined from the fundamental frequency of the PLL source see section 6 4 and the record length see section 1 3 The observation time is not displayed The observation times when the record length is not divided see section 6 4 are shown below When the record length is 100 k words Approx 0 5 to 1 6 s When the record length is 1 M word Approx 4 9 to 16 3 s When the record length is 4 M word Approx 19 5 to 65 1 s For details regarding the observation time sampling rate and record length see Appendix 1 During the normal measurement mode the observation time can be changed even when the data acquisition is stopped The new observation time takes effect when the data acquisition is started Observation time of
510. tion about the medium that was selected in step 5 IM 253710 01E 12 7 e eq y Huipeo7 pue Burnes Ey 12 4 Formatting the Disk Explanation CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the mark is blinking It can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium When the instrument cannot read a pre formatted medium reformat the medium on the instrument Make sure to back up important data before formatting the medium All data will be erased Formatting a floppy disk When using a new floppy disk you must format it first Select the appropriate format for the floppy disk from the following choices 2DD 640K Formats the 2DD floppy disk to 640 KB 8 sectors 2DD 720K Formats the 2DD floppy disk to 720 KB 9 sectors 2HD 1 2M Formats the 2HD floppy disk to 1 2 MB 8 sectors 2HD 1 44M Formats the 2HD floppy disk to 1 44 MB 18 sectors Formatting a disk The formats of media connected via SCSI option are as follows MO PD Semi IBM format Handled as removable disk ZIP JAZ Hard disk format Handled as fixed disk Hard disk format The hard disk format is IBM compatible format Selecting the format mode When formatting a medium in an external SCSI device the following two format modes are available Normal Executes physical format and logical format Quick Executes only the logical format The estimated time it takes to format a medium is as follows The
511. tle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box 5 20 IM 253710 01E 5 5 Setting the Scaling Function when using an External PT or CT Pover Module K Power Module Each Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 a 290A Shunt 260A Shunt 2A Shunt 2 A Shunt Pover Module U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ Terminal 5A_pen 20A pa Sen_20A PA Sen_2oA I Range 1600mUpk_ A6Apk TAPK Sensor Ratio nuay 0 0000 0 0000 3 0000 Line Filter Zero Cross Filter Scaling Pt Ratio 6 9000 0000 3 0000 Ct Ratio C 0 0000 Scaling Factor 6 000 6 0000 6 0000 C 9 0000 C 0 0000 UUUUUUEE Setting the CT ratio 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the CT Ratio of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to display the CT ratio setting box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the CT ratio For the procedures related entering values using the jog shuttle see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings 6 Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting box Pover Module Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 ZOA Shunt 26A Shunt 26A Shunt 20A Shunt U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk Terminal 5A_pen zoa A Sen_zoa fA Sen_zon A
512. to the acquisition memory ACQ memory along with the external trigger and external clock conditions according to the sampling rate that is automatically determined by the specified observation time see page 1 14 The digital signal processor DSP determines the voltage current and active power also reactive power for harmonic measurement mode from the sampled data in the acquisition memory The display ASIC processes the numerical and waveform data so that they can be displayed In order to accurately determine the basic measurement items for currents voltage current active power also reactive power for harmonic measurement mode the sampled data must be averaged over a period in sync with the period of the input signal To do so the DSP uses the zero crossing data and external clock and external trigger conditions In addition the DSP calculates additional items from the basic measurement items Among these additional items are the apparent power the reactive power for normal measurement mode the power factor phase difference impedance and 1 4 IM 253710 01E 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods There are two measurement modes normal measurement and harmonic measurement Normal Measurement Mode and Measurement Function Types of Numerical Data For procedures see section 5 1 The data specified by the measurement function numerical data in the normal measurement mode are measured
513. tputs the numerical data according to the specified number of displayed digits see section 8 1 This is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later Note Data list of normal measurement Output when the measurement mode is normal Elements are listed horizontally and measurement functions are listed vertically When the number of displayed digits is 6 the elements are printed using two columns Accordingly the measurement function list is also printed using two columns Data list of harmonic measurement Output when the measurement mode is harmonic Elements and measurement functions of the Dual List specified in section 8 5 are listed horizontally and the harmonic order is listed vertically The range of harmonic order is the range specified by Min Order and Max Order in section 10 7 Header Outputs the observation time is printed during the harmonic measurement mode sampling rate date time and the measurement range of each element You cannot print while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON IM 253710 01E 13 7 ejyeq abew uses9s Bulyndjno g 13 3 Printing to an External Centronics Printer Keys CONFIGURATION gt _ TRIG D serv moor Jesse ACQ DISPLAY MATH cuRsoR zoom o H REMOTE ILTE 4 H SS COPY MENU ELEMENTS FILTER FILTER FILTER F 1 2 3 CAL ER
514. tting the Measurement Range when using an External Current Sensor Note that the frequency and phase characteristics of the external current sensor affect the measured data Make sure that the polarity is correct when connecting to the circuit Otherwise the polarity of the measured current is reversed and proper measurements cannot be made Be especially careful when using a clamp type current sensor because it is easy to reverse the connection To minimize error when using a shunt type sensor note the following points when connecting the external sensor cable Connect the shielded wire of the external sensor cable to the L side of the shunt output terminal OUT Minimize the area created between the wires connecting the current sensor to the external sensor cable The effects due to the line of magnetic force and noise that enter this area of space can be reduced Shunt type current sensor Area of space created by the connection wires OUT H R A External sensor cable a i gt PZ4000 Shielded wire OUT L For a shunt type current sensor connect it to the power earth ground side as shown in the figure below If you have to connect the sensor to the non earth side use a wire that is thicker than AWG18 conductive cross sectional area of approx 1 mm between the sensor and the instrument to reduce the effects of common mode voltage Take safety and error reduction in consideration when constructing a
515. tting the Harmonic Orders under Analysis This section applies when the measurement mode is set to harmonic measurement CONFIGURATION TAIG D Eror eor esa frees el C REMOTE SHET corr war cax MENU U ELEMENT SINGLE SNE start stop ABORT VOLTAGE ZN CURRENT Q Co CC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 0000000 Procedure Set the measurement mode to harmonic measurement For the procedures see section 5 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode 1 Press the SETUP key to display the Setup menu Confirm that Mode is set to Harmonics 2 Press the MEASURE key to display the Measure setting menu 3 Press the Mode soft key to select ON Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu gt Selecting the minimum harmonic order under analysis 5 Press the Min Order soft key to select 0 or 1 Selecting the maximum harmonic order under analysis 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the maximum harmonic order to be analyzed Measure Mode Measure Mode Measure H 5 Formula pFF ON OFF DN UrnissIrms Averaging D ON le Count 16 We Start Pos M Phase 10 66ms 180 Lead Lag M Pc Formula Measure Exec Min Order 1 ia Max Order 1 M User M Thd Formula Def ined Total
516. type file extension data size Select the data type from the following list of choices The file extension is automatically attached to the file name Binary The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in binary format The data that are saved by selecting Main in Selecting the range of the waveform to be saved described later can be loaded to display the waveform and calculate numerical data Aheader file is automatically created The header file is used when analyzing the waveform on a PC The header file cannot be opened using this instrument For the header file format see Appendix 5 ASCII Header File Format e ASCII The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in ASCII format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC Data in this format cannot be loaded on this instrument Float The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in 32 bit floating point format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC Data in this format cannot be loaded on this instrument Data size For the normal measurement mode The following table shows the data size when the waveform data of CH1 to CH8 are saved with a record length of 100 k words observation time of 100 ms and MATH1 and MATH2 turned OFF Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes Binary WVF Approx 1 7 M 100 k words x 8 channels x 2 HDR Approx 7 K approx 8 K when Math1 and Math2 are ON ASCII CS
517. u cannot delete files while data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON Deleted data cannot be recovered Make sure not to erase the wrong files Directories can be deleted if there are not files in them If an error occurs while deleting multiple files the files after the error will not be deleted Directory attributes cannot be changed When File Item is Wave Data Type is Binary and Filter is Item deleting a file with a WVF extension that has a mark causes the file with the same name with the HDR extension to be deleted When Filter is All only the files that have the marks are deleted 12 32 IM 253710 01E 12 9 Copying Files Procedure CONFIGURATION TRIG D SETUP INPUT MEASURE TRIGGER EST eeru ES ACQ DISPLAY MATH CURSOR ZOOM REMOTE FILE MISC HELP LOCAL SHIFT copy wut ca MENU ELEMENTS SINGLE SHAE sTaRT STOP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME oo0pguL g S cH2 cH4 cH6 cH8 current SA CJC e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key i Press the FILE key to display the File setting menu 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the Utility setting menu and the File List dialog box 3 Press the Function soft key to display the file function selection menu Press the Copy soft key to display
518. ual scaling in which the upper and lower limits are set to predetermined values For the procedures see section 11 2 Setting the Equation Converting the Scale of the Computed Waveform You can also select whether or not to display the upper and lower limits For the procedures related to turning ON OFF the display see section 9 6 Turning ON OFF the Upper and Lower Limit Displays Note ___ __ The number of points from the start point to the end point is counted from the start point up to a maximum of 100 kW IM 253710 01E sishjeuy wojne M a 11 2 Setting the Equation Converting the Scale of the Computed Waveform Procedure CONFIGURATION O TRIG D SETUP INPUT WEASURE TRIGGER ACQ REMOTE SHIFT MENU ELEMEI FILTER FILTEi f a FILTER FILTER 4 CH7 00000000R CICHCA a Co CC CH8 e The __ mark indicates the keys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 1 Press the MATH key to display the Math setting menu For a functional description see section 1 8 SINGLE Suge start stop ABORT OBSERVATION TIME Q VOLTAGE CURRENT A Press the Mode soft key to select ON 3 Press either the Math1 or Math2 soft key to display the equation setting dialog box Selecting whether or not to per
519. ules If the sensor input module is installed in the element number 4 slot the menu for element 4 does not appear Selecting the line filter 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Line Filter of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to display the line filter selection box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the filter from OFF to 500HZz 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the line filter The FILTER indicator in the ELEMENT group on the front panel lights Selecting the zero crossing filter 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the Zero Crossing Filter of the element you wish to set 4 Press the SELECT key to display the zero crossing filter selection box Turn the jog shuttle to select the filter from OFF to 500Hz 6 Press the SELECT key to confirm the zero crossing filter a IM 253710 01E 5 25 obuey pue spo Jusweinseay oy Buas a 5 6 Selecting the Input Filter OUUUU0G0 K Pouer Module Each 4 Pouer Module CALL YD Ss Power Module Element 1 Element Z Element 3 Element 4 20 Shunt 26A Shunt 20A Shunt 20A Shunt U Range Z000Upk__ _2000Upk__ _2000Upk Terminal 5A_pen zoa pA Sen_zoa pa Sen_zon fA sen Zon I Range 1006nUpk_ TeApK__ ToApK__ Sensor Ratio muvA C 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Line Filter OFF Select OFF Zero Cross Filter OFF DEF OFF Scaling EN soos pr g Pt Ratio 0 0000
520. urement range Maximum allowable input 50 Vpk or 25 Vrms whichever is less Continuous maximum common mode voltage 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz CAT Il CMRR Influence from common mode voltage Short input terminals apply 600 Vrms 50 60 Hz between input terminals and case 0 005 of range or less at 10 Hz lt f lt 1 kHz 0 025 measurement range x f of range or less for other frequencies designed value f is the frequency in kHz Line filter Select from OFF 100 Hz and 500 Hz Zero crossing filter Select from OFF 100 Hz and 500 Hz A D converter 12 bit Sampling rate 5 MS s maximum Frequency band for waveform observation DC to 500 kHz 3 dB point Accuracy 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range With NULL function and line filter turned ON Temperature coefficient Add 0 03 of reading C in the range 5 to 20 C or 26 to 40 C Accuracy during the harmonic measurement mode CH8 0 1 of reading 0 05 of range in the range from 20 Hz to 10 kHz The maximum applicable harmonic order is the same as when 253751 or 253752 is installed Accuracy outside the applicable frequency range Add 0 005 x f x harmonic order of reading designed value f is the frequency of the relevant harmonic order kHz Pulse input Number of input channels 1 Revolution Sensor Signal Input 1 CH7 Frequency measurement range Auto 2 kHz to 200 kHz 250 Hz
521. urning ON OFF the computation of the equation Select whether or not to compute the specified equation OFF Does not compute the equation ON Computes the equation Setting the equation Two equations can be created Each equation can have up to 16 operands However for TREND including TRENDM TRENDD and TRENDF and FFT functions only one operand can be used from the following C1 to C8 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 or C7 C8 Operands C1 to C8 which correspond to CH1 to CH8 can be used as operands when constructing the equation However for TREND and FFT functions only one operand can be used from the following C1 to C8 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 or C7 C8 Operator The following operators can be used to create the equation TINTG integral TINTG integral TREND including TRENDM TRENDD and TRENDF AVG SSP SLIP and PM are available as special functions For details regarding these special functions see section 1 8 Waveform Analysis Operator Example Description C1 C2 Basic arithmetic of the specified waveform ABS ABS C1 Absolute value of the specified waveform SQR SQR C1 Square of the specified waveform SQRT SQRT C1 Square root of the specified waveform LOG LOG C1 Natural logarithm of the specified waveform LOG10 LOG10 C1 Common logarithm of the specified waveform EXP EXP C1 Exponentiation of the specified waveform N
522. ursor1 and x marker Cursor2 can be set on different waveforms Y Y axis value of Cursor1 Yx Y axis value of Cursor2 AY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 X X axis value of Cursor Xx X axis value of Cursor2 AX The difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 1 AX The inverse of the difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 H cursor Horizontal Two H cursors are displayed horizontally The vertical value Y axis value at the cross point between the H cursor and the waveform and the difference in the Y axis values of the H cursors can be measured The two H cursors are set on the same waveform Y1 Y axis value of Cursor1 Y2 Y axis value of Cursor2 AY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 V cursor Vertical Two V cursors are displayed vertically The horizontal value from the left edge of the screen to each V cursor X axis value and the difference in the X axis values of the V cursors can be measured The two V cursors are set on the same waveform X1 X axis value of Cursor1 X2 X axis value of Cursor2 AX The difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 1 AX The inverse of the difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 11 16 IM 253710 01E 11 4 Measuring with the Cursor H amp V cursor H amp V H cursors Cursor1 Cursor2 and V cursors Cursor3 Cursor4 are displayed The X
523. used to set the period Select the method used to set the measurement computation period from the following list of choices For details pertaining to setting the period for each method see the following sections Zero Cross The period can be set using zero crossing points This method is possible only in the normal measurement mode The period that is automatically determined from the zero level zero amplitude points becomes the measurement computation period Cursor The period can be set using cursors This method is possible in the normal measurement and harmonic measurement modes For the normal measurement mode the measurement computation period is the period between the cursors For the harmonic measurement mode the period is from the start position cursor to 8192 points of sampled data end position cursor Ext Trigger The period can be set using an external trigger This method is possible only in the normal measurement mode The measurement computation period is the period defined while the signal applied to the external trigger input connector is in the specified condition 1f or 1 IM 253710 01E 10 5 suonendwog jeonawny g 10 1 Setting the Measurement Computation Period Re computing Zero crossing setting The measurement computation period is set to the period between the first and last points on the screen at which the waveform crosses the zero level zero crossing with a positive slope When there is onl
524. using a clamp type current sensor as an external current sensor have a good understanding of the voltage of the circuit under measurement and the specifications and handling of the clamp type sensor Then confirm that there are no shock hazards For safety reasons when using the instrument on a rack mount furnish a switch for turning OFF the circuit under measurement from the front side of the rack To make the protective functions effective check the following items before applying the voltage or current of the circuit under measurement The power cable provided with the instrument is used to connect to the power supply and the instrument is grounded The power switch of the instrument is turned ON The current input protective cover provided with the instrument is being used When the power switch of the instrument is turned ON do not apply a signal that exceeds the following values to the voltage or current input terminals When the instrument is turned OFF turn OFF the circuit under measurement For other input terminals see the specifications of each module in chapter 17 Max Allowable Input Voltage Input Current Input Instantaneous max The peak value is 2000 5Aterminal The peak value is 30 A or the 1 second V or the RMS value is RMS value is 15 A which ever 1000 V which ever is is less less CAT Il 20 A terminal The peak value is 150 A or the RMS value is 40 A which ever is less Continuous max S
525. ut Terminal 1 Input Terminal 2 Input Terminal 3 3 14 IM 253710 01E 3 8 Using an External Current Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement To prevent electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the precautions given in section 3 4 Wiring Precautions As shown below when the maximum current value of the circuit under measurement exceeds the maximum measurement range of the current input terminal an external sensor cable from the external current sensor can be connected to the current sensor input connector of the power measurement module in order to measure the current of the circuit under measurement Power measurement module 253751 When the maximum current exceeds 7 Arms or 10 Apeak Power measurement module 253752 5 A terminal When the maximum current exceeds 7 Arms or 10 Apeak 20 A terminal When the maximum current exceeds 30 Arms or 100 Apeak A shunt type or clamp type current sensor can be used for an external current sensor Connecting to the current sensor input connector Connect an external sensor cable with the BNC connector that is included in the package to the current sensor input connector of the power measurement module Combination of Wiring Methods and Elements The combination of the selectable wiring methods and elements varies depending on the number of installed power measurement modules For details see Combination of Wiring Methods and
526. ution x raw data VOffset 6 Data Type ISn n byte signed integer lUn n byte unsigned integer FSn n byte signed real number FUn n byte unsigned real number Bm m bit data 7 X axis converting equation of each waveform X axis value HResolution x raw data HOffset IM 253710 01E App 19 Ea xipueddy Appendix 6 Float File Format For normal measurement mode When only power measurement modules are installed Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Element 4 XA 2B paces Numerical Data Address Numerical Data Santis Numerical Data Aadress Numerical Data Address Numerical Data Address Numerical Data 0000 Urms OOAC Urms 0158 Urms 0204 Urms 02B0 Urms 035C Urms 0004 Umn 00BO Umn 015C Umn 0208 Umn 02B4 Umn 0360 Umn 0008 Udc 00B4 Udc 0160 Udc 020C Udc 02B8 Udc 0364 Udc 000C Uac 00B8 Uac 0164 Uac 0210 Uac 02BC Uac 0368 Uac 0010 Irms OOBC Irms 0168 Irms 0214 Irms 02C0 Irms 036C Irms 0014 Imn o0CO Imn 016C Imn 0218 Imn 02C4 Imn 0370 Imn 0018 Idc 00C4 Idc 0170 Idc 021C Idc 02C8 Idc 0374 Idc 001C lac 00C8 lac 0174 lac 0220 lac 02CC lac 0378 lac 0020 P 0OCC P 0178 P 0224 P 02D0 P 037C P 0024 S ooDO S 017C S 0228 S 02D4 S 0380 S 0028 Q 00D4 Q 0180 Q 022C Q 02D8 Q 0384 Q 002C A 00D8 A 0184 A 0230 2 02DC 0388 2 0030 OODC o 0188 0234 6 02E0 6 038C 6 0034 fU QOEO fU 018C fU 0238 fU 02E4 NAN 0390 NAN 0038 fl OOE4 fl 0190 fl 023C fl 02E8 NAN 0394 NAN 003C U pk 00E8 U pk 0194 U pk 0240 U pk 02EC NAN 0398 NAN 0040 U pk OOEC U pk 0
527. ween elements 1 2 and 3 can be used to determine the measurement functions AUrms Alrms AUmn Almn AUdc Aldc AUac and Alac This is called delta computation The delta computation can be used for example to perform star to delta transformation of a three phase AC circuit For the equation see Appendix 3 The measurement and computation periods are the same as those described in section 1 2 Measurement Modes and Measurement Computation Periods User defined Functions For procedures see section 10 3 An equation can be created defined by combining the measurement function symbols and operators The numerical data corresponding to the equation can then be determined The combination of a measurement function and element number Urms1 for example constitutes an operand Four equations F1 to F4 can be defined for each measurement mode normal and harmonic Operators There are 11 types of operators ABS absolute value SQR square SQRT square root LOG logarithm LOG10 common logarithm EXP exponent and NEG minus sign Operands There can be up to 16 operands in one equation Equation for the Apparent Power For procedures see section 10 4 The apparent power is determined by the product of the voltage and current The voltage and current can be selected from the three types the true rms value the rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value and the simple average as explained in
528. wer Switch For Making Accurate Measurements Turn ON the power switch and allow the instrument to warm up for at least 30 minutes Perform zero level compensation after warm up see section 4 4 Performing Zero Level Compensation Shut Down Operation The setup parameters that exist immediately before the power switch is turned OFF are stored in memory The same is true when the power cord gets disconnected from the outlet The next time the power switch is turned ON the instrument powers up using the stored setup parameters Note A lithium battery is used to retain the setup parameters When the lithium battery voltage falls below a certain level a message is displayed on the screen see section 16 2 when the power switch is turned ON When this message appears frequently the battery must be replaced quickly The user cannot replace the battery For battery replacement contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer For information regarding battery life see section 16 6 3 24 IM 253710 01E 3 12 Setting the Date and Time Procedures UDUOUUE TRIG D CONFIGURATION SETUP INPUT WEASURE TRIGGER ACQ DISPLAY MATH cursor Zoom REMOTE FILE LOCA SHIFT carr wa oa MENU i TEM FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER SINGLE sate staaristoP ABORT OBSERVATION TIME g S A VOLTAGE CURRENT e The __ mark indicates the ke
529. wiring method must be selected See section 5 2 Selecting the Wiring Method The thick lines on the wiring diagrams indicate areas of current flow Use wires that are suitable for the current present The scaling function can be used to transform the input signal to data that correspond to direct measurements For the procedures see section 5 5 Setting the Scaling Function when using an External PT or CT Note that the frequency and phase characteristics of the PT or CT affect the measured data For the combinations of the elements and the input terminals in the figures below see Wiring Examples in section 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement Wiring Example of a single phase two wire system 1P2W using PT and CT SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD nput terminal Wiring Example of a single phase three wire system 1P3W using PT and CT SOURCE LOAD Erm nput terminal 2 3 20 IM 253710 01E 3 9 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Wiring Example of a three phase three wire system 3P3W using PT and CT R SOURCE LOAD UCT o dvipT Ov PT Load W ETEA E I O Ae i Ovi S l L L o Input terminal 1 Input terminal 2 LT l
530. y file corrected power 3 Corrective ACTION sonis eedi Creating a directory oo eee cece cena tee eeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaes crest factor GT sna COTTA te Current input terminal eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees CUITENT TANGE oo eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeetaeeteesaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaees current sensor input connector current Sensor range oo eee ee eee eters e eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeens current sensor transformation ratio cee eee 5 18 CUISOF isra avast dent ae NE vee CUrSOr MEASUFEMEN 0 eee ee cee ete eee eeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeteaeees cursor measurement display CUPSOF Seting A aiia deai esvensceeuasecoatoucretisceey D data formatii ssnin te data size numerical data esseeseeseeeeerrerreerrernrrreree data size screen image S data size setup parameter esseseesrerrerrrerrerrerrrereeren 12 14 data size waveform data seseeseeseereeriereerrerrerrrerees 12 20 data type numerical data cece eee eeeeeeaes 12 26 data type waveform data eee eee eeneeeeeeeeeee 12 20 date and time decreasing range eee cece eee eeee sense eeeeeeeeteneeeatees COLA Y ec nace vent EE A gest ch ansunateuciaesstees delay time deleting delta computation y AMCaSUFC aiar ei A A EN BIENTE DS F 1 AE E E E TT determination of delta computation determination of measurement function Dir Nameisis ieineio eaei diene
531. y one or no positive slope on the screen the measurement computation period is set to the entire width of the screen k Ik T k gt Measurement computation Measurement computation Measurement computation period period period the entire screen Selecting the synchronization source For each element you can set which input signal to use to synchronize to the zero crossing point Select the synchronization source from the following choices CH1 to CH8 The synchronization source is set to the voltage or current of the element which has a module installed The channel numbers of elements that do not have modules installed are not displayed Ext The synchronization source is set to the clock signal applied to the external clock input connector The specifications of the synchronization source is the same as that of the external clock as described in section 6 3 Selecting the Time Base Cursor setting For the normal measurement mode the measurement computation period is the period between the two cursors start and end positions placed on the screen For the harmonic measurement mode the period is from the start position cursor to 8192 points of sampled data end position cursor When the measurement mode is normal and the time base is set to internal clock the start position dot dashed line and end position dotted line can be moved in the range from 0 s the left end of the screen to t
532. yed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the waveform display see sections 9 1 to 9 8 Numeric Bar The numerical data and bar graph are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows The bar graph is useful when making harmonic measurements For the procedures related to setting the bar graph display see section 9 10 Displaying the Bar Graph of Harmonic Data Numeric X Y The numerical data and X Y waveform are displayed separately in the top and bottom windows For the procedures related to setting the X Y waveform display see section 9 11 Displaying the X Y Waveform X Y waveform display is applicable to products PZ4000 with firmware version 2 01 or later Selecting the number of displayed items or list display Select the number of items that are to be displayed concurrently or list displays from the following choices 8 When the display format is Numeric eight items of numerical data are displayed in one column When the display format is other than Numeric four items are displayed e 16 When the display format is Numeric 16 items of numerical data are displayed in two columns When the display format is other than Numeric eight items are displayed IM 253710 01E 8 4 Displaying Harmonic Measurement Data Single List When the display format is Numeric 48 items of numerical data of one type of measurement function are displayed in two
533. ys that are used for the operation e To exit the menu during operation press the ESC key 1 Press the MISC key to display the Misc menu 2 Press the Date Time soft key to display the date time setting dialog box Turning ON OFF the date time display 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select Display 4 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF Setting the date or time 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select Date or Time 6 Press the SELECT key to display the keyboard 7 Use the keyboard to set the date or time For keyboard operations see section 4 1 Entering Values and Strings Confirming the new settings 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select Set 9 Press the SELECT key If ON was selected in step 4 the new date and time are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen If the procedure is aborted M without pressing the SELECT key the new settings are not reflected on the display Information g GPIB RSZ32 SCSI ID Date Tine Conf ig Selftest Misc g GPIB RS23Z Time CFF _N 9901713 BERAE JUUOUUNU SCSI ID Mo Date Time Conf ig Information f 1999701713 13 25 49 Next 12 Date setting 997903730 Time setting 13 08 00 HAH m INSERT IM 253710 01E 3 25 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 g 3 12 Setting the Date and Time Ex

PZ4000 Power Analyzer USER`S MANUAL - Electro

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents